System overview 2016 / English
2016
System overview
System overview
2
Content
M1 Controller Hardware
Processor Modules
ME203 Series
MX200 Series
MC200 Series
MH200 Series
12
15
18
20
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Input Modules DI216, DI232/x
Digital Output Modules DO216, DO232/x
Digital Relay Output Modules DOR206/230
Digital Input/Output Modules DIO216/x, DIO232
Digital Input/Output Modules DIO248, DIO264, DIO280
24
27
29
31
34
Analog Input/Output Modules
Universal Input/Output Module GIO212
Universal Input/Output Module AIO208, AIO216
Universal Input/Output Module AIO204/SI, AIO202/SI
Analog Input Modules AI202/SI, AI204/SI
Analog Input Modules AI208/SI
Analog Input Modules AI204/x
Analog Output Module AO202
Analog Output Modules AO202/SI, AO204/SI
Analog Input/Output Modules AIO288/x
Temperature Input Module PTAI216
Temperature Input Modules TI214/x
Strain gauge Input Module DMS202
41
45
48
52
54
56
58
59
60
63
66
69
Function Modules
Counter Modules CNT204/x
Positioning Modules ISI222/x
Pulse Width Modulation Module PWM202
Axis Controller Module ACR222/2
74
76
79
81
Grid Measurement Module
Grid Measurement, Protection and Synchronization Module GSP274
Grid Measurement and Protection Module GMP232
Grid Measurement Module GM260
86
93
99
System Modules
Power Supply Module NT255
Power Supply Module NT250/48
Dummy Module LM201
Backplanes BS200 Series
Backplanes BS200 CC Series
Backplanes BS200/S Series
Backplane Adapter BS200/ET Series
104
106
107
108
109
110
111
Storage Media
PC Cards PCC201/xx
Compact Flash Memory CF200/xx UDMA
CFast Memory CFA200/xx
Bachmann System Maintenance Stick
113
114
115
116
3
Accessories
Front Terminals and Terminal Sets
3.5 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals KZ 35/xx
120
3.5 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals KS 35/xx, Old Type
122
3.5 Pitch, Narrow Cage Clamp Terminals KS 35/xx, New Type
124
3.5 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals KZ 51/xx
126
7.62 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals SS 76/xx, Side
138
7.62 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals SS 76/xx, Inverted
130
3.5 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals SS 35/xx, Side
132
5.08 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals SS 51/xx, Side 134
5.08 Pitch Screw Terminals SV 51/xx, Front
136
Coding138
Positioning140
Terminal Sets Overview
141
Plastic Fiber Optic Cables
Plastic Fiber Optic Cables POF-/PMMA Fibers
146
Glass Fiber Cable
Glass Fiber Cable (HCS/PCF) Glass Fiber Cable (Multimode)
PushPull® Connectors
PushPull® Adapter
150
156
157
157
Networking
4
Interfaces
Industrie Ethernet Master EM213
Interface Modules RS204
Ethernet Remote Station ERS202 CC
168
170
172
Bus Expansion
Bus Expansion Modules BEx200 series
176
FASTBUS
FASTBUS Modules Fx210 series
FASTBUS Modules Fx220 series
180
183
CANopen
CANopen Master Module CM202
CANopen Slave Modules CS200/x
CAN Slave - Digital Input/Output Modules DIOxxx-C
CAN Slave - Analog and Digital Input/Output Module DA3284-C
CAN Slave - Temperature Input/Output Modules TCO2xx-C
CANopen Configurator
190
193
196
199
203
205
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Master DNM201
206
EtherCAT®
EtherCAT® Master and EtherCAT® Configurator
EtherCAT® Slave Module ECS200
209
211
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP Master Module DPM200
PROFIBUS Configurator
215
217
PROFINET
PROFINET IO (RT)
PROFINET Configurator
219
220
M-BUS
MBUS201 Master
222
MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Modbus Master
Modbus Slave
225
228
SERCOS
SERCOS Master Module SEM201
231
bluecom233
Telecontrol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol)
IEC 60870-5 Client and Server (Master and Slave)
MMS Server (GOOSE Publisher / IEC 61850, IEC 61400-25)
MMS Client (GOOSE Subscriber / IEC61850, IEC61400-25)
240
245
252
257
OPC Solutions
OPC UA Server
OPC Enterprise Server
OPC Standard Server
261
265
269
Security
Security – Communication and information security
277
Safety – Integrated Safety Technology
Safety Modules & Safety Developer
Safety Processor Module SLC284
Safety Input Module SDI208
Safety Output Module SDO204
Safety Counter Module SCT202
Safety Developer Engineering Tool
288
291
294
297
302
Redundancy
Hot-Standby Redundancy
Warm-Standby Redundancy
Network Redundancy
310
314
318
HMI – Operating and Monitoring Devices
Operator Terminals
OT100 Series
OT200 Series
OT1300 Series
Web Terminal OT1200 Series
Operator Terminal Systemsoftware
326
328
331
337
339
Industrial PCs
Industrial PC BPC1500 Series
343
5
Engineering Software – SolutionCenter
Project engineering made easy: SolutionCenter
M-Base350
Configuration
Device Manager
352
Test and Diagnostics
Scope 3
355
Programming
M-PLC Programming Interface
C / C++ Developer
363
366
Model-based Design/Simulation
®
M-Target for Simulink 369
Component Manager
PLC Developer
374
376
SCADA and webMI
atvise® scada
M1 webMI pro
M-JVIS, M-JSYS tool library
381
391
397
Motion Control
M-SMC Software Motion Control
M-SHAFT Shaft controller
M-CNC Three-dimensional motions
Drive Middleware
M-TEMP Temperature controller
404
406
408
410
412
CMS – Condition Monitoring System
Vibration Sensor Input Module AIC212
Ω-Guard® System variants
Remote Service via WebLog Expert
Acceleration Sensors BAM100/BAM500
µ-bridge Sensor
418
422
425
426
427
Branch-specific Solutions
Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
Wind Power SCADA (WPS)
6
430
436
Appendix
Directives and certificates
441
Standards and approvals
442
ColdClimate449
CAE/CAD data
ePLAN library453
3D CAD model library
455
Installation in the control cabinet/housing
456
Dimensions458
Module power consumption
461
Bachmann training
463
Imprint464
7
Scalable. Robust. Versatile.
M1 controller hardware –
industrial controller with a future
Individual requirements can be met easily with a wide range of powerful
CPUs based on industrial (Pentium) processors and with an extensive range
of I / O modules. Real-time capable bus systems enable the automation to be
decentralized without any loss of performance.
The M1 controller perfectly combines the openness of a PC-based controller
with the reliability of industrial hardware platforms. Designed for the
toughest ambient conditions, they guarantee fault-free operation with fanless
installation from -40 °C up to an ambient temperature of +70 °C.
State-of-the-art system architecture designed for seamless networking
capability enables the M1 to be integrated easily in the area of the controller
and system peripherals. Real-time Ethernet permits real-time controller
networking and the support of all currently available fieldbus systems and
enables external components to be connected via standard interfaces.
9
Processor Modules
Maximum performance and unrivalled robustness
The processor modules of the M1
automation system stand out on account of
their optimum performance and unrivalled
robustness. Integrated into Bachmann CPU
boards and I/O systems, industrial Pentium
processors in an embedded design ensure
absolute deterministic real-time behavior.
standards and the performance of the PC
/ IT-world with the industrial robustness of
classical PLC.
The comprehensive scope of Bachmann
electronic software enables it to be used as
a PLC, motion controller or communication
and data centre.
Even the most rigorous demands in terms
of flexible data exchange and networking
can be met without costly additional
modules: M1 processor modules offer the
full range of interfaces already »on-board«.
This offers the automation engineer total
freedom and ensures cost efficient and
compact design. Ample power reserves for
networking and communication-intensive
applications are provided as basic features.
The mass storage of the device is also fully
scalable.
As Programmable Automation Controllers
(PAC), M1 CPUs combine flexibility, open
Consistent compatibility of the PACs
application software protects the user's
investments for future expansions.
Processor Modules ME203 Series
Features
Intel 80386 EX, 33 MHz
Integrated power supply, 17 W/24 V
SRAM: 512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM: 8 MB
FLASH: 8 MB file-flash, 2 MB boot flash
1x Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s or 1x CAN/CANopen
1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
Slots: PCC201/xx
10
Processor Modules
Processor Modules MX200 Series
Features
CPU x86 66 MHz / CPU 133 MHz / CPU 200 MHz
Pentium class
Integrated power supply 17 W/24 V
nvRAM: 512 kB, DRAM: 256 MB,
FLASH: 16 MB internal, MX207 64 MB internal FLASH
2x Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s
1x CAN/CANopen
1x USB, 1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
Slots: PCC201/xx, CF200/xx
Processor Modules MC200 Series
Features
CPU 600 MHz ATOM E620 / 1,6 GHz ATOM E680
DRAM: 1 GB DDR2
nvRAM0 (data memory): 512 kB
1x USB-Host, 1x Service USB interface, 1x RS232,
1x RS232/422/485
2x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with IEEE1588
Slots: CFast200/xx
Processor Modules
MH200 Series
Features
CPU 1.2 GHz Celeron
nvRAM: 512 kB
FLASH: 16 MB internal
2x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
1x USB 2.0
Internal mass memory: CFast card
Slot: CFA200/xx
Integrated power supply
11
Processor Modules
Processor Modules ME203 Series
The processor modules of the ME203 series extend
the range of the M1 controller family in terms of
reduced power consumption and moderate cycle
times. With an extremely slim design of only one
module width, ME203 CPUs offer all the essential
features of larger type series but with a lower power
consumption.
Several networking and power supply options scale
the module ideally for smaller applications. As fullyfledged M1 CPUs, ME203 processor modules are not
only configured with the same tools as the high-end
families MX and MPC, but are also fully code and
application compatible, although they have less
memory and fewer interfaces.
All modules have two serial interfaces and a front
slot for one PC card. The optional Ethernet interface
allows integration in 10 / 100 Mbit/s networks at
full data rate. With the retentive program and data
storage devices, also larger projects can be handled
without the need for external media. In addition to
the supply of the processor module, an integrated
optional power supply provides 17 W for extra I/O
modules.
•80386 EX processor
•2 serial interfaces
•Optional integrated power supply, 17 W / 24 VDC
•Optional CAN bus interface
or Ethernet 100 Mbit 100 Mbit / s interface
•RAM 8 MB DRAM
•Data memory 512 kB SRAM, (battery backed)
•Integrated program memory
•Removable memory:
PC cards with 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 MB
•Battery backed real-time clock (RTC)
•Status displays for RUN, INIT and ERROR
•Watchdog
Item
Item no.
ME203/EN00013177-00
ME203/EN CC 00015985-00
ME203/CN00013176-00
ME203/CNW00013191-00
ME203/CN CC 00016336-00
12
Processor Modules
ME203 series
Processor + memory
CPU
Intel 80386 EX, 33 MHz
SRAM (data memory)
512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM (working memory)
8 MB
PC card **
PCC201 / xx with 16 / 32 / 64 MB
Boot FLASH
2 MB (reserved by system software)
Program FLASH ***
8 MB
Interfaces
Serial (standard)
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485, 64 byte FIFO
Ethernet (optional)
1x 10/100 Mbit / s
CAN (optional)
1x 10 k to 1 MBaud*
Power supply
External power supply
5 V, ±15 V via backplane
module**
Internal power supply module
(optional)
Own supply and 17 W for I/Os
modules: +5 V / 2 A, +15 V / 250 mA, -15 V / 200 mA
supply voltage: 24 VDC (18 to 34 V)
Galvanic isolation
Supply to the system 500 V
Additional features
Watchdog
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
Cold Weather (W)
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C fanless
5 to 95 % with
condensation
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 % without
condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
ME203/EN
00013177-00
CPU module 386EX (33MHz); 8MB DRAM; 512kB SRAM; 8MB file-flash;
1x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; integrated power supply 17W;
PCC slot
ME203/EN CC
00015985-00
Like ME203/EN; ColdClimate ( )
ME203/CN
00013176-00
CPU module 386EX (33MHz); 8MB DRAM; 512kB SRAM; 8MB file-flash;
1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; integrated power supply
17W; PCC slot
ME203/CNW
00013191-00
CPU module 386EX (33MHz); 8MB DRAM; 512kB SRAM; 8MB file-flash;
1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485; integrated power supply
17W; PCC slot; Cold Weather (W)
ME203/CN CC
00016336-00
Like ME203/CN; ColdClimate ( )
* TCP / IP protocol can also be run via CAN
** not included in delivery
*** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
13
Processor Modules
Accessories ME203 series
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5.08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
K-CAN/xm
K-CAN/0.5m
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
S-CAN/1B
14
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
Processor Modules
Processor Modules MX200 Series
The processor modules of the MX200 series are
module based on PC technology for the M1 controller
system. Depending on the type, the modules are
equipped with a power supply and an integrated
CAN master, and have 100 Mbit Ethernet ports
that allow the simple integration of the controller
in physically separated networks. The processor
module with integrated floating point unit (FPU) is
suitable for control applications. The MX200 modules
are equipped with non-volatile RAM which provides
maximum data security for more than 10 years
without battery back-up.
Depending on type, the following features are:
•2 serial interfaces
•2 Ethernet-interfaces 10/100 Mbit/s
with status displays
•1 CAN interface
•1 USB interface
•Status indicating LEDs for RUN, INIT and ERROR
•Mass storage (Compact Flash)
•RAM 256 MB DRAM
•Data memory 512 kB nvRAM
•Program memory of 16 / 32 / 64 MB FLASH on
PC card and 16 MB internal FLASH, MX207 64 MB
internal FLASH
•Integrated power supply
Item Device
MX207
MX213
CF2GB MX213 CC
CF2GB
MX213CF4GB
MX213 CC
CF4GB
MX220CF2GB
MX220 CC CF2GB
MX220 CF4GB
MX220 CC
CF4GB
MX220 CC
Item no.
00014445-00
00018594-20
00018597-20
00018594-10
00018597-10
00018593-20
00017689-20
00018593-10
00017689-10
00019210-00
15
Processor Modules
MX200 series
MX207
MX213/x
MX220/x
x86
x86
x86
66 MHz
133 MHz
200 MHz
Processor + memory
CPU
Performance
(Pentium equivalent)
CF (mass storage)
–
Without restriction
nvRAM (data memory)
512 kB
DRAM (working memory)
256 MB
PC card (program memory)*
–
PCC201/xx with 16 / 32 / 64 MB FLASH
FLASH (program memory)**
64 MB internal
16 MB internal
1x RS232 / 422 / 485
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485
1x 10/100 base-Tx
2x 10/100 base-Tx
Interfaces
Serial
Ethernet
USB
1x USB 2.0
CAN
1x 10 k to 1 Mbit/s
Power supply for I/O
Supply voltage
24 VDC (18 to 34 V)
Nominal power
17 W for I/O
Module
+5 V / 2000 mA; +15 V / 250 mA; -15 V / 200 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for Ethernet and fieldbuses SERCOS and CAN
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
ColdClimate ( )
Standard
-30 to +60 °C fanless
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
* Not included in delivery
** Depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory (approx. 4 MB) is reserved for the
system software
16
Processor Modules
MX200 series
Order codes
MX207
00014445-00
CPU module LX700 (266MHz); without Cache; 256MB DRAM;
512kB nvRAM; 64MB file-flash; 1x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x
RS232/422/485; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W
MX213/CF 2GB
00018594-20
CPU module LX700 (266MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM;
16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC
slot; CF slot; 2GB CF card
MX213/CF 2GB CC
00018597-20
Like MX213/CF 2GB; ColdClimate ( )
MX213/CF 4GB
00018594-10
CPU module LX700 (266MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM;
16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC
slot; CF slot; 4GB CF card
MX213/CF 4GB CC
00018597-10
Like MX213/CF 4GB; ColdClimate ( )
MX220/CF 2GB
00018593-20
CPU module LX700 (433MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM;
16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC
slot; CF slot; 2GB CF card
MX220/CF 2GB CC
00017689-20
Like MX213/CF 2GB; ColdClimate ( )
MX220/CF 4GB
00018593-10
CPU module LX700 (433MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM;
16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC
slot; CF slot; 4GB CF card
MX220/CF 4GB CC
00017689-10
Like MX220/CF 4GB; ColdClimate ( )
MX220 CC
00019210-00
CPU module LX700 (433MHz); 256MB DRAM; 512kB nvRAM;
16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply 17W; PCC
slot; CF slot; Cold Climate
Accessories MX200 series
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5.08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
K-CAN/xm
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
K-CAN/0.5m
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
S-CAN/1B
17
Processor Modules
Processor Module MC200 Series
The powerful processor modules of the MC200
series offer maximum performance for demanding
applications of your M1 control system. The CPUs
are based on the latest embedded ATOM technology,
consequently they are ideally suited for the most
demanding regulating tasks, process control, signal
processing and complex communication protocols.
Through the use of state-of-the-art technology in a
robust design, a compact powerhouse with a long
service life and a broad temperature range (-30 to
+60 °C) is available. The supplemental integrated,
autonomous process image controller significantly
offloads the processor and the I/O bus. This enables
a new dimension in data transmission speed to the
inputs and outputs for the fastest possible process
cycles. Fast single accesses in the µs range for precise
control and regulating tasks are also available. For
efficient networking and state-of-the-art fieldbuses,
two independent Gigabit Ethernet interfaces,
including IEEE-1588 hardware support, are available.
An internal CFast card enables fastest access speeds
via the modern SATA (Serial Advanced Technology
Attachment). Non-volatile memory of 512 kB is
available as a drive and securely stores machine data
for longer than 10 years, without an external energy
supply or battery.
•2 serial interfaces
•USB 2.0 host interface
•USB device service interface
•2 Ethernet interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with
IEEE 1588
•Process image controller
•1 GB DRAM DDR2
•Data memory 512 kB non-volatile
•Internal mass storage CFast card
•internal 64 MB program memory
Item Device
MC205
MC205CFA4GB
MC205 CC
MC205 CC
CFA4GB
MC210
MC210CFA4GB
MC210 CC
MC210 CC
CFA4GB
18
Item no.
00018805-10
00018805-12
00020513-10
00020513-12
00018806-10
00018806-12
00020514-10
00020514-12
Processor Modules
MC200 series
MC210, MC210 CC
MC205, MC205 CC
1.6 GHz ATOM E680
600 MHz ATOM E620
Processor + memory
CPU
I/O bus
Process image controller
CFast (mass storage)
1 x integrated (accessible from the side) / > 8 GB
RAM
1 GB DRAM DDR2
nvRAM-0 (data memory)
512 kB
Internal FLASH (program memory)
64 MB, 40 MB free for application program
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232 + 1x RS232/422/485 (SW configurable)
Ethernet
2x 10/100/1000 Base-T with IEEE1588
USB host
1x USB 2.0
Service USB interface
1x USB device
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for I/O bus, fieldbuses SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C, fan-free
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
MC205-1G/0GB CFA
00018805-10
CPU module ATOM E620 (600MHz); 1GB DRAM, 512kB nvRAM;
64MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; 1x USB2.0 Device; CFast slot
MC205-1G/0GB CFA CC
00020513-10
Like MC205-1G/0GB CFA; ColdClimate ( )
MC205-1G/4GB CFA
00018805-12
CPU module ATOM E620 (600MHz); 1GB DRAM, 512kB nvRAM;
64MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; 1x USB2.0 Device; CFast slot; 4GB CFast Card
MC205-1G/4GB CFA CC
00020513-12
Like MC205-1G/4GB CFA; ColdClimate ( )
MC210-1G/0GB CFA
00018806-10
CPU module ATOM E680 (1.6GHz); 1GB DRAM, 512kB nvRAM;
64MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; 1x USB2.0 Device; CFast slot;
MC210-1G/0GB CFA CC
00020514-10
Like MC210-1G/0GB CFA; ColdClimate ( )
MC210-1G/4GB CFA
00018806-12
CPU module ATOM E680 (1.6GHz); 1GB DRAM, 512kB nvRAM;
64MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
1x USB2.0; 1x USB2.0 Device; CFast slot; 4GB CFast Card
MC210-1G/4GB CFA CC
00020514-12
Like MC210-1G/4GB CFA; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories MC200 series
Item
Item no.
Description
CFast Card 4GB
00017355-00
CFast Card 4GB
19
Processor Modules
Processor Modules MH200 Series
The high-performance MH212/S processor module
Celeron M offer maximum performance for demanding
applications with an M1 controller. The CPU is
based on the latest PC technology, consequently it
is ideally suited for demanding computation tasks,
databases, signal processing or extensive network
applications. With integration of the power supply and
the generously dimensioned passive cooling system,
a compact powerhouse with long service life and an
extensive temperature range (-30 °C to +60 °C) is
ready. The additional integrated autonomous process
image controller results in a significant offload of the
processor and enables a new speed dimension for
data transmission to the inputs and outputs for the
fastest process cycles. For efficient networking and
the state-of-the-art fieldbusses, two independent
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces including IEEE-1588
hardware support are ready. An internal CFast card
enables fastest access speeds via the modern SATA
(Serial Advanced Technology Attachment). Nonvolatile memory of 512 kB is available as a drive and
stores machine data for longer that 10 years, without
an external energy supply or battery.
•2 serial interfaces
•USB 2.0 interface
•2 Ethernet interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with
IEEE 1588
•Process image controller
•Data memory 512 kB non-volatile
•Program memory intertal 16 MB Flash
•Internal mass storage CFast card
•Power supply 100 watt, power for I/O modules
30 watt
Item Device
MH212/S
MH212/SCFA4GB
MH212/S CC
MH212/S CC CFA4GB
20
Item no.
00016370-00
00016370-02
00018652-00
00018652-02
Processor Modules
MH200 series
MH212/S, MH212/S CC
Processor + memory
CPU
1.2 GHz Celeron M ULV 722
I/O processor
process image controller
CFast (mass storage)
1 x integrated (accessible via side cover)
nvRAM-0 (data memory)
512 kB
DRAM
2 GB
Internal FLASH (program memory)
16 MB
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232 + 1x RS232/422/485 (SW configurable)
Ethernet
2x 10/100/1000 base-T
USB
1x USB 2.0
Power supply
Internal power supply module
CPU supply and 30 watt for I/Os
Supply voltage
24 VDC (18 to 34 V)
Nominal power
17 W
Module
+5 V / 3 A; +15 V / 500 mA; -15 V / 500 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for I/O busses, fieldbusses SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature
Ambient conditions
0 to +60 °C
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without
condensation
5 to 95 % with
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without
condensation
5 to 95 % with
condensation
Order codes
MH212/S
00016370-00
CPU module Celeron M ULV 722 (1.2GHz); 2GB DDR; 512kB
nvRAM; 16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485 isolated; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply
30W; CFast slot
MH212/S CC
00018652-00
Like MH212/S; ColdClimate ( )
MH212/S 4GB CFA
00016370-02
CPU module Celeron M ULV 722 (1.2GHz); 2GB DDR; 512kB
nvRAM; 16MB file-flash; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485 isolated; 1x USB2.0; integrated power supply
30W; CFast slot; 4GB CFast card
MH212/S 4GB CFA CC
00018652-02
Like MH212/S 4GB CFA; ColdClimate ( )
21
Digital Input/Output Modules
Efficiency for all channel types
The M1 Automation System's wide range
of digital I/O modules means there is a
module for any channel type. A selection
from the standard 6-channel variant up
to the ultra-compact 80-channel module
guarantees the right module for every
purpose.
Combined I/O modules allow the operating
mode (DI / DO) of each individual channel
to be configured by the user. As well as
the global standard 24 VDC input signal,
48 VDC modules are also available for the
power station sector.
Bachmann electronic's M1 I /O modules not
only allow the process image access typical
of PLCs but also direct access at any point
in the program. This makes it possible
to configure individual digital inputs and
their status changes as interrupt sources
so that programs can respond to processcontrolled inputs. All modules support
transmission via FASTBUS (fiber optic
cable), CAN or P
­ ROFINET and offer a
high degree of fl
­ exibility in the design of
sophisticated automation solutions.
Digital Input Modules DI216/232
Features
Number of inputs: 16 / 32
Input voltage:
nom. 24 VDC / nom. 48 VDC
Separate single groups
Interrupt inputs: max. 2
Sink/source inputs
Galvanic isolation
Status display for each channel via LED
22
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Output Modules
DO216/232
Features
Number of outputs: 16 / 32
Output voltage:
nom. 24 VDC / nom. 48 VDC
Output current: depends on type 2.5 / 1 / 0.5 A
Total current depends on type: 8 / 16 A
Galvanic isolation
Status display for each channel via LED
Digital Relay Output
Modules DOR206/230
Digital Input/Output
Modules DIO216/232
Features
6 relays
Standard socket for SIL relays
Electromechanical or solid state
relays
Mechanically locked relays
Galvanic isolation measured for
system to chanal 2500 VAC
Status display for each channel
via LED
Features
Total channel number: 16 / 32,
nom. 24 VDC
Number configurable inputs/
outputs: 16
Number of inputs: 8 / 16 / 32
Number of outputs: 16
Configurable interrupt inputs
Galvanic isolation from system
Status display for each channel
via LED
Digital Input/Output Modules
DIO248/264/280
Features
Total channel number: 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 / 80,
nom. 24 VDC
Number configurable inputs/outputs: 16
Number of inputs: 16 / 32 / 48
Number of outputs: 16/ 32 / 48
Configurable interrupt inputs
Configurable 32 Bit counter
PDM output mode
Galvanic isolation from system
Status display for each channel via LED
23
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Input Modules DI216/232
The digital input modules DI216, DI232, DI232 CC,
DI232/np1 and DI232/48 are used to connect up to
16 or 32 digital sensors to the M1 controller.
•Digital input modules with 16 or 32 inputs
•Current sinking logic > 2 mA acc.
to EN61132 type 1
•DI216, DI232, DI232 CC, DI232/np:
input voltage: nom. 24 VDC (18 to 34 VDC)
•DI232/48: input voltage: nom. 48 VDC
(30 to 58 VDC)
•Inputs 1 and 2 configurable as interrupt
inputs
•Galvanic isolation of inputs from the system
•Status display for each channel via LED
•Sink / source inputs (DI232/np1)
Item
Item no.
DI21600009002-00
DI23200008997-00
DI232 CC
00016411-00
DI232/np100011516-00
DI232/4800012162-00
24
Digital Input/Output Modules
DI216
DI232, DI232 CC
Number of inputs
16
32
Isolated input groups
2 (1-8 / 9-16)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Input voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
Internal resistance
Approx. 6 kΩ
Approx. 6 kΩ
Low level
-34 to +5 V
-34 to +5 V
High level
+15 to +34 V
+15 to +34 V
Input delay (normally via filter)
3 ms
3 ms
Interrupt inputs
Max. 2
Max. 2
Input delay (normally)
50 µs
50 µs
Galvanic isolation from system
300 V
300 V
Galvanic isolation of groups
500 V
500 V
Inputs
DI232/np1
DI232/48
Number of inputs
32
32
Isolated input group
4 (1-8 /9-16), (17-24/25-32)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Input voltage
24 VDC
48 VDC
Internal resistance
< 4,7 kΩ
< 7,5 kΩ
Low level
|UC-UIN| < 5 V
-34 to +10 V
High level
|UC-UIN| > 15 V
+30 to +58 V
Input delay (normally via filter)
100 µs
3 ms
Interrupt inputs
Max. 2
Max. 2
Input delay (normally)
50 µs
20 µs
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
500 V
Galvanic isolation of groups
500 V
500 V
Current consumption (via BS2xx)
80 mA at 5 V
88 mA at 5 V
Inputs
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
DI216
00009002-00
Digital input module; 16x 24V; 3ms filter; 2 groups; 2 interrupt
channels; 50µs delay; isolated
DI232
00008997-00
Digital input module; 32x 24V; 3ms filter; 2 groups; 2 interrupt
channels; 50µs delay; isolated
DI232 CC
00016411-00
Like DI232; ColdClimate ( )
DI232/np1
00011516-00
Digital input module; 32x 24V; 100µs filter; sink / source; 4 groups;
2 interrupt channels; 50µs delay; isolated
DI232/48
00012162-00
Digital input module; 32x 48V; 3ms filter; 2 groups; 2 interrupt
channels; isolated
25
Digital Input/Output Modules
Accessories DI216/232
26
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-DI216 B+C
00011973-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/10) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KZ-DI232 B+C
00012004-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SV-DI216 B+C
00010866-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/10) with labeling
strip and coding elements
SV-DI232 B+C
00010867-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/12) with labeling
strip and coding elements
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Output Modules
DO216/232
The digital output modules DO216, DO232,
DO232 CC and DO232/48 are suitable for connecting
up to 16 or 32 digital signal receivers (relays,
contactors, signal lamps, valves, etc.) to the M1
controller.
•Digital output modules with 16 or 32 outputs
•Outputs 24 VDC (DO216, DO232, DO232 CC)
•Outputs 48 VDC (DO232/48)
•16 outputs with 2.5 A or 32 outputs
with 1 A / 0.5 A
•Outputs parallel connectable
•Monitoring of short circuit, wire break
and overload
•Compact design
•Status display for each channel via LED
Item
Item no.
DO21600009004-00
DO23200009003-00
DO232 CC
00016414-00
DO232/4800012176-00
27
Digital Input/Output Modules
DO216
DO232, DO232 CC
DO232/48
Number of outputs
16
32
32
Output current / channel*
2.5 A
1A
0.5 A
Groups with different power
supplies
2 (1-8 / 9-16)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Total current / group
Max. 8 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 8 A
0 -> 1
Normally 80 µs
(at 1 A)
Normally 80 µs
(at 1 A)
Normally 25 µs
(at 0.5 A)
1 -> 0
Normally 250 µs
(at 1 A)
Normally 250 µs
(at 1 A)
Normally 25 µs
(at 0.5 A)
500 V
500 V
Description
Switching delay (resistive load)
Galvanic isolation from system
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
DO216
00009004-00
Digital output module; 16x 2.5A / 24VDC outputs; 2 groups; isolated
DO232
00009003-00
Digital output module; 32x 1A / 24VDC outputs; 2 groups; isolated
DO232 CC
00016414-00
Like DO232; ColdClimate ( )
DO232/48
00012176-00
Digital output module; 32x 0.5A / 48VDC outputs; 2 groups; isolated
* rated
Accessories DO216/232
28
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-DO216 B+C
00012005-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/10) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KZ-DO232 B+C
00012006-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SV-DO216 B+C
00010865-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/10) with labeling
strip and coding elements
SV-DO232 B+C
00010868-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/12) with labeling
strip and coding elements
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Relay Output Modules
DOR206/230
Relays are the simplest way of controlling galvanically
isolated power circuits. The output module’s direct
plugability relays drastically reduce wiring work,
save valuable control cabinet space and facilicate
troubleshooting. The locking mechanism keeps the
relay in place even when subjected to shocks and
vibrations. The relays offer maximum flexibility
for implementation in control cabinets thanks to
possibilities offered by standard relay types with a
voltage range from 24 V/48 VDC or 230 VAC, a broad
power range and the selection of valuable electromechanical relays or solid state for high make-andbreak cycles.
Quick and easy serviceability without the use of tools
is won by availability, clear status and error display
(thanks to LED) and a locking/ejecting mechanism of
relays as service parts.
•6 relays
•Normally open contact (NO), normally closed
contact (NC), change-over contact (CO)
•Standard socket for SIL relays
•Electromechanical or solid state relays
•Mechanically locked relays
•Coil current monitoring
•Status display for each channel via LED
•Galvanic isolation measured for voltages
from system to channel 2500 VAC
•Backplanes BS2xx/S with protection class 1 for
other voltages than SELV are available
•Cost effective and space saving through direct wiring to the consumer without relay and terminal
Item
Item no.
DOR206/23000014497-10
29
Digital Input/Output Modules
DOR206/230
Output relays
Quantity
6 relay outputs; 3 groups with 2 output relays each are together
on an output plug
Relay socket
For SIL relays 28 x 5 x 15 mm
relay coil
Coil voltage 24 VDC, power rating 170 mW
Relay contact
230 VAC, 24 VDC depending on relay type
Switching capacity per channel (max.)
Ohm resistive load up to 2 A AC
AC 15 230 VA (230 VAC / 1 A AC)
DC 13 12 W (24 VDC / 0.5 A DC)
Status indication (LED)
Green
Switching rate (max. load in Ohms)
1 Hz
RC circuit
Depending on relay and load complete externally
Input voltage, rated
230 VAC, 24 VDC depending on relay type (current consumption
not allowed)
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation relay outputs to the
system
2500 VAC / 5.5 mm
Galvanic isolation between the groups
1500 VAC / 3 mm (between the three relays output groups and to
the Cabinet)
Galvanic isolation between relay
outputs
800 VAC / 1 mm (between every two relay outputs)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DOR206/230
00014497-10
Digital relay output module 6x sockets with relay 24V/230V; AC15
230 VA; DC13 12W; change-over contact; BS2xx protection class 1
necessary with 230V working voltage
Accessories DOR206/230
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-DOR206 B+C
00014760-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/06) with labeling strip
and coding elements
Safety instruction for operation
If higher voltages than safe low voltages are connected, then a backplane with BS2xx/S protective
grounding for protection class 1 must be used. Safe low voltages and dangerous voltages may not be
connected together on a relay module. In addition a suitable safeguard against accidental contact must be
provided: for example, installation in a control cabinet. While in operation all sockets must have a relay
plugged in. Cage clamps are the best method for protecting against accidental contact by technicians. It is
not permissible to use these relays as safety relays or for safety related applications.
30
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Input/Output Modules
DIO216/232
The digital input / output modules DIO2xx/x can be
used to operate receivers of digital control devices
such as contactors, relays, pneumatic and hydraulic
valves as well as for reading signals from digitally
operating sources such as sensors, photocells or
switches.
•16 / 32 / 48 / 64 or 80 digital channels
•16 channels can be configured as input
or output
•Configurable interrupt inputs
•Status display for each channel via LED
•Supply voltage 18 to 34 VDC
•Supply voltage protected against reverse polarity
•Cost effective and space saving
•Full wiring without extra potential rails
(3-wire, only DIO216)
•Configurable input filter (DIO232)
Item
Item no.
DIO21600010615-00
DIO216/400010892-00
DIO216/4 CC 00016141-00
DIO23200013034-00
DIO232 CC
00019502-00
31
Digital Input/Output Modules
DIO216
DIO216/4
DIO216/4 CC
DIO232
DIO232 CC
Max. 16
16 to 32
Inputs
Quantity
Max. 16
Input voltage range (H)
15 to 34 VDC
Input voltage range (L)
Input delay (normally)
0 to 5 VDC
600 µs
600 µs
Internal resistance
6.8 kOhm
Status indication (LED)
Interrupt inputs
0 to 365 ms
Green
1
1
8
Max. 16
Max. 16
16 to 32
Outputs
Quantity
Output voltage range
Output current per channel (max.)
Total current (max.)
18 to 34 VDC
1A
12 A
1A
0.5 A
16 A
8A
Status indication (LED)
green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
1 kHz
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Galvanic isolation from system
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
500 V
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
5 to 95 % with
condensation
Order codes
32
DIO216
00010615-00
Digital input/output module; 16x DIO; 24V / 1A; 600µs filter;
1 group; 3-wire system; 1 interrupt channel; 50µs delay; isolated
DIO216/4
00010892-00
Digital input/output module; 16x DIO; 24V / 1A; 600µs filter;
4 groups; 3-wire system; 1 interrupt channel; 50µs delay; isolated
DIO216/4 CC
00016141-00
Like DIO216/4; ColdClimate ( )
DIO232
00013034-00
Digital input/output module; 16x DI; 40µs..365ms filter configurable;
16x DIO; 24V / 0.5A; 2 groups; 8 interrupt channel; 35µs delay;
­isolated
DIO232 CC
00019502-00
Like DIO232; ColdClimate ( )
Digital Input/Output Modules
Accessories DIO216/232
Item
Item no.
Description
SV-DIO216 B+C
00012078-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (3x SV 51/12; 1x SV 51/02)
with labeling strip and coding elements
KZ-DIO216 B+C
00011974-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12; 1x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strip and coding elements
KZ-DIO216/4 B+C
00011975-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12; 1x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strip and coding elements
SS-DIO232 B+C
00015816-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (3x SS 51/12) with labeling
strip and coding elements
KZ-DIO232 B+C
00013742-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12) with labeling strip
and coding elements
33
Digital Input/Output Modules
Digital Input/Output Modules
DIO248/264/280
The input/output module DIO2xx are used for
controlling digital consumer like contactors, relays,
pneumatic and hydraulic valves, as well as for
reading signals of digital working sensors, detectors
or switches. On events can be reacted expressly
via 8 available interrupt inputs. Alternatively there
are available up to four counters, for detecting e.g.
positions or counting goods. For the energy-saving
operation of inductivities all outputs can be operated
as PWM. Especially for the PWM operation of valves
a hold time is additionaly configurable between 0 up
to 2 s. Outputs are parallel connectable, in case it is
operated in the same operation mode.
•16/32/48/64 or 80 digital channels
•16 channels can be configured as input
or output
•Configurable interrupt inputs
•Configurable 32 bit counter
•Mode: event counter, incremental encoder,
gate measurement, cycle time or frequency
measurement
•Configurable input filter
•PWM output mode for e.g. valve economy mode
•Status display for each channel via LED
•Supply voltage 18 to 34 VDC
•Supply voltage protected against reverse polarity
•Cost effective and space saving
Item
Item no.
DIO24800019116-00
DIO26400019115-00
DIO28000019114-00
DIO280 CC
00019119-00
34
Digital Input/Output Modules
DIO248
DIO280
DIO280 CC
DIO264
Inputs
Quantity
16 to 32
24 to 40
Input voltage range (H)
Input voltage range (L)
0 to 5 VDC
Input delay (normally)
Standard: 600 µs
Settable 10 µs to 270 ms
Internal resistance
8 kOhm
Status indication (LED)
Interrupt inputs
32 to 48
15 to 34 VDC
Green
8, configurable as counter inputs or interrupt inputs
Counter
Quantity
up to 4
Resolution
Operating mode
Encoder types
Input signal
Signal evaluation
Max. input frequency
32 Bit
event counter, incremental encoder, gate measurement, cycle time or
frequency measurement
incremental encoder with A and B channel and one-channel pulse
encoder
A, B, Initator (interrupt inputs configurable)
1 / 2 / 4-fold edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
one-channel: 50 kHz
dual-channel (A/B): 20 kHz
Outputs
Quantity
16 to 32
Output voltage range
32 to 48
18 to 34 VDC
Output current per channel (max.)
Total current (max.)
24 to 40
0,5 A
16 A
20 A
Status indication (LED)
Green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
1 kHz
Inductive breaking capacity
1,15 H
24 A
PWM
Quantity
Pulse duty ratio / resolution
Frequency
Like outputs
0 to 100 % / 13 Bit
1 Hz to 1 kHz
Holding time (valve mode)
0 to 2s configurable
Start/Stopp
By dedicated output
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from system
Internal power supply
Internal current consumption
(at 5 V)
500 V
BS2xx
180 mA
35
Digital Input/Output Modules
DIO248
DIO264
DIO280
DIO280 CC
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Energetic recovery
Yes
Sensor energetic recovery of DIO by switched-off supply
Input voltage
Nominal 24 VDC
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Working temperature
-40 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
ColdClimate ( )
5 to 95 % with
condensation
Order codes
DIO248
00019116-00
Digital input/output module; 16x DI; 600µs filter; 16x DIO; 16x DO;
24V / 0.5A; 4 groups, 600µs filter; 8 interrupt channel; 50µs delay;
isolated
DIO264
00019115-00
Digital input/output module; 24x DI; 600µs filter; 16x DIO; 24x DO;
24V / 0.5A; 5 groups; 600µs filter; 8 interrupt channel; 50µs delay;
isolated
DIO280
00019114-00
Digital input/output module; 32x DI; 600µs filter; 16x DIO; 32x DO;
24V / 0.5A; 6 groups; 600µs filter; 8 interrupt channel; 50µs delay;
isolated
DIO280 CC
00019119-00
Like DIO280; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories DIO248/264/280
36
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-DIO248 B+C
00012539-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/16) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KZ-DIO248 B+C
00011976-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (4x KZ 35/16) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SS-DIO264 B+C
00012539-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (5x SS 35/16) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KZ-DIO264 B+C
00011977-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (5x KZ 35/16) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SS-DIO280 B+C
00012538-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (6x SS 35/16) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KZ-DIO280 B+C
00011978-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (6x KZ 35/16) with labeling strip
and coding elements
Digital Input/Output Modules
37
Analog Input / Output Modules
The appropriate accuracy for each task
The diverse requirements of industrial and
plant automation in the field of analog
signal processing can be ideally covered
by the M1 Automation System's signal
modules.
Pt100 temperature sensors or strain gauge
sensors with perfectly scalable channel
quantities, modules of various standard
levels for general analog transmission
are available. Beside commonly supplied
Universal Input/Output
Module GIO212
Universal Input/Output
Module AIO208/216
Features
Number of in- and outputs: 12
(analog und digital)
Resolution: input 16 Bit,
output 14 Bit
Input voltage: ±10 V to ±10 mV
Input current: 0(4) to 20 mA
Digital input 24 V
Digital 32-bit counter
Filter from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz
Temperature sensor Pt 2-,3-,4-wire
Thermoelements J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Condensation-proof ColdClimate
­design ( )
Features
Number of in- and outputs: 8
(AIO208) / 16 (AIO216)
Resolution: input 16 Bit,
output 14 Bit
Input voltage: ±10 V to ±10 mV
Input current: 0(4) to 20 mA
Filter from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz
Temperature sensor Pt 2-,3-,4-wire
Thermoelements J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Condensation-proof ColdClimate
­design ( )
Universal Input/Output
Module
AIO202/SI, AIO204/SI
Features
Number of channels:
2 (AIO202/SI) / 4 (AIO204/SI)
Resolution: input 16 Bit, output
14 Bit
Input voltage: ±10 V bis 100 mV
Input current: 4 bis 20 mA
Temperature sensor Pt 2-,3-,4-wire
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
38
modules, the scope of products also
comprises models with single channel
isolation, wire break detection and much
more. Resolutions from 12-bit to 16-bit
offer perfect accuracy for every task. Fast
sampling times in some cases adjustable
input filters and support of spontaneous
single accesses are also ideally suited for
dynamic applications.
Analog Input Modules
AI202/SI, AI204/SI
Features
Number of inputs: 2 / 8
Input current: 0 to 20 mA
Differential inputs
Resolution: 13 to 16 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Input Module
AI208/SI
Features
Number of inputs: 8
Input current: 4 to 20 mA,
0 to 20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Resolution: 13 to 16 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog Output
Module AO202
Features
Number of outputs: 2
Output voltage: ±10 VDC
Differential and short circuit
proof outputs
Resolution: 16 bit
Outputs can be synchronized
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog Input Modules
AI204/x
Features
Number of inputs: 1 / 2 / 4
Input voltage: ±10 VDC
Differential inputs
Resolution: 16 bit
Inputs can be synchronized
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog Output
Modules AO202/SI,
AO204/SI
Features
Number of outputs: 2 / 4
Output current: 0 to 20 mA
Differential outputs
Short circuit proof outputs
Resolution: 16 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog Input/Output
Modules AIO288/x
Features
Number of inputs:
8 (±10 VDC / ±1 VDC
or 0 to 20 mA)
Number of outputs:
8 (±10 VDC)
Resolution: 14 bit
Connection:
single-ended or differential
Number of Pt100 sensors: 4
Connection: 2- or 4-wire
technology
Optional galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
39
Analog Input / Output Modules
Temperature Recording
Module PTAI216­
Features
Number of inputs: 4
(±10 VDC / ±1 VDC or
0 to 20 mA)
Connection: single-ended or
differential
Resolution: 14 bit at AI
Number of Pt100/Pt1000 sensors:
12
Connection: 2-wire technology
Resolution: 12 bits with Pt100/
Pt1000
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Strain Gauge Module
DMS202
Features
Number of strain gauge measuring
inputs: 2 (full bridge)
Industrial connectors (LEMO)
Analog measuring outputs: 2
Automatic measuring range
selection Wire break detection on
the measurement inputs
Resolution: 12 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
40
Temperature
Recording Modules
TI214/x
Features
TI214: 14 inputs for Pt100 /
Pt1000 sensors as well as type
J or K thermocouples
TI214/2: thermal couples type
N or S
Resolution 14 bit (16 bit with
measured value filtering)
Wire break detection on the
measurement inputs
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Analog Input / Output Modules
Universal Input/Output Module
GIO212
Item Item no.
GIO21200020620-00
GIO212 CC
00020623-00
•12 channels
•Analog and digital inputs and outputs
•Modes that can be selected per channel:
•Analog voltage input ±10 V to ±10 mV
•Analog current input 0(4) to 20 mA
•Temperature sensor Pt elements as 2-,3-,4-wire
•Thermoelements type J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
•Analog voltage output ±10 V
•Analog current output 0(4) to 20 mA
•Digital input 24 V
•Digital 32-bit counter, A and A/B operation
•Digital output 100 mA
• Low-Side, High-Side, Push-Pull
• Digital output as 16-bit PWM
The GIO212 is a module that can measure and
output various types of signals. Each channel can be
used as analog or digital output or input. With the
standard signals current (0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA)
and Voltage (±10 V), various sensors and actuators
can be connected. A resolution of at least 14 bits
allows measurement results from signals that do not
completely use the measuring range (e.g. 0 to 5 V).
Temperatures are playing a significant role in ever
more processes, which is why this module supports
Pt100/Pt1000 in 2-, 3-, and 4-wire measurement, as
well as all standard type thermoelements. Similarly,
the channels can be used as digital inputs, which
can also be configured as interrupt input and digital
32-bit counters. The quick digital 24V output can be
selected as Push-Pull, High-Side or Low-Side. The
output can be controlled as simple output or as PWM.
Up to two signal types can be used simultaneously
per channel. Analog sensors can be supplied via the
digital output (short circuit-proof and monitored),
actuator signals read back and digital signals
monitored analog. Thus, this is a single universal
module for countless applications instead of different
modules for each signal type. A cost-effective solution
that simplifies logistics and service.
Various modes can be combined and set easily
via a configuration wizard in the SolutionCenter
engineering tool.
•Resolution: Input 16-bit with filter, output 14-bit
•Filter adjustable from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz per channel
•Digital status display for analog channels
•Digital inputs in accordance with IEC 61131 Type
1,2,3
•Digital outputs up to 10 kHz
•All outputs overload, short circuit and external
voltage-proof
•Measuring range monitoring freely adjustable
(±105 %)
•Error message on overload and overtemperature
and undervoltage of the supply
•Galvanic isolation from the system 500 V
•Condensation-proof ColdClimate design ( )
41
Analog Input / Output Modules
GIO212
Inputs/Outputs
Quantity
12 channels, individually configurable as input or output
Modes per channel
Analog input
Temperature measurement input for Pt elements and thermoelements
Analog output
Digital input
Counter input
Digital output
PWM output
SYNC signal
In
Analog input, digital input, temperature measurement, counter
(depending on the mode)
Out
Analog output, digital output
Analog inputs in general
Digital resolution
16-bit
Measuring range
±105 % of nominal range
Measuring range monitoring
Lower and upper measuring range limit, error message as status or
measuring range monitoring
Allowed common mode voltage
Max. ±1 V
Refresh cycle time
100 µs
Cut-off frequency
4 kHz to 0.5 Hz adjustable channel by channel
Filtering slope
>80 dB/decade
Voltage inputs
Input voltage
±10 V, ±1 V, ±100 mV, ±10 mV
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Range
Range
Range
Range
±10 V: ±0.05 %FS
±1 V: ±0.05 %FS
±100 mV: ±0.05 %FS
±10 mV: ±0.2 %FS
Current inputs
Input current
±20 mA or 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Range ±20 mA: ±0.1 %FS
Range 4 to 20 mA: ±0.2 %FS
Input impedance
Max. 300 Ohm
Shunt short-circuit proof
To +24 V
Interference voltage strength
+24 V
Temperature inputs PTC
42
Temperature inputs
Pt100/Pt1000
Connection type
2-, 3- or 4-wire, optional
Input impedance
>100 kOhm
Temperature range
-100 to +800 °C
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Pt100/Pt1000: 0.15 % of 900 ° (measuring range -100 to 800 °C)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K, measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Analog Input / Output Modules
GIO212
Temperature inputs TE
Temperature elements
Types J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B can be selected
Temperature
ranges per type
J
-100 to +1200 °C
K
-100 to +1370 °C
T
-100 to +400 °C
N
-100 to +1300 °C
E
-100 to +1000 °C
R
-50 to +1768 °C
S
-50 to +1768 °C
B
+600 to +1820 °C
Ground
Up to ±3 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Input range max. ±0.15 % of input current range
(S, R, T, B max. ±0.3 %)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K, measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Analog outputs in general
Digital resolution
14-bit
Output signal range
±105 % nominal range
Voltage outputs
Output voltage
±10 V
Output current
Max. 10 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Min. 1 kOhm, max. ±0.05 % of output current range
Current outputs
Output current
0(4) to 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.2 %FS of the output current range
Apparent ohmic resistance
Up to 600 Ohm
Digital inputs
Input voltage
Nom. 24 VDC
Low level
0 V to 5 V
High-level
+11 V to +34 V
According to
IEC 61131-2
Input current at
24 V
Type 1
2 mA to 6 mA
Type 2
6 mA to 10 mA
Type 3
2 mA to 6 mA
Input type "source"
2 mA to 6 mA
Input type "comparator"
Typ. 1.2 V (TTL compatible)
Prof. filter for digital inputs
16 µs to 262 ms, default 1 ms
Digital counter
Modes
1, 2, 4x evaluation
Period duration measurement
Pulse duration measurement
Combination with 2nd channel: pulse/direction mode or quadrature ­encoder
43
Analog Input / Output Modules
GIO212
Digital counter
Counter
Counter up or down (in combination with 2nd channel)
32-bit
Count frequency
125 kHz (500 kHz at 4-fold evaluation)
Input type
24 V, like digital input
Trigger (2nd channel)
Save value
Reset (2nd channel)
Reset counter
Digital output
Output type
Low-Side, High-Side or Push-Pull (half bridge)
Output current / channel
0.1 A (briefly 0.5 A for <10 s)
Short-circuit current/channel
800 mA
Max. switching frequency
10 kHz
Broken wire detection
Yes
Short circuit, overload
Yes
PWM output
Output
Specification like digital output
Frequency range
0.95 Hz to 10 kHz
Pulse range
100 µs (10 µs) to 8.192 ms
Frequency resolution
16 bit (LSB is 125 ns or 16 µs)
Internal power supply
Supply internal
Via backplane BS2xx
Current consumption internal
80 mA
Power supply external
Voltage range external
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption external
24 V
Typically 200 mA without external load
Galvanic isolation from the
system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
GIO212
00020620-00
Universal input/output module; 12x analog In ±10V ±20mA Pt TC;
16bit; analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; digital In DI 5V / 24V, 125kHz,
sink/­source, counter; digital Out 24V/100mA, 10kHz, highside/lowside/
pushpull, pwm; configurable DI/AI filter; 100µs sample and refresh time;
threshold monitoring; isolated
GIO212 CC
00020623-00
Like GIO212; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories GIO212
44
Item
Item no.
Description
KS-GIO212 B+C
00023145-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4 x KS 35/15; 1 x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strip and coding elements
Analog Input / Output Modules
Universal Input/Output Module
AIO208/216
The AIO208 and AIO216 modules enable the
measuring or output of all standard analog signals.
The AIO208 offers 8 channels and the AIO216
16 channels compactly in a single module. The
standard signal types for current (0 to 20 mA and
4 to 20 mA) and voltage ranges (±10 V to ±10 mV)
allow the connection of a wide range of sensors and
actuators. A minimum 14-bit resolution makes it
­possible to also measure signals that do not fully
utilize the measuring range (e.g. 0 to 5 V) with
a sufficiently high resolution. Temperatures are
playing an important role in an increasing number
of processes. These modules therefore also support
Pt100/Pt1000 in 2, 3 and 4-wire measuring ­circuits,
as well as all standard thermocouples.
For each channel, a second channel with unused
signal types can be used in addition to the pri­mary
configured signal type. For example, a current output
can be assigned to a voltage input so that up to twice
the number of channels per module are provided.
This enables one module to cover virtually all
analog signal measuring tasks instead of having to
use many different modules for each signal type.
A cost-effective solution that simplifies logistics
and servicing. Different modes can be combined
and set simply using a configuration wizard in the
SolutionCenter engineering tool.
Item Item no.
AIO20800020628-00
AIO208 CC
On request
AIO21600020627-00
AIO216 CC
00020631-00
•16 channels AIO216, 8 channels AIO208
•Analog inputs and outputs
•Modes that can be selected per channel:
• Analog voltage input ±10 V to ±10 mV
• Analog current input 0(4) to 20 mA
• Temperature sensor Pt elements as 2-,3-,4-wire
• Thermo couples type J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
• Analog voltage output ±10 V
• Analog current output 0(4) to 20mA
•Resolution: 16-bit input with filter, 14-bit output
•Filter adjustable from 4 kHz to 0.5 Hz per channel
•All outputs overload, short circuit and external
voltage-proof
•Measuring range monitoring freely adjustable
(±105 %)
•Error message on overload and overtemperature
and undervoltage of the supply
•Galvanic isolation from the system 500 V
•Optional condensation-proof ColdClimate ( )
45
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO208/216
Inputs/Outputs
AIO208
AIO216
Quantity
8 channels
16 channels
Modes per channel
Analog input
Temperature measurement input for Pt elements and thermo couples
Analog output
SYNC signal
In
Analog input, temperature measurement
Out
Analog output
Analog inputs in general
Digital resolution
16-bit
Measuring range
±105 % of nominal range
Measuring range monitoring
Lower and upper measuring range limit, error message as status or
measuring range monitoring
Allowed common mode voltage
Max. ±1 V
Refresh cycle time
100 µs
Cut-off frequency
4 kHz to 0.5 Hz adjustable channel by channel
Filtering slope
>80 dB/decade
Voltage inputs
Input voltage
±10 V, ±1 V, ±100 mV, ±10 mV
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Range
Range
Range
Range
±10 V: ±0.05 %FS
±1 V: ±0.05 %FS
±100 mV: ±0.05 %FS
±10 mV: ±0.2 %FS
Current inputs
Input current
±20 mA or 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Range ±20 mA: ±0.1 %FS
Range 4 bis 20 mA: ±0.2 %FS
Input impedance
Max. 300 Ohm
Shunt short-circuit proof
Up to +24 V
Interference voltage strength
+24 V
Temperature inputs PTC
46
Temperature inputs
Pt100/Pt1000
Connection type
2-, 3- or 4-wire
Input impedance
>100 kOhm
Temperature range
-100 to +800 °C
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
PT100/Pt1000: 0,15 % of 900 ° (measuring range -100 to 800 °C)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K, measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Temperature elements
Types J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B can be selected
Temperature
ranges per type
J
-100 to +1200 °C
K
-100 to +1370 °C
T
-100 to +400 °C
N
-100 to +1300 °C
E
-100 to +1000 °C
R
-50 to +1768 °C
S
-50 to +1768 °C
B
+600 to +1820 °C
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO208/216
Temperature inputs TE
Ground
Up to ±3 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.15 % of input current range
(S, R, T, B max. ±0.3 %)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K; measurement values in 1/10 Kelvin
Analog outputs in general
Digital resolution
14-bit
Output signal range
±105 % nominal range
Voltage outputs
Output voltage
±10 V
Output current
Max. 10 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Min. 1 kOhm, max. ±0.05 % of output range
Current outputs
Output current
0(4) to 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.2 %FS of the output range
Apparent ohmic resistance
Up to 600 Ohm
Power supply
Supply internal
Via backplane BS2xx
Current consumption internal
80 mA
Voltage range external
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption external
24 V
Typically 200 mA without external load
Galvanic isolation I/O to system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
AIO208
00020628-00
Universal analog input/output module; 8x analog In ±10 V ±20 mA Pt
TC; 16bit; analog Out ±10 V 20 mA; 14bit; configurable analog filter;
100 µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring; isolated
AIO208 CC
Auf Anfrage
Like AIO208; ColdClimate ( )
AIO216
00020627-00
Universal analog input/output module; 16x analog In ±10 V ±20 mA Pt
TC; 16bit; analog Out ±10 V 20 mA; 14bit; configurable analog filter;
100 µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring; isolated
AIO216 CC
00020631-00
Like AIO216; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories AIO208/216
Item
Item no.
Description
KS-AIO208 B+C
00023149-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (2 x KS 35/20; 1 x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strip and coding elements
KS-AIO216 B+C
00023148-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4 x KS 35/20; 1 x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strip and coding elements
47
Analog Input / Output Modules
Universal Input/Output Modules
AIO208/SI, AIO204/SI, AIO202/SI
All conventional analog signals are measured or
emitted by modules AIO208/SI, AIO204/SI and
AIO202/SI. AIO208/SI has 8 channels, AIO204/SI
has 4 channels and AIO202/SI 2 channels isolated
compactly and individually in one module. A wide
variety of sensors and actuators can be connected
using standard current (0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA)
and voltage range (±10 V to 100 mV) signal types.
A 16-bit resolution also enables measurements from
signals that do not make full use of the measuring
range (e.g. 0 to 5 V) at sufficiently higher resolution.
Temperatures are playing a major role in more and
more processes, which is why these modules support
Pt100 in 2-, 3-, and 4-wire measurement, as well as
all standard type thermoelements.
Item Item no.
AIO208/SI00023018-00
AIO204/SI00023017-00
AIO202/SI00023016-00
Input and output are available on every channel.
If, for example, the voltage input is used in most
instances, the free output as a secondary channel
can be used for the current output, for instance, so
that double the number of channels are available per
module.
This enables virtually all analog signal measuring
tasks to be covered easily in a single module instead
of using many different modules for each signal type.
An economical solution that simplifies logistics and
service as well as enabling the flexible use of reserve
resources.
Different modes can be combined and set easily
using a configuration wizard in the SolutionCenter
engineering tool.
•Resolution: input 16 bits, output 14 bits
•Filter adjustable from 4 kHz to 1 Hz per
channel
•All outputs overload, short circuit and external
voltage-proof
•Measuring range monitoring freely adjustable
•Error message on overload and
overtemperature, undervoltage in the supply
unit
•Galvanic isolation channel to channel and
system 500 V
48
•8 channels AIO208/SI, 4 channels AIO204/SI,
2 channels AIO202/SI
•Analog inputs or outputs
•Galvanically isolated by channel
•Modes that can be selected per channel:
•Analog voltage input ±10 V to 100 mV
•Analog current input 4 to 20 mA, ±20 mA
•Temperature sensor Pt elements as 2-,3-,4-wire
•Thermoelements type J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B
•Analog voltage output ±10 V
•Analog current output 0(4) to 20 mA
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO208/SI
AIO204/SI
AIO202/SI
Quantity
8 channels
4 channels
2 channels
Modes per channel
Analog input
Inputs/Outputs
Temperature measurement input for Pt elements and thermo couples
Analog output
SYNC signal
In
Analog input, temperature measurement
Out
Analog output
Analog inputs in general
Digital resolution
16-bit
Measuring range
±105 % of nominal range
Measuring range monitoring
Error interrupt/status message on undershoot or overshoot of the
nominal range
Measured value monitoring
Event interrupt/status message on undershoot or overshoot of an
­adjustable measuring range
Allowed common mode voltage
Max. ±1 V between primary and secondary channel
Refresh cycle time
100 µs standard
Cut-off frequency (3 dB)
4 kHz to 0.5 Hz adjustable channel by channel
Filtering slope
> 80 dB/decade
Voltage inputs
Input voltage
±10 V, ±1 V, ±100 mV nominal range
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.05 % of measuring range
Current inputs
Input current at -30 to +60 °C
±20 mA (0 to 20 mA) or 4 to 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Range ±20 mA:
max. ±0.1 % of measuring range
Range 4 to 20 mA: max. ±0.2 % of measuring range
Input impedance
Typ. 250 Ohm
Max. 300 Ohm
Shunt short-circuit proof
Up to +24 V
Interference voltage strength
±24 V
Temperature inputs PTC
Temperature inputs PTC
Pt100
Connection type
2-, 3- or 4-wire
Input impedance
> 100 kOhm
Temperature range
-100 to +800 °C
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Up to 300 °C ±0.15 %
Value of the LSB
0.1 K
49
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO208/SI
AIO204/SI
AIO202/SI
Temperature inputs
Temperature elements
Types J, K, T, N, E, R, S, B can be selected
Temperature
­ranges per type
J
-30 to +1200 °C
K
-30 to +1370 °C
T
-30 to +400 °C
N
-30 to +1300 °C
E
-30 to +1000 °C
R
-30 to +1768 °C
S
-30 to +1768 °C
B
+600 to +1820 °C
Ground
Up to ±3 V allowed common mode voltage
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.15 % of input current range
(T max ± 0.3 %; B, S, R max ±0.25 %)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K; measured values in 1/10 Kelvin
Analog outputs in general
Digital resolution
14-bit
Output signal range
±105 % nominal range
Voltage outputs
Output voltage
±10 V
Output current
Max. 10 mA (current-limited)
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Min. 1 kOhm, max. ±0.05 % of the output range
Current outputs
Output current
0(4) to 20 mA
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.2 % of the output range
Apparent ohmic resistance
Up to 600 Ohm
Power supply
Supply internal
50
Via backplane BS2xx
Current consumption internal
110 mA
Voltage range external
18 to 30 VDC
100 mA
95 mA
160 mA
95 mA
Current consumption external 24 V
310 mA
Galvanic isolation system
500 V
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO20x/SI
Item
Item no.
Description
AIO208/SI
00023018-00
Universal analog input/output module; 8x analog In ±10V ±20mA
Pt TC; 16bit; analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; configurable analog
filter; 100µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring;
isolated
AIO204/SI
00023017-00
Universal analog input/output module; 4x analog In ±10V ±20mA
Pt TC; 16bit; analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; configurable analog
filter; 100µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring;
isolated
AIO202/SI
00023016-00
Universal analog input/output module; 2x analog In ±10V ±20mA
Pt TC; 16bit; analog Out ±10V 20mA; 14bit; configurable analog
filter; 100µs sample and refresh time; threshold monitoring;
isolated
Accessories AIO20x/SI
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-AIO208/SI B+C
00025859-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (8x KZ 35/05) with labeling strip
KZ-AIO204/SI B+C
00024832-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (4x KZ 35/05) with labeling strip
KZ-AIO202/SI B+C
00024831-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (2x KZ 35/05) with labeling strip
51
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Input Modules
AI202/SI, AI204/SI
The analog input module AI20x / SI offers two or
four high resolution analog 16 bit current input
channels. Single channel isolation, high immunity
to interference, as well as integrated signal filtering
(delta-sigma converter) make this module particularly
interesting for process technology.
•2 or 4 analog inputs
•Input current 0 to 20 mA
•Input impedance 75 Ω
•Resolution: 16 bit
•Refresh cycle time 250 ms / channel
•Galvanic isolation of channels
•Galvanic isolation from system
•Monitoring of internal voltages
Item
Item no.
AI202/SI00012245-10
AI204/SI00012245-00
52
Analog Input / Output Modules
AI202/SI, AI204/SI
Current inputs
Quantity
2 (AI202 / SI) or 4 (AI204 / SI)
Input current range
0 to 20 mA
Input impedance
75 Ω
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
509 nA (Vref = 2.5 V to 75 Ω)
Cross-talk attenuation
> 100 dB between the channels
Signal suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz
> 60 dB
Error at 25 °C
±0,1%
Error at the entire temperature range
±0.5 %
Sample frequency
4 measurements per second / channel
Input filter
fg (3dB) delay time 1ms, Low-pass filter: 1st order
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
AI202/SI
00012245-10
Analog input module; 2x In 20mA; 16bit; 0.1%; single
isolated
AI204/SI
00012245-00
Analog input module; 4x In 20mA; 16bit; 0.1%; single
isolated
Accessories AI202/SI, AI204/SI
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-AI202/SI B+C
00012354-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (2x SS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SS-AI204/SI B+C
00012353-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KS-AI204/SI B+C
00024539-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
53
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Input Modules
AI208/SI
The compact analog input module AI208/SI offers
eight individual galvanically isolated current
inputs. The measuring range is +/- 24.6 mA and
covers standards 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA and
-20 to +20 mA.
Via adjustable measuring range limits errors, such as
short circuit, sensor defect or wire break can be easily
detected. Threshold values that can be configured
within the measuring range permit monitoring of
the process factor without having to sample it. The
shunt is protected against short circuit of the 24 V
supply, which can easily occur with the sensor wiring.
Robustness and above-average diagnostic capabilities
are the outstanding characteristics of this input
module.
•8 analog inputs
•Input current 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA,
-20 to +20 mA
•Input impedance approx. 200 Ω
•Resolution: 13 to 16 bit
•Adjustable input filter 2.5 kHz to 2.5 Hz
Item
Item no.
AI208/SI00017772-00
AI208/SI CC 00018843-00
54
Analog Input / Output Modules
AI208/SI
Current inputs
Quantity
8
Input current range
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Measuring range
±24.6 mA
Input impedance
Normally 200 Ω
Digital resolution
13 bit (2.5 kHz filter) to 16 bit (10 Hz filter)
Value of the LSB
751,202 nA
Cross-talk attenuation
> 80 dB between the channels
Signal suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz
75 dB / 80 dB at 2.5 Hz filter
Sample frequency
Maximum 10 kHz (filter 2.5 kHz)
Filtering slope
From cutoff frequency (3 dB) with 60 dB/decade
Input filter
Adjustable: 2.5 kHz, 1.2 kHz, 640 Hz,
320 Hz, 160 Hz, 80 Hz, 40 Hz, 20 Hz, 10 Hz, 5 Hz, 2.5 Hz
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
ColdClimate( )
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without
condensation
5 to 95 % with
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
AI208/SI
00017772-00
Analog input module 8x IN; ±20 mA /13 .. 16bit; 0.1%;
sample time configurable up to 100µs; threshold; single
isolated
AI208/SI CC
00018843-00
Like AI208/SI; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories AI208/SI
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-AI208/SI B+C*
00019091-00
Terminal set cage clamp (8x KZ 35/03) with labeling strip and
coding elements  not for new developments
KS-AI208/SI B+C
00027409-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (8x KS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-AI208/SI B+C
00019866-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (8x SS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
* Article will be discontinued and replaced by KS-AI208/SI B+C (00027409-00)
55
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Input Modules
AI204/x
The analog input module AI204/x offers two or
four high-resolution 16 bit analog input channels
depending on the model. The extraordinarily high
accuracy with integrated temperature calibration
predestine this unit for demanding measurement
applications for industrial processes.
•1, 2, or 4 analog inputs
•Input voltage -10 to +10 V
•Resolution: 16 bit
•Sample time from 20 µs
•Inputs can be synchronized
•Galvanic isolation of channels
•Galvanic isolation from system
•Temperature calibration
•Connection possibility differential
•Internal voltage generation is monitored
Item
Item no.
AI204/100010693-20
AI204/200010693-10
AI204/400010693-00
56
Analog Input / Output Modules
AI204/x
Voltage inputs
Quantity
1, 2 or 4
Input voltage
±10 V
Input impedance
>33 kΩ
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
305 µV
Allowed common mode voltage
Max. ±2 V
Cross-talk attenuation
>66 dB
Cross-talk attenuation
>120 dB between the channels
Error at 25 °C
±1mV (±0.005 %)
Error at the entire temperature range
±1mV (±0.005 %)
Sample time
20 / 160 / 320 / 640 µs at
1- / 8- / 16- / 32-times sampling
Temperature calibration
Normally 500 µs per calibration
Input filter
0.33 kHz / 4 kHz selectable by software
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
AI204/1
00010693-20
Analog input module; 1x In ±10V; 16bit; high precision 0.005 %;
20µs sampling time; digital averaging; single isolated
AI204/2
00010693-10
Analog input module; 2x In ±10V; 16bit; high precision 0.005 %;
20µs sampling time; digital averaging; single isolated
AI204/4
00010693-00
Analog input module; 4x In ±10V; 16bit; high precision 0.005 %;
20µs sampling time; digital averaging; single isolated
Accessories AI204/x
Item
Item no.
Description
KS-AI204/4 B+C
00013156-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/04) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-AI204/4 B+C
00012008-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/04) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KS-AI204/2 B+C
00013155-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (2x KS 35/04) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SS-AI204/2 B+C
00011979-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (2x SS 35/04) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KZ-AI204/1 B
00012053-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp small (1x KZ 35/04) with labeling
strip
57
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Output Module
AO202
The analog output module AO202 offers two
high-precision 16 bit analog output channels.
•2 analog outputs
•Output voltage -10 to +10 V
•Resolution: 16 bit
•Outputs can be synchronized
•Galvanic isolation of channels
•Galvanic isolation from system
•Differential connection
•Short circuit proof
•Monitoring of internal power supply
Item
Item no.
AO20200010692-00
AO202
Voltage outputs
Quantity
2
Output voltage
±10 V
Output impedance
output is corrected to ±2 mA
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
305 µV
Cross-talk attenuation
>120 dB between the channels
Error at 25 °C
±2.5 mV (±0.0125 %)
Error in the entire temperature range
±12 mV (±0.06%)
Refresh cycle time
10 µs per channel
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
AO202
00010692-00
Analog output module; 2x Out ±10V; 16bit; high p
­ recision
0.0125%; 10µs refresh cycle; single isolated
Accessories AO202
58
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-AO202 B+C
00011980-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (2x KZ 35/04) with labeling strip
and coding elements
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Output Modules
AO202/SI, AO204/SI
The analog input module AO20x / SI
offers two or four high resolution analog
16 bit current output channels.
•2 or 4 analog outputs
•Output current 0 to 20 mA
•Resolution: 16 bit
•Galvanic isolation of channels
•Galvanic isolation from system
•Short circuit proof outputs
Item
Item no.
AO202/SI00012246-10
AO204/SI00012246-00
AO202/SI, AO204/SI
Analog outputs
Quantity
2 (AO202/SI) or 4 (AO204/SI)
Output current
0 to 20 mA
Apparent ohmic resistance
Up to 500 Ω
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
305 nA
Cross-talk attenuation
>100 dB between the channels (50 to 60 Hz)
Error at 25 °C
±0,2 %
Error at the entire temperature
range
±0,6 %
Setting time of 0.1 % of the output
current range
Max. 3 ms
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
AO202/SI
00012246-10
Analog output module; 2x Out 20mA; 16bit; 0.2%; single isolated
AO204/SI
00012246-00
Analog output module; 4x Out 20mA; 16bit; 0.2%; single isolated
Accessories AO202/SI, AO204/SI
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-AO202/SI B+C
00012378-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (2x SS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SS-AO204/SI B+C
00012379-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
KS-AO204/SI B+C
00024539-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
59
Analog Input / Output Modules
Analog Input/Output Modules
AIO288/x
The analog input/output module AIO288/x
offers eight analog input channels as well as eight
analog output channels.
•8 analog inputs
•8 analog outputs
•Connection possibility single-ended
or differential
•Power supply for up to 4 potentiometers
•Temperature inputs for up to
4 Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
•2-wire or 4-wire inputs for
Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
•Wire break detection for the inputs (for
voltage and temperature)
•Short circuit proof outputs
•Overload detection for
potentiometer power supplies
•Monitoring of the external
supply voltage
Item
Item no.
AIO28800014470-00
AIO288 CC 00016157-00
AIO288/100014470-10
AIO288/x
Voltage inputs
60
Quantity
Max. 8
Input voltage
±1 V or ±10 V
Input impedance
> 100 kΩ
Digital resolution
14 bit
Allowed common mode
voltage
Max. ±1 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.05 % of input voltage range
Input cutoff frequency
1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Cross-talk attenuation
> 60 dB
Sample time
200 µs
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO288/x
Voltage outputs
Quantity
Max. 8
Output voltage
±10 V
Digital resolution
14 bit
Allowed common mode voltage
Max. ±1 V
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.025 % of output voltage range
Settling time of 1 % of the
output current range
Max. 400 µs
Cross-talk attenuation
> 60 dB
Refresh cycle time
200 µs
Current inputs
Quantity
Max. 8
Input current
0 to 20 mA
Input impedance
243 Ω
Digital resolution
14 bit
Max. input current
35 mA (destruction limit)
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.1 % of input current range
Input cutoff frequency
1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Sample time
200 µs
Temperature inputs
Temperature inputs
Pt100, Pt1000 selectable
Quantity
Max. 4
Connection type
2- or 4-wire, optional
Temperature range
-100 to +500 °C
Input impedance
> 100 kΩ
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Max. ±0.1 % of input current range
Input cutoff frequency
1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K
Sample time
200 µs
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Potentiometer power supply
Quantity
Max. 4
Voltage range
±10 V
Error at 25 °C
Max. ±100 mV
Load
Max. 40 mA
External power supply
Voltage range 18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption 230 mA at +5 VDC
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V (only AIO288)
61
Analog Input / Output Modules
AIO288/x
Ambient conditions
ColdClimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
5 to 95 % with
condensation
Order codes
AIO288
00014470-00
Analog input/output module; 8x In ±10V ±1V 20mA 4x Pt100/1000;
14bit; 0.1%; 200µs sample time; 8x Out ±10V; 4x Poti supply;
­isolated
AIO288 CC
00016157-00
Like AIO288; ColdClimate ( )
AIO288/1
00014470-10
Analog input/output module; 8x In ±10V ±1V 20mA 4x Pt100/1000;
14bit; 0.1%; 200µs sample time; 8x Out ±10V; 4x Poti supply; NOT
isolated
Accessories AIO288/x
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-AIO288 B+C
00012007-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/19; 1x KZ 51/03) with
labeling strip and coding elements
SV-AIO288 B+C
00010864-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (4x SS 35/19; 1x SV 51/03)
with labeling strip and coding elements
KS-AIO288 B+C*
00012598-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/19; 1x KZ 51/03) with
labeling strip and coding elements  not for new developments
KZ-AIO288 B+C
00026125-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (4x KZ 35/19; 1x KZ 51/03) with
labeling strip and coding elements
* Item is discontinued and replaced by KZ-AIO288 B+C (00026125-00).
62
Analog Input / Output Modules
Temperature Input Module
PTAI216
The temperature recording module PTAI216 has four
analog input channels and 12 inputs for Pt100/Pt1000
sensors.
•4 analog inputs ±10 V / ±1 V / 0 to 20 mA
•12 inputs for Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
•Single-ended or differential inputs
for analog signals
•2-wire inputs for Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
•Resolution 14 bit (AI) / 12 bit (Pt100/Pt1000)
•Sample time 2.5 ms (AI) / 480 ms (Pt100/Pt1000)
•Channels galvanically isolated from system
•wire break detection for the inputs
•Monitoring of the external power
supply
Item
Item no.
PTAI21600010708-00
PTAI216 CC
00017456-00
63
Analog Input / Output Modules
PTAI216
Voltage inputs
Quantity
Max. 4
Input type
Single-ended or differential
Input voltage
±1 V or ±10 V
Input impedance
> 33 kΩ
Input filter
170 Hz (low pass 1st order)
Digital resolution
14 bit
Allowed common mode voltage
Max. ±1 V
Error at operating temperature
±1 V: 25 °C  ±0.5 %
±1 V: 0 bis +60 °C  ±0.5 %
±1 V: -30 bis +60 °C  ±0.5 %
±10 V: 25 °C  ±0.1 %
±10 V: 0 bis +60 °C  ±0.15 %
±10 V: -30 bis +60 °C  ±0.3 %
Cross-talk attenuation
> 60 dB
Sample time
2.5 ms
Current inputs
Quantity
Max. 4
Input current
0 to 20 mA
Input impedance
243 Ω
Digital resolution
14 bit
Max. input current
35 mA (destruction limit)
Error at operating temperature
0 bis 20 mA: 25 °C  ±0.2 %*
0 bis 20 mA: 0 bis +60 °C  ±0.2 %*
0 bis 20 mA: -30 bis +60 °C  ±0.3 %*
Sample time
2.5 ms
Pt100/Pt1000* inputs
Quantity
12
Input type
2-wire technology
Temperature range
-100 to +300 °C
Constant current via sensor
Pt100: 3 mA
Pt1000: 0.3 mA
Digital resolution
12 bit
Value of the LSB
0.1 K
Averaging
Over 16 values per 480 ms
External power supply
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption internal
Normally 70 mA at 24 VDC
* only applies for DC in the input current range 20 mA
64
Analog Input / Output Modules
PTAI216
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
5 to 95 % with
condensation
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
PTAI216
00010708-00
Temp.-recording module; 12x Pt100/1000; 4x In ±10V ±1V 20mA;
14bit; 0.25 %; isolated
PTAI216 CC
00017456-00
Like PTAI216; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories PTAI216
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-PTAI216 B+C
00012010-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x KZ 51/02; 4x SS 35/14) with
labeling strip and coding elements
SV-PTAI216 B+C
00010870-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (1x SV 51/02; 4x SS 35/14)
with labeling strip and coding elements
KS-PTAI216 B+C*
00012599-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (1x KZ 51/02; 4x KS 35/14) with
labeling strip and coding elements  not for new developments
KZ-PTAI216 B+C
00026126-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 4x KZ 35/14) with
labeling strip and coding elements
* Item is discontinued and replaced by KZ-AIO288 B+C (00026126-00).
65
Analog Input / Output Modules
Temperature Input Modules
TI214/x
The temperature recording modules TI214/x provide
14 temperature measuring channels in a single
module width. With the TI214 either Pt100/Pt1000
sensors in 2 and 3 wire technology or type J or K
thermocouples can be connected to each measuring
channel. The TI214/2 module allows for the
connection of type N or S thermocouples. The sensor
type can be individually selected for each channel. In
this way, the most effective and cost-efficient solution
can be implemented for the application.
The average determination of the measured
value can be set between 16 fold and 64 fold
for easy an reliable interference suppression.
With the module version TI214 the temperature of
the switching cabinet can be measured on the same
module with an inexpensive Pt100 sensor, while for
example the temperature control systems are fitted
with thermocouples.
The new 3-wire measuring evaluation of the
Pt100/Pt1000 sensor compensates the voltage error
of both symmetrical cable runs and enables the
precision of complex 4-wire measuring technology
to be implemented in inexpensive 3-wire technology.
The Pt sensors can also be connected in simple 2-wire
technology and this is sufficient for many applications
with short measuring lines.
TI214/x
•Resolution 14 bit (16 bit measured value averaging)
•Averaging of measured values for interference
suppression
•Wire break detection the inputs
•Channels isolated against the system
•Monitoring of the external power supply
•Cold junction temperature compensated
TI214
•14 inputs for Pt100 / Pt1000 sensors as well as type
J or K thermocouples
•2-wire or 3-wire input for Pt100 / Pt1000 sensors
TI214/2
•14 inputs for thermocouplers type N or S
Item
Item no.
TI214 00014008-00
TI214/200014008-20
66
Analog Input / Output Modules
TI214 TI214/2
Quantity
14
14
Connection type Pt100/Pt1000
3-wire or 2-wire technology
-
Input filter
Low pass filter 1st order
cutoff frequency (3 dB) 17 kHz
Low pass filter 1st order
cutoff frequency (3 dB) 8Hz
Sensor types thermocouples
J or K in insulated or uninsulated
design in accordance with
DIN IEC584 each input can be
programmed for different types
N or S in insulated or uninsulated
design in accordance with
DIN IEC584 each input can be
programmed for different types
Temperature range Pt100/Pt1000
-100 to +800 °C
-
Temperature range thermocouples
J/K: -30 to +1000 °C
N: -30 to +1300 °C
S: -30 to +1600 °C
Constant current Pt sensor
2 mA (Pt100), 200 µA (Pt1000)
-
Digital resolution
14 bits (16 bits representation with measured value averaging)
Value of the LSB
0.055 K (Pt100 / Pt1000)
0.062 K
(thermocouple -30 to +1000 °C)
0.08 K
(thermocouple N -30 to +1300 °C)
0.098 K
(thermocouple S -30 to +1600 °C)
Base accuracy
0.1 % of measuring range at
25 °C (Pt100 / Pt1000)*
0.15 % of measuring range at
+25 °C (thermocouples J /
K)**
0.15 % for type N and
0.25 % for type S of measuring
range at +25 °C (thermocouples
N / S)**
Conversion time
80 ms at 16 fold averaging
320 ms at 64 fold averaging
1 ms without averaging
80 ms at 16 fold averaging
320 ms at 64 fold averaging
Thermocouples linearization
Polynomial to IEC60584 part 1,
for sensor types J or K
Polynomial to IEC60584 part 1,
for sensor types N or S
Temperature measuring inputs
Error detection
Wire break
Interference voltage strength
-36 to +36 V
External power supply
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption internal
Normally 160 mA at + 24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
TI214
00014008-00
Temperature recording module; 14x thermocouple type J,K (FeCo/
NiCrNi); Pt100/1000; 14bit; 0.15%; isolated
TI214/2
00014008-20
Temp.-recording module; 14x thermocouple type N,S; 14 bit; 0.15%;
isolated
* only applies for 3-conductor technology
** without consideration of cold point compensation
67
Analog Input / Output Modules
Accessories TI214/x
68
Item
Item no.
Description
KS-TI214 B+C
00014432-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (1x KZ 51/02; 2x KS 35/16;
2x KS 35/12) with labeling strip and coding elements
SS-TI214 B+C
00014395-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x SS 51/02; 2x SS 35/16;
2x SS 35/12) with labeling strip and coding elements
Analog Input / Output Modules
Strain Gauge
Input Module DMS202
The strain gauge input module DMS202 is a twochannel, micro controller operated measuring module
to read quickly changing strain gauge signals up
approx. 1 kHz with a sample time of only 12.5 µs.
•2 strain gauge measurement inputs
•High-quality plug-in connector
•2 analog measurement outputs
•Automatic measuring range selection
(input)
•Wire break detection on the measurement inputs
•Monitoring of the external supply voltage
Item
Item no.
DMS20200009884-00
69
Analog Input / Output Modules
DMS202
Bridge supply
Carrier frequency
5 kHz ±2 %
Amplitude
4 VRMS ±2 %
Synchronization of the carrier frequency
Optional
Synchronization range
5 kHz ±2 %
Strain gauge amplifier input
Input resistance
> 5 MΩ
Desired signal bandwidth
1 kHz
Resolution
12 bit
Max. input common mode voltage
10 V (no overdrive)
CMRR (0 to 5 kHz)
> 80 dB
Wire break monitoring
Yes, error message
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Monitoring of the ext. voltage
Yes, power-fail signal
Conversion time
12.5 µs for one channel, 25 μs for two-channel operation
Measurement range selection
2.0 / 4.0 / 8.0 / 16.0 mV or Auto Range
Measurement range switchover
Automatic or via software
Measurement outputs
Output voltage
0 to 10 V
Internal resistance
<2Ω
Load resistor
> 2.5 kΩ
Special functions
Peak value capture
Electronic capacity comparison
Carrier frequency synchronization
External power supply
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption external
100 mA at 24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order code
DMS202
00009884-00
Strain gauge measurement, 2x full bridge; ±2/4/8/16mV;
25µs sampling time; 5 kHz carrier frequency, 12bit; isolated
Accessories DMS202
70
Item
Item no.
Description
S-DMS/G
00008472-00
Lemo Connector directly
S-DMS/W
00010134-00
Lemo Connector angle
KZ-DMS202 B
00012054-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/03) with
labeling strip
Analog Input / Output Modules
71
Function Modules
Flexibility and precision in soft motion control
As the leading provider in the field of soft
motion control, Bachmann electronic offers
a flexible line of modules for directly wired
motion control.
Interface). The possibility of controlling the
drives with analog signals (voltage), step
motor outputs or PWM output channels allows
­flexible configuration.
Bachmann modules cover all types of
data acquisition, from fast pulse and
incremental encoder cards with bandwidths
up to 8 MHz to SSI (Serial Synchronous
All encoder interface modules of the M1
system offer precise synchronizability as
well as comprehensive functional support
for the programmer.
Counter Modules
CNT204 / x
Features
Number of counter inputs: 4
(for single-channel pulse encoders, zero initiators,
triggers)
Number of incremental encoders: 2 input channels
(HTL and / or RS422)
Encoder power supply direct from the module via the
connectors
Inputs can be synchronized
Encoder Interface Modules
ISI222 / x
Features
Input channels for incremental or SSI encoder: 2
Output channels analog: 2 (±10 VDC)
Input channels digital: 4 (reference, trigger)
Encoder power supply directly from the module via
the connectors
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Max. input frequency: 1 MHz / 8 MHz
72
Function Modules
Pulse Width Modulation
Module PWM202
Features
Pulse width modulated output channels: 2
18 to 48 VDC external supply TTL
Integrated current control
Output current: to 2 A
Resolution: 10 / 16 bit
Monitoring of the load current
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Axis Controller Module
ACR222 / 2
Features
Interfaces for stepping motor output stages up to
150 kHz: 2
Interfaces for incremental encoders to 1 MHz: 2
Encoder power supply direct from the module via
the
connectors
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Linear or sine shaped acceleration profiles
External set or integrated profiles
73
Function Modules
Counter Modules CNT204/x
The counter module CNT204/x contains four counters
for single line pulse generators. Two of the channels
can optionally be used as inputs for incremental
encoders.
•4 counter inputs for single line pulse generators
•Status indication: LED (green) per counter/
initiator input
•2 input channels for incremental encoders
•Encoder power supply directly from the module via
the connectors
•Inputs can be synchronized
•Monitoring of all supply voltages
•Period measurement with 42 ns resolution
•Differential measurement (phase shift between C1
and C3 or C2 and C4) with 42 ns resolution
Item Item no.
CNT204/ H
00010709-10
CNT204/H CC 00016407-10
CNT204/R00010709-20
74
Function Modules
CNT204/x
Incremental encoder inputs
Quantity
2
Counter resolution
32 bit
Input signals
A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Signal evaluation
1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
Max. input frequency
1 MHz (RS422) / 300 kHz (HTL)
Input filter
185 kHz to 6 MHz adjustable, default 6 MHz
Counter inputs
Quantity
4 (2 if INC inputs are used)
Counter resolution
32 bit
max. input frequency
20 kHz
min. pulse length
25 µs
Input filter
183 Hz to 46.88 kHz adjustable, default off (fg=100 kHz)
Encoder power supply
+5 V
+24 V
voltage
+5 V
Uext -1 V
Tolerance
±5 %
like Uext
max. current / encoder
200 mA
300 mA
Ripple
< 150 mVss
like Uext
Short circuit proof
Yes, permanent
Yes, permanent
External power supply
Power supply
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption internal
40 mA at 24 V + 1.2x current consumption of the encoders
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
CNT204/H
00010709-10
Counter module; 2x INC HTL 300kHz + 2x counter HTL 20kHz oder
4x counter HTL 20kHz; HTL=24V; 32bit; INC A,A/B/N; position; phase
­difference; period; trigger; isolated
CNT204/H CC
00016407-10
Like CNT204/H; ColdClimate ( )
CNT204/R
00010709-20
Counter module; 2x INC RS422 1MHz + 2x counter HTL 20kHz oder
4x counter HTL 20kHz; HTL=24V; 32bit; INC A,A/B/N; position; phase
­difference; period; trigger; isolated
Accessories CNT204/x
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-CNT204 B
00012057-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strip
SV-CNT204 B
00010869-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (1x SV 51/02; 1x SV 51/12)
with labeling strip
75
Function Modules
Positioning Modules ISI222/x
Especially designed for sophisticated motion control
applications the ISI222 module offers compact
equipment and optimum precision. Equipped for
the total control of two motion axes, the module
features a number of encoder interfaces for position
acquisition, analog outputs for the application of
manipulated variables, as well as digital inputs for the
initiator or trigger. Furthermore, due to the central
communication concept, all I / Os of the remaining
M1 system can also be incorporated into the motion
control (limit switches, etc.).
Input frequencies up to 8 MHz and the integrated
synchronization (IO-Bus-Sync) with the total system
allow highly dynamic and precise movements.
Beside the full compatibility to the well proven
controller modules M-SMC, M-CNC and M-SHAFT, also
the user own programs and individually designed
control tasks can utilize the extensive integrated
functions of the module simply via the known
standard interfaces (SVI, MIO). The extensive
integrated error monitoring with ongoing checking of
the encoder resolution identifies hard-to-see wiring
or ESD problems and allows the application especially
under difficult environmental conditions.
•2 input channels for incremental and SSI
encoders
•full 32 bit counter
•2 analog outputs (14 bit)
•4 fast digital input channels for initiator and trigger
•Position measurement / position storage can be
initiated via triggers
•Virtual for use in applications: zero pulse, speed,
etc.
•Synchronization via SYNC / PreSYNC
•Encoder supply via module
•Monitoring of the encoder voltage
•Wire break monitoring (encoder)
Item Item no.
ISI22200013737-00
ISI222 CC
00016421-00
ISI222 / 8
00014127-00
76
Function Modules
ISI222 / x
Encoder interface module
Quantity
2
Counter resolution
32 bit
Input signals
A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Signal evaluation
1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
Input frequency
Max. 1 MHz (ISI222), max. 8 MHz (ISI222 / 8)
Synchronization
By means of SYNC signal
Modes
Reference value monitoring
Conditional storage of counter value
Conditional load / rest of counter value
Speed measurement
Error detection
Wire break, encoder resolution monitoring
Galvanic isolation of channels* 500 V
SSI encoder interface*
Quantity
2
Data word length
programmable up to 32 bits
Input signals
D-, D+
Output signals
T-, T+
Data format
Graycode and binary format, others can be evaluated by SW
Transfer clock rate
100 kHz to 2 MHz
Synchronization
Via preSYNC function
Encoder power supply
Output voltage ranges
+5 V and +15 V selectable with jumper, 24 V looped through
Output voltage
+5 V
+15 V
-1 V
Tolerance
±5 %
±3 %
like Uext
max. current / encoder
250 mA
100 mA
300 mA
Yes, permanent
Yes, permanent (PTC)
Short circuit proof
Yes, permanent
Ripple
< 150 mVss at +5 V and +15 V
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Analog outputs
Quantity
2
Output voltage
±10 V
Resolution
14 bit
Output current
Max. ±2 mA
Conversion time
<40 µs
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
0.025 %
Error at the entire
Temperature range
±0.1%
Setting time of 1% of the
output current range
Max. 500 µs
Error detection
Wire break
Short circuit proof
Yes, permanent
Synchronization
By means of SYNC signal
* only for ISI222
77
Function Modules
ISI222 / x
Digital inputs
Quantity
4 (2 INIT, 2 TRIG)
voltage
18 to 34 VDC
Input delay
30 µs default, filter adjustable
Acc. to IEC 61131
Type 1
Function
INIT: initiator, trigger for strobe register, digital input
TRIG: trigger for strobe register, digital input
Connection type
Connection for analog and
digital I / O
Phoenix Contact MINICOMBICON connector RM 3.5 with flange
Connection type
Screw clamp, spring tension clamp
plug codable, labeling by channels
Operating conditions
Supply voltage
18 to 34 VDC
Mounting
Mountable on backplane BS2xx
Mounting position
Horizontal (vertical at -20 to +55 °C
operating temperature)
Horizontal (vertical at -30 to +55 °C
operating temperature)
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
ISI222
00013737-00
Positioning module; 2x In INC/SSI; 1MHz; 32bit; RS422 level; INC A,
A/B/N; position; gate time; period; velocity; encoder supply 5V / 15V /
24V; 2x Out ±10V; 14bit; 0.025 %; 40µs; synchronized; PreSYNC; 4x DI
24V; trigger; homing
ISI222 CC
00016421-00
Like ISI222; ColdClimate ( )
ISI222 / 8
00014127-00
Positioning module; 2x In INC; 8MHz; 32bit; RS422 level; INC A, A/B/N;
position; gate time; period; velocity; encoder supply 5V / 15V / 24V; 2x Out
±10V; 14bit; 0.025 %; 40µs; synchronized; PreSYNC; 4x DI 24V; trigger;
homing; SSI-Encoder not supported
Accessories ISI222/x
78
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-ISI222 B
00014277-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/06; 1x
KZ 35/07; 1x KZ 35/02) with labeling strip
KZ-ISI222 B+D
00014277-70
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/06; 1x
KZ 35/07; 1x KZ 35/02) with labeling strip + DSUB-Connector
Function Modules
Pulse Width Modulation Module
PWM202
The pulse width modulation module PWM202 has two
power outputs for direct activation of inductive or
ohmic loads, such as DC motors, immersion coils, etc.
with pulse width modulated signals.
•2 pulse-width modulated output channels
•2 shielded DSub connectors for output channels
•Status indication: LED (green) per output
•Choice of high-power or TTL output level
•Monitoring of the load current
•Monitoring of the external supply voltage
•Monitoring of the internal temperature
Item Item no.
PWM20200011056-00
79
Function Modules
PWM202
Outputs
Quantity
2
State indicating LEDs
RDY yellow, OUT-1 / OUT-2 green
Output voltage
18 to 48 V (= Uexternal) or TTL level
Output current
0 to 2 A at f ≤ 40 kHz and Uout ≤ 48 V (TA = +60 °C)
Frequency
Channel 1: 3 Hz to 40 kHz adjustable
Channel 2: 155 Hz to 40 kHz adjustable
Duty cycle
0 to 100 % individually adjustable for each channel
Resolution channel 1
16 bit, edge aligned or center aligned
Resolution channel 2
10 bit, edge aligned
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Load resistor
Normally 20 Ω
External power supply
Voltage range
18 to 48 VDC
Power consumption
Max. 10 W + load
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Monitoring
External power supply
Yes, power-fail signal + interrupt
Overvoltage
Yes
Undervoltage
Yes
Overcurrent (channel)
Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order code
PWM202
00011056-00
Pulse width modulation module; 2 channels each 2A/48V or TTL;
actuator or current regulation; isolated
Accessories PWM202
80
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
Function Modules
Axis Controller Module ACR222/2
The axis controller module ACR222/2 is a encoder
interface module to operate one / two (micro) stepping
motor output stages with stepper frequencies of up to
150 kHz.
•2 interfaces for stepping motor output stages
to 150 kHz
•2 interfaces for incremental encoders up to 1 MHz
•Encoder power supply directly from the module via
the connectors
•Inputs for home, abort and
2 limit switches per channel
•Monitoring of the external supply voltage
2
•Linear, sine or parabolic acceleration
•Two-step linear speed profiles
Item ACR222 / 2
Item no.
00009928-10
81
Function Modules
ACR222/2
Encoder interface
Counter resolution
24 bit
Counter modes
1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation
Encoder frequency
Max. 1 MHz
Inputs
HEDL (HP / AVAGO interface) / RS422
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Encoder power supply
+5 V or +15 V selectable with jumper
Motor controller interface
Stepper frequency
Max. 150 kHz
Number of steps (range)
1 to 16 777 215
Acceleration type
Linear, sin2- or parabolic
Acceleration time / braking time
8 ms to 131 s
Output voltage
Low: 0 to 2 V, high: 3 to 34 V, Imax = 10 mA
Input voltage
Low: 0 to 3 V, high: 4 to 30 V
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption internal
Normally 400 mA at 24 VDC + Σ current consumption of
the encoders and sensors
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order code
ACR222 / 2
00009928-10
Stepper motor module; 2x Out 150kHz; 2x In INC; 1MHz;
RS422; 8x DI 24V; acceleration modes linear/sine²/
parable; without power amplifier; encoder supply 5/15V
Accessories ACR222/2
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-ACR222 B
00012056-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/10) with
labeling strip
maximum frequency [kHz]
Start ramp
[ms]
maximum frequency [kHz]
breaking ramp
[ms]
Start ramp
[ms]
middle frequency [kHz]
breaking ramp
[ms]
position
or SW-trigger
82
Function Modules
83
Grid Measurement Module
Safety and efficiency of the electrical energy supply
The safety and efficiency of the electrical
energy supply are placing increasing
demands on the generator units,
transmission systems and consumers. A
new generation of systems for measuring,
monitoring and protection provides
an essential technical basis. Our grid
modules supply the latest state-of-the-art
technology as a fully integrated solution in
the automation units of the M200 system.
This provides modular expansion capability,
data storage and communication over
several fieldbus and telecontrol interfaces
that are simple and affordable.
High resolution and fast acquisition of all
grid variables forms the indispensable basis
of all grid modules. The integrated energy
metering simplifies handling in engineering
and operation. In order to ensure network
stability, generator units must be able to
guarantee a defined response according
to the relevant grid codes. Faults in the
grid or in the plant must lead to defined
responses such as the provision of control
Grid Measurement, Protection and
Synchronization Module GSP274
Features
Measures current, voltage, frequency, power and
power quality
Synchronism-check relay
Monitoring functions to ensure safe generator
operations
Controls two circuit breakers
Integrated fault recorder
Provides grid measurement simulation
Integrated sequence of events recorder
4Q energy counter
Grid Measurement and Protection
Module GMP232
Features
Measures current, voltage, frequency, power and
power quality
Input voltage up to 690 VL-L, RMS
Numerous monitoring functions
Integrated fault recorder
Sequence of events recorder with real time stamp
Two integrated relays
Grid measurement simulation
Monitoring functions are independent of PLC status
84
Grid Measurement Module
power or grid disconnection. The GSP274
and GMP232 module series offer for this
configurable protection and monitoring
functions in accordance with the latest
standards. The integrated harmonics analysis
function deals with the problems of power
quality caused by increasingly larger power
electronic components. Precise, time-stamped
event logging and integrated real-time data
recorders provide a convenient basis for
commissioning or fault analysis. Furthermore,
the GSP274 modules also provide a
synchronization unit for the automatic grid
coupling of generators. GM260 modules
impress with their particularly compact
design and simple handling for consumption
optimization and energy monitoring.
Grid Measurement Module
GM260
Features
Current, voltage, frequency and grid measurement
Remanent four-quadrant power counter
Rated voltage up to 480 VL-L, RMS
Robust and reliable hardware
85
Grid Measurement Module
Grid Measurement, Protection and
Synchronization Module GSP274
The GSP274 enables the safe, reliable and automatic
synchronization of generator units to the power
supply grid. It also provides a number of monitoring
functions for generator and grid protection. The
circuit-breakers are tripped by the module directly
via digital outputs and relays. Additional digital inputs
enable the monitoring of the relevant switching state.
The continuous monitoring of grid harmonics up to
the 50th harmonic can be used for direct responses
as well as for evaluating the power quality.
Item Item No.
GSP27400019756-00
GSP274 CC
00021759-00
The module is provided with an integrated realtime data recorder for the high-precision recording
of up to 16 measuring channels during protective
tripping or synchronization. Error events are recorded
continuously and stored permanently with a high
resolution time entry. The internal time base of the
module can be synchronized to an external time
source (e.g. IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol),
which supports the analysis of the data from spatially
separated measurement and protection devices.
The GSP274 is fully integrated in the Bachmann
SolutionCenter. Configurations can be created simply
and stored for later reuse. Both the measured
channel values and also the derived values are made
available directly in the user interface. Commissioning
and fault analysis are simplified with tabular, phasor
and time sequence displays. Event logs and recorded
time sequences can be exported in CSV respectively
COMTRADE format. The integrated simulation
function simplifies the configuration of protection and
monitoring functions.
•Measurement of current, voltage, frequency, power,
power factor, phase angle
•Measurement of grid harmonics up to the
50th (power quality)
•Synchronization monitoring / Synchro-check
•Monitoring/Protection functions for grid and
generator protection
•Controls two circuit-breakers
•Integrated real-time data recorder
•Integrated event logging
•4Q energy counter
•Measured value simulation
86
Grid Measurement Module
GSP274 - Grid Measurement
Current/voltage measurement
Measuring method
True RMS (incl. harmonics up to 50th)
Sampling rate
100 µs (10 kHz)
Measurement interval
50 Hz: 10 ms
60 Hz: 8.33 ms
Voltage measurement
Number
7 (generator: L1,L2,L3,N / grid: L1,L2,L3,N / busbar Lx,Ly)
Maximum rated voltage
UL-L, RMS: 480 Vrms UL-N, RMS: 277 Vrms
Voltage measuring range
UL-L, RMS: 17.3 – 718 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 10 – 415 Vrms
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.15 %
Continuous overload
UL-L, RMS: 680 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 390 Vrms
Short-term overload
(10x10 s, Interval 10 s)
UL-L, RMS: 1039 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 600 Vrms
Input impedance
> 2 MΩ
Current measurement
Number
4 (generator: 3x, Generator star/neutral-point: X 1)
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.08 %
Current transformer rated current
5 Arms
Current measuring range
0,01 to 9,8 Arms
Continuous overload
10 Arms
Short-term overload
(5x1 s, interval 300 s)
100 Arms
Apparent ohmic resistance
250 mVA
Frequency measurement
Rated frequency
50 / 60 Hz
Reference range
50 Hz: 35 to 65 Hz
60 Hz: 45 to 75 Hz
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.004 Hz
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
1-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Frequency change measurement
3-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 6.667 ms
60 Hz: 5.6 ms
Yes
Power measurement – active, reactive and apparent power
Measured values
P, Q, S per phase and as total
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.16 %
Calculation methods
DIN 40110-2, IEC61400-21
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
1-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
3-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 6.667 ms
60 Hz: 5.6 ms
* Accuracy values as a percentage of the nominal value at 25 °C and
reference conditions
87
Grid Measurement Module
GSP274 - Grid Measurement
Energy
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.16 %
Resolution
1 Ws
Active energy
Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Reactive energy
Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Type of memory
Nonvolatile (on the module)
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
1-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
3-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 6.667 ms
60 Hz: 5.6 ms
Power quality
Voltage
Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase
Current
Total demand distortion (TDD) per phase
Voltage harmonics
Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Current harmonics
Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Calculation method
EN 61000-4-7
Measurement interval
50 Hz: Calculation over 10 periods
60 Hz: Calculation over 12 periods
Digital inputs – Switch position indication
Number
4
Signal rated voltages
24 VDC
Input voltage range (H)
15 to 34 VDC
Input voltage range (L)
-34 to 5 VDC
Internal resistance
6.8 kOhm
Input delay (typically)
1 ms
Status display (LED)
Green
Digital outputs – Synchronization and alarming
Number
4
Signal rated voltages
24 VDC
Output voltage range (H)
18 to 34 VDC
Output current max.
0.5 A
Status display (LED)
Green
Digital relay outputs – Grid and system protection
88
Number/type
2 changeover contacts
Signal rated voltages
230 VAC, 48 VDC, 24 VDC (not mixed)
Output current max.
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Status display (LED)
Green
0.5
0.5
1A
2A
A at +24 VDC, DC-13
A at +24 VDC, resistive load
at 230 VAC, AC-15
at 230 VAC, resistive load
Grid Measurement Module
GSP274 Limit Value Monitoring
Figure 1: Available protection elements acc. to ANSI IEEE Std C37.2 – 2008 – overview
GSP274 - Limit Value Monitoring
Undervoltage/overvoltage (ANSI 27/59)
Resolution
0.1 % URated
Delay
0 to 65535 ms
Evaluated potentials
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral
Protection elements
U<
U<<
U>
U>>
Undervoltage warning
Undervoltage error
Overvoltage warning
Overvoltage error
Underfrequency/overfrequency (ANSI 81 U/O)
Delay
0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements
f<
f<<
f<<<
f>
f>>
f>>>
Underfrequency inner band
Underfrequency middle band
Underfrequency outer band
Overfrequency inner band
Overfrequency middle band
Overfrequency outer band
89
Grid Measurement Module
GSP274 - Limit Value Monitoring
Q(U)
Description
Voltage dependent directional reactive power protection. Used to
support the voltage during grid faults. Trips if all three evaluated
voltages are below a certain limit (e.g. 0.85 URated) and inductive
reactive power is drawn from the power supply grid.
Rate of change of frequency – ROCOF (ANSI 81 R)
Description
To calculate the frequency change over time the last 10 (50 Hz) or
12 (60 Hz) frequency samples are linearly interpolated.
Vector jump (ANSI 78)
Description
Monitoring of sudden phase shifts for detection of sudden load
changes or islanding.
Overcurrent (ANSI 50TD)
Resolution
0.1 % of IRated
Delay
0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements
I>
I>>
Overcurrent warning
Overcurrent error
Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring – FRT (Fault Ride Through)
Description
Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring is triggered if one of the
three evaluated voltages falls below a curve U(t) configured via
interpolation points. Up to 10 time/voltage pairs are available to
calculate a grid-code dependent limit curve.
Voltage asymmetry (ANSI 47)
Description
EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Current asymmetry (ANSI 46)
Description
EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Power quality monitoring – PQM
90
Description
Monitors voltage and current harmonics up to the 50th harmonic.
Trips if one of the pre-defined limits is exceeded (evaluation per
phase).
Protection elements
THD
TDD
H2 to H50
H2 to H50
Total harmonic distortion
Total demand distortion
Individual amplitudes of voltage harmonics
Individual amplitudes of current harmonics
Grid Measurement Module
GSP274 - Limit Value Monitoring
Alarm relays (ANSI 74)
Description
Two relays for actuating the circuit-breakers are provided for single
fault tolerant grid and system protection acc. to VDE-AR-4105. See
Digital relay outputs
Synchronization test relays (ANSI 25)
Description
Digital outputs control up to two circuit-breakers (2 DO per
circuit-breaker). They are activated by the GSP module if the
synchronization criteria are fulfilled. Pulse or continuous signal can
be configured for the actuation. See Digital outputs
Trip circuit monitoring – TCM
Description
Digital inputs are provided to monitor the actual switching state of
the circuit-breakers. See Digital inputs
Time synchronization
Basic principle
GSP module is synchronized automatically with the real-time clock of
the PLC-CPU. This can be synchronized via the network.
Physical medium
Ethernet (CPU)
Protocols
IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol)
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Event logging with real-time stamp – SER (sequence of events recorder)
Description
Monitoring events (configured alarm/protection functions) are stored
with a precise time reference when they occur.
Type of memory
nonvolatile (on the module)
Size
2048 entries
Real-time data recorder / digital fault recorder – DFR
Description
The GSP module is provided with 3 integrated real-time data
recorders. One data recorder can be used for recording the
synchronization sequence between the generator and busbar and one
for busbar and grid. Another data recorder can carry out recordings
when triggered by a monitoring function.
Number of channels
16 channels (measured values, digital I/O, calculated values)
Memory depth per channel
40,960 sampling values (4 s at 100 µs sampling rate)
Sampling rate
100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 800 µs, 1.6 ms
Pre-trigger
Yes
91
Grid Measurement Module
GSP274 - Module Properties
Electrical safety
Product standard
IEC/EN 61131-2
Generic standard
IEC/EN 60664-1
Pollution degree
2
Overvoltage category
3
Test surge voltage
4 kV
Protection class
2
Approvals / certificates
General
CE, UL/cUL, CCC
Medium voltage directive
BDEW:2008, FGW TR3:2011 (Rev. 23), FGW TR8:2011 (Rev. 6)
Low-voltage directive
VDE AR-N-4105:2011
Marine
GL, DNV, LR, ABS, BV
Others
ENA ER G59/3:2013, IEEE Std. C37.90:2005
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. air humidity, operation
5 to 95 % no condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. air humidity, storage
5 to 95 % no condensation
Maximum operating height
2,000 m above sea level (operation up to 4,500 m on request)
Power supply
Via backplane
+5 V | ≤ 316 mA, +15 V| ≤ 21 mA, -15 V | ≤ 23 mA
External on the module
24 V | 110 mA
System requirements
Hardware
All M1 CPU families apart from ME203, SK1 backplane not required
Software
M-Base 3.90 / SolutionCenter 1.90 or higher
Item
Item no.
Description
GSP274
00019756-00
Grid measurement, protection and synchronization module; 7x In
480V, 4x In 5A; 4x In 5A; 4x In 24V; 4x Out 24V; 2x Out Relay
24/48VDC, 230VAC; U-, I-, P-, Q-, f-measurement; 4Q-energy
­metering, integrated monitoring/protection functions, harmonic
analysis, integrated realtime data recorder (16 channels); sequence
of event log with realtime stamp
GSP274 CC
00021759-00
Like GSP274; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories GSP274
92
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-GSP274 B+C
00023426-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp/screw (1x KZ 51/03; 3x KZ 51/06;
2x SS76/10) with labeling strip and coding elements
Grid Measurement Module
Grid Measurement and Protection
Module GMP232
The GMP232 module enables the safe, reliable and
fast measuring of all relevant values for threephase electrical networks. It also provides a number
of monitoring functions for generator and grid
protection. Up to two circuit-breakers/trip circuits are
triggered by the module directly via relay outputs.
The continuous monitoring of grid harmonics up to
the 50th harmonic can be used for direct responses
as well as for evaluating the power quality.
Item Item No.
GMP23200017829-00
GMP232 CC
00019063-00
The module is provided with an integrated real-time
data recorder for the high-precision recording of up
to 16 measuring channels during alarm/protection
events. Error events are recorded continuously and
stored permanently with a high resolution time
entry. The internal time base of the module can
be synchronized to an external time source (e.g.
IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol), which supports
the analysis of the data from spatially separated
measurement and protection devices.
The GMP232 is fully integrated in the Bachmann
SolutionCenter. Configurations can be created simply
and stored for later reuse. Both the measured
channel values and also the derived values are made
available directly in the user interface. Commissioning
and fault analysis are simplified with tabular, phasor
and time sequence displays. Event logs and recorded
time sequences can be exported in CSV respectively
COMTRADE format. The integrated simulation
function simplifies the configuration of protection and
monitoring functions.
•Measurement of current, voltage, frequency, power,
power factor, phase angle
•Direct connection to input voltages
up to 690 VL-L, RMS
•Measurement of grid harmonics up to the 50th
(power quality)
•Monitoring/Protection functions for grid and
generator ­protection
•Direct relay outputs for circuit-breaker/trip circuits
•Integrated real-time data recorder
•Integrated event logging
•4Q energy counter
•Measured value simulation
93
Grid Measurement Module
GMP232 – Grid measurement
Current/voltage measurement
Measuring method
True RMS (incl. harmonics up to 50th)
Sampling rate
50 µs (20 kHz)
Measurement interval (RMS values)
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Individual sampling values
Intervals that can be called via function calls in the user application:
100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 800 µs, 1.6 ms (via block access)
Voltage measurement
Number
3
Maximum rated voltage
UL-L, RMS: 690 Vrms UL-N, RMS: 400 Vrms
Voltage measuring range
UL-L, RMS: 17.3 to 1030 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 10 to 595 Vrms
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.1 %
Continuous overload
UL-L, RMS: 1039 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 600 Vrms
Short-term overload(10x1 s, interval 10 s)
UL-L, RMS: 1385 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 800 Vrms
Input impedance
>2 MΩ
Current measurement
Number
3
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.15 %
Current transformer rated current
5 Arms
Current measuring range
0.01 to 5.07 Arms
Continuous overload
10 Arms
Short-term overload
(5x1 s, interval 300 s)
Apparent ohmic resistance
100 Arms
250 mVA
Frequency measurement
Rated frequency
50 / 60 Hz
Reference range
50 Hz: 35 to 65 Hz
60 Hz: 45 to 75 Hz
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.002 Hz
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
1-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Frequency change measurement
3-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 6.667 ms
60 Hz: 5.6 ms
Yes
Power measurement – active, reactive and apparent power
Measured values
P, Q, S per phase and as total
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.2 %
Calculation methods
DIN 40110-2, IEC61400-21
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
1-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
* Accuracy values as a percentage of the nominal value at 25 °C and
reference conditions
94
3-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 6.667 ms
60 Hz: 5.6 ms
Grid Measurement Module
GMP232 – Grid measurement
Energy
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.2 %
Resolution
1 Ws
Active energy
Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Reactive energy
Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Type of memory
Nonvolatile (on the module)
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
1-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
3-conductor systems:
50 Hz: 6.667 ms
60 Hz: 5.6 ms
Power quality
Voltage
Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase
Current
Total demand distortion (TDD) per phase
Voltage harmonics
Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Current harmonics
Amplitudes of harmonics up to 50th harmonic per phase
Calculation method
EN 61000-4-7
Measurement interval
50 Hz: Calculation over 10 periods
60 Hz: Calculation over 12 periods
Digital relay outputs
Number/type
2 changeover contacts
Signal rated voltages
230 VAC, 48 VDC, 24 VDC (not mixed)
Output current max.
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Status display (LED)
Green
0.5
0.5
1A
2A
A at +24 VDC, DC-13
A at +24 VDC, resistive load
at 230 VAC, AC-15
at 230 VAC, resistive load
95
Grid Measurement Module
GMP232 – Limit value monitoring
Undervoltage/overvoltage (ANSI 27/59)
Resolution
0.1 % URated
Delay
0 to 65535 ms
Evaluated potentials
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral
Protection elements
U<
U<<
U>
U>>
Undervoltage warning
Undervoltage error
Overvoltage warning
Overvoltage error
Underfrequency/overfrequency (ANSI 81 U/O)
Delay
0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements
f<
f<<
f<<<
f>
f>>
f>>>
Underfrequency inner band
Underfrequency middle band
Underfrequency outer band
Overfrequency inner band
Overfrequency middle band
Overfrequency outer band
Q(U)
Description
Voltage dependent directional reactive power protection. Used to
support the voltage during grid faults. Trips if all three evaluated
voltages are below a certain limit (e.g. 0.85 URated) and inductive
reactive power is drawn from the power supply grid.
Rate of change of frequency – ROCOF (ANSI 81 R)
Description
To calculate the frequency change over time the last 10 (50 Hz) or
12 (60 Hz) frequency samples are linearly interpolated.
Vector jump (ANSI 78)
Description
Monitoring of sudden phase shifts for detection of sudden load
changes or islanding.
Overcurrent (ANSI 50TD)
Resolution
0.1 % of IRated
Delay
0 to 65535 ms
Protection elements
I>
I>>
Overcurrent warning
Overcurrent error
Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring – FRT (Fault Ride Through)
Description
Time-dependent undervoltage monitoring is triggered if one of the
three evaluated voltages falls below a curve U(t) configured via
interpolation points. Up to 10 time/voltage pairs are available to
calculate a grid-code dependent limit curve.
Voltage asymmetry (ANSI 47)
Description
96
EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Grid Measurement Module
GMP232 – Limit value monitoring
Current asymmetry (ANSI 46)
Description
EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio of negative sequence
components to positive sequence components. The reference value is
the current basic oscillation component.
Power quality monitoring – PQM
Description
Monitors voltage and current harmonics up to the 50th harmonic.
Trips if one of the pre-defined limits is exceeded (evaluation per
phase).
Protection elements
THD
TDD
H2 to H50
H2 to H50
Total harmonic distortion
Total demand distortion
Individual amplitudes of voltage harmonics
Individual amplitudes of current harmonics
Time synchronization
Basic principle
The GMP module is synchronized automatically with the real-time
clock of the PLC-CPU. This can be synchronized via the network.
Physical medium
Ethernet (CPU)
Protocols
IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol)
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Event logging with real-time stamp – SER (sequence of events recorder)
Description
Monitoring events (configured alarm/protection functions) are stored
with a precise time reference when they occur.
Type of memory
Nonvolatile (on the module)
Size
2048 entries
Real-time data recorder / digital fault recorder – DFR
Description
A high resolution time sequence recording can be started
automatically when a monitoring function is triggered.
Number of channels
16 channels (measured values, digital I/O, calculated values)
Memory depth per channel
40,960 sampling values (4 s at 100 µs sampling rate)
Sampling rate
100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 800 µs, 1.6 ms
Pre-trigger
Yes
97
Grid Measurement Module
GMP232 – Module properties
Electrical safety
Product standard
IEC/EN61131-2
Generic standard
IEC/EN60664-1
Pollution degree
2
Overvoltage category
3
Test surge voltage
6 kV
Protection class
2
Approvals / certificates
General
CE, UL/cUL, CCC
Medium voltage directive
BDEW:2008, FGW TR3:2011 (Rev. 22), FGW TR8:2011 (Rev. 5)
Marine
GL, DNV, LR, ABS, BV
Others
ENA ER G59/3:2013, IEEE Std. C37.90:2005
Ambient conditions
ColdClimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. air humidity, operation
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % no condensation
Storage temperature
5 to 95 % with temporary
condensation
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. air humidity, storage
Maximum operating height
5 to 95 % with temporary
condensation
5 to 95 % with temporary
condensation
2,000 m above sea level (operation up to 4,500 m on request)
Power supply
Via backplane
+5 V | ≤260 mA, +15 V| ≤20 mA, -15 V | ≤16 mA
External on the module
24 V | ≤87 mA
System requirements
Hardware
All M1 CPU families apart from ME203, SK1 backplane not required
Software
M-Base 3.85 / SolutionCenter 1.85 or higher
Order codes
GMP232
00017829-00
Grid measurement and protection module; 3x In 690V, 3x In 5A;
2x Out Relay 24/48VDC, 230VAC; U-, I-, P-, Q-, f-measurement;
4Q-energy metering, integrated monitoring/protection functions,
harmonic analysis, integrated realtime data recorder (16 channels);
sequence of event log with realtime stamp
GMP232 CC
00019063-00
Like GMP232; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories GMP232
98
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-GMP232 B+C
00018860-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp/screw (1x KZ 51/03; 1x KZ
51/06; 2x SS76/06) with labeling strip and coding elements
Grid Measurement Module
Grid Measurement Module
GM260
The GM260 module enables the safe, reliable
and fast measuring of all relevant values for
three-phase electrical networks. Two separate
three-phase branches can be measured if there is a
common voltage measuring point. The grid variables
are calculated online in the module as True RMS
values including harmonics up to the 40th harmonic.
This is particularly useful for applications such as
for operational measurement on machines or the
energy monitoring in plants and buildings. As well
as functions for determining the active, apparent
and reactive power for each phase, two separate
4-quadrant energy counters are directly integrated
in the module.
Item GM260 GM260 CC
Item No.
00022162-00
00026118-00
The GM260 module is fully integrated in the
Bachmann SolutionCenter. Both the measured
channel values and also the derived values are made
available directly in the user interface.
•Measurement of current, voltage, frequency, power,
power factor, phase angle
•Direct connection to input voltages
up to 480 VL-L, RMS
•True RMS calculation online
•2 independent 4Q energy counters
•Compact design for 2 three-phase branches
Voltage
inputs
Current
inputs
Current
inputs
Application example: Power measurement with
­common voltage input
99
Grid Measurement Module
GM260 – Grid measurement
Current/voltage measurement
Measuring method
True RMS (incl. harmonics up to 40th)
Measurement interval
50 Hz: 10 ms
60 Hz: 8.33 ms
Voltage measurement
Number
3
Maximum rated voltage
UL-L, RMS: 480 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 277 Vrms
Voltage measuring range
UL-L, RMS: 70 to 625 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 36 to 361 Vrms
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.1 %
Continuous overload
UL-L, RMS: 680 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 390 Vrms
Short-term overload(10x1 s, interval 10 s)
UL-L, RMS: 1039 Vrms, UL-N, RMS: 600 Vrms
Input impedance
>2 MΩ
Current measurement
Number
6
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.3 %
Current transformer rated current
1 Arms
Current measuring range
0.01 to 1.2 Arms
Continuous overload
1.2 Arms
Short-term overload (5x1 s, interval 300 s) 20 Arms
Apparent ohmic resistance
75 mVA
Frequency measurement
Rated frequency
50 / 60 Hz
Reference range
45 to 65 Hz
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.014 Hz
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Power measurement – active, reactive and apparent power
Measured values
P, Q, S per phase and as total
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.4 %
Calculation method
DIN 40110-2
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
* Accuracy values as a percentage of the nominal value at 25 °C and
reference conditions
100
Grid Measurement Module
GM260 – Grid measurement
Energy
Number of energy counters
2
Accuracy*
≤ ±0.4 %
Resolution
1 Wh
Active energy
Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Reactive energy
Supplied (positive), drawn (negative)
Measurement interval
Updated at each positive zero crossing
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.67 ms
Type of memory
Nonvolatile (on the module)
Memory cycle
1 sec
Electrical safety
Product standard
IEC/EN 61131-2
Generic standard
IEC/EN 60664-1
Pollution degree
2
Overvoltage category
3
Test surge voltage
4 kV
Protection class
2
Approvals / certificates
General
CE, CCC, In preparation: UL/cUL
Marine
GL, DNV, LR, ABS, BV
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. air humidity, operation
5 to 95 % no condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. air humidity, storage
5 to 95 % with temporary condensation
Maximum operating height
2,000 m above sea level (operation up to 4,500 m on request)
Power supply
Via backplane
+5 V | ≤130 mA, +15 V| ≤45 mA
System requirements
Hardware
All M1 CPU families apart from ME203, SK1 backplane not required
Software
M-Base 3.91 / SolutionCenter 1.91 or higher (recommended)
(if the release driver is installed manually, also executable from the
system software of the CPU ≥M-Base 3.90)
Order codes
GM260
00022162-00
Grid measurement module; 3x In 480V, 6x In 1A; U-, I-, P-, Q-,
f-measurement; 4Q-energy metering
GM260 CC
00026118-00
Like GM260; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories GM260
Item
Item no.
Description
SS-GM260 B
00023512-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x SS 76/11) with labeling strip
101
System Modules
Systematic perfection
The M1 automation system is based on
an ingenious and field-tested modular
concept. Precisely matched to the
respective requirements, automation
engineers can assemble the technically and
economically optimized configuration from
a broad selection of modules.
Extremely space-saving standardized
Power Supply Module
NT255
Power Supply Module
NT250/48
Features
Power supply of modules via
backplane
Supply voltage:
18 to 34 VDC
Monitoring of supply voltage
Power-fail signal for processor
module
Galvanic isolation
Output power: 45 W (55 W)
Buffer time: 18 ms
Features
Power supply of modules via
backplane
Supply voltage:
38 to 58 VDC
Monitoring of supply voltage
Power-fail signal for processor
module
Galvanic isolation
Output power: 45 W
Buffer time: 10 ms
Dummy Module LM201
Features
Placeholder for one module slot as
a reserve for future extension
No electronics
Used to protect the backplane
102
module sizes, robust and absolutely
maintenance-free mechanical design as well
as immunity to external influences particularly
characterize the M1 system concept from
Bachmann electronics.
System Modules
Backplanes BS2xx Series
Features
1 to 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design
Backplane BS2xx CC Series
Features
1 to 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design
ColdClimate design (protected against temporary
condensation)
Backplanes BS2xx/S Series
Features
1 to 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design
For protection class 1
Grounding tab for protective conductor connection
Backplane Adapter
BS200/ET Series
Features
2 to 8 module slots
Optimized thermal connection
Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules
103
System Modules
Power Supply Module NT255
With the NT255 Bachmann electronic sets new
standards for the power supplies of CPUs and
backplane-supplied modules. As a result of intensive
development work and in consideration of field
experiences with several thousand supply modules,
the NT255 combines long term knowledge with the latest technologies.
Best possible, selected components and lifetime
optimized design form the reliable base for the
module. Recent planar transformer technologies
ensure a significantly increased efficiency, the
integrated heat dissipation in the circuit board
(»coolPCB technology«) prevents even minimal local
warming and thus the early ageing of components.
Moreover, because of the extremely reduced weight
of the parts, the module is even more robust against
shock and vibrations.
In spite of the primary design focus on a long
service life and robust design, the NT255 also offers
outstanding technical features: up to 80 % longer
buffer time at short voltage drops and generous
power reserves (55 W peak power) for temporary
overload ensure safety and reliability in every
respect.
•Input voltage range 18 to 34 VDC
•Provides all the necessary CPU voltages as well as
supply for modules on backplanes
•45 W output power (55 W peak power)
•Galvanic isolation input / ground
•Galvanic isolation input / system
•Electronic reverse polarity protection
•2 state indicators allow differentiation between
supply failures and internal errors
•Monitored supply voltage
•Monitored output voltages
•Power-fail signal and state information for CPU
module (processable from application)
Item Item no.
NT25500013251-00
NT255 CC
00016158-00
104
System Modules
NT255
Input
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Input voltage, peak value
+40 V at t < 1 s / min
Power consumption
Max. 68 W
Reverse polarity protection
Electronic
Starting current limitation
Max. 8 A after 5 ms
Fuse
SMD wire fuse 7 A at device defect
Input voltage monitoring
Yes, for power fail message
Output
Output power
45 W (55 W)
Output voltage / output current
+5 V/ 6 A (8 A peak)
+15 V / 0.5 A
-15 V / 0.5 A
Power-fail bypass
18 ms, power-fail message after 3 ms
Monitoring
State indication
Power-fail on processor
State display
LEDs (Power, Error, Ready)
Galvanic isolation
500 V (input / system), 100 V (input / ground)
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without
condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
NT255
00013251-00
Power supply 45W (55W); 24V; 5V 6A; ±15V 0.5A
NT255 CC
00016158-00
Like NT255; ColdClimate ( )
Accessories NT255
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
105
System Modules
Power Supply Module NT250/48
The power supply module NT250 / 48 is suitable for
operation on 48 VDC input voltage. It supplies all M1
modules with all voltages required.
•Power supply for M1 controller systems
•State indicating LED
•Supply voltage 38 to 58 VDC
•Monitoring of supply voltage
•Power fail signal for processor module
•Galvanic isolation input / bus
•Galvanic isolation input / ground
Item NT250 / 48
Item no.
00012754-00
NT250 / 48
Power supply unit
Voltage range
38 to 58 VDC
Input voltage, peak value
+60 V at t < 1 s / min
Inrush current
Max. 7 A after < 0.5 s
Output voltage / output current
+5 V / 6.0 A
+15 V / 0.5 A
-15 V / 0.5 A
Output power
42 W
Galvanic isolation
500 V (input / bus), 100 V (input / ground)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
NT250 / 48
00012754-00
Power supply 42W (55W); 48V; 5V 6A; ±15V 0.5A
Accessories NT250/48
106
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
KZ 51/03 B+C
00012052-50
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
and coding elements for NT250/48
System Modules
Dummy Module LM201
The dummy module LM201 is used as fill-in for
later extensions and does not contain any electronic
components. Used to protect the backplane.
•Placeholder for one module slot
•No electronics
•Used to protect the backplane
Item Item no.
LM20100009494-00
LM201
Execution variants
LM201
Dummy module (cover)
107
System Modules
Backplanes BS200 Series
The backplanes BS201 to BS216 interconnect the
M1 controller hardware modules, such as power
supplies, CPU modules and input / output modules,
mechanically and electrically. They are the backbone
of the controller. The DIN rail adapters S201 and
S202 are identical in construction, without electrical
function and they are used for solitary modules.
•1 to 16 module slots
•Seamless connection / possible
•Stabile mechanics / compact design
•Vibration proof fixing of modules
•Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
Item Item no.
S20100009542-00
S20200021588-00
BS20100010507-00
BS20200009802-00
BS20300009313-00
BS20400009752-00
BS20500009206-00
BS20600009792-00
BS20700009207-00
Item Item no.
BS20800009793-00
BS20900009634-00
BS21000009794-00
BS21100009795-00
BS21200009796-00
BS21300009797-00
BS21400009798-00
BS21500009799-00
BS21600009800-00
BS200 series
Dimensions
Number of module slots
1 to 16
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
23 mm incl. connector
Height
119 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C (vertical: -30 to +55 °C)
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
BS201
Backplane with 1 module slot
BS202
Backplane with 2 module slots
..
..
BS216
Backplane with 16 module slots
S201
DIN rail adapter with 1 module slot for solitary module without backplane
S202
DIN rail adapter with 2 module slots for solitary module without backplane
Accessories BS200
108
Item
Item no.
Description
K-BS240
00010519-00
Cable Backplane extension manufactured 40-poles
System Modules
Backplanes BS200 CC Series
The backplanes for BS200/W CC for cold weather
and protection class 1 interconnect the M1 controller
hardware modules, such as power supplies, CPU
modules and I / O modules, mechanically and
electrically. They are the backbone of the controller.
•1 to 16 module slots
•Seamless connection / possible
•Stabile mechanics / compact design
•Vibration proof fixing of modules
•Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
•ColdClimate design (protected against temporary
condensation)
Item BS203 CC
BS204 CC
BS205 CC
BS206 CC
BS207 CC
BS208 CC
BS209 CC
Item no.
00015947-00
00015948-00
00015949-00
00015950-00
00015951-00
00015952-00
00015953-00
Item BS210 CC
BS211 CC
BS212 CC
BS213 CC
BS214 CC
BS215 CC
BS216 CC
Item no.
00015954-00
00015955-00
00015956-00
00015957-00
00015958-00
00018623-00
00018624-00
BS200 CC series
Dimensions
Number of module slots
3 to 16
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
23 mm incl. connector
Height
119 mm
Ambient conditions
ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C (vertical: -30 to +55 °C)
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
BS203 CC
Backplane with 3 module slots; ColdClimate ( )
BS204 CC
Backplane with 4 module slots; ColdClimate ( )
..
..
BS216 CC
Backplane with 16 module slots; ColdClimate ( )
109
System Modules
Backplanes BS200/S Series
The backplanes of the series BS200/S for protection
class 1 interconnect the M1 controller hardware
modules, such as power supplies, CPU modules and
input / output modules, mechanically and electrically.
They are the backbone of the controller.
•3 to 16 module slots
•Seamless connection / possible
•Stabile mechanics / compact design
•Vibration proof fixing of modules
•Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
•For protection class 1
•Grounding tab (item no. 00016115-00) for
protective conductor connection, necessary for use
of voltages other than SELV
Item
Item no.
BS203/S00016785-00
BS204/S00016786-00
BS205/S00016787-00
BS206/S00016788-00
BS207/S00016789-00
BS208/S00016790-00
BS209/S00016791-00
BS210/S00016792-00
Item
BS211/S
BS212/S
BS213/S
BS214/S
BS215/S
BS216/S
Protective conductor connection set
BS200/S
Dimensions
Number of module slots
3 to 16
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
23 mm incl. connector
Height
119 mm without protective conductor connection
137 mm with protective conductor connection
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C (vertical: -30 to +55 °C)
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
BS203/S
Backplane with 3 module slots, Protection Class 1
BS204/S
Backplane with 4 module slots, Protection Class 1
..
..
BS216/S
Backplane with 16 module slots, Protection Class 1
Accessories BS200/S
110
Item
Item no.
Description
K-BS240
00010519-00
Cable Backplane extension manufactured 40-poles
Item no.
00016793-00
00016794-00
00016795-00
00016796-00
00016797-00
00016798-00
00016115-00
System Modules
Backplane Adapter BS200/ET Series
The backplane adapters of the BS200/ET family
are used to optimize thermal and robust Controller
connection to e. g. the cabinet back panel. Through
this application-specific coupling, the heat can be
specifically removed through the rear wall of the
cabinet housing, in which the cooling of the interior
becomes much easier. Frequently, a maintenanceintensive active cooling of the components in the
interior can therefore be avoided.
This adapter also allows for direct mounting without a
top-hat rail, if this is beneficial for structural ­reasons,
like in the case of a vertical mount or increased
­mechanical loads.
These accessories can be used for the backplaneseries BS200.
Backplane adapter with fitted M1 controller
•4 to 8 module slots
•Optimized thermal connection
•Stabile mechanics / compact design
•Vibration proof fixing of modules
Item BS204/ET BS205/ET BS206/ET BS207/ET BS208/ET Item no.
00021791-00
00021558-00
00021792-00
00021793-00
00021794-00
BS200/ET
Dimensions
Number of module slots
4 to 8
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
10 mm
Height
150 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Corresponding to the installed backplanes family
Rel. humidity operation
Corresponding to the installed backplanes family
Storage temperature
Corresponding to the installed backplanes family
Rel. humidity storage
Corresponding to the installed backplanes family
Design variants
BS204/ET
Backplane adapter with 4 module slots; for heat dissipation to the rear panel
BS205/ET
Backplane adapter with 5 module slots; for heat dissipation to the rear panel
..
..
BS208/ET
Backplane adapter with 8 module slots; for heat dissipation to the rear panel
111
Storage Media
Robust in every detail
To safely satisfy the high availability
requirements imposed on the entire
automation system, program memory
and d
­ ata memory should also be selected
with the utmost care. The PCC201, CF200,
as well as the latest CFA200 families are
specially selected industrial types that
meet the special requirements imposed by
the harsh e
­ veryday conditions.
PC Cards PCC201/xx
Features
Memory capacity 32 / 64 MB
Access width 16 bits
Designed as 5 V card
Program voltage of 12 Vpp
Write protection via
operating software
CFast Memory
CFA200/xx
Features
CFast type I
Memory capacity 4 / 8 / 16 GB
Fast data transfer
Write protection via software
Extended temperature range
Long service life / MTTF
112
Due to the extended ambient conditions, the
high number of supported write cycles and the
exchange of experience with suppliers these
memory cards are strongly recommended for
use both in the controller system as well as in
the operating and monitoring devices, and in
industrial PCs.
Compact Flash
­Memory CF200/xx
UDMA
Features
Compact Flash type I
according to Compact Flash
specification
Memory capacity 2 / 4 / 8 GB
Very fast data transfer (UDMA)
Write protection via operating
software
Extended temperature range
Long service life / MTTF
Bachmann System
Maintenance Stick
Features
USB stick with backup and
restore program
For operator terminals and
industrial PCs with Linux and
Windows
Memory capacity 8 GB
Storage Media
PC Cards PCC201/xx
The PCC201/xx PC cards serve as a storage medium
of the M1 controller. Depending on the memory
extension, the PC cards may contain source codes
and pieces of documentation in addition to the
operating system, the drivers and the application
software.
The PCC201 cards can directly be written to and
formatted in all processor modules of the M1
controller. With an A-PCC200 adapter it is possible
to use the PC cards in the PCMCIA slots of PCs and
notebooks.
The PCC201 series is produced entirely in-house and
therefore long-term supply is guaranteed.
Item
Item no.
PCC201/3200012081-30
PCC201/6400012081-40
A-PCC20000009540-00
•Memory capacity 32 / 64 MB
•Access width 16 bits
•Designed as 5 V card
•Program voltage of 12 Vss
•Write protection via operating software
PCC201/xx
Basic data
Register
No CMR (Component Management Register)
Powerdown mode
Not possible
Information
All information is stored in CIS
(Card Information Structure)
Operating voltages
Operating voltage
5 V (min. 3 V for FLASH memory)
Program voltage
12 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
PCC201/32
00012081-30
PC Card 32MB
PCC201/64
00012081-40
PC Card 64MB
Accessories PCC201/xx
Item
Item no.
Description
A-PCC200
00009540-00
Adapter for PCC-Card
113
Storage Media
Compact Flash Memory CF200/xx
UDMA
Given the high availability demands placed on
automation systems, program and data memory must
be selected with particular care. The Compact Flash
memory cards CF200/xx are therefore especially
selected industrial types that can cope with the
requirements of harsh daily working routines.
Use of the CF200/xx both in CPUs of the M1 family
and in CT and WT devices is strongly recommended
due to the extreme environmental conditions, the
large number of supported write cycles and the many
years of lasting experience with suppliers.
•Compact Flash type I
according to Compact Flash specification
•Memory capacity 2 / 4 / 8 GB
•Very fast data transfer (UDMA)
•Write protection via operating software
•Extended temperature range
•Long service life / MTTF
Item Item no.
CF200/2GB UDMA 00013163-00
CF200/4GB UDMA 00016586-00
CF200/8GB UDMA 00016587-00
CF200/xx UDMA
Technical data
Memory type
Compact Flash Type I
Memory capacity
2 / 4 / 8 GB
Data transfer rate
Up to 66 MB/s (UDMA 4 burst)
NAND flash type
SLC
Operating voltage
3.3 V / 5 V (automatic adaptation)
Read / write cycles
> 100,000
MTBF at 25 °C
> 3,000,000 h (depending on free memory)
Vibration
20 G
20 Hz to 2 kHz
Shock
1500 G
half cycle 0.5 ms
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 85 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +100 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 85 % without condensation
Order codes
114
CF200/2GB UDMA
00013163-00
Compact-Flash Karte 2 GB UDMA
CF200/4GB UDMA
00016586-00
Compact-Flash Karte 4 GB UDMA
CF200/8GB UDMA
00016587-00
Compact-Flash Karte 8 GB UDMA
Storage Media
CFast Memory CFA200/xx
The full speed of the SATA interface is available with
the CFast memory card for powerful controllers. Up
to 30x the transmission rates of the CF cards can be
reached. Given the high availability demands placed
on automation systems, program and data memory
must be selected with particular care. The CFast
memory cards CFA200/xx are therefore especially
selected industrial types that can cope with the
requirements of harsh daily working routines.
Use of the CFA200/xx both in CPUs of the M1 family
as well as in our visualization devices is strongly
recommended due to the extreme environmental
conditions, the large number of supported write
cycles and the many years of lasting experience with
suppliers. The robustness was significantly increased
in comparison with a CF card via a stable edge
connector.
Item
Item no.
CFA200/4GB00017355-00
CFA200/8GB00021781-00
CFA200/16GB00019082-00
•CFast type I
•Memory capacity 4 / 8 / 16 GB
•Fast data transfer
•Write protection via software
•Extended temperature range
•Long service life / MTTF
CFA200/xx
Technical data
Memory type
CFast type I
Memory capacity
4 / 8 / 16 GB
Data transfer rate
Up to 300 MB/s
NAND flash type
SLC
Operating voltage
3.3
Read / write cycles
> 60,000
MTBF at 25 °C
> 2,000,000 h (depending on free memory)
Vibration
15 G
10 Hz to 2 kHz
Shock
1500 G
half cycle 0.5 ms
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
CFA200/4GB
00017355-00
CFast Card 4 GB
CFA200/8GB
00021781-00
CFast Card 8 GB
CFA200/16GB
00019082-00
CFast Card 16 GB
115
Storage Media
Bachmann System Maintenance Stick
for Linux and Windows devices
The Bachmann System Maintenance Stick (BSM Stick)
is a combination of an 8 GB USB stick and an easyto-operate, graphic backup and restore program for
operator terminals and industrial PCs with Linux and
Windows. Using the BSM Stick you can conveniently
create complete backups of the operating system on a
USB stick, or restore a complete backup from the stick.
The operating philosophy of the Bachmann System
Maintenance Utility is based on the easiest possible
operation via a standard PC keyboard, so that a corrupt
operating system of an operator terminal or IPC can
be quickly restored in the field, even by unexperienced
operating personnel (one-click recovery). With the aid
of the BSM Stick the end customer can keep machine
downtimes to a minimum; this makes "repairs" of the
visualization hardware, due to an operating system
defect, unnecessary. Also the end customer can save
the high expenses associated with keeping a pool of
replacement devices on hand for these kinds of service
cases. Thus the BSM Stick directly helps to reduce costs
and optimizes availability of the terminal or of the IPC,
and thus it helps to optimize availability of the system
or machine, and contributes to increased acceptance of
a machine on the part of the end customer.
The Bachmann System Maintenance Stick supports all
series OT200, and series OT1300 operator terminals, as
well as the series IPC1400 and IPC300 IPCs.
System prerequisites
•Free USB port
•System BIOS that supports booting from the USB port
•External standard PC keyboard
Scope of delivery
•8 GB USB with pre-installed Bachmann System
Maintenance Utility
Item BSM Stick
116
Item no.
On request
Storage Media
117
Accessories
Terminals and Connections for Controller Systems
Bachmann electronic GmbH also offers
terminal sets and individual terminals –
and cables, connectors and tools for the
networking of fiber-optic cables.
The standard connection technology
for digital and analog signals of the M1
controller system is implemented with
robust spring-loaded or screw terminals
that can be fixed securely with a screw
flange. Our product portfolio has the right
connection to suit your requirements.
The plastic fiber optic cables (POF/PMMA
fibers) and glass fiber cables (HCS/PCF)
are used to connect the FM211, FM212,
FS211, FS211/N, FS212 and FS212/N
FASTBUS modules, enabling the connection
118
of remote substations over large distances
with the least possible signal delay. The
inspection and fiber-optic installation tools
are also on offer for service and installation
tasks.
The Multimode glass fiber cable is used
to connect the FM221, FM222, FS221/N
and FS222/N FASTBUS modules, enabling
the implementation of remote substations
over distances of up to 2 kilometers.
Bachmann's range of accessories covers
all the requirements of complete system
solutions.
Accessories
Front Terminals and Terminal Sets
The standard connection technology for digital and
analog signals of the M1 controller system is implemented with robust spring-loaded or screw terminals
that can be fixed securely with a screw flange. Our
product portfolio has the right connection to suit your
requirements: Terminals with 3.5 mm pitch for analog
signals or high density terminals for digital signals,
and 5.08 mm pitch terminals for digital signals and
power supply connections. Terminals with a 7.62 mm
pitch are suitable for signals such as for grid measuring modules as they can meet particularly high
requirements with regard to isolation.
The front terminals are compatible with the P
­ hoenix
Contact COMBICON® connection (5.08 and 7.62
pitch) or miniCOMBICON® (3.5 pitch).
The following features are provided depending on
type:
•Terminals to a proven industrial standard
•Space saving pitch, depending on signal type
•Robust fixing via screw flange
•Coding of plug and terminal
•Different connection technologies possible
(cage clamp, screw)
•Marking with stickers
•Measuring via test connection possible in part
Technical data of the individual terminals
The following terminal types are contained in terminal
sets:
3.5 pitch, cage clamp terminals KZ 35/xx
3.5 pitch, small cage clamp terminals KS 35/xx, old type
3.5 pitch, small cage clamp terminals KS 35/xx, new type
5.08 pitch, cage clamp terminals KZ 51/xx
7.62 pitch, screw terminals SS 76/xx, side
7.62 pitch, screw terminals SS 76/xx, inverted
3.5 pitch, screw terminals SS 35/xx, side
3.5 pitch, screw terminals SS 51/xx, side
5.08 pitch, screw terminals SV 51/xx, front
119
Accessories
3.5 Pitch, Cage Clamp Terminals
KZ 35/xx
Cage clamp terminals for rapid connection in pushin contacts with space saving 3.5 mm pitch. The
front labeling facility and the test connection using
a standard 1 mmØ test pin make this terminal
ideally suited for analog signals and digital modules
with a large number of channels. The screw flanges
also ensure a secure mounting even in rugged
environments.
Beispieldarstellung
KZ 35/xx
General
Pitch
3.5 mm
Numbers of pins
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 16, 19
Rated current
Up to 8 A with 1.5 mm²
Rated voltage
300 V acc. to UL / 160 V acc. to VDE
Rated voltage (III/2)
160 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
120
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.14 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.14 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
0.5 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
28
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
16
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228-4 with insulation collar
Cross section: 0.14 mm²; Length: 3.5 mm
Cross section: 0.34 mm²; Length: 8 to 10 mm
Cross section: 0.5 mm²; Length: 8 to 10 mm
Cross section: 0.75 mm²; Length 8 to 10 mm
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Accessories
KZ 35/xx
Tools
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 2.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.4 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.3 Nm
Spring contact actuator
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 2.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.4 mm
Test connection
1 mmØ test pin
Coding
Coding
By removing the coding pins on the contact and corresponding coding
element in the pin housing of the module. For details see the section
»Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
FK-MCP1,5/..-STF-3,5 (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
121
Accessories
3.5 Pitch, Small Cage Clamp
Terminals KS 35/xx, Old Type
Example illustration
Narrow design cage clamp terminals for rapid
connection in push-in contacts with space saving
3.5 mm pitch. This terminal is ideally suited for analog
signals with a test connection using a standard 1
mmØ test pin. The screw flanges also ensure a secure
mounting even in rugged environments.
The mounting form shown here is replaced by the
new mounting from because the new design allows
labelling on the front.
KS 35/xx
General
Pitch
3.5 mm
Numbers of pins
3, 4, 6, 12, 15, 16, 19, 20
Rated current
Up to 8 A with 1.5 mm²
Rated voltage
150 V acc. to UL / 160 V acc. to VDE
Rated voltage (III/2)
160 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On side with stickers
Conductors
122
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
0.75 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
24
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
16
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228-4 with insulation collar
Cross section: 0.25 mm²; Length: 3.5 mm
Cross section: 0.34 mm²; Length: 8 to 10 mm
Cross section: 0.5 mm²; Length: 8 to 10 mm
Cross section: 0.75 mm²; Length 8 to 10 mm
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Accessories
KS 35/xx
Tools
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 2.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.4 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.3 Nm
Spring contact actuator
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 2.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.4 mm
Test connection
1 mmØ test pin
Coding
Coding
By removing the coding pins on the contact and corresponding coding
element in the pin housing of the module. For details see the section
»Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
FMC1,5/..-STF-3,5 (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
123
Accessories
3.5 Pitch, Small Cage Clamp
Terminals KS 35/xx, New Type
Example illustration
Narrow design cage clamp terminals for rapid
connection in push-in terminals with space saving
3.5 mm pitch. The front labelling feature and the test
connection using a standard 1 mmØ test pin makes
this terminal ideally suited for analog signals. The
screw flanges also ensure a secure mounting even in
rugged environments.
KS 35/xx
General
Pitch
3.5 mm
Numbers of pins
3, 4, 6, 12, 15, 16, 19, 20
Rated current
Up to 8 A with 1.5 mm²
Rated voltage
300 V acc. to UL / 130 V acc. to VDE
Rated voltage (III/2)
130 V (UL 300 V)
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.14 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.14 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
1.0 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
0.75 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
24
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
16
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 / max. 1.5 mm²
Acc. to DIN 46228 T4 / max. 1 mm²
Stripping length and pin length
Min. 8 to 11.5 mm
Tools
124
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.7 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.2 Nm
Spring contact actuator
Screwdriver blade width ≤ 2.75 mm
Test connection
1 mmØ test pin
Accessories
KS 35/xx
Coding
Coding
Coding element »CKF« is inserted on the contact and matches the
unmounted coding element in the pin housing of the module. For details
see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
SAURO
CBF..0D8-0M (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
125
Accessories
3.5 Pitch, Cage Clamp Terminals
KZ 51/xx
Example illustration
Cage clamp terminals for rapid connection in push-in
contacts with a 5.08 mm pitch.
For larger cross-sections up to 2.5 mm² with front
labelling and the test connection using a standard
1 mmØ test pin, this terminal is ideally suited for
digital signals. The screw flanges also ensure a secure
mounting even in rugged environments.
KZ 51/xx
General
Pitch
5.08 mm
Numbers of pins
2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 10, 12, 13, 16
Rated current
Up to 10 A with 2.5 mm²
Rated voltage
250 V
Rated voltage (III/2)
320 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
2.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
2.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
2.5 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
26
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
12
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 or T4, Form A
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Tools
126
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.3 Nm
Spring contact actuator
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Test connection
2 mmØ test pin and 2.3 mmØ test pin
Accessories
KZ 51/xx
Coding
Coding
Coding element »CP-MSTB« is inserted on the contact and matches the
unmounted coding element in the pin housing of the module. For details
see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
FKC-2,5/..-STF-5,08 (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
127
Accessories
7.62 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals
SS 76/xx, Side
Example illustration
Screw terminal is also designed for the safe
connection of large cross-sections up to 6 mm² and
corresponding voltage resistance up to 600 V of
network measuring modules. Front labelling feature
and with screw flanges also ensure a secure mounting
even in rugged environments.
SS 76/xx
General
Pitch
7.62 mm
Numbers of pins
6, 10, 11
Rated current
Up to 41 A with 6 mm²
Rated voltage
600 V
Rated voltage (III/2)
1000 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M3
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
10 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.20 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
6 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
4 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
24
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
8
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 or T4, Form A
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Tools
128
Screw connection
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw terminal torque
0.7 to 0.8 Nm
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.7 Nm
Test connection
No
Accessories
SS 76/xx
Coding
Coding
Coding element »CP-PC-RD« is inserted on the contact and matches the
unmounted coding element in the pin housing of the module. For details
see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
PC 5/ ..-STF1-7,62 (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
129
Accessories
7.62 Pitch Cage Clamp Terminals
SS 76/xx, Inverted
Example illustration
Screw terminal with inverted face for reliable
mechanical reverse polarity protection in comparison
to SS 76/xx. The SS 76/xx inverted is also designed
for the safe connection of large cross-sections up to
6 mm² and corresponding voltage resistance up to
600 V of network measuring modules. Front labelling
feature and with screw flanges also ensure a secure
mounting even in rugged environments.
SS 76/xx inv.
General
Pitch
7.62 mm
Numbers of pins
6, 10, 11
Rated current
Up to 41 A with 6 mm²
Rated voltage
600 V
Rated voltage (III/2)
1000 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M3
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
10 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.20 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
6 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
4 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
24
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
8
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 or T4, Form A
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Tools
130
Screw connection
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw terminal torque
0.7 to 0.8 Nm
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.7 Nm
Test connection
No
Accessories
SS 76/xx inv.
Coding
Coding
Coding element »CP-PC-RD« is inserted on the contact and matches the
unmounted coding element in the pin housing of the module. For details
see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
IPC 5/ ..-STF-7,62 (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
131
Accessories
3.5 Pitch, Cage Clamp Terminals
SS 35/xx, Side
Example illustration
Screw terminal for the safe connection in 3.5 mm
pitch for finer wires up to max. 1.5 mm², as used
for analog signals or compact digital modules. The
terminals can be labeled on the front. The screw
flanges also ensure a secure mounting even in rugged
environments.
SS 35/xx
General
Pitch
3.5 mm
Numbers of pins
2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 14, 16, 19
Rated current
Up to 8 A with 1.5 mm²
Rated voltage
160 V
Rated voltage (III/2)
160 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.14 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.14 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
1.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
0.5 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
28
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
16
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 or T4, Form A
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Tools
132
Screw connection
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 2.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.4 mm
Screw terminal torque
0.22 to 0.25 Nm
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 2.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.4 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.3 Nm
Test connection
No
Accessories
SS 35/xx
Coding
Coding
By removing the coding pins on the contact and corresponding coding element
in the pin housing of the module. For details see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
MC 1,5/..-STF-3,5 (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
133
Accessories
5.08 Pitch, Cage Clamp Terminals
SS 51/xx, Side
Example illustration
Screw terminal for the safe connection in 5.08 mm
pitch and for larger cross-sections up to 2.5 mm²
for digital signals. The terminals can be labeled on
the front. The screw flanges also ensure a secure
mounting even in rugged environments.
SS 51/xx
General
Pitch
5.08 mm
Numbers of pins
2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 16
Rated current
Up to 12 A with 2.5 mm²
Rated voltage
250 V
Rated voltage (III/2)
320 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On front with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
2.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
2.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
2.5 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
30
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
12
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 or T4, Form A
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Tools
134
Screw connection
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw terminal torque
0.5 to 0.6 Nm
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.3 Nm
Test connection
No
Accessories
SS 51/xx
Coding
Coding
Coding element »CP-MSTB« is inserted on the contact and matches the
unmounted coding element in the pin housing of the module. For details
see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
MSTB 2,5/..-STF (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
135
Accessories
5.08 Pitch, Screw Terminals
SV 51/xx, Front
Example illustration
Screw terminals with screws on front enable
convenient mounting and safe connection in 5.08 mm
pitch for larger cross-sections up to 2.5 mm² for
digital signals. The signals can be measured easily
via the front screws. The screw flanges also ensure a
secure mounting even in rugged environments.
SV 51/xx
General
Pitch
5.08 mm
Numbers of pins
2, 3, 7, 16
Rated current
Up to 12 A with 2.5 mm²
Rated voltage
250 V
Rated voltage (III/2)
320 V
Color
Green
Contact surface
Tin, lead-free
Flammability class
acc. to UL94
V0
Fixing
Side screw flange M2.5
Labelling
On side with stickers
Conductors
Conductor cross-section rigid min.
0.2 mm²
Conductor cross-section rigid max.
2.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section flexible max.
2.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar min.
0.25 mm²
Conductor cross-section, ferrule
with collar max.
2.5 mm²
AWG acc. to UL/cUL min.
24
AWG acc. to UL/cUL max.
12
Ferrules
Acc. to DIN 46228 T1 or T4, Form A
Stripping length and pin length
3.5 mm
Tools
136
Screw connection
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw terminal torque
0.5 to 0.6 Nm
Screw flange
Screwdriver, blade width ≤ 3.5 mm, thickness ≤ 0.6 mm
Screw flange
Torque max.
0.3 Nm
Test connection
No (can only be tapped via screw head)
Accessories
SV 51/xx
Coding
Coding
Coding element »CP-MSTB« is inserted on the contact and matches the
unmounted coding element in the pin housing of the module. For details
see the section »Coding«
Approvals
UL / cUL
cULus Recognized, VDE
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
FRONT-MSTB 2,5/..-STF (.. =Number of poles, two-digit)
137
Accessories
Coding
If several jacks of the same type and with the same number of pins are used for a module,
the jack coding can prevent a jack from being plugged into the incorrect socket. For this, the
jacks/sockets must be equipped with coding elements.
Coding elements (Overview)
Clip-on coding element
Plug-in coding element
CP-MSTB
Coding element
for R = 3.5 socket
for R = 5.08 pin header
for R = 7,62
socket and pin header
(SS 76)
CKF-SC1
CR-MSTB
CP-HCC 4
Coding 3.5 pitch plug connectors
Procedure:
1.
Insert plug-in coding element into socket.
2. Code the associated jack.
On the corresponding pin of the jack:
• If connector type 1, remove coding pin. This applies to all plug connectors with a 3.5 mm
pitch except the 3.5 pitch cage clamp terminals, narrow / KS 35/xx new type.
• With the 3.5 pitch cage clamp terminals, narrow / KS 35/xx new type the CKF-SC1 coding
element must be fitted.
138
 This way, this jack will only fit in this socket.
Accessories
Coding 5.08 pitch plug connectors
Procedure:
1.
Insert clip-on coding element into pin header.
2.
Insert plug-in coding element into socket on the pins on which there is no coding
element in the pin header.
 This way, this jack will only fit in this socket.
Coding 7.62 pitch plug connectors (SS 76)
Procedure:
1.
Fitting the CP-HCC4 coding element in the socket.
2. The same CP-HCC4 coding element is fitted on the plug connector.
 This way, this jack will only fit in this socket.
139
Accessories
Positioning
Positioning of the coding element depends on the number of pins and the number of jacks.
Number of Pins > Number of jack
If the number of pins is greater than the number of the same jack, it is sufficient when one
coding element is plugged in per socket:
Positioning - number of pins > number of jacks
Number of Pins < Number of jack
If the number of pins is smaller than the number of the same jack, then coding must occur
in binary fashion:
Positioning - number of pins < number of jacks
140
Accessories
Terminal Sets Overview
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/02 B
00012058-00
Terminal 02-pins pitch 5.08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strips
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins pitch 5.08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strips
KZ 51/03 B+C
00012052-50
Terminal 03-pins grid 5.08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strips
and coding elements for NT250/48
KZ 51/05 B
00013391-00
Terminal 05-pins pitch 5.08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strips
KZ-ACR222 B
00012056-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/10) with
labeling strips
SS-AI202/SI B+C
00012354-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (2x SS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KS-(AI204/SI //
AO204/SI) B+C
00024539-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-AI204/SI B+C
00012353-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KZ-AI204/1 B
00012053-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp small (1x KZ 35/04) with labeling
strips
KS-AI204/2 B+C
00013155-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (2x KS 35/04) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-AI204/2 B+C
00011979-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (2x SS 35/04) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KS-AI204/4 B+C
00013156-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp small (4x KS 35/04) with labeling
strips and coding elements
SS-AI204/4 B+C
00012008-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/04) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KZ-AI208/SI B+C*
00019091-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (8x KZ 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements  not for new developments
KS-AI208/SI B+C
00027409-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (8x KS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-AI208/SI B+C
00019866-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (8x SS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KZ-AIC212 B+C
00014396-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 4x KZ 35/12) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-AIO202/SI B+C
00024831-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (2x KZ 35/05) with labeling strips
KZ-AIO204/SI B+C
00024832-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (4x KZ 35/05) with labeling strips
KZ-AIO208/SI B+C
00025859-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (8x KZ 35/05) with labeling strips
KS-AIO208 B+C
00023149-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (2x KS 35/20; 1 x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KS-AIO216 B+C
00023148-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/20; 1 x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KS-AIO288 B+C**
00012598-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/19; 1x KZ 51/03) with
labeling strips and coding elements  not for new developments
KZ-AIO288 B+C
00026125-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp small (4x KZ 35/19; 1x KZ 51/03)
with labeling strips and coding elements
SS-AIO288 B+C
00012007-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/19; 1x KZ 51/03) with
labeling strips and coding elements
SV-AIO288 B+C
00010864-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw (4x SS 35/19; 1x SV 51/03) with
labeling strips and coding elements
* Article will be discontinued and replaced by KS-AI208/SI B+C (00027409-00)
** Article will be discontinued and replaced by KZ-AIO288 B+C (00026125-00)
141
Accessories
Terminal Sets Overview
142
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-AO202 B+C
00011980-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (2x KZ 35/04) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-AO202/SI B+C
00012378-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (2x SS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KS-(AI204/SI //
AO204/SI) B+C
00024539-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/03) with labeling strip
and coding elements
SS-AO204/SI B+C
00012379-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/03) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KS-AO208/I B+C
00012948-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (4x KS 35/06; 1x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strips and coding elements
SS-AO208/I B+C
00012009-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/06; 1x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-CNT204 B
00012057-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strips
SV-CNT204 B
00010869-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw front (1x SV 51/02; 1x SV 51/12) with
labeling strips
KZ-CPC210 B+C+D
00023591-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 3x KS 35/16;
3x KS 35/20) with labeling strips + coding elements + DSUBConnector
KZ-DA2384-C B+C
00013832-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (8x KZ 51/12; 1x KZ 51/07;
4x KZ 35/12; 4x KZ 35/03) with labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-DI216 B+C
00011973-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/10) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SV-DI216 B+C
00010866-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/10) with labeling
strips and coding elements
KZ-DI232 B+C
00012004-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SV-DI232 B+C
00010867-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/12) with labeling
strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO16-C B+C
00012011-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/07; 4x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO32-C B+C
00012012-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/07; 8x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO48-C B+C
00012013-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/07; 12x KZ 51/12)
with labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO264-C B+C
00012014-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 6x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO216 B+C
00011974-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12; 1x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strips and coding elements
SV-DIO216 B+C
00012078-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (3x SV 51/12; 1x SV 51/02)
with labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO216/4 B+C
00011975-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12; 1x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strips and coding elements
Accessories
Terminal Sets Overview
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-DIO232 B+C
00013742-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-DIO232 B+C
00015816-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (3x SS 51/12) with labeling
strips and coding elements
KZ-DIO248 B+C
00011976-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (4x KZ 35/16) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-DIO248 B+C
00012539-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (4x SS 35/16) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KZ-DIO264 B+C
00011977-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (5x KZ 35/16) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KZ-DIO280 B+C
00011978-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (6x KZ 35/16) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SS-DIO280 B+C
00012538-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (6x SS 35/16) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KZ-DMS202 B
00012054-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/03) with
labeling strips
KZ-DO216 B+C
00012005-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/10) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SV-DO216 B+C
00010865-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/10) with labeling
strips and coding elements
KZ-DO232 B+C
00012006-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/12) with labeling strips
and coding elements
SV-DO232 B+C
00010868-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (2x SV 51/12) with labeling
strips and coding elements
KZ-DOR206 B+C
00014760-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (3x KZ 51/06) with labeling strips
and coding elements
KS-GIO212 B+C
00023145-00
Terminal set cage clamp small (4 x KS 35/15; 1 x KZ 51/02) with
labeling strip and coding elements
SS-GM260 B
00023512-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x SS 76/11) with labeling strips
SS-GMP232 B+C*
00018860-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp/screw (1x KZ 51/03; 1x KZ 51/06;
2x SS76/06) with labeling strips and coding elements
(up to KR 102.000)
SS-GMP232/x B
00027474-00
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x KZ 51/03; 1x KZ 51/06;
1x SS 76/06; 1x SS 76/06 inv) with labeling strips
(from KR 103.000)
KZ-GSP274 B
00023426-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp/screw (1x KZ 51/03; 3x KZ
51/06; 2x SS76/10) with labeling strips
KZ-ISI222 B
00014277-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/06;
1x KZ 35/07; 1x KZ 35/02) with labeling strips
KZ-ISI222 B+D
00014277-70
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/06;
1x KZ 35/07; 1x KZ 35/02) with labeling strips + DSUB-Connector
KZ-PVA204 B
00028033-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 1x KZ 35/08) with
labeling strips (also for PVA202)
KZ-PVA208 B+C
00028032-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 2x KZ 35/08) with
labeling strips and coding elements
*
From KR 103.000 use the terminal set SS-GMP232/x B (00027474-00) (inverted current
measurement point)
143
Accessories
Terminal Sets Overview
Item
Item no.
Description
KS-PTAI216 B+C*
00012599-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (1x KZ 51/02; 4x KS 35/14) with
labeling strips and coding elements  not for new developments
KZ-PTAI216 B+C
00026126-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp small (1x KZ 51/02; 4x KZ 35/14)
with labeling strips and coding elements
SS-PTAI216 B+C
00012010-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x KZ 51/02; 4x SS 35/14) with
labeling strips and coding elements
SV-PTAI216 B+C
00010870-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw frontside (1x SV 51/02; 4x SS 35/14)
with labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-SCT202 B+C
00027026-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 2x KZ 35/07) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-SDI208 B+C
00014774-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/05; 2x KZ 35/12) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-SDO204 B+C
00014772-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/05; 2x KZ 35/08) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-SLC284 B+C
00014771-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/05; 6x KZ 35/08) with
labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-TCO204-C B+C
00012022-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 1x KZ 51/13;
1x KZ 35/12) with labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-TCO216-C B+C
00012015-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 2x KZ 51/13;
4x KZ 35/12) with labeling strips and coding elements
KS-TI214 B+C
00014432-50
Terminal set cage clamp small (1x KZ 51/02; 2x KS 35/16;
2x KS 35/12) with labeling strips and coding elements
SS-TI214 B+C
00014395-50
Terminal set Phoenix screw side (1x SS 51/02; 2x SS 35/16;
2x SS 35/12) with labeling strips and coding elements
KZ-VP200 B+C
00012017-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (2x KZ 51/16; 2x KZ 51/07) with
labeling strips and coding elements
*
144
Article will be discontinued and replaced by KZ-PTAI216 B+C (00026126-00)
Accessories
145
Accessories
Plastic Fiber Optic Cables
POF-/PMMA Fibers up to 40 m Distance
The fiber optic cables are used to connect the FM211,
FM212, FS211, FS211/N and FS212 and FS212/N
FASTBUS modules, enabling the connection of remote
substations over large distances with a minimum
signal delay.
• Minimum signal delay
• Cable length: Plastic Optical Fiber (POF or PMMA)
max. 40 m
Assembled plastic fiber optic cables
Item
Item no.
Description
K-LWLP1
0,5 m
00009624-02
POF Cable 0.5m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
1,0 m
00009624-00
POF Cable 1.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
2,0 m
00009624-01
POF Cable 2.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
3,0 m
00009624-06
POF Cable 3.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
5,0 m
00009624-04
POF Cable 5.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
7,0 m
00009624-11
POF Cable 7.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 10,0 m
00009624-03
POF Cable 10.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 15,0 m
00009624-07
POF Cable 15.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 20,0 m
00009624-05
POF Cable 20.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 30,0 m
00009624-12
POF Cable 30.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 40,0 m
00009624-15
POF Cable 40.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
When utilizing cable from other manufacturers be aware of possibly divergent specifications, e. g.
attenuation, minimum bend radius etc.
146
Accessories
Self-assembled plastic fiber optic cables
The following table lists the individual components
required for the self assembly of plastic fiber optic
cables.
When using the cables of other manufacturers,
ensure that they do not have any different
specifications, e.g. attenuation or minimum
bending radius.
Required material and equipment for assembling cables
Item
Item no.
Description
LWLP1 connector
00009502-00
Connector for plastic fiber optic cable. 2-line
LWLP1 bush
00009514-00
Bush LWL Plastic per piece
LWLP polishing set
00009696-00
Polishing set for LWL Plastic (HFBR-4593/Hewlett Packard)
LWLP-WKZ1
00010126-00
Skinning tool for LWL Plastic Type RS
LWLP gripper
00009695-00
BNC-Crimpgripper (Pressmaster DCC 1113)
Assembling cables
The following steps are required for cables for self assembly:
- Prepare cables
- Fit connectors
- Check connectors
- Polish plastic fiber
Preparing the cable
Procedure:
The synthetic fiber must not be damaged when stripping, otherwise optical reflections
could result, which would seriously reduce the transmission quality.
1. Strip jacket using a stripping knife.
2.
LWL-Kabel mit Mantel
Schutzumhüllung Kunststofffaser
8 mm
Strip the synthetic fibers.
30 mm
5 mm
3. Slide a crimp sleeve over the jacket on both sides.

Cable is ready for the connector assembly.
147
Accessories
Assemble connector
Procedure:
Dorn
1.
Crimphülse
PMMA-Fasern
Mantel
Insert individual wires into the connector socket.
In so doing, slide cable jacket over the connector pin.
In order to ease plugging/unplugging on the module, two opposite surfaces of the
hexagonal crimp ought to be parallel with the broad side of the connector socket.
2.
Crimphülse
Slide crimp sleeve over the pin and clamp with crimping pliers.
3.
Kunststofffasern
ca. 1,5 mm
Trim protruding plastic fibers to approx. 1.5 mm.

148
1. Connecter is assembled.
Accessories
Check connector
Procedure:
Check whether the fibers are chipped.
1. Cover a fiber end on the fully assembled connector.
2. 1
2
2
1
On the other end of the cable check which fiber is light or dark.
Polish synthetic fibers
Procedure:
1. Place the duplex connector on the polishing adapter.
2.
Schleifadapter
Schleifpapier
Surface-grind protruding fibers using the sandpaper (600 grain) in 8 movements.
3. Polish fibers using the lap film (3 µm) in figure-8 movements.
 Synthetic fiber cable is fully patc hed.
149
Accessories
Glass Fiber Cable (HCS/PCF)
The fiber optic cables are used to connect the FM211,
FM212, FS211, FS211/N and FS212 and FS212/N
FASTBUS modules, enabling the connection of remote
substations over large distances with a minimum
signal delay. HCS (hard cladded silica) is also known
as PCF (polymer cladded fiber).
• Distances of up to 150 m with HCS cables or 180 m
with special HCS cables between two stations
• Minimum signal delay
Item
Item no.
Description
K-LWLH1
2.0 m
00010762-07
HCS Cable 2.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
10.0 m
00010762-04
HCS Cable 10.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
15.0 m
00010762-06
HCS Cable 15.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
90.0 m
00010762-01
HCS Cable 90.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1 100.0 m
00010762-03
HCS Cable 100.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1 120.0 m
00010762-02
HCS Cable 120.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
Required material and equipment
150
Item
Item no.
Description
LWLH connector
00010949-00
Pin for HCS-Cable Type Simplex per piece
LWLH-Fiber optic
cable housing ZA
00011105-00
Casing LWL-HCS for left site (metal casing with screws)
LWLH-Fiber optic
cable housing ZB
00011622-00
Casing LWL-HCS for right site (metal casing with screws)
LWLH-WKZ-SET
00010952-00
Tool set for LWLH with cutter, Skinning tool, Crimpgripper,
Diamond cutter
LWLH/-Cap
00011188-00
Protection cap for LWL-metal connector
Accessories
Cable recommendations*
Item
Item no.
Manufacturer
Glass fiber cable**
(HCS/PCF)
84Q02300T000ZUL00
LEONI AG
I-V(ZN)YY 2K200/230
Mini breakout cable up to 150 m long, operating
and storage temp. -40 to 90 °C
Glass fiber cable**
(HCS/PCF)
84Q04700T
LEONI AG
AT-V(ZN)Y11Y 2K200/230
Breakout cable up to 150 m long, operating and
storage temp. -40 to 85 °C
Glass fiber cable**
(HCS/PCF)
84Q02300W
LEONI AG
I-V(ZN)YY 2K200/230 GI-PCF
Mini breakout cable up to 180 m long, operating
and storage temp. -20 to +70 °C, storage temp.
-40 to +70 °C
Glass fiber cable**
(HCS/PCF)
84Q04700W
LEONI AG
AT-V(ZN)Y11Y 2K200/230
Breakout cable up to 180 m long, operating temp.
-20 to +70 °C, storage temp. -30 to +70 °C
Glass fiber cable**
(HCS/PCF)
801733
HELUCOM
I-V(ZN)YY 2K200/230
Mini breakout cable up to 150 m long, operating
and storage temp. -30 to +85 °C
Description
* Information without guarantee, order directly from manufacturer
** When using the cables of other manufacturers, be aware of any different specifications, e.g.
attenuation or minimum bending radius. The fiber optic single fiber must have a diameter of 2.2 mm,
the HCS core 200 μm. The outer diameter of the fiber optic cable incl. sheath must not exceed ≤ 8 mm
in order to be accommodated by the strain relief housing.
151
Accessories
Preparing the cable
Procedure:
The HCS-fiber must not be damaged when stripping, otherwise optical reflections could
result, which would seriously reduce the transmission quality.
1. Strip jacket using a stripping knife.
2.
Strip HCS-fibers. For this purpose, stripping pliers notch 1.6 has to be
used.
3.
LWL-Kabel
mit Mantel
Einzelader mit
Umhüllung, ø2,2 mm
Kevlar-Fasern
HCS-Faser mit
Buffer, ø230 µm
5,5 mm
x mm 1)
50 mm
Cut off half of the Kevlar fibers (on a quantity basis) with the scissors The length x
(1)) is geared to the possibility of traction relief. The length is 55 mm for fiber optic
cable casingZA or ZB.
 Cable is prepared.
Apply crimp sleeve
Procedure:
1. Distribute the carbon fibers evenly backward over the jacket.
2. Slide the crimp sleeve onto the HCS-fiber.
3.
Einzelader mit
Umhüllung, ø2,2 mm
Crimpring
Kevlar-Fasern
HCS-Faser, ø200 µm
Screw the crimp sleeve onto the jacket until resistance can be felt.
4.
Crimp the crimp sleeve onto the HCS-fiber. For this purpose, the forward
inset of the crimping pliers has to be used.
5. Cut off protruding Kevlar fibers with the scissors.  Crimp sleeve is assembled.
152
Accessories
Remove buffer
Procedure:
1.
Insert the HCS-fibers along with the crimp sleeve into the frontal
aperture of the stripping tool up to the stop.
2. Squeeze both stripping tool grips.
3. Remove the buffer carefully and straightly from the HCS-fiber.
4. Check the HCS fiber for damage or dirt. BIf the fiber has been hurt, start again. If the
fiber is dirty, wipe off, using a soft towel.
Apply plug
Procedure:
The fiber has to be clean, try and oil free in order to achieve good crimp performance.
1.
Einzelader mit
Umhüllung, ø2,2 mm
Crimpring
Steckerteil
HCS-Faser,
ø200
µm The plug flange has to
Slide the plug over the HCS-fiber and under
the crimp
sleeve.
abut the crimping pliers.
2.
Crimp the crimp sleeve onto the plug. For this purpose, the rearmost
inset of the crimping pliers has to be used.  Plug is assembled.
Breaking the HCS-fiber
Procedure:
1.
Insert the connector into the breaking tool (diamond cutter) and hold it
tight on the stop.
2. Hold the breaking tool with one hand at the round handle.
3. Press the lever down slowly with your thumb.
4. Release the lever.  HCS-fiber is broken.
153
Accessories
Casing assembly
Depending on the application, different housings have to be used.
The example described here shows a FAST-Bus cable with two housings of ZA type, as
needed e. g. for the connection between the A channel of an FM21x to the A channel
of the FS21x at the first FAST Bus slave station.
Procedure:
1.
Steckerteile
Insert plug into the casing. The individual wires in the casing must not be tensed,
otherwise the horizontal play of the single connector in the casing is inhibited.
2.
Kabelbinder
Bind cable with cable tie. Fasten using both countersunk screws (M2.5 x 10). The
fastening screw (M3 x 20) secures the connector‘s pull-off guard on the module.
NOTE: To ensure optimum enclosure of the cable sheath, position the cable tie so that
the head of the cable tie is located outside of the connector housing.
3.
M2,5 x 10
Bohrung für
Befestigungsschraube
Assemble cover.  1. Casing is assembled.
154
M2,5 x 10
Accessories
4. Assemble casing
This can usually be checked by different colors of the protective coatings.
1
2
2
1
Check whether the fibers are chipped.
5. 2. Assemble casing. The procedure is the same as for 1. Casing.  2. Casing is
assembled.
 The cable is fully patched.
Mounting on the module
When attaching the housing to the module make sure that the housing is
shifted upwards as far as possible. The tolerance window for the module‘s
fiber optic cable connector is shifted as a result. If the socket is bolted tight
against the lower stop and the individual wires in the socket are taut, it can
happen that the individual fiber optic cable jack is easily pulled out of the
module‘s fiber optic cable socket.
155
Accessories
Glass Fiber Cable (Multimode)
The Multimode glass fiber cable is used to connect
the FM221, FM222, FS221/N and FS222/N FASTBUS
modules. This enables the connection of remote
substations over distances of up to 2 kilometers.
Multimode fibers are also used for fiber optic Ethernet
connections allowing the inexpensive combination of
Fastbus and Ethernet using multi-core cables.
Bachmann electronic GmbH recommends the
following multimode cables, which have been
tested accordingly. Cables of other manufacturers
with the same or better specifications can naturally
be used. These must be tested before use.
Cable recommendations*
Item
Item no.
Manufacturer
Glass fiber cable**
(Multimode)
8421801LG000
LEONI AG
AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2G50/125 TB900L 2,2
Breakout cable up to 2,000 m long,
Operating and storage temp. -40 to +85 °C,
UL license
Glass fiber cable**
(Multimode)
84950785G222
LEONI AG
I-V(ZN)Y 2G50/125 TB900L 2,8
Mini breakout cable up to 2,000 m long,
Operating and storage temp. -40 to +70 °C
*
**
156
Description
Information without guarantee, order directly from manufacturer
When using the cables of other manufacturers, be aware of any different specifications, e.g.
attenuation or minimum bending radius. Fibers with a core diameter of 50 µm or 62.5 µm can be
used. The outer diameter of the fiber optic cable depends on the connector used, see connector data
sheet.
Accessories
PushPull® Connectors
The following recommended PushPull® connectors
have been specially selected on account of their
robust design and accuracy of fit. Other connector
types should not be used. LC connectors of other
manufacturers can be used once they have been
functionally checked.
Connector recommendations* for glass fiber cables (multimode)
Manufacturer
Item
Item no.
Description
HARTING
PushPull®
connector
09 57 402 0500 020
HARTING
KGaA
Plastic connector, suitable for breakout cables
HARTING
PushPull®
connector
09 57 409 0500 020
HARTING
KGaA
Metal connector, suitable for breakout cables
LC connector
SXLC-DK0-43-0010
LEONI AG
Plastic connector, suitable for mini breakout
cables
* Information without guarantee, order directly from manufacturer
PushPull® Adapter
This adapter is required for PushPull®
connectors.
When an adapter is screwed on an LC patch cable
must not be fitted as this covers the LC release lever
so that it cannot be disconnected.
Accessories
Item
Item no.
Description
PushPull® adapter*
00016682-00
Adapter for Harting PushPull LC Connector
157
Accessories
Mounting LWL connector/PushPull® adapter
Caution
LC duplex connector (1) in interface (2) plugged in with PushPull® adapter (4)!
Catch unlocking no longer operable!
PushPull® adapter (4) must be dismounted for unlocking.
› Use interface (2) without PushPull® adapter (4).
- or › Remove the PushPull® adapter (4).
Mounting LC duplex plug
1
2
3
Abb.: FO connector mounting - LC duplex
Procedure:
CAUTION! When mounting, ensure that the plug is securely locked at the transceiver
interface.
Plug patch cable with LC duplex plug (1) into interface (2) without PushPull® adapter (4).
158
Accessories
Mounting the PushPull® system
2
3
Abb.: FO connector mounting - PushPull®
5
4
Procedure:
1. Mounting PushPull® adapter (optional)
In case of independent mounting of the PushPull® adapter, care must be taken that
the PushPull® adapter rests flush and without gaps on the transceiver housing.
2. Fasten PushPull® adapter (4) with M3 screws, permissible torque 50 Ncm.
3. Mount PushPull® connector
Requirements:
For a secure and robust plug connection with a PushPull® plug, the PushPull®
adapter must be installed.
Caution! During installation, ensure that the PushPull® connector is securely locked
at the PushPull® adapter.
Push PushPull® plug (5) onto adapter (4).
159
Accessories
Couplings
Couplings must only be used for transmission segments with plastic fiber cables
(PMMA), or multi-mode fiber optic cables.
Couplings reduce the useable cable length. Bachmann electronic GmbH does not specify
any couplings.
When selecting a coupling you should note the following requirements:
•The coupling must be specified in relation to the transmission attenuation (length
losses).
•The coupling must be specified for the cable type used.
•Other tools are required for the completion of the coupling.
Attenuation measurement multi-mode
When using other measuring instrument sets, the procedure for measuring attenuation
can vary. See the description of the respective measuring instrument set.
Requirements:
•Ready-made fiber optic cable with plugs
•Set of measuring instruments
For Bachmann electronic GmbH, for the attenuation measurement, the measuring
instrument set NOY-MLP 4-2 from AFL Telecommunications GmbH is used, as are the
FO types recommended by Bachmann electronic GmbH.
•LC duplex adapter FMA-LC-2x for measuring instrument set
•Accessories as specified in the tables below
Accessories - measurement with LC connector
Designation
LC adapter cable
Quantity
[pc.]
1
Description
Multi-mode cable, 2-fiber with 2 x LC Simplex connector
↔ LC
duplex connector
LC-coupling
1
LC-LC coupling for multi-mode FO (duplex)
Accessories - measurement with PushPull® connector
Designation
160
Quantity [pc.] Description
PushPull®-adapter
cable
2
PushPull®-couppling
2
Multi-mode cable, 2-fiber with 2 x LC Simplex connector
PushPull®LC connector
PushPull® LC coupling for multi-mode FO (duplex)
↔
Accessories
Measurement for FO cable with LC connector
Procedure:
1. Connect the first connector of the LC adapter cable to the LED source OLS1 DUAL.
2. Switch on LED source (operating mode without modulation)
– Set the wavelength to 1,300 nm.
3. Adjust the OPM4 power meter (see power meter operation manual).
3.1 Set the wavelength to 1,300 nm
3.2 Set the measuring mode to dB.
4. Connect the second connector of the adapter cable to the power meter.
5. Set the reference level.
– Press and hold the button <Ref/Set> until "[HELD]" is shown on the display.
6. Remove the adapter cable from the power meter and connect it to an LC coupling.
7. Connect the first connector of the FO cable to be tested, to the power meter.
8. Connect the second connector of the FO cable to be tested, to the LC coupling.
9. ACompare the value displayed on the measuring instrument to the limit value.
 Measurement completed.
Measurement for FO cable with PushPull® connector
Procedure:
1. Connect the LC connector of the first PushPull® adapter cable to the LED source
OLS1 DUAL.
2. Switch on LED source (operating mode without modulation).
– Set the wavelength to 1,300 nm.
3. Adjust the OPM4 power meter (see power meter operation manual).
3.1 Set the wavelength to 1,300 nm.
3.2 Set the measuring mode to dB.
4. Connect the LC connector of the second PushPull® adapter cable to the power meter.
5. Connect PushPull® connectors of both adapter cables via a PushPull® coupling.
6. Set the reference level.
– Press and hold the button <Ref/Set> until "[HELD]" is shown on the display.
7. Remove one PushPull® connector from the PushPull® coupling.
8. Connect the FO cable to both adapter cables via PushPull® couplingAm Messgerät
angezeigten Wert mit Grenzwert vergleichen.
 Measurement completed.
Formulas for the link budget calculation
LB (dB) ≥ M + VL(dB/km) * L + VC1(dB) + VC2(dB) + ... + VCX(dB)
LB – Link Budget (see Technical data of the respective module)
M – System Margin (reserve, preferably 3 dB)
VL – losses via the FO fiber (see data sheet for the FO fiber used)
L – length of the cable in [km]
VCX – losses via the couplings
161
Accessories
Multi-fiber FO cable (multi-mode)
1
162
2
3
4
5
Abb.: Example - installation of multi-fiber FO cable (multi-mode)
1)
Installation of multi-fiber FO cable (multi-mode)
2)
Switch cabinet leadthrough z B. System „Han-Yellock®“ from HARTING KGaA
3)
Switch cabinet
4)
FO duplex cable, LC duplex connector M1-side
5)
M1 controller
Accessories
163
Independent. Powerful. Open.
Networking – the backbone
of the automation solution
As an automation specialist in the area of distributed energy generation
plants, we know the significance of a powerful, scalable, and absolutely
reliable networking solution. Networking as the backbone of every
automation solution has the task of connecting different sub-components
according to their requirements in terms of signaling. In this regard rigorous
requirements are imposed on real-time capability, protection against
tampering and availability.
To meet these high requirements, Bachmann electronic provides an extensive
offering of different networking components. For example, our offering
enables a central control room connection adapted to the particular customer
requirements via Ethernet, or a machine-internal, flexible connection of
the individual machine components on the controller via real-time capable
fieldbuses. You decide which of the networking possibilities established on
the market best fits your automation task. In this regard the transmission
medium, optical fiber or copper, can be freely selected in accordance with the
requirements imposed on resistance to interference and distance. Bachmann
electronic is guaranteed to have a suitable solution in its product line.
165
System networking – Interfaces
Numerous upgrade possibilities
The M1-CPU already offers hardware
interfaces for Ethernet and serial
connections. If needed the number of these
interfaces can be increased by placement
of appropriate hardware modules on the
backplane. The RS204 module offers
additional serial ports with 9-pin D-Sub
connectors. In addition the EM213 module
extends the system by additional network
adapters with three RJ45 ports. This means
that the interface extensions can also be
used on Fastbus substations.
Topology: Interface
SYSTEM NETWORKING INTERFACES
M1-CPU
EM203
RS204
RS485
SERVICE INSTALLER
WIND
SENSOR
RS232, RS422
PITCH
CONTROL
Modbus RTU
CMS
SYSTEM
166
CONVERTERS
Interfaces
Industrie Ethernet Master
EM213, EM213 CC
Features
Additional Ethernet port (separate IP address)
Cable length to 100 m per line
RJ45 connections: 3
Status display via LED
Integrated switch
Transfer rate to M1 CPU:
max. 2.4 Mbit / s user data
Transfer rate as switch: max. 100 Mbit / s
Interface Modules
RS204, RS204 CC
Features
4 interfaces on one module
Any number of interfaces possible per controller
RS232 / RS422 / RS485 can be combined
High speed interfaces with up to 1.5 Mbaud
Auto-flow control for automatic handshake
Integrated terminating resistors
(connect/disconnect)
Interfaces galvanically isolated
Ethernet Remote Station
ERS202 CC
Features
1 serial interface
2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s with status
displays
1 USB interface
RAM 256 MB DRAM
Data memory 512 kB NVRAM
Integrated power supply
167
Interfaces
Industrie Ethernet Master EM213
The module EM213 extends the control system
with an additional Ethernet adapter with 3 ports for
10/100 MBit. Thus Ethernet ports for connection of a
service laptop or for other Ethernet-based networking
are also available on FASTBUS substations.
•Cable length to 100 m per line
•Status display via LED
•3xRJ45 connections
•Integrated switch
Item Item no.
EM21300017321-00
EM213 CC
00017470-00
VISUALIZATION
CMS
FS
EM
FO (FASTBUS)
M1-CPU
168
INTERNET
FM
Interfaces
EM213
Ethernet master
Number of transceivers
3x 10 / 100BaseT
Connectors
3x RJ45 / crossed and uncrossed cables can be used
(autocross detection)
Line length
Max. 100 m / line
Transfer rate to M1 CPU
Max. 2.4 Mbit / s user data
Transfer rate as switch
Max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance
100 Ω
Status display
LEDs for power, collision + 4x LinkPuls, 3x speed (10 / 100 Mbit / s)
Ambient conditions
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 %
without condensation
5 to 95 %
with condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 %
with condensation
5 to 95 %
with condensation
Order codes
EM213
00017321-00
Ethernet interface module; RJ45; 3 Ports; Eth100
EM213 CC
00017470-00
Like EM213; ColdClimate ( )
169
Interfaces
Interface Module RS204
The interface module RS204 is used to
connect four asynchronous serial i­nterfaces
to the M1 controller.
•4 interfaces on one module
•Any number of interfaces possible per controller
•RS232 / RS422 / RS485 can be combined
•High speed interfaces with up to 1.5 Mbaud
•Auto-flow control for automatic handshake
•Integrated terminating resistors
(connect/disconnect)
•Interfaces galvanically isolated
Item
Item no.
RS20400021235-00
RS204 CC
00021674-00
170
Interfaces
RS204
Description
Transfer rate* (max.)
Signal level
Terminating resistance
RS232
RS422
RS485
115.2 KBaud
1.5 MBaud
1.5 MBaud
RS232
RS422
RS485
–
Yes, adjustable via DIP switch
Operating mode
Full duplex
Half duplex
External power supply
Voltage range
18 to 34 V DC
Current consumption
120 mA at 24 V DC
Galvanic isolation from system
and between interfaces
500 V
Ambient conditions
ColdClimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
RS204
00021235-00
Serial interface module; 4x RS232/422/485; up to 1.5MBaud; 128Byte
FIFO; single isolated
RS204 CC
00021674-00
Like RS204; ColdClimate ( )
*T
he following transfer rates [bit / s] can be set via software: 300; 1200; 2400; 4800;
9600; 19,2k; 28,8k;38,4k; 57,6k; 76,8k; 115,2k; 153,6k; 230,4k; 460,8k; 921,6k or
250k; 300k; 375k; 500k; 750k; 1,5Mbit/s
Accessories RS204
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/02 B
00012058-00
Terminal 02-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
171
Ethernet
Ethernet Remote Station ERS202 CC
The module ERS202 serves as a remote slave module
for sub-stations (e.g. redundant networks).
It manages the local data and the exchange of two
Ethernet ports to the for example redundant master
controllers. Easy configuration and efficient data
exchange allows for safe operation with the fastest
possible switchover.
The robust design as a cold climate version
provides protection even under hard environmental
conditions. An integrated power supply simplifies the
construction.
•The module offers the following features:
•1 Serial interface
•2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s
with status displays
•1 USB interface
•Status indicating LEDs for RUN, INIT and ERROR
•RAM 256 MB DRAM
•Data memory 512 Kb NVRAM
•Program memory of 16 MB and internal FLASH (4
MB for system software, 12 MB for redundancy
configuration)
•Integrated power supply
Item ERS202 CC
172
Item no.
00021244-00
Ethernet
ERS202
Processor + memory
CPU
x86
NVRAM (data memory)
512 kB
DRAM (working memory)
256 MB
FLASH (program memory)*
16 MB internal
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232
Ethernet
2x 10 / 100 base-Tx
USB
1x USB 2.0
Power supply
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Nominal power
17 W
Current consumption at + 5 V
2000 mA
Current consumption at + 15 V
250 mA
Current consumption at - 15 V
200 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronization pulse for Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions
ColdClimate ( )
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C, fan-free
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95% with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95% with condensation
Order codes
ERS202 CC
00021244-00
Ethernet Remote Station; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x USB2.0; inegrated
power supply 17W; ColdClimate ( )
* depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
Accessories ERS202
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
173
System networking – Bus Expansion
Standardized performance
With the bus expansion modules from
Bachmann electronic for the CPU station,
additional backplanes with I/O modules can
be added. A configuration is not required
to do this; at system start all stations and
modules will be automatically detected and
initialized. All I/O modules can be reached
transparently; the physical structure of
the control system does not need to be
considered. Organization of the controller
in multiple stations permits both spatial
adaptation to the control cabinet, as well
as wide-area distribution of I/O modules
for extended machines and plants. There
is no restriction for the user in terms
of performance and convenience. The
interconnected backplanes behave as if
they were connected on a single, large
backplane.
Topology: bus expansion
M1
BEM
<3m
BES
BES
174
105
Bus Expansion Modules
BEx200 Series
Features
Bus expansion master module:
1 interface
Bus expansion slave module:
2 interfaces (cascadable)
Up to 6 substations
Minimal signal delay
Distances of up to 3 m between stations
Integrated watchdog on slave modules
175
Bus Expansion
Bus Expansion Modules
BEx200 Series
With the bus expansion modules BEM211 and BES212
a »high speed« connection up to 3 m away is possible
with less than 1.5 µs access time to distributed
I / O units. Up to six distributed substations can be
directly interconnected in a daisy chain topology. Each
substation can in turn handle up to 15 M1 standard
modules.
The wiring using RJ45 connectors is one advantage
of this new technology. Thus wiring is significantly
facilitated. A special protocol is not required to use
the I / Os with the bus expansion. The user can access
these modules directly: As if they were local.
The bus expansion module BES212 / N with integrated
24 V power supply provides power for the substation.
•Bus expansion master module with 1 interface
•Bus expansion slave module with 2 interfaces
•Bus expansion slave module optionally with
integrated power supply
•Up to 6 local substations
•Minimal signal delay
•Distances of up to 3 m between 2 stations
•Integrated watchdog on slave modules
Item Item no.
BEM21100012846-00
BES21200012847-00
BES212 / N
00012848-00
176
Bus Expansion
BEx200 Series
Bus expansion interface
Line length
3m
Transmission medium
CAT7 special cable
Max. number of stations
6 (BES212/N)
Integrated power supply (optional)
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power
17 W
Output current at +5 V
2A
Output current at +15 V
250 mA
Output current at -15 V
200 mA
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
BEM211
00012846-00
Bus expansion master module with 1 interface
BES212
00012847-00
Bus expansion slave module with 2 interfaces (up to 6 stations)
BES212 / N
00012848-00
Bus expansion slave module with 2 interfaces and integrated power
supply 17 W (up to 6 stations)
Accessories BEx200 Series
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
K-BE211/0.5 m
00012931-00
Cable bus expansion with RJ45 connector with 0.5 meter, converted
K-BE211/1.0 m
00012931-01
Cable bus expansion with RJ45 connector with 1.0 meter, converted
K-BE211/2.0 m
00012931-03
Cable bus expansion with RJ45 connector with 2.0 meter, converted
K-BE211/3.0 m
00012931-02
Cable bus expansion with RJ45 connector with 3.0 meter, converted
177
System networking – FASTBUS
Extensive networking possibilities
With the aid of FO-based FASTBUS
solutions numerous distributed tasks can
be executed easily and reliably. FASTBUS
permits a mixed topology of star and
linear networking. In order to design
distributed stations even more compact,
FASTBUS slaves with integrated power
supplies are available. These stations are
capable of supplying the I/O modules on
the substations. Between the individual
stations distances of up to 2000 m can be
bridged with no problems, in this regard
the galvanic separation is ensured by the
fiber optic connection. Use of the FASTBUS
does not require a configuration, or other
special handling in the software, but rather
functions in accordance with the »plug and
play« principle.
FASTBUSFASTBUS
Topology:
CONTROL CABINET
MOTOR
SPEED SENSOR
T
MPC
FM21x
FS212
178
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
FS211
T
FASTBUS
FASTBUS Modules Fx210 Series
Features
Fast, fail-safe distribution via fibre optic cables
(up to 200 m)
Master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Slave modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Up to 15 remote substations, cascadable
Group isolation: 500 V
FASTBUS Modules Fx220 Series
Features
Distances to 2000 m via multimode cable
Master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Slave modules with integrated power supply
Up to 15 remote substations, cascadable
Connection technology via robust Harting PushPull®
connector or LC patch cable
179
FASTBUS
FASTBUS Modules Fx210 Series
The FASTBUS modules, FM211, FM212, FS211/N,
and FS212/N are designed to enable distribution of
substations over long distances with a very low signal
delay. The power supply integrated in the FASTBUS
slave modules, FS211 / N and FS212 / N can supply the
I / O modules of a substation.
•FASTBUS master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
•FASTBUS slave modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
•FASTBUS slave modules with integrated power
supply
•Up to 15 distributed substations
•Distances to 40 m for POF cable, 150 m for HCS
cables or 200 m for special HCS cables between
2 stations
•Status display (RUN/ERR) and display for fiber type
•Minimal signal delay
Item Item no.
FM21100017821-00
FM21200017822-00
FS211/N00017823-00
FS212/N00017824-00
180
FASTBUS
Fx210 Series
FASTBUS interface
Line length
40 / 150 / 200 m between the stations,
Total length max: 1000 m
Transmission medium
Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) max. 40 m (POF sometimes also referred
to as PMMA)
Hard Cladded Silica (HCS) max. 150 m (HCS sometimes also
referred to as Plastic Silica Fiber (PCF))
Special HCS cable 200 m
Number of stations
Max. 16
Integrated power supply
Input voltage
24 VDC (18 to 34 V)
Current consumption
Max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power
17 W
Output current at +5 V
2A
Output current at +15 V
250 mA
Output current at -15 V
200 mA
Galvanic isolation from the system
500 V
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
FM211
00017821-00
FASTBUS master module with 1 FO interface; HCS/PCF 150 m or
POF 40 m
FM212
00017822-00
FASTBUS master module with 2 FO interfaces; HCS/PCF 150 m or
POF 40 m
FS211 / N
00017823-00
FASTBUS slave module with 1 FO interface; HCS/PCF 150 m or POF
40 m; integrated power supply 17 W
FS212 / N
00017824-00
FASTBUS slave module with 2 FO interfaces; HCS/PCF 150 m or POF
40 m; integrated power supply 17 W
181
FASTBUS
Accessories Fx210 Series
182
Item
Item no.
Description
LWLP1 connector
00009502-00
Connector for plastic fiber optic cable. 2-line
LWLP1 bush
00009514-00
Bush LWL Plastic per piece
LWLP polishing set
00009696-00
Polishing set for LWL Plastic (HFBR-4593/Hewlett Packard)
LWLP-WKZ1
00010126-00
Skinning tool for LWL Plastic Type RS
LWLP gripper
00009695-00
BNC-Crimpgripper (Pressmaster DCC 1113)
K-LWLP1
0.5m
00009624-02
POF Cable 0.5m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
1.0m
00009624-00
POF Cable 1.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
2.0m
00009624-01
POF Cable 2.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
3.0m
00009624-06
POF Cable 3.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
5.0m
00009624-04
POF Cable 5.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1
7.0m
00009624-11
POF Cable 7.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 10.0m
00009624-03
POF Cable 10.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 15.0m
00009624-07
POF Cable 15.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 20.0m
00009624-05
POF Cable 20.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 30.0m
00009624-12
POF Cable 30.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLP1 40.0m
00009624-15
POF Cable 40.0m duplex Plastic Optical Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
2.0m
00010762-07
HCS Cable 2.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
10.0m
00010762-04
HCS Cable 10.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
15.0m
00010762-06
HCS Cable 15.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1
90.0m
00010762-01
HCS Cable 90.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1 100.0m
00010762-03
HCS Cable 100.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
K-LWLH1 120.0m
00010762-02
HCS Cable 120.0m duplex 200µm HCS Fiber; Fx21x Fastbus
LWLH connector
00010949-00
Connector for LWLH (plug plus crimping sleeve, 4 per cable)
Fiber optic cable
housing ZA
00011105-00
housing for 2 LWLH connectors with lock, for the A channel of a
Fx21x
Fiber optic cable
housing ZB
00011622-00
housing for 2 LWLH connectors with lock, for the B channel of a
Fx212
LWLH-WKZ-SET
00010952-00
tool set for LWLH with cutter, Skinning tool, Crimpgripper, Diamond
cutter
LWLH/-Cap
00011188-00
Cap for transport protection of fiber connector housing
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
FASTBUS
FASTBUS Modules Fx220 Series
The FASTBUS modules FM221, FM222, FS221 and
FS222 are designed to enable distribution
of substations over long distances with a very
low signal delay. The power supply integrated
in the FASTBUS slave modules FS221/N and
FS222/N can supply the I/O modules of
a substation. The flexible connector concept
allows easy connection via a patch cable or
an industrial grade push-pull plug connection
via an adapter.
•FASTBUS master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
•FASTBUS slave modules with integrated power
supply
•Up to 15 distributed substations
•Connection technology via robust Harting PushPull®
connector or LC patch cable
•Distances to 2000 m via multimode cable
•Minimal signal delay
•ColdClimate models ( )
Item
Item no.
FM22100016747-10
FM221 CC
00018091-10
FM22200016747-00
FS221/N00016749-10
FS221/N CC
00018092-10
FS222/N00016749-00
Screwable adapter* for using PushPull® connector:
Item
Item no.
Adapter*00016682-00
* This adapter is needed for PushPull® connector. With screwed adapter no LC patch cord should be
plugged, as this covers the LC-release lever and thus can not be removed.
183
FASTBUS
Fx220 Series
FASTBUS interface
Line length
2000 m between the stations,
Total length max: 2300 m
Transmission medium
Multimode fiber (50/125 μm and 62.5/125 µm) max. 2000 m
FOC connector type LC
FOC guide wavelength 1310 nm
Number of stations
Max. 16 (max. 10 per line)
Link budget
> 8 dB (3 dB Reserve)
Diagnostic possibilities
Fiber optic cable – received light
output
HW: three-color status LED
SW: 0 – 100 %
Integrated power supply
Input voltage
24 VDC (18 to 34 V)
Nominal power
17 W
Output current at +5 V
2A
Output current at +15 V
250 mA
Output current at -15 V
200 mA
Ambient conditions
Standard
ColdClimate
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
FM221
FASTBUS master module with 1 FO-port; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber;
up to 2000m; LC connector
FM221 CC
like FM221; ColdClimate ( )
FM222
FASTBUS master with 2 FO-ports; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber; up to
2000m; LC connector
FS221/N
FASTBUS slave 1 FO-port; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber; up to 2000m;
LC connector; integrated power supply 17W
FS221/N CC
like FS221/N; ColdClimate ( )
FS222/N
FASTBUS slave 2 FO-ports; 50/62.5µm multi mode fiber; up to
2000m; LC connector; integrated power supply 17W
Accessories Fx220 Series
184
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
PushPull®-Adapter
00016682-00
Adapter for Harting PushPull LC Connector
FASTBUS
Accessories Fx220 Series*
Item
Order codes
Manufacturer
Description
LC connector
SXLC-DK0-56-0010
LEONI
LC connector duplex uniboot multimode type2
for multimode fibers with 125 μm outer diameter
(Minibreakout-cable)
Harting connectors
09 57 402 0500 020 HARTING
HARTING PushPull LC duplex plastic Multi Mode
SFP (Breakout-cable)
Harting connectors
09 57 409 0500 020 HARTING
HARTING PushPull LC duplex metal Multi Mode
SFP (Breakout-cable)
Cable Recommendations*
Item
Order codes
Manufacturer
LC patch cable
JUDNAAUXXc77AO0
LEONI AG
Length
[m]
Description
c = 0005
0.5
c = 001
1
c = 003
3
I-V(ZN)Y 2G50/125 TB900L
2.8
patched
Cable: 84950785G222
Side A: LC
Side B: LC
c = 005
5
c = 010
10
c = 030
30
Operating and storage
temperature -40 to +70 °C
* Information without guarantee, order directly from the manufacturer
185
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Proven millions of times over
The Controller Area Network (CAN) in the
CANopen specification has now developed
to become the leading fieldbus system for
industrial automation. Proven millions of
times over and perfectly mature, it offers
the ideal basis for safe, easy, and yet
flexible networking tasks. By using only
one fieldbus, the compact CAN I / O
modules from Bachmann electronic
facilitate the homogeneous design of an
automation system with high efficiency and
packing density. Galvanic separation from
the main station, the scalable range, and
the extremely low-cost wiring make the
modules particularly attractive for
the users.
Possible topology: CANopen
186
M1 CONTROLLER WITH CAN MASTER
CAN SLAVE
MX2xx WITH INTEGRATED
CAN INTERFACE
CAN SLAVE WITH CS200 HEAD
CAN SLAVE
CAN SLAVE
CANopen
CANopen Master Module
CM202
Features
Up to 4 CM202 modules per M1 controller
2 independent CAN buses per CANopen
master module
Can be used either as NMT master or NMT
slave
Transfer rate: 10 kbit / s to 1 Mbit / s
CANopen Slave Modules
CS200/x
Features
Head module for CANopen slave stations
Up to 30 I / O modules per slave station
Optional integrated power supply
Transfer rate: 10 kbit / s to 1 Mbit / s
187
CANopen
CAN Slave - Universal Analog/
Digital Input/Output Module
DA3284-C
Features
Compact CAN slave I / O module
8 analog inputs:
±10 V, ±1 V, Pt100, Pt1000, 0 (4) to 20 mA
4 analog outputs ±10 V,
either ±10 V, 0 (4) to 20 mA configurable
16 digital inputs
16 digital inputs or outputs (can be configured
individually), 2 integrated counter inputs
CAN Slave - Digital Input/Output
Modules DIOxxx-C
Features
Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
16 / 32 / 64 input channels, of which 16 / 32 / 32 free
can be configured as output (DIO)
Digital outputs each with 1 A continuous current
Supply voltage: 18 to 34 VDC
3-wire connection technology
188
CANopen
CAN Slave - Digital Input/Output
Modules TCO2xx-C
Features
Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
8 / 16 temperature sensor inputs
for temperature sensor types J and K
Measuring range: 0 to 500 / 800 °C
12 / 24 digital each with max. 1 A
CANopen Configurator
Features
Graphic configurator
Easy integration of the DCF files
Multiple networks
(up to 8 CAN networks per CPU)
CANSync for synchronization of drives*
CAN monitor for commissioning
and diagnostics
IP-based access to CAN nodes
with »IP over CAN« in accordance with CiA
Draft 301 / 405
*C
ANSync synchronization also via
the SYNC mechanism of the CPU
Note: There are processor modules
with integrated CAN interface
(see the processor modules section)
189
CANopen
CANopen Master Module CM202
The CAN master module CM202 can operate either
one or two separated networks. Both connections can
be configured independently as NMT master or slave.
In an M1 controller up to four CANopen
master modules CM202 can be operated.
•Up to 4 CANopen master modules
per M1 controller
•2 independent CAN buses per CANopen master
module
•Can be used as NMT master or slave
•Transfer rate 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud
•Bus length to 5000 m (signal repeater required)
•Galvanic isolation
•Short circuit proof
Item Item no.
CM20200009698-00
CM202 CC
00016404-00
190
CANopen
CM202
CANopen master
Max. number of masters
4 per M1 controller
Number of CAN buses
2 per module
Max. number of nodes
64 per CAN bus
Protocol
CANopen to CiA DS 301
Device profile
In accordance with CiA DS 405
Firmware
Reloadable (FLASH technology)
Current consumption
320 mA / 5 VDC
CAN interface
Transfer rate
10 k to 1 Mbaud
Bus length
Max. 5000 m
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment
In accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Signal level
In accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Galvanic isolation,
interfaces to the system
500 V
CANopen features in compliance with CiA Product Guide
CANopen master
Yes
CANopen slave
Yes
Extended boot-up
No
Minimum boot-up
Yes
COB ID distribution
Per SDO, no DBT
Node ID distribution
Yes (no LMT)
No. of TxPDOs
128
No. of RxPDOs
128
PDO modes
Sync, async, RTR, event
Variable PDO mapping
Yes
Emergency message
Yes client (master), server (slave)
Life guarding
yes (heartbeat and / or node guarding)
No. of SDOs
4 server, 64 client
Device profile
301, 302, 405
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
CM202
00009698-00
CAN fieldbus master module; 2x CAN/CANopen; up to 1Mbit/s;
Master/Slave configurable; CANsync; isolated
CM202 CC
00016404-00
Like CM202; ColdClimate ( )
191
CANopen
Accessories CM202
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
K-CAN/xm
K-CAN/0.5m
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
S-CAN/1B
192
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
CANopen
CANopen Slave Modules CS200/x
The CS200 / x is the head module for CANopen slave
stations. The CS200 / x allows modular CANopen slave
stations to be set up from the M1 modules. The same
modules that are used for local stations can be used
to design a slave station, which simplifies stockkeeping and consistently ensures the same technical
data.
•Head module for CANopen slave stations
•Up to 30 I / O modules per slave station
•Optional integrated power supply
•Transfer rate 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud
•Bus length to 5000 m ­(signal repeater required)
•Two internally connected CAN interfaces for
loop-through of the cable
•Galvanic isolation between CAN interfaces and
control electronics
•Node address can be set via rotary switch
•2 serial interfaces (COM 1/2)
•External 24 V power supply (CS200/N)
Item Item no.
CS20000013178-00
CS200 / N
00013179-00
193
CANopen
CS200 / x
CANopen slave
Node ID
1 to 254 selectable via rotary switch
Protocol
CANopen to CiA DS 301 V3.0
Device profile
In accordance with CiA DS 401 for I / O, in accordance with CiA DS 402
for ACR
Firmware
Reloadable (FLASH technology)
Number of I / O modules
15 per station, 30 using bus extension modules BES / BEM or FASTBUS
Current consumption
600 mA / 5 V, 15 mA / + 15 V, 40 mA / - 15 V
Serial interfaces
COM1: RS232, COM2: RS232 / 422 / 485
CAN interface
Transfer rate
10 k to 1 Mbaud
Bus length
Max. 5000 m
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment
In accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Signal level
In accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Terminating resistance
123 ohm, external
Galvanic isolation,
Interfaces to the system
500 V
CANopen features in compliance with CiA Product Guide
CANopen master
N
CANopen slave
Y
Extended boot-up
N
Minimum boot-up
Y
COB ID distribution
Per SDO, no DBT
Node ID distribution
N, (no LMT)
No. of TxPDOs / RxPDOs
128 / 128
PDO modes
sync, async, RTR, event
Variable PDO mapping
Y
Emergency message
Y
Life guarding
Yes (heartbeat / node guarding)
No. of SDOs
4 servers
Device profile
301, 401, 402
Optional integrated power supply (optional) CS200 / N
194
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power
17 W
Current consumption at + 5 V
2000 mA
Current consumption at + 15 V
250 mA
Current consumption at – 15 V
200 mA
CANopen
CS200 / x
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
CS200
00013178-00
CAN bus master 1 line 1 Mbit/s, processor system, isolated
CS200 / N
00013179-00
CAN fieldbus slave module; 1x CAN/CANopen; 1Mbit/s; isolated;
integrated power supply 17W
Accessories CS200/x
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/03 B
00012052-00
Terminal 03-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
K-CAN/xm
K-CAN/0.5m
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
S-CAN/1B
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
195
CANopen
CAN Slave - Digital Input/Output
Modules DIOxxx-C
The digital I / O modules DIO16-C, DIO32-C or
DIO264-C are stand-alone CAN slave modules with
16, 32 or 64 digital input / output channels.
•Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
•16 / 32 channels can be freely configured as input or
output
•Digital outputs each with 1 A continuous current
•Two internally connected CAN interfaces for
loop-through of the cable
•Galvanic isolation between CAN interfaces
and control electronics
•Baud rate and node ID can be set via rotary switch
•Supply voltage 18 to 34 VDC
•Operating range 0 to +60 °C without additional
cooling
•Full wiring without additional backplanes
•Snappable on EN 50022 backplanes
Item Item no.
DIO16-C00010285-00
DIO32-C00010129-00
DIO264-C00009205-00
196
CANopen
DIOxxx-C
DIO16-C
DIO32-C
DIO264-C
Quantity
Max. 16
Max. 32
Max. 64
Input delay
< 3.5 ms
< 3.5 ms
< 3.5 ms
Internal resistance
6 kΩ
6 kΩ
6 kΩ
Status display
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
Quantity
Max. 16
Max. 32
Max. 32
Supply voltage
18 to 34 VDC
18 to 34 VDC
18 to 34 VDC
Isolated output blocks
1-16
1-16, 17-32
1-16, 17-32
Nominal output current
1A
1A
1A
Output current (sum / block)
Max. 12 A
Max. 12 A
Max. 12 A
Switching frequency
Max. 500 Hz
Max. 500 Hz
Max. 500 Hz
Short-circuit proof
Yes
Yes
Yes
Status display
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
Transfer rate (Kbaud)
10 to 1000
10 to 1000
10 to 1000
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub
2x 9-pin D-Sub
2x 9-pin D-Sub
Module ID
1 to 254
1 to 254
1 to 254
Galvanic isolation
500 V
500 V
500 V
Terminating resistance
123 Ω, external
123 Ω, external
123 Ω, external
Inputs
Outputs
CAN interface
External power supply
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption
(without I / O)
Normally 100 mA at 24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
CAN protocols
CAL / CANopen
DS 301 communication profile, DS 401 device profile
Status LEDs
RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
DIO16-C
00010285-00
CAN slave - digital input/output module; 16x DIO; 24V / 1A; 1 group;
CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
DIO32-C
00010129-00
CAN Slave - Digital IO module; 32x DIO, 24V / 1A; 2 groups; CAN/­
CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
DIO264-C
00009205-00
CAN Slave - Digital IO module; 32x DI; 32x DIO, 24V / 1A; 2 groups;
CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
197
CANopen
Accessories DIOxxx-C
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-DIO16-C B+C
00012011-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/07; 4x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strip and coding elements
KZ-DIO32-C B+C
00012012-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/07; 8x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strip and coding elements
KZ-DIO264-C B+C
00012014-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 6x KZ 51/12) with
labeling strip and coding elements
K-CAN/xm
K-CAN/0.5m
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
198
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
S-CAN/1B
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
S-CAN/1S
00011036-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, for DIOxx-C,
TCO2xx-C, DA3284-C and female-femail CAN cable
CANopen
CAN Slave - Universal Analog/
Digital Input/Output Module
DA3284-C
Noteworthy compactness and a clever mix of possible
signal types are offered by the CAN bus compact
module DA3284-C. As a stand-alone fieldbus module
(CANopen), the module offers the complete I /O
spectrum already integrated for small applications
or distributed signal connection points. It is the ideal
addition to the familiar family of CAN digital modules
and is an optimum »all-in-one« peripheral for small
applications, e. g. such as those based on the control
terminals CT300 / CT200 from Bachmann electronic.
The channel-specific programmable mode (on / off
or applied standard signal) enables the unit to be
adapted ideally to a wide range of applications
without any interface converter. The robust design
and processing quality, its outstanding technical
specifications, seldom available from the usual
fieldbus peripherals, are very impressive.
•Compact CAN slave I /O module
•8 analog inputs ±10 V, ±1 V, Pt100, Pt1000, 0 (4)
to 20 mA
•4 analog outputs ±10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA
configurable
•16 digital inputs
•16 digital inputs or outputs (individually
configurable)
•2 integrated counter inputs
•Digital outputs each with 0.5 A continuous current
•Error detection for digital and analog channels
•Full wiring without additional backplanes
•Powerful 32-bit processor for fast cycle times
Item Item no.
DA3284-C00013597-00
199
CANopen
DA3284-C
Analog inputs
Quantity
8
Measuring ranges, selectable by channel
±10 V, ±1V
Pt100, Pt1000: -100 °C to +500 °C
0 (4) to 20 mA
Resolution
14 bit
Sampling rate
< 1 ms for all channels (500 µs)
Input cutoff frequency
750 Hz (3 dB)
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Voltage 0.05 %
Current / Pt100 / Pt1000 0.1 %
Error at the entire temperature
range
Voltage 0.2 %
Current/Pt100/Pt1000 0.2 %
Error detection
cable break (at voltage), current or temperature error
Analog outputs
Quantity
4
Measuring ranges, selectable by channel
±10 V, 0 (4) to 20 mA configurable
Resolution
14 bit
Conversion time
Depends on CAN protocol
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
Voltage 0.05 %
Current 0.2 %
Error at the entire temperature range
Voltage 0.1 %
Current 0.4 %
Error detection
Load error
Digital inputs
Quantity
16 (max. 32)
Input delay
500 µs default value, filter adjustable
Input current
Normally 3 mA at +24 VDC
Input type
Current consumption, type 1 in accordance with IEC61131
Status display
Green LED
Connection technology
3-wire (+ / - / signal)
Counter
Counting channels
2 (digital input channels 1 and 2)
Counter frequency
Max. 5 kHz
Counter functions
Counting, speed measurement (period duration, gate time)
measurement)
Counting modes
- infinite up / down
- one-time up / down to / from reference value
- periodic up / down to / from reference value
Digital outputs
200
Quantity
16
Supply voltage
18 to 34 VDC
Isolated output blocks
1 to 12, 13 to 24
Nominal output voltage
0.5 A
Output current sum / block
Max. 8 A / 4 A per block
Switching frequency
500 Hz (with purely resistive load)
Short-circuit proof
Yes
CANopen
DA3284-C
Digital outputs
Error detection
Short circuit / excess temperature by block
power supply per block ≤ 16.5 V
Status display
Green LED
Connection technology
3-wire (+ / - / signal)
CAN interface
CANopen
DS 301 communication profile, DS 401 device profile
Status LEDs
RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Transfer rate (Kbaud)
10 to 1000 (adjustable via rotary switch)
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub
Module ID
1 to 127 (configurable via rotary switch or SW)
Galvanic isolation
500
Terminating resistance
123 ohm, external
Input / output connection technology
Connection for digital inputs / outputs
and supply
Phoenix Contact MINICOMBICON connector RM 5.8 with flange
Connection technology for digital
inputs / outputs and supply
Screw clamp, spring tension clamp, crimp
Connection for analog inputs / outputs
Phoenix Contact MINI COMBICON RM 3.5 connector with flange
Connection technology for analog
inputs / outputs
Screw clamp, spring tension clamp
Connection general
Plug codable, labeling by channels
Operating conditions
Voltage range
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption
≤ 270 mA at +24 VDC for module supply + load
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Galvanic isolation CAN bus module
500 VRMS
Galvanic isolation I / O channels
None
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order code
DA3284-C
00013597-00
CAN slave universal input/output module; 16x DI; 16x DIO;
24V/0.5A; 4x AO +-10V 20mA; 8x AI +-10V +-1V 20mA
Pt100/1000; CAN/CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s
201
CANopen
Accessories DA3284-C
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-DA2384-C B+C
00013832-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (8x KZ 51/12; 1x KZ 51/07; 4x
KZ 35/03; 4x KZ 35/12) with labeling strip and coding elements
K-CAN/xm
202
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
K-CAN/0.5m
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
S-CAN/1B
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
S-CAN/1S
00011036-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, for DIOxx-C,
TCO2xx-C, DA3284-C and female-femail CAN cable
CANopen
CAN Slave - Temperature Input/
Output Modules TCO2xx-C
The temperature I / O modules, TCO204-C, TCO208-C
and TCO216-C are stand-alone CAN slave modules
with 8 or 16 thermocouple inputs and 12 or 24 digital
outputs.
•Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
•Thermocouple inputs for thermocouple
types J and K
•Measuring range 0 to +500 °C / +800 °C configurable
•Sensor break detection
•Digital outputs each with 1 A
•Supply voltage 18 to 34 VDC
•Operating range 0 to +60 °C
•Snappable on EN 50022 backplanes
•CAN node ID can be set (hex switch)
•Baud rate is adjustable (hex switch)
Item Item no.
TCO208-C00010850-00
TCO216-C00008673-00
TCO2xx-C
Temperature sensor inputs
Quantity
8 / 16
Sensor types
J or K, selectable per input
Measuring range
0 to +500 °C / +800 °C configurable
Resolution
12 bit
Linearization
Polynomial in accordance with DIN IEC 584
Cold junction compensation
0 to +133 °C (K)
Sampling period
16 ms
Sensor break detection
Yes
Digital outputs
Quantity
12 / 24
Supply voltage
18 to 34 VDC
Output current per channel
0.5 A (max. 1 A)
Output current (sum)
Max. 12 A
Switching frequency
Max. 500 Hz at 1 kOhm ohmic load
Short-circuit proof
Yes
Status display
Green LEDs
203
CANopen
TCO2xx-C
CAN interface
Transfer rate
10 k to 1 Mbaud
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Module ID
1 to 254
Galvanic isolation via interfaces
500 V
Terminating resistance
123 ohm, external
Status LEDs
RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Communication profile
CiA DS 301
Device profile
CiA DS 401
External power supply
Supply voltage
18 to 34 VDC
Current consumption (without I / O)
normally 105 / 110 / 120 mA at 24 VDC
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
TCO208-C
00010850-00
CAN slave temperature input/digital output module; 8x
thermocouple type J, K; 12x digital Out 24V / 0,5A; CAN/
CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
TCO216-C
00008673-00
CAN slave temperature input/digital output module; 16x
thermocouple type J, K; 24x digital Out 24V / 0,5A; CAN/
CANopen; 2x DSUB 9 (In/Out); up to 1Mbit/s; isolated
Accessories TCO2xx-C
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-TCO204-C B+C
00012022-30
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 1x KZ 51/13; 1x
KZ 35/12) with labeling strip and coding elements
KZ-TCO216-C B+C
00012015-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 2x KZ 51/13; 4x
KZ 35/12) with labeling strip and coding elements
K-CAN/xm
K-CAN/0.5m
00008684-03
Cabel CAN with 0.5 m length
K-CAN/1.0m
00008684-08
Cabel CAN with 1.0 m length
K-CAN/2.0m
00008684-04
Cabel CAN with 2.0 m length
K-CAN/5.0m
204
Cabel CAN with x m length (x = user-defined)
male <> female, without terminating resistor
00008684-06
Cabel CAN with 5.0 m length
S-CAN/1B
00009383-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, female
S-CAN/1S
00011036-00
Connector CAN-terminator, 37 mm high, 120 Ω, for DIOxx-C,
TCO2xx-C, DA3284-C and female-femail CAN cable
CANopen
CANopen Configurator
The Bachmann SolutionCenter supports the
commissioning and diagnostics of CAN and CANopen
networks with integrated tools. With a few mouse
clicks a network can be configured from standard
EDS files and transferred to the controller. Thanks
to the easy interface to the application and to the
commissioning tools a signal test can be executed
immediately.
•Managing EDS files in the device catalog
•Online and offline configuration of networks
•Bus scan of online networks for convenient
creation of a configuration
•Graphic network presentation
•Graphic presentation of the PDO mapping
•Tabular editor for network parameters
•Editors for specific device parameters
•Tabular editor for the object directory enables
adding, changing, and deleting of network variables
•Fast workflow for the creation of standard
configurations
The CAN monitor in the SolutionCenter enables more
extensive diagnostics. It offers dialogs for:
•Direct SDO access
•NMT and LSS commands
•PDO triggering
•Access to emergency lists
205
Fieldbuses – DeviceNet
Proven basis, new view.
DeviceNet is based on the same physical
layer as CAN, however it has an objectoriented view of the process data and uses
monitored point-to-point connections.
The bus system is standardized through
the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association).
The DeviceNet master module and its
software equipment enable operation of
the M1 controller as DeviceNet master
and DeviceNet slave, as well as simultaneous
operation in two networks in combined
master/slave mode.
The cyclic data is available to the application
program via the process image. Acyclic
accesses and status commands are possible
via libraries for M-PLC and C/C++. The
configuration is executed via the Bachmann
SolutionCenter.
DeviceNet Master DNM201
The DNM201 fieldbus master module allows the M1
controller to be used as bus master in DeviceNet
networks. The DNM201 module is used to connect
drives and input / output interfaces. The system bus of
an M1 supports up to 8 separate networks, each with
a maximum of 64 nodes that can be operated with
different cycle times. Thus the bus architecture allows
up to 512 DeviceNet stations (nodes) to be controlled
individually.
•1 DeviceNet module for up to 64 nodes
•8 separate networks with max. 512 nodes
(requires 8 DNM201 modules in one M1 system)
•Support of »Multi-Master« mode
•5-pin connector (in acc. with open DeviceNet
standard)
•Isolation voltage from DNM201 to case 100 V
•Isolation voltage from DeviceNet bus to system
voltages of the controller 500 V
•Baud rates 125 / 250 / 500 kbit / s
•Extensive status LEDs
•Modes: Master (multi-master capable), slave,
master / slave
•Module and network status LEDs (MS / NS)
•Error detection: Duplicate MAC-ID check,
device heartbeat, device shutdown message
•Automatic resumption of communication after
failure
Item Item no.
DNM20100012696-00
206
DeviceNet
DNM201
Technical data
Maximum number of stations
64 nodes
Number of independent DeviceNet lines
Up to 8 DNM201 modules per M1 system (equals 512 nodes)
Bus connection
5-pin DeviceNet connector
Galvanic isolation via interfaces
500 V
Baud rates
125 / 250 / 500 kbit / s
DPRAM size
4 or 8 kByte
Protocol conformity
ODVA specification release 2.0
Access libraries
For C or IEC 61131
Modes
Master (multi-master ability – multiple masters on the same
CAN bus possible), slave, master / slave
Supported communication services
I / O communication bit-strobe, polling, change of state, cyclic
to 448 byte connection size, support of »Group2Server« as
slaves, no multicast polling, explicit message, fragmentation
protocol, UCMM, message forwarding
LEDs
RDY
Yellow off: Controller cannot initialize the DNM module
Yellow on: Controller has successfully initialized the module
MS RUN (MS=Module State)
Green on: DNM ready
Green flashing: DNM is being configured
MS ERR (MS=Module State)
Red on: DNM not ready
NS RUN (NS=Net State)
Green on: DNM online and connected
Green flashing: DNM online, but not connected / not
completely configured
NS ERR (NS=Net State)
Red on: no network connection possible
Green flashing: Connection in timeout
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order code
DNM201
00012696-00
Device Net master module; 1x device net interface; 500
kbit/s; isolated
Accessories DNM201
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ 51/05 B
00013391-00
Terminal 05-pins grid 5,08; cage clamp terminal with labeling strip
207
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT®
The universal drive bus
The EtherCAT® bus system is ideally
suited for controlling servo-electric drives
by an M1 controller. The Bachmann
SolutionCenter contains convenient tools
for the configuration, commissioning and
diagnosis of the network. In combination
SOLUTIONCENTER
M1-CPU
208
FM
with the Drive Middleware, the project
planning of applications with drives of
different manufacturers is also very easy.
EtherCAT®
EtherCAT® Master and
EtherCAT® Configurator
The EtherCAT® Master for the M1 controller is a pure
software solution and uses an Ethernet port of the
controller CPU. No additional hardware is required.
The cyclical data, which is exchanged automatically
with the slaves, is available in the control system
as process variables and therefore is just as easy
to use as data from local input and output modules.
The user software accesses acyclic data by means of
functions or library modules.
The software on the controller can be synchronized
exactly with the EtherCAT®-Bus by the activation of
distributed clocks to ensure control tasks. Standard
Ethernet traffic to the slaves, e.g. access to the
webserver of a servo amplifier, can be transferred
in parallel on the same connection via Ethernetover-EtherCAT® (EoE). During this process, the M1
controller routes the packets from the service PC
directly to the EtherCAT® slave. The simple data
transfer to the slave, e.g. for the firmware update, is
also possible with File-over-EtherCAT (FoE).
Configuration, commissioning and testing are
supported by the Bachmann SolutionCenter.
The slave description files (ESI) are managed
in a catalog and compiled for the network. PDO
mapping is generated automatically and can be
changed manually. The cyclical data can be displayed
and tested immediately without any additional
programming. Read and/or write access to all other
service data is also possible in an SDO monitor. File
transfer is supported by a wizard.
Diagnosis of configuration problems is simplified since
the master can also start in the case of configuration
errors and the SolutionCenter displays the
discrepancies after repeating a Busscan. EtherCAT®
slaves can be handled as optional nodes for modularly
designed machines.
209
EtherCAT®
EtherCAT® Master
•Software solution for operation on standard
controller CPUs
•Addressing the slaves via autoincrement or alias
address
•Allocating and checking the alias address
•Supporting optional nodes
•Supports slaves with distributed clock
•Synchronization of application programs and
fieldbus is possible
•Cyclical data exchange via PDO mapping
•Displaying process values as logical I/O modules
and in the PLC process image
•Acyclic data exchange is available for application
program via SDO function interface
•Support of the following profiles:
- CoE (CANopen® over EtherCAT®)
- FoE (File over EtherCAT®)
- EoE (Ethernet over EtherCAT®)
- MDP (Modular Device Profile)
•Function interface for network and slave status
•Extensive diagnostics via system variables
•Quality is ensured through regular participation
in Plug-Fests of the ETG
210
EtherCAT® Configurator
•Integrated in the Bachmann SolutionCenter
•Easy creation of an online configuration by means
of Busscan
•Creation of an offline configuration by selecting
the slave from a catalog
•Management of standard-compliant ESI files in
the catalog
•Monitors for process data, SDO access, reading
and setting of alias addresses
•File transfer wizard
•Subsequently adding, removing and changing the
sequence of slaves
•Targeted search for configuration errors by
repeating Busscan also in the event of an error
•All diagnostic options also via remote
maintenance over network boundaries
•Archiving of configurations in the templates and
solutions EtherCAT®
EtherCAT® Slave Module ECS200
The ECS200 allows connecting a M1 controller system
as slave device to an external EtherCAT® network.
The goal is to use the M1 to control an autonomous
intelligent subsystem within a complex system or
machine. The application programs (PLC, C/ C++)
have full access to the incoming and outgoing cyclic
process data via the MIO and SVI interfaces and
via the process image. The slave state and the
connection state can be recognized by the user
programs. Thus, emergency situations like network
problems or failures of the external EtherCAT®
Master can be handled individually in dedicated
emergency routines. The application programs at
the slave station can be accurately synchronized to
the external EtherCAT® bus for closed-loop control
operations. The execution cycle of the user programs
can be maintained also in emergency situations.
Distributed Clocks are supported. Amount and size of
the incoming and outgoing cyclic data are configured
on the slave station, and then a dedicated ESI file is
generated to configure the master system. The PDO
mapping can be defined statically or can be
created by the EC Master dynamically. As EtherCAT®
slave, the M1 is a module device with a static object
dictionary that does not need to be further configured
by the master. Diagnostic is supported by several LED
indications on the module, by log messages and by a
monitor in the Bachmann SolutionCenter.
•2 EtherCAT® Ports IN, OUT
•Max. 700 Bytes cyclic data for Rx und Tx each
•Bus interval 125 μs to 10 ms
•Distributed Clock
•User programs can be synchronised to EtherCAT®
•Connection- and network state visible for user
programs
•Behavior in case of network problems confi gurable
•LED for display of slave state
•Error-LEDs for In- and Out-Port
•Galvanic isolation from the system
•Condensation-proof ColdClimate design on request
Item ECS200
ECS200 CC
Item no.
00018548-00
00019206-00
211
EtherCAT®
ECS200
EtherCAT® data
EtherCAT® Device Type
Module device
Object dictionary
Statical (depends on configuration of the slave station)
PDO Mapping
Statical or dynamical
Distributed Clock
Available
EtherCAT® data types
BOOL, BIT, USINT, SINT, UINT, INT, UDINT, DINT, REAL, ULINT, LINT, LREAL
Number of cyclic data
Max. 700 Byte respectively in Tx and Rx
Cycle time
≥ 125 µs, depend on CPU and data volume, max. 10 ms
Interface to user program
Access of cyclic data
Process image, UFB channel view, SVI view
Slave Status
Readable, settable through functional interface
Connection quality to network
View as module and channel state of UFB, request by user software
Time-base synchronization
Adapted to synchronization by user software of EC network
Behaviour in the event of
­network break
Further completion of the user software by intervall possible
Mailbox data
On request
Diagnostic
LED Run
Run (permanent light for operational, blinking codes for other slave state)
LEDs Parity Error 1, 2
Failure in the physical receive layer of in or out ports
LEDs EtherCAT® Ports
Standard LED‘s for activity (green) and data rate (orange)
Monitor in SolutionCenter
Value view of state information
Logbook entries
Information host via debug level selectable
Configuration
SolutionCenter
Setting of object directories via UFB channel configurator
System requirements
M-Base
V3.80 or higher
Processor module
Recommended MX207 or higher
Electrical data
Number EtherCAT® Ports
2 (In/out)
Supply
Internal via bus rail BS2xx
Current consumption
Internal 270 mA
Galvanic isolation from the
system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
-30 to +60 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
ColdClimate ( )
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
ECS200
00018548-00
EtherCAT® slave module; 2x Eth100 (In/Out); operation only with CPU
module
ECS200 CC
212
00019206-00
Like ECS200; ColdClimate ( )
EtherCAT®
213
Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS
Widely used, esteemed everywhere.
PROFIBUS is a field bus that is widely
used, particularly in the area of mechanical
engineering and plant engineering and
even today – in spite of all Ethernetbased fieldbuses – it continues to show
increasing quantities. A broad palette of
peripheral components and an active user
organization will also ensure long-term
availability of
PROFIBUS components in the future.
Bachmann electronic offers a fieldbus
interface module for the backplane that can
be used both as master, as well as slave.
The SolutionCenter contains a complete
configurator that enables interfaces to the
engineering tools of other manufacturers
through the consistent application of
standards.
PROFIBUS DP Master Module
DPM200
Features
Fast ASIC technology
Transfer rate:
9.6 kbit / s to 12 Mbit / s
Up to 3 masters per M1 controller
Maximum 125 slave stations (with repeater)
Features
Multiple networks (multiple networks per CPU)
Convenient integration of the GSD files
PROFIBUS DP class 1 master
Support of all baud rates (9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud)
defined in the standard
Transparent access to IO and process variables
214
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP Master Module
DPM200
The interface module for Profibus DP (Distributed
Peripherals) can be operated as DP master, DP slave
or as combined master/slave, which in a multi-master
network offers variables for another master. The
process data is available to the application program
as logical I/O module and thus can be reached via the
process image or via the function interface.
•Up to 3 DPM200 modules per M1 controller
•Transfer rate 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
•8 kByte shared memory for process data image
•Consistency lock for data blocks is configurable
•Two internal bridged connections for loop-through of
the cable
•Galvanic isolation between fieldbus and controller
Item Item no.
DPM20000010555-00
DPM200 CC
00018032-00
215
PROFIBUS
DPM200
PROFIBUS DP master
Large process image
8 Kb x 16 DPM
Firmware
Update via SolutionCenter is possible
Max. number of masters
3 per M1 controller
Max. number of slaves
32 without repeater, 125 with repeater
PROFIBUS Standard
V0
Data length in the DPM
732 bytes per slave
Current consumption
400 mA / 5 VDC
Interface
Transfer rate
9.6 k to 12 Mbaud
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment
In accordance with EN 50170
Signal level
In accordance with RS485 standard
Galvanic isolation,
Interfaces to the system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
ColdClimate
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Order codes
216
DPM200
00010555-00
Profibus master/slave module; 12Mbit/s; Profibus V0; isolated
DPM200 CC
00018032-00
Like DPM200; ColdClimate ( )
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS Configurator
The Device Manager contains a complete
configuration tool for creation of PROFIBUS
configurations for master and slave applications
of the M1 system. Devices from any manufacturer
can be added to the catalog via their standardized
device description file in GSD format, and
integrated in the configuration.
The PROFIBUS configurator enables creation of
networks with an M1 controller as master station
and multiple slave stations. Likewise, M1 DP slave
stations can either be configured together with
an M1 master, or a pure slave configuration can
be created for an M1.
In this regard the slaves can be additional M1
controllers or also standard-conformant slave devices
from other manufacturers. For an M1 controller
a pure slave configuration can also be created.
For this station a GSD file can be exported that
facilitates integration in a different configuration tool.
On the master and slave station the configurator
automatically generates logical I/O modules for
access to the process data that permit an immediate
diagnosis and signal test via the Device Manager
and enable easy integration into the process image.
Bit-coded values can in this manner be conveniently
split into the individual DI or DO signals and given
symbolic channel names, without the necessity of
masking out the bits in the application program.
•Graphic network configuration
•Catalog for managing device descriptions files in
GSD format
•Generates complete network configurations for
applications with M1 as master
•Generates reduced configuration for applications
with M1 as slave, if a master from a different
manufacturer is used
•Exports GSD files for configured M1 slaves for use in
other tools
•Flexible creation of access channels that organize
the byte stream of the PROFIBUS in handy process
values
217
Fieldbuses – PROFINET
More flexibility, a more efficient network.
The Ethernet-based fieldbus system,
PROFINET IO RT, is the technical successor
of PROFIBUS DP. The advantage of
Ethernet as a media is the flexibilty
of the network topology, as standard
Ethernet switches can be used. Moreover,
the network infrastructure can be used
Features
Mode controller (master) and device (slave)
Transmission of I/O channel values of the device
to and from the controller
Transmission of process values (SVI) of the device
to and from the controller via data blocks
Configuration data for I/O channels on the device
(measuring range, signal direction, etc.) are stored
on the controller and transmitted to the devices when
the system boots
Standardized GSDML file available for configuration
in other configuration tools
Minimum bus cycle 1 ms
Data rate 10/100 Mbit
Other TCP/IP data traffic on the same network is
possible
218
in parallel for other traffic. Thanks to the
prioritized transmission of PROFINET, other
protocols, such as FTP, HTML, visualization,
etc. can be operated on the same physical
network.
PROFINET
PROFINET IO (RT)
At Bachmann electronic PROFINET RT is a pure
software solution that can be started on the available
Ethernet ports of the controller. The control system
can be operated as PROFINET controller (master) and
as PROFINET device (slave). The PROFINET device
offers access to its I/O channels to the PROFINET
controller. Each module on the device can be assigned
to another controller, or input values can be read
by several controllers (Shared Device). Moreover,
the PROFINET device offers also access to process
variables of its local application programs. Thus it
is not only possible to create I/O-Slaves but also
devices with local intelligence (I-Device). An I-Device
works directly on its I/O-Signals and synchronizes
itself with a superior controller.
•Transmission of I/O channel values from and to the
controller
•I-Device: Transmission of process variables (SVI)
for coupling between CPUs (intelligent device)
•Shared Device: Modules of a device can be assigned
to several controllers
•Automatic handling of transmission errors,different
switch-on sequences, and network failures
•Extensive diagnostics
•Parallel operation with other Ethernet traffic in the
same network
•Cycle times ≥ 1 ms
•Adjustable reduction ratio for individual process
values that should be transmitted less frequently,
e. g. for analog inputs
219
PROFINET
PROFINET Configurator
The grapical configurator for PROFINET networks is
part of the Device Manager in the SolutionCenter. It
enables the design of the network topology, including
all switches and cables. The devices are managed
via the standardized GSDML files in the PROFINET
catalog.
On the devices, modules can be assigned to slots
according to the information in the GSDML files.
For configuration of I-Devices, the communication
of process variables between M1 PROFINET devices
and the PROFINET controller is organized with data
blocks. SVI variables of the application software
are assigned to the data blocks and can then be
exchanged with a PROFINET controller.
On the M1 PROFINET controller, the I/O and process
valuess of its devices are represented as logical
I/O modules which enable convenient access to the
process data for application software and diagnostic
tools.
Network parameters such as timeout limits,
optional stations, assignment of process values to
communication relations, and further settings are
available in parameter tables.
The controller- and device-configurations are
automatically distributed to all participtating M1
systems. Additionally, the configuration project is
stored on the controllers, so the configuration can be
directly opened for verification or change. This grants
that the maintenance engineer always works on the
current network configuration.
•Complete network configurations for the PROFINET
controller
•Partial network configuratons for M1 PROFINET
devices
•Device catalog for managing GSDML description files
•Free arrangement of the devices in the graphical
network layout editor
•Assignment of the modules to the slots on the
device
•Convenient processing of network and device
parameters in tables
•Generation of logical I/O modules on the controller
•Direct opening of the existing configuration from the
controller
220
PROFINET
221
Fieldbus - M-BUS
Standardized basis, integrated solution.
Energy meters (gas, heat, output, water
etc.) are required in power plants, and
in combined heat and power generation
in particular, for regulation, as well as
accounting. The M-Bus standardized in EN
61334-4-1 is highly prevalent in Europe
for the connection of these meters. The
OSI model, if M-Bus is the physical layer,
the data link according to IEC 870 and the
application layer according to EN 1434-3
are specified for this protocol.
An integrated solution is provided by a rugged
and easily installable M-Bus adapter and
its convenient integration as a fieldbus in
software communication.
MBUS201 Master
The MBUS201 master enables easy connection of a
serial RS232 interface on M-Bus via an adapter.
The M-Bus is a widely used fieldbus in accordance
with EN 13757 for reading out consumption data from
meters (electricity, water, gas, heat). Transmission is
serial via voltage and current modulation on a twowire line that is protected against polarity reversal.
The M-Bus protocol is integrated as an intuitively
configurable fieldbus, and is addressed via the UFB
(Unified FieldBus ) software interface.
•max. 4 MBUS201 masters per M1 controller
•M-Bus protocol implemented as fieldbus
•max. 5 meters (slaves) per master
•Adapter can be inserted directly on the DSUB
connector
•Integrated M-Bus power supply
•Interfaces M-Bus and RS232 are galvanic isolated
•LED display for collision detection and power supply
•Data transmission at 300 to 9600 bps
Item MBUS201
222
Item no.
00019766-00
M-BUS
MBUS201
Interfaces
M-Bus
In accordance with DIN EN 13757-2
Connection
Spring-force terminal in housing, shield support
Number of nodes
Max. 5 counters (slaves) per master
Data rate
300 to 9600 bps
RS232
In accordance with EIA-232, D-Sub 9-pin, socket, no hardware handshake
Power supply
24 V ( 20 to 30 VDC)
Current consumption
Max. 0.25 A
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Status displays
Power supply
LED green
Collision detection- M-Bus
LED yellow
Housing
Dimensions (W x H x D)
32 x 60 x 15 mm
Nickel-plated zinc die-cast
Mounting
Hex socket (size 2.5) with ball head
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity, operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. Humidity, storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
MBUS201
00019766-00
M-Bus master adapter; energy measurement fieldbus EN13757; M-Bus
interface to RS232 DSUB 9; 24V power supply; up to 9,6kbit/s
223
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Simply proven, proven simple
Modbus is a very simple, but proven
fieldbus system. In principle it only knows
the two data types, bool and integer, and
a set of queries that are always posed by
the master and answered by the slaves.
Modbus RTU was originally developed for
serial interfaces, later the principles were
then extended to Ethernet with Modbus
TCP and Modbus UPD.
Modbus Master / Modbus Slave
Features
Modbus master and slave available
Supported protocols: Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP,
­Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII
Multiple protocols can be used simultaneously
Uses existing interfaces of the controller, special
hardware is not required
Interfaces can be spatially distributed on FASTBUS
or BES substations.
Configuration via Device Manager
224
Thanks to its simplicity and its inter
operability, Modbus is widely used in older,
as well as in new applications.
Bachmann electronic offers Modbus master
and slave as a pure software solution. Special
hardware is not required. Both the Ethernet
ports and COM ports of all controller CPUs,
as well as the ports of the corresponding bus
modules EM203 and RS204 can be used.
MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Modbus Master
With the Bachmann M1 Modbus master read/write
access to the data from any external standardconformant Modbus slave device is possible. The
holding register, register, coils und discrete inputs
of the external slave-devices are mapped to logical
hardware modules of the control system per hardware
modules. The cyclic update is executed automatically,
the values remain available in the process image.
Queries to the slaves are summarized automatically
in this process to reduce the load. In addition, the
Modbus master offers a function interface via which
any Modbus requests can be sent to the slaves. The
standardised error messages (Modbus exceptions)
are passed through to the application software,
the connection status is identified via diagnostics
variables. All Ethernet ports for Modbus TCP and UDP,
as well as all serial interfaces for Modbus ASCII and
RTU, are available. These can also be distributed
spatially to substations of the control system.
•Supported protocols:
Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP, Modbus ASCII
and Modbus RTU
•Use of the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
•Possibility of spatial distribution of the
interfaces via FAST substations with EM213
or RS204 modules
•Mapping of the contents of the »Modbus Primary
Tables« to virtual channel values
•Multiple networks parallel
(also for different modes)
•Gateway functionality
(also to other bus systems)
•Investment protection thanks to extremely
wide distribution
•Compatibility and openness
•Easy handling
225
MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Modbus
Slave
network,
connection
UFB module 1
Modbus
Channel 1
master
Channel 2
Channel 3
Configuration
»Output
Registers«<
1
1<2
»Coils«
2 3
1 Discrete«>
»Input
3 4
1 2
4 ...
2 3
... n
3 4
n
4 ...
n
...
Channel 4
Request
Channel 5
»Input
Registers«>
Channel 6
Channel 7
Response
Cyclic
Functions
(Polling
engine)
Channel 8
UFB module n
Modbus
protocol
engine
n
Channel 1
Data
Mapping
Interface &
transformation
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Application example Modbus master
Serial
Modbus
Network 2
Station 1
Station 1
Modbus slave
Ethernet
Station 1
Modbus slave
226
Modbus
Network 3
Station 2
Modbus slave
Modbus slave
10 / 100 Mbit / s
Station 3
Modbus slave
Station …
Modbus slave
Station n
Modbus slave
MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Modbus Master
Protocols
Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP, Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII
Protocol version
Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b
Supported function codes
1, 2, 3, 4, 15, 16 (are used automatically purely through
configuration). Via a function interface any function codes
can be called directly from the application program.
Interfaces
Physical layer – Modbus RTU, ASCII
RS232, RS422, RS485
Interfaces – Modbus RTU, ASCII
Serial interfaces to M1-CPUs
Nominal transfer rates
serial (RTU)
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bits/s (gross)
Distributability – Modbus RTU, ASCII
Yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with RS204 module)
Physical layer – Modbus TCP, UDP
Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit in accordance with IEEE 802.b
Interfaces – Modbus TCP, UDP
Ethernet ports of the CPU or of EM213 module
Distributability – Modbus TCP, UDP
Yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with EM213 module)
Performance data
Multiple Modbus networks
simultaneously
Yes (up to 8 networks per controller)
Connection to multiple slaves
Yes, only limited by bandwidth and memory
Baud rates with RTU, ASCII
All baud rates offered by the interface can be used
Parallel operation of other protocols
With TCP, UDP other TCP/IP-based protocols (FTP, web server, HMI
etc.) can be run on the same connection. Serial interfaces (ASCII,
RTU) require the COM port exclusively.
Word order
Configurable per data point
Optimization
Automatic summary of requests
Diagnostics
Status of the connection
Can be indicated via channel module error states of the M1 I/O
system
Diagnosis of the connection quality
Counter variables of the number of sent requests, received
responses, CRC errors, connection errors etc.
Error messages in plain text
Entry in the M1 log book
Implementation
Form of delivery
Driver MBM201 as part of the M-Base installation
Interface to the application
Virtual modules in accordance with the »Unified Fieldbus Model«
for access via MIO or process image
Configuration data format
mconfig.ini (ASCII)
227
MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Modbus Slave
The Modbus slave can be installed as a software
module on every controller CPU. Controlled through
a mapping table, it reads variables of the system and
makes them available on Modbus registers, where
they can be read by every standard-conformant
Modbus master. Write accesses of the master are
appropriately forwarded by the Modbus slave to the
mapped variables. In this manner process variables
of the user software, direct I/O signals, as well as
system variables, such as time of the controller, can
be transparently presented for the external Modbus
master.
All Ethernet ports for Modbus TCP and UDP, as well
as all serial interfaces for Modbus ASCII and RTU, are
available. These can also be distributed spatially to
substations of the control system.
• Supported protocols: Modbus TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
• Use of the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
• Possibility of spatial distribution of the interfaces via
FASTBUS substations and EM213 or RS204 module
• Mapping of any SVI variables in the Modbus Primary
Tables
• Mapping of any I/O channels in the Modbus Primary
Tables
SVI interface
network,
connection
Symbolic_Var_1
Task 1
Symbolic_Var_2
config.
Symbolic_Var_n
Request
SVI interface
Symbolic_Var_A
Task 2
Symbolic_Var_B
Symbolic_Var_Z
SVI interface
Symbolic_Var_I
Task n
Symbolic_Var_II
Symbolic_Var_X
»Output Registers«<
Data
Mapping
Interface
&
Transformation
»Input Registers«>
»Coils« <
»Input Discrete«>
1
2
3
4
SVI interface
I / O
system
228
Symbolic_Var_1
Symbolic_Var_2
Symbolic_Var_n
Modbus
Control
engine
...
n
Virtual Modbus data tables
Response
Modbus
master
MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU/ASCII
Modbus Slave
Protocols
Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP, Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII
Protocol version
Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b
Data direction
Bidirectional
Supported function codes
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16
Interfaces
Physical layer – Modbus RTU, ASCII
RS232, RS422, RS485
Interfaces – Modbus RTU, ASCII
Serial interfaces to M1-CPUs
Nominal transfer rates
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bits/s (gross)
serial (RTU)
Distributability – Modbus RTU, ASCII
Yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with RS204 module)
Physical layer – Modbus TCP, UDP
Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit in accordance with IEEE 802.b
Interfaces – Modbus TCP, UDP
Ethernet ports of the CPU or of EM213 module
Distributability – Modbus TCP
Yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with EM203 module)
TCP / IP Port
Adjustable, preset: 502
Performance data
Multiple slave instances
simultaneously
Yes, up to 8 instances per controller for concurrent operation
different Modbus protocols or for the creation of different data
models for different masters
Multiple master connections
simultaneously
Yes, for Modbus TCP configurable, number of simultaneous
master connections (default 10). For UDP no limitation. With RTU,
ASCII, the operating principle only 1 master in the network.
Parallel traffic to Modbus TCP, UDP
Yes (normal IP traffic via the same interface)
Diagnostics and safety
Log book support
Yes (with adjustable debug level)
Online diagnostics
Yes
Online connection statistics
Yes
Access limitation
Configurable list of permissible IP addresses, integration in the M1
rights management and access logging
Implementation
Form of delivery
Modbus.m software module as part of the M-Base installation
Connection to process data
SVI variables, flags and I/O signals
Configuration data format
mconfig.ini (ASCII)
System prerequisites
Supported devices
All controller CPUs
229
Fieldbuses – SERCOS
Specialized for rigorous requirements
SERCOS (SErial Realtime COmmunication
System) is a dedicated bus system for
activation of high-quality electric drives
and servo amplifiers. Communication is
configured on the controller and distributed
to the drives when the system boots. The
process data of the drive is available in
standardized form and makes not only the
numeric values available via appropriate
services, but it also makes meta information,
such as symbolic names, input limits and
units, available. Via service channel accesses,
in addition to the cyclic process data, acyclic
parameters at runtime from the application
program can also be changed or transferred
from a list of initial parameters at system
start.
Possible topology: SERCOS
ENGINEERING PC
ETHERNET
SERCOS DRIVE
NT250
MPC240
DI216
DO216
AIO288
SEM201
SERCOS DRIVE
230
SERCOS
SERCOS Master Module SEM201
The SERCOS (Serial Real-time Communication
System) master module SEM201 is capable of
controlling up to 32 drives. The bus has a ring
structure and offers a high level of interference
immunity thanks to the fibre optic technology.
•SERCOS 2 Standard IEC 61491
•Fiber optic technology
•Bus with ring structure
•2 Kb x 32 DPRAM
•Transfer rates: 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Mbaud
•Cycle times: 62.5 µs to 65 ms
•Multiple masters can be synchronized
Item Item no.
SEM20100011756-00
SEM201
Description
Channels / drives
Fiber optic ring with max. 32 drives, 2 kB x 32 DPRAM
Modules per controller
Max. 12
Transfer rate
2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Mbaud
Cycle times
62.5 µs to 65 ms
Synchronization
Multiple masters can be synchronized
Certified by
SI – Sercos International (formerly IGS)
Galvanic isolation from system
Yes, via fiber optic cable
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Order codes
SEM201
00011756-00
Sercos master module; 2/4/8/16MBaud; SERCOS II; FO interface 2x
FSMA (In/Out)
231
bluecom
The real-time communication solution for large projects
Renewable energy sources like solar
and wind power stations exist in ranges
and dimensions that vary considerably.
Beginning with separate installations
at a distance of a few hundred meters
up to hundreds of participants spread
across several square kilometers, the
installations have to maintain contact
among themselves and with a monitoring
and control center. Operators are placing
ever higher demands on the controllability
of such virtual power stations. In order to
be able to react positively to errors like LVRT
and FRT, there has to be a swift and reliable
real-time connection to every separate power
station. Diagnostic and remote maintenance
tasks, e.g state-of-the-art condition
monitoring analyses, should be possible
parallel to time-sensitive communications.
bluecom provides reliable real-time
communication technology for the highest
performance requirements, specifically
optimized for renewable energy systems' rapid
bluecom - energy park/virtual power station networking model
Park control center /
control station
M1 controller
Monitoring and maintenance from any
connection point possible with standard
PC
232
exchange of information. Top reliability,
easy maintenance and diagnosability, as
well as adaptability to existing networks,
have been achieved.
As a software-only solution absent
with special requirements for CPU and
compatible to a broad spectrum of network
hardware, applications in user-defined
topologies can be put into effect, having up
to 500 participants and saves resources.
Library functions for cyclic and acyclic
communication in IEC 61131-3, C and C++
make for the greatest easy development.
The configuration, monitoring and diagnostic
analysis are executed via the SolutionCenter.
Thanks to its compatibility with Ethernet
standard IEEE 802.3, bluecom provides a
sustainable solution for the networking tasks
of modern power stations. bluecom at once
predefines the optimization of performance
with lower CPU and network load for mastermaster communication at the machine and
plant level too.
bluecom
Features
Networking of more than 500 subscribers in a free
network topology with bidirectional transmission of at
least 250 bytes in a real-time cycle of 20 ms.
Continuous additions of stations and entire network
segments during real-time operation
Optimization of speed and bandwidth utilization
ensure high data throughput with low CPU and
network load
Monitoring and analysis of the state of the network
and the fastest location of errors possible with no
extra effort via integrated diagnostic and monitoring
interfaces
Standards-compliant implementation is the basis
for the influence-free coexistence of real-time
communication parallel to other Ethernet-based
protocols and services
233
bluecom
bluecom
bluecom defines an open real-time transmission
protocol optimized for the requirements of diverse
Ethernet based network structures that have grown
over time. Structures such as these can be found
in the networking of alternative energy plants, for
instance, the so-called virtual power stations.
bluecom connects hundreds of network devices
deterministically and is not assigned to proprietary
extensions of Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3. The
user is free to choose the topology, the transmission
medium and the transmission rate. As a result,
bluecom render the most cost-efficient real-time
networking of new and pre-existing systems possible.
•Real-time networking of more than 500 sub-stations
with cycle time of less than 20 ms at 250 bytes of
bidirectional data transmission
•Compatible with every MX, MPC, MH and MC series
processor module
•Ethernet-based real-time protocol without specific
requirements for networking topology
•Optimized for speed and bandwidth utilization
•Efficiency by design (low CPU and networking
utilization)
•Hot-plug functionality when removing and adding
network stations
234
Item
Item no.
Description
bluecom CL
00019331-61
License to operate the bluecom communication software on
any number of Bachmann controller CPUs (Redustribution
exclusively together with CPU modules).
bluecom CL AMT
00019331-71
One year extension of product support and update delivery
for the bluecom Company License.
bluecom RT
00019331-63
Runtime License to operate the bluecom communication
software on one controller CPU. Enables the communication
with one or several bluecom compliant devices. Extension
of product support and update delivery is covered by a valid
M-Base Annual Maintenance.
bluecom DL
00020721-64
License to develop bluecom compatible products on third
party devices by any number of employees in one location
(Porting License).
bluecom DL AMT
00020721-74
One year extension of product support and update delivery
for the bluecom Porting License.
bluecom
•Parallel communication via the same interfaces
and media, without impact on real-time
capabilities (HTTP, FTP, video, VoIP etc.)
•Priorization of Ethernet traffic acc. to IEEE 802.3q
•Configurable bandwidth limit
•Subnet formation and cascading
•Multi-master functionality
•Integrated error detection and diagnostics
functionality
•Configurable I/O mapping of network variables
•Programming and diagnostic interface in IEC
61131-3 and C/C++
bluecom
Rationale / Type / Compatibility
Protocol type
Ethernet-based real-time protocol
Ethernet compatibility
Yes, as per IEEE 802.3q (ISO/OSI layer 1+2)
Registered IEEE Ethertype
0x892D
Transmission medium
Independent of transmission medium
Wireless communication (802.11) permissible once the jitter
Requirements have been taken care of
Gateway functionality
Interface of different network types on the application level
Fieldbus
CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus UDP + TCP, EtherCAT
Control station level
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA, Modbus
TCP/UDP
Application development:
Communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
Topology / Networking
Topologies
Star, bus, ring*, mesh network
Dimension
In compliance with IEEE 802.3 - ≥ 2000 m per network
section via fiber optic connection
Transfer rates supported
100 Mbit/s, 1 Gbit/s
Time synchronization
Via PTP (IEEE 1588) **
Switches / infrastructure
Standard Ethernet IEEE 802.3q
Parallel data traffic
Yes, possible
Ethernet-based protocols and services, e. g. HTTP(S), FTP(S),
SNTP, SMTP, video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS etc.
* Employing appropriate network hardware
** Accuracy achievable subject to CPU type used and master clock used
235
bluecom
bluecom
Configuration / Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
Yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
IEC 61131-3, C/C++ user interfaces integrated,
Library functions
Software interfaces
API for sending and receiving and for monitoring and checking
the full and proper delivery of packets, as well as the
management of I/O stations
Network variables
Yes (configuration of variables at the endpoints automatically
generates bluecom communication channel)
Adding/removing slaves
Yes, possible (hot plug)
Diagnostics / Monitoring
I/O live display
Yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
I/O network variables
Yes, for every I/O channel (status, value)
Channel status
Yes, for every bluecom channel
Error status
Yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Diagnostics
Yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Statistics
Yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
Yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Bandwidth limitation
Monitoring and limitation of real-time communication
bandwidth use included
(adjustable, pre-configured: 35 Mbit/s)
Jitter monitoring
Yes
QoS
Yes (IEEE 802.3q)
Performance data
236
Number of I/O stations
Max. 500 *** (restricted by software)
Cycle time
200 µs to 1 s *** (any intermediate values configurable)
Transmission frame cyclic
0 to 1400 bytes per payload unit
Transmission frame acyclic
32000 bytes per payload unit
Capacity under test conditions
Master CPU: MPC293, slave CPU: MX213, 10 ms cycle, 96
slaves, 50-byte cyclic data exchange bidirectional to each I/O
station, transmission medium copper
CPU load only Protocol
Master: 17 %, slave: 1,7 %
CPU load (Protocol, GetData +
SetData)
Master: 27 %, slave: 3 %
Network load
Master: 9 Mbit/s, slave: 0.082 Mbit/s
*** Limit value is subject to the power of the controller and the network, as well as the
controller capacity utilization and the network topology/load
bluecom
bluecom
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
By software possible / licence required
System prerequisites
Automation equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better (application licence)
Porting information is available for implementation on external
equipment (developer licence)
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
Network
Industrial standard managed switch (unmanaged switch with
appropriate configuration)
237
Telecontrol
Protocols for energy technology
Devices for energy generation, energy
transmission, and distribution are part of
the critical infrastructure, consequently
particularly high demands are imposed on
availability and robustness. A reliable data
exchange between different devices is the
prerequisite for further expansion of intelligent power networks. Several standards
have established themselves for integration in data networks. In this regard, the
­ anufacturer of an intelligent device can
m
usually not decide on his own which protocol will be used – this is decided by the plant
operator.
For the device manufacturer, the flexible,
interchangeable telecontrol solutions offer
crucial advantages in the international market. Without changes to the existing software
for operational management, control, and
DNP3 (Distributed N
­ etwork
Protocol)
Features
Complies with Level 2 with some extensions from
Level 3 and 4
Requires for operation on the controller a license file
for master, outstation or both simultaneously
Uses the Ethernet ports and/or serial COM ports of
the controller
Support for unsolicited responses
Support for time synchronization via DNP3
IEC 60870-5 Client and Server
(Master and Slave)
For communication in accordance
with IEC 60870-5-101, -103 and -104
Features
Standard compliant implementation of IEC 60870-5101, -103, -104 client and server
Subsequently installable service/software solution
No changes to the application logic required
Fully configurable/no application-specific processing
via PLC libraries required
Configurator for commissioning and diagnostic
monitor in the SolutionCenter
Import/export of the slave configuration in CSV
format for exchange with other manufacturers
Reducing the amount of data via configurable
threshold filters
238
Telecontrol
regulation, the telecontrol protocol can be
installed as an additional software component, no additional hardware is necessary.
Thus this step can also still occur in the
commissioning phase. Thus, even retrofitting a protocol on an already-delivered system can be easily implemented. Likewise,
common operation of master and slave
is possible, and so is simultaneous use of
multiple communication standards on one
controller.
MMS Server
MMS Client
GOOSE Publisher / IEC 61850, IEC 61400-25
GOOSE Subscriber /
IEC 61850, IEC 61400-25
Features
Communication in accordance with
standards IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25
Pure software solution, special
additional hardware is unnecessary
Shared operation with other
protocols on the same Ethernet
interface
Enables access from outside to
variables of the controller
Features
Communication in accordance with
standards IEC61850 or IEC61400-25
Pure software solution, special
additional hardware is unnecessary
Shared operation with other
protocols on the same Ethernet
interface and on the same network
possible
Enables access from outside to
variables of the controller
239
Telecontrol
DNP3
(Distributed Network Protocol)
DNP3 is telecontrol protocol that is primarily used
in North America, the UK and Australia. It is used
for data exchange between power generation
and distribution facilities, as well as for other
infrastructure installations such as in water
management. The standard is maintained and further
developed by the members of the DNP3 user group
and is released as standard IEEE1815.
The DNP3 service for the M1 controller is a pure
software solution that uses the Ethernet and COM
ports on the controller so that no additional hardware
is required. Depending on the configuration and
license, the service enables the operation of a DNP3
master, a DNP3 outstation (slave) or both operating
modes at the same time. The set of available services
and functions is conform to DNP3 level 2.
Control station
Master
Uses data or
manipulate them (display,
commands)
Plant / field level
Process
SolutionCenter
us
db
iel
,F
I/O
Outstation
DNP3 serial
DNP3 TCP/IP
M1-CPU
Data objects can be generated on the M1 outstation
and linked with the process variables of the controller
software. To transfer actual values to the master
(monitoring direction), there are the possibilities
event polling, the polling of static data, the activation
of an a
­ utomatic transfer (unsolicited responses) as
well as explicit read accesses. In control ­direction,
the outstation can receive the commands (controls)
of the master in order to accept setpoints, commands
and parameters.
FM
Has data and makes them
available
240
Item
Item no.
Description
DNP3-Master RT
00024216-63
License to operate the DNP3 master on one control CPU.
Provides communication over the ethernet or serial interfaces
with standards-compliant servers (outstations) using
the DNP3 protocol in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
DNP3-Outstation RT
00024219-63
License to operate the DNP3 outstation (Slave) on one
controller CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet or
serial interface with standards-compliant clients (masters)
using the DNP3 protocol in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
DNP3-Master/
Outstation RT
00024329-63
License to operate the DNP3 master and outstation on one
controller CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet or
serial interface with standards-compliant clients (masters)
using the DNP3 protocol in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
DNP3 DVD
00024216-xx
Installation media for DNP3 client (master) software (DVD).
Without a valid Runtime License the DNP3 client runs only
temporarily for 2h in demo mode.
Telecontrol
When run as a DNP3 master, the M1 can read
and write values from standard compliant DNP3
outstation devices. Operation via the user
program is as simple here as setting a local digital
output. Through the configuration of the master,
a logical IO module in accordance with the Unified
Fieldbus Model (UFB) can be generated for each
outstation. These UFB modules can be operated
immediately in the SolutionCenter diagnostic tool
or in a visualization. The values in the PLC are
made available to the user program in the process
image. Alternatively, an event-driven response
can also be implemented to new actual values
from the outstation.
Details on supported object groups, variations and
function codes of the outstation are provided in
the device profile document. In DNP3 there is no
corresponding document for the master. However,
its features largely correspond to the possibilities
of the outstation.
•Requires for operation on the controller a license
file for master, outstation or both simultaneously
•Uses the Ethernet ports and/or serial COM ports of
the controller
•Support for unsolicited responses
•Support for time synchronization via DNP3
DNP3 outstation
•Configuration of data objects via CSV file
•Linking of data objects with existing
process variables
•Parallel connection with several masters possible
(requires the configuration of several instances)
•Automatic deadband calculation (threshold value
filtering) of analog a
­ ctual ­values to reduce the
data volume
•Time stamp of value changes i­mplicit via the
service
•Formation of quality information (flags) implicit
via the service, can be set additionally by the
application via a quality variable.
•Quality ensured by ­standardized certification tests
DNP3 service for master and outstation
•Complies with Level 2 with some extensions
from Level 3 and 4
241
Telecontrol
DNP3 master
•Access to data objects of the outstation via logical
UFB modules
•The currently received values are provided in the
process image
•All events with flags and time stamp can be read
via the function
•Event-driven handling of received actual values
possible
242
Telecontrol
DNP3
General product features
Type
Licensable service for Bachmann M1 controllers (pure software
solution, subsequently installable) with configuration interface.
Requires a valid license file for operation.
Object groups (telegram types)
Complies with DNP3 Level 2, additionally some groups of Level 3 and
4; For details see Device Profile Document
Variations (representation
­formats)
Complies with DNP3 Level 2, additionally some variations of Level 3
and 4; For details see Device Profile Document
Data types
Automatic conversion of data types between process variables (SVI)
and DNP3 objects
Connection diagnostics
Diagnostic variables show the connection status and statistics, can be
used for tools, HMI and application programs
Log messages
Clear text messages in the log book, detail level changeable at runtime
Outstation product features
Multi master operation
Possible by configuring several instances of the outstation with
different TCP port numbers
Assignment to event classes
Selectable per data point in the CSV file
Preferred variation
Selectable per data point in the CSV file
Addressing
Standard compliant by configuring master address and outstation
address; With TCP an IP address and port number of the slave is also
required for the master
Source time stamping
Implicit via the service
Quality marking (flags)
Implicit via the service, additional setting possible via the application
using quality variable. Analog values outside of the configured min./
max. range are automatically marked with OVER_RANGE
Unsolicited responses
Can be selected by the configuration; must be activated by the master
Threshold value filter
Deadband value configurable to reduce value changes per data object
in the CSV file. Can also be changed by the master via DNP3.
Remote/local status
Integrated in the token offered by M1 Access Control for write
accesses. When the token is taken, LOCAL status is displayed, write
accesses are denied. The local or remote status can also be set by
means of a function.
Rights control
Integration in M1 Access Control to control access rights to the process
variables, for the prioritization of token assignments and for the
authorization of controller reboot
Access logging
Write accesses of the master are recorded in the security log of the M1
Limiting of the master
Configurable permitted master IP. Connection attempts by other
masters are denied
Time synchronization
NEED_TIME request to the master can be configured once for the start,
cyclically or never
243
Telecontrol
DNP3
Master product features
Integrity poll
Configurable cycle for triggering a class 0 poll (integrity poll)
Event poll
Free wheeling cycle for polling event classes 1, 2, 3
Connection monitoring
Connection status detectable via diagnostic variable
Receipt of unsolicited responses
Can be selected by the configuration: The master can activate and
receive the unsolicited responses of the outstations, and assign the
values to the process image.
API for incoming actual values
The values of event polls and integrity polls are provided as channel
values in the process image. Full information incl. flags and time stamp
can be read by a function call. Additionally, an attach feature allows
event-driven reaction on incoming data.
Network configuration on the
master
One UFB module per outstation; one UFB channel per data object. Data
objects for which no UFB channel is configured are not shown but can
still be received.
Time synchronization
Is executed on request of the outstation
Installation
Delivery form
Separately installable product (service); supplied on DVD or as download
Licensing
Runtime license for operation on a controller, irrespective of the
number of connections or information objects. Different licenses can be
purchased for master, outstation or combination.
License protection
Hardware-dependent software key
Configuration of service and
instance
Via SolutionCenter
Configuration of the data objects Via CSV file
Connection with process
variables
Mapping to the SVI variables of the controller software (IEC 61131-3, C/
C++) as well as directly to IO and fieldbus values via a CSV file
System requirements for the controller
Device
All M1 CPU series (MH200, MC200, MPC200, MX200) except for ME203
System version
M-Base 3.90 or better
Physical Ethernet interfaces
Ethernet ports of the controller CPUs or of the EM203 modules;
Operation with other TCP/IP-based protocols on the same interface is
possible
Physical serial interfaces
Serial COM ports of the M1 CPU or of the RS204 modules in operating
modes RS232, RS422 and RS485. The parallel operation of several
protocols on the same COM port is not possible
System requirements for the PC
SolutionCenter
244
SolutionCenter from version 1.90 (M-Base 3.90), processor requirements
see SolutionCenter product data sheet
Telecontrol
IEC 60870-5 Client and Server
(Master and Slave)
For communication in accordance
with IEC 60870-5-101, -103 and -104
Application areas
The remote control protocol, according to standards
IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104, is widely
used in power generation, power distribution and
infrastructure areas. They enable the control and
monitoring of intelligent sub-components and substations through a superordinate control center.
The palette of these sub-components ranges from
circuit breakers, converters, and energy meters to
cogeneration units up to complete power plants. The
IEC 60870-5-103 standard was defined especially for
communication with protective devices.
Control station
Plant / field level
Process
SolutionCenter
us
db
iel
,F
I/O
IEC 60870-5-101, -103:
Serial RS232, 422, 485
IEC 60870-5-104: Ethernet
M1-CPU
Product features
The IEC 60870-5 service is installed purely as a
software component on the controller and requires
no special hardware. It uses the serial interfaces
(-101, -103) or the Ethernet ports (-104) available
on the controller. Through configuration of multiple
instances, simultaneous operation of -101, -103, and/
or -104 is possible; the function as master or slave
can be selected per instance. It is possible to connect
multiple external masters by creating multiple slave
instances. Multiple redundant masters are also
possible for each instance.
FM
Item
IEC 60870-5-Server RT
IEC 60870-5-DVD
IEC 60870-5-Client RT
IEC 60870-5 Server/Client RT
IEC 60870-5 Redu-Server RT
IEC 60870-5 Client/Redu-Server RT
Item no.
00022127-63
00022127-xx
00024214-63
00024327-63
00027197-63
00027198-63
245
Telecontrol
Client (Master)
Each instance of the master connects
automatically to the assigned external slave
device, sends a general interrogation and receives
the interrogated values as well as the values
transmitted spontaneously from the slave. These
values are represented as channel values and are
available to the user immediately without any
additional programming effort. Values can be sent
in the direction of the command by simply writing
to an output channel. As a result, the slave can be
operated as easily as a local I/O module.
Event-driven reception of the slave data is
possible for more complex applications. Additional
library functions are available for special functions
such as setting the time of the slave, meter
readout etc.
PC
• Configuring
• Parametrizing
• Monitoring
SolutionCenter
Configurator
SolutionCenter
Monitor
Ethernet, TCP/IP:
FTP, SMI
M1 controller
SW modules
C/C++
Process data
Configuration
Adresses and
server objects,
mapping
on process data
SW modules
PLC with process image
Logical
module
Logical
module
Logical
module
IEC 60870-5 Client software (Master)
-104 (TCP/IP)
-101, -103 (serial)
IEC 60870-5-104
Server (Slave)
IEC 60870-5-104
Server (Slave)
IEC 60870-5-101
or -103
Server (Slave)
Sensor
Actuator
Sensor
Actuator
Sensor
Actuator
Process
Software interface
246
Hardware interface
Block diagram IEC 60870-5 Client
Telecontrol
Server (Slave)
The information objects that the server offers in
the command and monitoring direction, are linked
to the controller with existing process variables, via
the configuration. No change to the programming
code is necessary for this. A different data model
can also be created for different clients.
SolutionCenter
Configurator/
Monitor
PC, Visu,
60870
control
Master
station etc.
60870
Master
60870
Master
Ethernet TCP/IP
M1 controller
Ethernet
TCP/IP
Configuration
Object model
Data mapping
Serial COM ports
Monitor direction
PC
• Configuring
• Parametrizing
• Monitoring
Control direction
To reduce the communication load, a threshold filter
can be enabled. Values that are outside of defined
Min/Max limits are marked as invalid and will only
be transferred again when they return to the valid
range. No implementation by the user is necessary
for this. A monitor in the SolutionCenter shows the
current configuration of information objects used in
the server, and the value most recently transmitted
to the client.
The log-in of clients can be restricted by specifying
a permitted IP address, and the number of
simultaneous client connections can also be limited.
Write accesses can be captured in the security log
of the controller; the user-dependent management
of access rights is also effective for IEC 60870.
IEC 60870-5 Server
Communication according to
-101, -103, -104
SVI
Software Module
PLC, C/C++
Process
MIO
Sensor
Actuator
Block diagram IEC 60870-5 Server
247
Telecontrol
Control room #1: 2 Master
Router
1 computer with
1 network card with
2 IP addresses
Slave with
master redundancy
Control room #2: 4 Master
Router
2 computer with
2 network cards each
Router
Application example of redundancy per IEC 60870-5-104
Engineering
Easy to use tools for configuration of the client
and server are available in the SolutionCenter.
The master is configured like a local I/O module
on whose channels the information objects of the
internal devices are represented in monitoring and
command direction.
There is a table editor for the slave for generating
the outwardly visible information objects. The
link to the process data takes place by selecting
the corresponding SVI variables from a variable
browser. To exchange the configuration using other
tools, import and export functions of a generic CSV
format are available.
Advantage
Existing software for sequence control and
regulation does not need to be changed and will
not be affected in its runtime. Thus it can be
flexibly responsive to final customer requirements
without changing the existing tested software for
control and regulation of the substation. Through
realization as a finished server with integrated
update- and threshold logic, tedious replication of
the protocol functions via limiting PLC-libraries, and
the associated training efforts in the standard, is
eliminated. Engineering and testing time can thus
be reduced, and the integrated diagnostics shorten
the troubleshooting in the event of malfunctions
during operation.
248
The diverse communication possibilities via field
busses and real-time Ethernet, the broad range
of signal interfaces to grid measurement, as well
as powerful mass storage make the M1 system
in conjunction with the remote control protocol
of the series IEC 60870-5-10x ideally suitable
for use as a control device, central control, data
concentrator, datalogger and gateway.
Technical data
•Standard compliant implementation of
IEC 60870-5-101, -103, -104 client and server
•Subsequently installable service/software
solution
•No changes to the application logic required
•Fully configurable/no application-specific
processing via PLC libraries required
•Configurator for commissioning and diagnostic
monitor in the SolutionCenter
•Import/export of the slave configuration in CSV
format for exchange with other manufacturers
•Reducing the amount of data via configurable
threshold filters
•Number and IP addresses of authorized clients
can be limited
•Logging of write accesses in the security log of
the controller
•Easy and fast start-up including diagnosis
without any programming effort
•The remote control protocol can be operated like
a simple I/O module
Telecontrol
IEC 60870-5-10x services
General product features
Supported protocols
IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104 as client
(­ master) or server (slave)
Type
Licensable service for Bachmann M1 controls (software-only solution,
subsequently installable) with configuration interface.
Requires a valid license file for operation.
Parallel operation
Simultaneous operation of client and server as well as various
protocols on one controller possible
Message types (ASDU types)
Comprehensive implementation of the essential application data units,
for example: single point information; single command; double-point
information; double command; step position information; regulating
step command; measured value, normalized; time synchronization,
reset (See interoperability documents for details)
Delivery form
Separately installable product (service); delivery on DVD or as
download
Installation
Via SolutionCenter
Licensing
Subject to individual license per CPU (regardless of number of servers,
client connections or points of information)
License protection
Hardware-dependent Software Key, can be ordered separately for
server or combination
Device
All M1 CPU families (MH200, MC200, MPC200, MX200) except ME203
System version
Msys from version 3.85, Mcore from version 3.80
General features of Client (Master)
Receipt of data in monitoring
direction
- Automatic mapping of the values on input process variables without
any programming
- Display in process image for IEC 61131-3 programs
- Event-driven reception in C/C++ possible
- Access to the receiving buffers also possible via function interface
Transmission of data in controller
direction
- Automatic transmission by writing output process variables
- Display in process image for IEC 61131-3 programs
- Function interface for special procedures such as time
synchronization, multistage command execution or meter readout
General features Server (Slave)
Configuration of the information
objects
Configurator im SolutionCenter for generating the information objects
and for connecting to process variables. Checking for plausibility of
the parameters and suitability of the selected variable type depending
on the ASDU type, storage of the configuration as a CSV file on the
controller.
Data type conversion
Automatic conversion of SVI data types to IEC data types
Query groups
Yes, information can be assigned to query groups 1 to 16 per
­configuration
Source time stamping
This is created automatically by the server or read from a configured
process variable.
Quality labeling
This is created automatically by the server or read from a configured
process variable.
249
Telecontrol
IEC 60870-5-10x services
General features Server (Slave)
Designation of the (COT) cause of
transmission
Created automatically by the server.
Cyclic transmission
Can be configured with individual cycle time per information object
Background interrogation
Can be configured with individual cycle time per server instance
Update rates
Configurable monitoring cycle for detection of spontaneous value
changes. Additional triggering possible through software. Automatic
protection against system overload. Minimum cycle limited through
free capacity of the CPU.
Threshold filter
With -101 and -104 one threshold value can be configured per
­information object, filtration is either absolute or integrating.
Connection monitoring
Connection status can be detected via diagnostics variables for
­customer software.
Access control and logging
Limiting of the number of clients, IP address specification for client,
integration with M1 Access Control: Logging of connections and write
accesses
Multi-master capability
A connection to multiple masters is possible by multiple instancing.
Different object directories are possible per instance.
Configuration
Configuration interface
Integrated in Bachmann SolutionCenter
Data configuration/mapping
Storage of configuration as CSV file via configuration interface with
variable browser and consistency check
Diagnostics
Monitor for information objects
Bachmann SolutionCenter shows all information objects with the last
transmitted value and time stamp
Connection statistics
Connection status, connection error, number of correct/incorrect
telegrams etc. are mapped on process variables and are available for
the user software, tools and visualizations.
Error messages in plain text
Shiftable levels of logbook entries during runtime
Logging
Write accesses can be logged automatically in the security log of the
M1 controller.
IEC 60870-5-101
250
Physical interface
Serial ports of the M1 CPU or of RS204 modules in operating modes
RS232, RS422 and RS485. Parallel operation of multiple protocols on
the same port is not possible
Operating mode of the Link Layer
Either symmetric or asymmetric
Addressing
Device via address of the connection layer (Link Layer) and station
address (Common Address). Information object address (IOA) either
structured (28.7.16) or flat (1836816), can be freely assigned in the
configuration.
Baud rates
No restriction through the IEC server
Telecontrol
IEC 60870-5-10x services
IEC 60870-5-103
Physical interface
Same as for -101
Addressing
Device: Common station address
Information object: Via FUN, INF or via GIN
IEC 60870-5-104
Physical interface
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (interfaces of the M1 CPUs and EM2131) Parallel
operation with other TCP/IP based communication on the same
interface is possible.
Addressing
Device: Via selection of the Ethernet interface, as well as assignment
of the IP port (default 2404). IOA same as for -101
Redundancy
Supports master redundancy per IEC 60870-5-104 and the Norwegian
Convention. The redundant operation of the slave requires an
appropriate RT license.
* EM213 Performance values limited compared to the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
Order codes
Item
Item no.
Description
IEC 60870-5-Server RT
00022127-63
License to operate the IEC 60870-5 server on one controller CPU.
Provides communication over the ethernet or serial interfaces
with standards-compliant clients using the IEC 60875-5-104
protocol in accordance with the compatibility documentation.
IEC 60870-5-DVD
00022127-xx
Software and documentation for the IEC 60870-5 server (slave)
and client (master). Enables communication according to the
standards IEC 60870-5-101, -103 and -104. Without a valid
Runtime License the IEC 60870-5 server runs only temporarily
for 2h in demo mode.
IEC 60870-5-Client RT
00024214-63
License to operate the IEC 60870-5 client on one controller CPU.
Provides communication over the ethernet or serial interface
with standards-compliant servers using IEC 60875-5-101,
-103 and -104 protocols in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
IEC 60870-5 Server/
Client RT
00024327-63
License for the combined operation of the IEC 60870-5 client
and server on one controller CPU without regard of number of
connections or data points. Provides communication over the
ethernet or serial interfaces with standards-compliant partners
using the IEC 60875-5-101, -103, -104 protocol in accordance
with the compatibility documentation.
IEC 60870-5 ReduServer RT
00027197-63
License for the operation of the IEC60870-5 server with
redundant network connection on a controller CPU. Enables
communication via the Ethernet or serial interface with
standard compliant clients via IEC60870-5-101, -103 and -104
protocol in accordance with interoperability documents.
IEC 60870-5 Client/
Redu-Server RT
00027198-63
License for the combined operation of the IEC60870-5 server
with redundant network connection and of the client on a
controller CPU. Enables communication via the Ethernet or serial
interface with standard compliant communication partners via
IEC60870-5-101, -103 and -104 protocol in accordance with
interoperability documents.
251
Telecontrol
MMS Server
GOOSE Publisher / IEC 61850, IEC 61400-25
The MMS Server equips the M1 controller with the
capability of communicating in accordance with
the standards IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25. These
standards describe manufacturer-independent
communication between plants for energy generation
and distribution. They enable the seamless integration
of an ever-increasing number of heterogeneous
plants, such as wind turbines or CHPs, in a control
station or in a mixed network.
The standards IEC 61850 and IEC 61400-25
extend far beyond pure data communication. They
also define the data modeling and thus offer an
object-oriented view of the system. Objects such
as generator, power switch, transformer, voltage
controller, or rotor are standardized. For each of these
objects the designation, data points, and services for
access to the data are specified.
A customer achieved the
certification of its system
according to IEC 61850 based on
the MMS Server from Bachmann.
M1 software module
Customer software
PLC 1
SVI
Customer software
PLC 2
SVI
Customer software
C/CC++
SVI
System variables
SVI
read,
write
MMS server
Connect/
Disconnect
read,
write
read,
write
read,
write
Set values / Operates
TCP/IP
Actual values / Reports
While TCP/IP-based MMS is mostly used as a SCADA
interface, the multicast-based GOOSE is also available
for automation with real-time requirements for fast
transmission of spontaneous value alterations.
Mapping
IEC names
to
SVI names
Browse
Object
dictionary
Read/write
values
Operate
DataSet
handling
Generate
reports
File transfer
MMS Server as a SCADA interface for the M1 controller
252
Telecontrol
Both processes are configured via the same
standardized XML file, which can also be used for
scheduling the entire network.
The MMS Server from Bachmann electronic maps
the automation process variables to the attributes of
the IEC 61580 or IEC 61400-25 address space. The
user of the MMS Server determines the standardized
ICD file (ICD = Intelligent Electronic Device
Capability Description), what information of the
plant is represented by the server, and are therefore
visible to the client (e.g. the control station). This
enables individual adaptation to different plants or
modular expansion stages.
The GOOSE Publisher feature enables, in addition
or as an alternative, the selected process data to be
distributed as prioritized multicast messages in the
network. To do this, only the corresponding GOOSE
control blocks need to be configured in the ICD file.
Features according to IEC 61850 / IEC 61400-25
•Support for Ed. 1 and Ed. 2 of IEC 61850
•The object definition decides between IEC 61850
or IEC 61400-25
•Transport layer MMS (Manufacturing Message
Specification) according to ISO 9506
•GOOSE (Generic Object-Oriented Substation
Event) Publisher in accordance with performance
class 3
•Generating reports and GOOSE messages
•Browsing of objects with presentation of structures
and elements in plain text (self-describing system)
•Reading and writing of values (Get / Set data
values)
•Managing data sets
•Direct operate, Select before operate (single and
multi-level command control, each with »normal«
or »enhanced« security)
•File transfer
Features
•It is started as a stand-alone software module
•No special hardware required; purely software
solution for all M1 CPUs except for ME 203
•Simultaneous operation of client, server, GOOSE
Publisher, and GOOSE Subscriber on one controller
•Configuration of the variable set via standardized
ICD file (XML format)
•Mapping of process variables to IEC variables in a
CSV file
•Cyclic scan of report and GOOSE data to
automatically detect and send value alterations
•In addition, triggering is also available from the
application software
•Automatic deadband calculation (db, zeroDb) for
analog measured values (MV, CMV) for reducing
network load
•Integrated into the mechanisms in the controller
for rights validation and logging write accesses
and connections
•Customer application has been certified
successfully as per IEC 61580 Ed. 2 by TÜV SÜD
•Can be operated together with other protocols
(OPC, QSOAP, Telnet etc.) on the same Ethernet
interface of the M1 controller
•CPU load can be limited
253
Telecontrol
Application
Manufacturer
Message
Specification
TCP/IP
Layer 3
Internet
MMS Server
MMS Server
I/O
us
,F
iel
b
eld
i
,F
I/O
MMS
Control station
MMS Client
db
M1 CPU
us
M1 CPU
GOOSE
GOOSE Publisher,
Subscriber
Ethernet
Layer 2
GOOSE Publisher,
Subscriber
Generic
objectoriented
substation
event
Differences between MMS and GOOSE
254
MMS
GOOSE
SCADA protocol
Automation protocol
Connection to control station or central controller
(hierarchical)
Connection between switch and protection devices
(on an equal basis)
Enables the reading of individual values, writing of
commands and set values, monitoring lists (reports)
Only the exchange of actual values, mostly binary
status information (events), no writing via GOOSE
TCP/IP, layer 3, connection oriented
Ethernet, layer 2, connectionless, multi-cast
Client/Server principle: 1:1
Publisher/Subscriber principle: 1:n
(producer/consumer)
Deferred transmission, partly from buffered
information
Real time – immediately send value alterations
Defined for IEC 61850 and IEC 61400-25
Only defined for IEC 61850
Telecontrol
MMS Server/GOOSE
Performance data
Number of server instances per controller
1
Number of logical devices per server
200
GOOSE performance class
P3
Order codes
Item
Item no.
Description
MMS-Server DVD
00014547-xx
Software and documentation for the MMS Server. Provides
communication over the ethernet interface according to the
standards IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25. Without a valid Runtime
License the MMS Server runs only temporarily for 2h in demo
mode.
MMS-Server RT
00014547-63
License to operate the MMS Server on one controller CPU. Allows
communication over the ethernet interface with standardscompliant client software using the IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25
protocol in accordance with the compatibility documentation.
MMS-GSV-Server RT 00023856-63
License to operate the MMS Server on one controller CPU.
Provides communication over the ethernet interface with
standards-compliant client software via the IEC 61850 incl.
GOOSE and IEC 61400-25 in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
MMS-Client/
Server RT
00020316-63
License for the combined operation of the MMS Server and Client
on one controller CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet
interface with standards-compliant remote stations using the
IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25 protocol in accordance with the
compatibility documentation.
MMS-GSV-Client/
Server RT
00026409-63
License for the combined operation of the MMS Server and MMS
Client incl. GOOSE Publisher and Subscriber on one controller
CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet interface with
standards-compliant remote stations using the IEC 61850 or
IEC 61400-25 protocol in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
255
Telecontrol
MMS Server – Available services
IEC 61850
IEC 6140025
GetServerDirectory
M
O
Services for establishing and
­closing a connection via the
client.
Associate
M
M
Abort
M
O
Release
M
O
Logical device
Provides the list of all logical
­devices within the server.
GetLogicalDe­viceDirec­
tory
M
O
Logical node
Represents a certain function,
e.g. the overvoltage protection.
LogicalNode­Directory
M
O
GetAllData­Values
M
X
Data
Allows specification of typified
information, such as the position
of a switch with quality infor­
mation and timestamp.
GetDataValues
M
M
SetDataValues
O
M
GetDataDefinition
M
O
GetDataDirectory
M
O
Allows grouping of different data.
GetDataSetValues
M
M
Functional group
Description
Services
Server
Represents the visible outwards
appearance of a device. All other
functional groups are part of the
server.
Association
Data set
Report Control
Block
GOOSE
Control
File transfer
CreateDataSet
O
O
DeleteDataSet
O
O
GetDataSet­Directory
O
O
C
O
Event-oriented, real-time commu- SendGOOSE­Message
nication on Ethernet Layer 2. The
data is managed in data sets.
C
X
Describes the service for the control of devices or groups for parameter specification, for instance.
O
O
Automatic transmission of process
values to the client after modi­
fying value or quality. The behavior is controlled by a Report
Control Block (RCB). The data is
managed in data sets.
Defines the exchange of files.
Report
GetBRCBValues
SetBRCBValues
GetURCBValues
SetURCBValues
Select
SelectWithValue
Cancel
Operate
M
M
Command­Termination
O
O
GetFile
M
SetFile
DeleteFile
GetFileAttribute­Values
M = mandatory
O = optional
C = conditional, at least one of them should be supported (BRCB or URCB)
X = not part of the standard
256
O
M
X
Telecontrol
MMS Client
GOOSE Subscriber / IEC 61850, IEC 61400-25
(Manufacturing Message Specification Client)
Numerous switching, protective, and measurement
devices in the energy technology area are equipped
with an Ethernet interface and offer communication
in accordance with the IEC 61850 standard. Via
this interface, parameters can be assigned for the
devices regardless of manufacturer, the devices can
be diagnosed, and actual values can be picked up
through polling or received per report or GOOSE.
Through the Bachmann MMS Client, the M1 control
system is capable of operating and monitoring such
devices. The MMS Client behaves on the controller
in a manner similar to a fieldbus driver: It supplies
actual values of the peripheral devices, which are
received as reports or GOOSE messages, directly
to the application software. Here they are available
in the process image. In the control direction,
switch commands, set values, and parameters for
the peripheral device can be set directly from the
application program.
M1 software module
Configuration
- Server
- Reports
- GOOSE
Function
call
Customer software
PLC module 1
MMS Client
Connect/
Disconnect
Function
call
Customer software
PLC module 2
Function
call
Customer software
C/CC++ module
Process image
Reports,
GOOSE
data as
process
values
Server 1
XCBR1.Pos
Read/write
values
Function
interface
Operate
Configure
reports,
activate/
deactivate
Activate/
deactivate
GOOSE
messages
Server 2
MMXU1.AvgWatts
Server 3
LPHD.PhyHealth
Receiving reports and
GOOSE data
Ethernet
MMS Client as peripheral device interface
257
Telecontrol
Features
•No special hardware required, pure software
solution for all M1 CPU types except ME203
•It is started as a stand-alone service directly
from the application software
•Common operation with other protocols on the
same Ethernet port and in the same network
•Configuration via SolutionCenter, no external
tools are required
•Operates devices in accordance with IEC 61850
and/or IEC 61400-25 in the same network
•Operating interface for sequential programs
(IEC 61131-3, C/C++) via SMI for temporal
decoupling
•Library for PLC programming in accordance with
IEC 61131-3
•Header file for C/C++ programming
•Commissioning and diagnostics monitor in the
SolutionCenter
•Disclosed interface for tools and visualizations
•Report data and Goose messages are available
via logical I/O modules for application programs
and tools
MMS Client (IEC 61850 / IEC 61400-25)
Usability
Implementation areas
Operation and monitoring of substations and protection
devices in accordance with IEC 61850-7
Communication with distributed energy resources in
accordance with IEC 61850-7-420, e.g. CHP, photovoltaic,
thermal storage
Communication with wind energy devices and plants
in accordance with IEC 61400-25, e.g. wind turbines,
meteorological measuring in-struments
Scope of delivery
Software components for the controller
PLC library and C/C++ header for operation of the API
Test and diagnostics monitor in the SolutionCenter
User manual
Sample configuration
PLC sample project
User interface for IEC 61131-3
Display of data in the process image via report or GOOSE
Individual read and write commands via non-blocking
function blocks (PLC) or non-blocking calls (C/C++)
User interface for C/C++
Non-blocking functions for calls and replies; header file
with required definitions
Features according to IEC 61850 / IEC 61400-25
Login/logout on the external server with or
without password
Associate, Abort, Release
Check connection status
MMS status request
Read value from data attributes
GetDataValues
Write value from data attributes
SetDataValues
Activation and configuration – buffered and
unbuffered reports (BR, RP)
Get/SetBRCBValues, Get/SetURCBValues, BRCB etc.
Buffered report control block
Generating, deleting, and reading datasets
CreateDataSet, DeleteDataSet, GetDataSetDirectory
Issuing of switch commands (operates)
Select, Select with value, Operate, Cancel,
TimeActivatedOperate
Receipt of information reports as reaction to operates with
enhanced security
258
Telecontrol
MMS Client (IEC 61850/IEC 61400-25) / Order codes
Item
Item no.
Description
MMS-Client DVD
00017952-xx
Software and documentation for the MMS Client. Provides access
to external devices over the ethernet interface using the standard
IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25. Without a valid Runtime License the
MMS Client runs only temporarily for 2h in demo mode.
MMS-Client RT
00017952-63
License to operate the MMS Client on one controller CPU.
Provides communication over the ethernet interface with
standards-compliant servers using the IEC 61850 or IEC 6140025 protocol in accordance with the compatibility documentation.
MMS-GSV-Client RT
00024328-63
License to operate the MMS Client on one controller CPU. Provides
communication over the ethernet interface with standardscompliant servers using the IEC 61850 incl. GOOSE subscriber
or IEC 61400-25 protocol in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
MMS-Client/
Server RT
00020316-63
License for the combined operation of the MMS Server and Client
on one controller CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet
interface with standards-compliant remote stations using the
IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25 protocol in accordance with the
compatibility documentation.
MMS-GSV-Client/
Server RT
00026409-63
License for the combined operation of the MMS Server and MMS
Client incl. GOOSE Publisher and Subscriber on one controller
CPU. Provides communication over the ethernet interface with
standards-compliant remote stations using the IEC 61850 or
IEC 61400-25 protocol in accordance with the compatibility
documentation.
259
OPC Solutions
Manufacturer-independent data exchange
Machines and plants usually work as a
composite and are coupled to a central
data acquisition system, a control room, or
a PDA/MES system. OPC stands for Openness, Productivity and connectivity, it is
a solution for manufacturer-independent
exchange of data, and it is the bridge, established worldwide, from automation into
the IT world.
tion solution is simply supplemented with
an additional software component, additional hardware is not necessary. For the
user of OPC Classic, a high-performance
server is available in two expansion stages.
Convenient tools are provided for commissioning and configuration.
Since the introduction of OPC UA (Unified
Architecture) this data interface can be
operated directly on the controller without
Windows PC. For this, the existing automa-
OPC UA Server
Features
Operation on the controller without additional
­Windows PC
OPC UA data access (DA) for accessing process
­variables
Read and write access to process variables can be
controlled via user groups
Login can be requested by configuration
Signing by TLS certificate can be requested by
­configuration
Communication encryption can be requested by TLS
up to 256 bits
OPC Standard Server
Features
OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05, 3.0
Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
Secure SSL connection to the
controllers
Up to 5 automation devices per
server
Up to 10,000 information points
Operation under Microsoft Windows
7, Vista, XP
260
OPC Enterprise Server
Features
OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05, 3.0
Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
Secure SSL connection to the
controllers
No limitation of connected M1
systems
No restriction of data quantity
Simulation of clients
Operation under Microsoft Windows
7, Vista, XP, Server 2003, Server
2008
OPC Solutions
OPC UA Server
(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)
The OPC UA Server is a pure software solution
and can be executed directly on the controller
CPU without additional hardware. It offers full and
transparent access to the process values of the
control application. Systems for visualization, Scada
or data logging can use OPC UA as a manufacturer
independent interface. An additional Windows® PC
for execution of the OPC server software is no longer
required.
More benefits from the direct execution on the
controller are the automatic recognition of process
data without the need to create a configuration, and
the accurate source time stamps. If requested, the
communication is encrypted, and the communication
partners can be identified unambiguously by TLS
certificates. Plain communication without login data
and the certification check are of course still possible.
•Data Access according to OPC UA specification
•Is installed as additional service on the controller
•Displays the process values of the controller in its
address space without additional configuration steps
•Considers access permissions on variables at
reading and writing
•Write access can be logged
•The supply of variables can also be restricted via
the configuration in the SolutionCenter
•Quality is granted by participation at Interop
workshops and conformance tests
Item
Item no.
Description
OPC-UA-DA-Server DVD
00022170-00
Software and documentation to operate the OPC UA Server
on one M1 controller. Provides access to process variables
via ethernet according to the OPC UA Data Access standard.
Without a valid Runtime License the OPC UA Server runs only
temporarily for 2h in demo mode.
OPC-UA-DA-Server RT
00022170-63
License to operate the OPC UA Server on one controller CPU.
BA142 over the ethernet interface with standards-compliant
client software via OPC Unified Architecture according to Data
Access Specification.
261
PC, Visu,
OPC UA
control
Client
station etc.
SolutionCenter
Configurator/
Monitor
OPC UA
Client
OPC UA
Client
Ethernet TCP/IP
M1 controller
Ethernet
TCP/IP
Configuration
of the address
space
(optional)
Serial COM ports
OPC UA Server
SVI
Software Module
PLC, C/C++
Process
Functionality of OPC UA Server
Optional restriction of the supply of variables
262
MIO
Sensor
Actuator
Monitor direction
PC
• Configuring
• Diagnostics
Control direction
OPC Solutions
OPC Solutions
OPC UA Server
Supported OPC UA Profiles
Security Profile
Security Policy - None
Security Policy - Basic128Rsa15
Security Policy - Basic 256
Transport Profile
UA-TCP UA-SC UA Binary
Server Profiles
Base Server Behaviour Facet
Basic DataChange Subscription Server Facet
Core Server Facet
Embedded UA Server
Enhanced DataChange Subscription Server Facet
Low End Embedded Device Driver Facet
Supported OPC UA Information Models
Information models
Data Access (DA)
Supported OPC UA Service Sets
Discovery Service Set
FindServers
GetEndpoints
SecureChannel Service Set
OpenSecureChannel
CloseSecureChannel
Session Service Set
CreateSession
ActivateSession
CloseSession
Cancel
View Service Set
Browse
BrowseNext
TranslateBrowsePathToNodeIds
RegisterNodes
UnregisterNodes
Attribute Service Set
Read
Write
MonitoredItem Service Set
CreateMonitoredItems
ModifyMonitoredItems
SetMonitoringMode
SetTriggering
DeleteMonitoredItems
Subscription Service Set
CreateSubscription
ModifySubscription
SetPublishingMode
Publish
Republish
DeleteSubscriptions
263
OPC Solutions
OPC UA Server
Security features
Encryption
See Security Profile
Protection against overload (DoS)
CPU overload caused by clients can be avoided by limiting the
minimum sample rate
Public Key Infrastructure
File based on the controller
Access logging
Connections and write operations are stored in the security log of the
controller
Restriction of visible variables
The address space can be configured in the SolutionCenter. If
the security settings and access rights to the controller are used,
visibility also depends on the login of the OPC UA client.
Diagnose
State variables
Number of active sessions
Number of active subscriptions
Number of items monitored by subscription
Show functions
List of sessions
List of all software modules in the address space
List of all items in subscriptions
Logbook messages
Amount and type of messages can be selected by debug levels
Installation
Shipping
As DVD oder by download
Installation
Via SolutionCenter; Can be installed separately as service on the
controller
License
Needs a runtime license for each controller CPU,
independant of number of items or clients
License protection
License file depending on hardware
System requirements
CPU Hardware
All M1 CPU types except ME203 (MH2xx, MC2xx, MPC2xx, MX2xx)
Memory
Minimum 64 MB, recommended 128 MB
System software version
M-Base 3.85 or better
Order information
264
OPC-UA-DA-Server DVD
Software and documentation to operate the OPC UA Server on one
M1 controller. Provides access to process variables via ethernet
according to the OPC UA Data Access standard. Without a valid
Runtime License the OPC UA Server runs only temporarily for 2h in
demo mode.
OPC-UA-DA-Server RT
License to operate the OPC UA Server on one controller CPU. BA142
over the ethernet interface with standards-compliant client software
via OPC Unified Architecture according to Data Access Specification.
OPC Solutions
OPC Enterprise Server
(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)
OPC defines a number of manufacturer-neutral
software interfaces for automation
(www.opcfoundation.org). With OPC data access,
actual states and values (online data) can be
exchanged between controllers and software
applications, such as visualizations, control systems
or production data acquisition. As a pure software
interface OPC runs on a PC or IPC under Windows
and communicates with the M1 automation systems
via Ethernet. Any standard-conformant OPC clients
will then either be operated on the PC of the server,
or in the network and permit data exchange in both
directions.
R
M P LIA
N
FO
CO
CE
SELF-TESTED
®
TM
The integrated configuration tool supports the
selective disclosure of any variables from the control
system under a freely selectable item name for the
clients. Configurations can either be created directly
in the graphic interface, or transferred from other
tools via the import/export function. Convenient copy
functions accelerate the configuration or management
even for large installations with many connected
controllers.
The integrated simulation enables communication
tests with client applications even without connected
M1 systems. Inversely a test client that is likewise
integrated in the »OPC Configurator« configuration
tool allows checking of the data exchange with
underlying controllers without a completely set-up
OPC client application.
The Bachmann M1 OPC enterprise server has been
specially developed for large installations with a
variety of automation devices, i.e. for large data
volumes. In addition to the possibility of handling
multiple network connections simultaneously, here
the parallelization of queries and the multi-processor
support have a particular effect.
Item OPC Enterprise Server
(Installation DVD) OPC Enterprise Server
(Runtime license) Item no.
00015632-xx
00015632-63
265
OPC Solutions
•OPC-conformant data server – manufacturerneutral interface
•Specifications: OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05
and 3.0
•Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
•Secure SSL connection to the controllers
•No restriction of the connected
•M1 systems*
•No restriction of data quantity (items)*
•Multi-processor support (depending on operating
system)
•Powerful configuration tool
•Flat and hierarchical browsing
•Simulation for clients (configuration tool)
•Integrated test client (configuration tool)
•Operation under Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, XP,
2000, Server 2003 and Server 2008
P C 1 (W indow s)
P C 2 (W indow s)
A pplication 1
A pplication 2
(S C A D A , H M I,
Alarm-System,
Historian, ..)
(S C A D A , H M I,
Alarm-System,
Historian, ..)
O P C C lient
O P C C lient
O P C S erver
M 1 O P C E nterprise S erver
Ethernet
VHD
SVI
M 1 C ontroller 1
VHD
SVI
VHD
SVI
VHD
SVI
M 1 C ontroller 2
M 1 C ontroller 3
M 1 C ontroller n
* However there is restriction due to computer performance, network capacity and communication load
on the M1 system. The actual achievable throughput depends on the application case.
266
OPC Solutions
OPC Enterprise Server
Server
Protocol for client application
OPC data access
Supported specifications
V1.0, 2.04, 2.05a, 3.0
Data exchange direction
Bidirectional
Supported data types
Basis types
UINT1, UINT8, SINT8, UINT16, SINT16, UINT32,
SINT32, REAL32, BOOL8, CHAR8, CHAR16, MIXED,
REAL64, UINT64, SINT64
Block types
all basis types; basis type + BLK
(e.g. CHAR8 + BLK = STRING)
Data type mapping
SVI on OPC (automatic)
Number of variables (items)
User-defined**
Time stamp on the server
Yes
Time stamp from controller
Yes (per group one time item possible)
Quality attribute on the server
Yes
Quality attribute from controller
Yes (per group one quality item possible)
Display of connection loss
Yes (affected items show quality=BAD)
Server type
OUT_PROCESS or SERVICE (configurable)
Operation without GUI
Yes
Flat browsing
Yes
Hierarchical browsing
Yes
Refresh rates
Dynamically adjustable per group (from 50 ms)**
Multi-processor support
Yes
Simulation mode
Yes
Interfaces to the controller
Physical interface to the M1
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex)
Basis protocols
TCP/IP
UDP/IP
QSOAP
Protocol
SMI / VHD
Multiple connections per controller
Yes
Simultaneous queries
Yes
Number of connected controllers
User-defined**
Access protection
Yes, configurable
Supported security levels
0 to 4
Encryption
SSL (configurable)
Configuration
Graphic interface
Yes (OPC configurator)
Browsing of controllers
Yes
Browsing of controller variables
(SVI)
Yes
** Refresh rates depend on the data volume and the computer performance,
(Free) controller performance and network topology/network load.
*** No program-technical restriction. Limit value depends on performance
of the computer, the network and the capacity utilization of the controllers.
267
OPC Solutions
OPC Enterprise Server
Configuration
Import/export
Yes (CSV)
Templates
Yes
Clones (with enumeration)
Yes
Restricted access
Yes (only on configured items)
Item names
OPC side can be freely configured (»renaming«)
Item access rights
OPC side can be freely restricted
Integrated test client
Yes
Configurations can be saved
Yes
Access protection on configuration
Yes (different user levels)
Diagnostics
Error logging
Yes (log file)
Debug mode
Yes (several can be set)
Diagnosis on items
Yes (static items)
Statistics on items
Yes (static items)
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation can be automated
(»silent«)
Yes
License basis
Per installation (single-license obligation)
License protection
Hardware-dependent software key
Configured installation
Yes (items/controller configuration, as well as configuration users
can be preset)
System prerequisites – server
Computer
IBM-compatible PC (Intel x86 architecture)
Processor
Minimum: Intel Pentium 500 MHz or comparable (Windows 2000)
Recommended: Intel Core2Duo or Core2Quad with >2 GHz
RAM
Minimum: 256 MB RAM (Windows 2000)
Recommended: >1 GB RAM
Network card
At least 1x Ethernet 802.3
Hard disk
> 300 MB free
Graphic
1024 x 768 or better (only for configuration)
Input devices
Keyboard, 2-button mouse (only for configuration)
Operating system (OPC Server)
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
Other software
Text editor or MS Excel recommended for external configuration
7
Vista
XP
2000
Server 2003
Server 2008
System prerequisites M1
268
M1 automation devices
Families ME, MX, MPC, MPE, as well as CT/WT200 , CT/WT300
(achievable performance is type-dependent)
System software
MSys V2.11 or higher (for full function scope)
OPC Solutions
OPC Standard Server
(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)
OPC defines a number of manufacturer-neutral
software interfaces for automation
(www.opcfoundation.org). With OPC data
access actual states and values (online data) can
be exchanged between controllers and software
applications, such as visualizations, control systems
or production data acquisition. As a pure software
interface OPC runs on a PC or IPC under Windows and
communicates with the M1 automation systems via
Ethernet. Any standard-conformant OPC clients will
then either be operated on the PC of the server, or
in the network and permit data exchange in both
directions.
The integrated configuration tool supports the
selective disclosure of any variables from the control
system under a freely selectable item name for
the clients. Configurations can either be created
directly in the graphic interface, or transferred from
other tools via the import/export function. Inversely
a test client that is also integrated in the »OPC
Configurator« configuration tool allows checking of
the data exchange with underlying controllers without
a completely
set-up OPC client application.
•OPC conformant data server manufacturer-neutral
interface
•Specifications – OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04,
•2.05 and 3.0
•Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
•Secure SSL connection to the controllers
•Up to 5 automation devices per server
•Up to 10,000 information points (items / field
elements)
•Multi-processor support (depending on operating
system)
•Graphic configuration tool
•Flat and hierarchical browsing
•Integrated test client (configuration tool)
•Operation under Microsoft Windows Vista,XP, 2000
269
OPC Solutions
PC (Windows)
Application 1
(SCADA, HMI,
alarm system,
Historian, ..)
OPC client
OPC server
M1 OPC enterprise server284
Ethernet
Bachmann M1
Automation device
VHD
SVI
PLC 1
#1
IEC61131
Motion
PLC x
#2
C/C++
#n
IEC61131
Bachmann MSys, MCore
VxWorks
I/O fieldbus
OPC Standard Server
Server
270
Protocol for client application
OPC data access
Supported specifications
V1.0, 2.04, 2.05a, 3.0
Data exchange direction
Bidirectional
Supported data types
Basis types
UINT1, UINT8, SINT8, UINT16, SINT16, UINT32,
SINT32, REAL32, BOOL8, CHAR8, CHAR16, MIXED,
REAL64, UINT64, SINT64
Block types
all basis types; basis type BLK
(e.g. CHAR8 + BLK = STRING)
Data type mapping
SVI on OPC (automatic)
Number of variables (items)
10,000 (individual variables or field elements)
Time stamp on the server
Yes
Time stamp from controller
Yes (per group one time item possible)
Quality attribute on the server
Yes
Quality attribute from controller
Yes (per group one quality item possible)
OPC Solutions
OPC Standard Server
Server
Display of connection loss
Yes (affected items show quality=BAD)
Server type
OUT_PROCESS
Operation without GUI
Yes
Flat browsing
Yes
Hierarchical browsing
Yes
Refresh rates
Dynamically adjustable per group (from 50 ms)*
Multi-processor support
Yes
Interfaces to the controller
Physical interface to the M1
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex)
Basis protocols
TCP/IP
UDP/IP
QSOAP
Protocol
SMI / VHD
Multiple connections per controller
Yes
Simultaneous queries
Yes
Number of connected controllers
5 (maximum)
Access protection
Yes, configurable
Supported security levels
0 to 4
Encryption
SSL (configurable)
Configuration
Graphic interface
Yes (OPC configurator)
Browsing of controllers
Yes
Browsing of controller variables
(SVI)
Yes
Import/export
Yes (CSV)
Templates
Yes
Clones (with enumeration)
Yes
Restricted access
Yes (only on configured items)
Item names
OPC-side can be freely configured (»renaming«)
Item access rights
OPC side can be freely restricted
Integrated test client
Yes
Configurations can be saved
Yes
Access protection on configuration
Yes (different user levels)
Diagnostics
Error logging
Yes (log file)
Debug mode
Yes (several can be set)
Diagnosis on items
Yes (static items)
Statistics on items
Yes (static items)
* Refresh rates depend on the data volume and the computer performance,
(Free) controller performance and network topology/network load.
271
OPC Solutions
OPC Standard Server
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
(See standard package M-Base and M-COM)
Installation can be automated
(»silent«)
Yes
System prerequisites – server
Computer
IBM-compatible PC (Intel x86 architecture)
Processor
Minimum: Intel Pentium 500 MHz or comparable (Windows 2000)
Recommended: Intel Core2Duo or Core2Quad with >2 GHz
RAM
Minimum: 256 MB RAM (Windows 2000)
Recommended: >1 GB RAM
Network card
At least 1x Ethernet 802.3
Hard disk
> 300 MB free
Graphic
1024 x 768 or better (only for configuration)
Input devices
Keyboard, 2-button mouse (only for configuration)
Operating system (OPC Server)
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Windows 2000
Other software
Text editor or MS Excel recommended for external configuration
System prerequisites M1
272
M1 automation devices
Families ME, MX, MPC, MPE, as well as CT/WT200 , CT/WT300
(achievable performance is type-dependent)
System software
MSys V2.11 or higher (for full function scope)
OPC Solutions
273
Know-how protection
Manipulation protection
Cryptographic functions
Security log
Monitoring of variables
Access control
Communication security
SSL/TLS
Simple. Efficient. Secure.
Security – Communication and
information security
The direct consequences of targeted, destructive access to a machine
controller or an unintentional operating error are the same: standstill or
even destruction of a machine or plant and thus production stoppage, loss of
reputation and money. Therefore, the main objective is to ensure robustness
against disturbances. Protection of data and communication as well as the
logging of access are preventive measures that make unauthorized access
more difficult and bring irregularities to light.
Modern machines and production equipment are deeply embedded in IT
environments, whether in company networks or in public communications
networks, for example, for purposes of remote maintenance. This gives rise
to information security requirements that often pose new challenges for the
equipment manufacturer and plant owner.
In the ever more crowded international competition of machine and
equipment manufacturers, the unique selling points are increasingly in
the direction of software. The processing quality of different providers
is comparable, and so is the resulting production speed. Experience and
knowledge of the process make the difference. More and more, know-how
is in the applications and data, for example, in the form of algorithms,
control parameters and recipes. New opportunities with service offerings,
such as online monitoring and maintenance, demand secure communication
paths, strictly separate access areas and tamper-proof logging. Ultimately
responsibly dealing with one‘s own company includes protecting its
intellectual property against unauthorized modification, and likewise against
misuse by third parties.
Driven by legislation and standards, application sectors like energy and water
supply, as well as functional safety, have for some time been compelled to
implement concrete measures. Particularly in these critical areas, devices
and software from Bachmann electronic are implemented with preference.
Different protective measures, such as secure network connections, user
and access control and security logging have been fixed components of
every controller from Bachmann for years. The existing security concept is
constantly reviewed on the basis of current standards and directives, and
further developed jointly with our customers, well before Stuxnet or Duqu.
275
Security
With Bachmann one decisive step ahead
Machines and production plants are
connected with private and public
communication networks in many cases
today.
Applications in the energy and w
­ ater
supply sector belong to the s
­ o-called
critical infrastructures and place particular
demands on information security stipulated
by law.
Bachmann controllers are used world­
wide especially in cases where maximum
availability, robustness and communication
skills are called for. Many years of
experience in critical applications offer each
user the assuredness that he is working
with proven functions that are being
developed constantly.
With an extensive security package for
machines and plants, B
­ achmann protects
its units from unauthorized access and logs
every write access up to variable level if
necessary.
Quite incidentally, the security measures
increase the robustness against
communication problems that are caused,
for example, by faulty network devices.
Features
Layer-based protection concept
Ethernet load limitation
Securing of network services and logging by means
of authentication and end-to-end encryption (SSL)
Access control and logging
Protection functions at system level
Open interfaces for access control and cryptographic
functions in user applications
Continuous, independent security log
Predefined security levels for basic protection
Integrated component of the M-Base
276
Security
Communication and
Information Security
The direct consequences of targeted, destructive
access to a machine controller or an unintentional
operating error are the same: standstill or even
destruction of a machine or plant and thus production
stoppage, loss of reputation and money. Therefore,
the main objective is to ensure robustness against
disturbances. Protection of data and communication
as well as the logging of access are preventive
measures which make unauthorized access more
difficult and bring irregularities to light.
Targeted access
Exposed machines and plants are not subject to the
same perimeter protection as enclosed industrial
plants. Hence, wind power plants or biogas plants are
relatively easy to access and the response times in
the event of a detected break-in are high.
High risk in production plants mainly emanates from
legitimized persons. Service staff from the external
service provider or a dismissed employee who in
frustration succumbs to the temptation of a targeted
act of damage to property are two classical examples.
The targets here are switches, routers and controllers
with free ports. These can be used for inconspicuous disruption or for targeted interception of
communications.
Engineering
Ethernet
SolutionCenter
Secure network services and logs
Device Viewer
Access control
System security measures
HMI / SCADA
SCADA
Server / Client
Web browser
MES-System
User applications
Security
library
Security
log
C, C++, 61131
Remote
maintenance
The layer-based security architecture forms multiple security walls around user applications. Each level
­includes specific security measures that can also be used in user-specific applications.
Security
Control components of Bachmann have various
measures for counteracting targeted access. E
­ ffective
­mechanisms are in place for protecting against
network overload which ensure stability of the
­application in the event of denial of service attacks.
Vigorous implementation of end-to-end encryption
of the communication by SSL renders eavesdropping
ineffective. User programs use interfaces to current
cryptographic procedures to encrypt data.
Critical infrastructures
Guided by national and international regulations,
public utility companies are particularly sensitized in
matters of security and are obligated to protect
their plants accordingly. Comprehensive measures
embedded in detailed security concepts at all
organizational levels have long been established.
Protective fencing, own surveillance staff and
continuous access controls have been found in
critical parts of these plants. Control networks
and operating panels were strictly sealed off
­previously. In the meantime, modern business and
service models require targeted access of other
organizational components via Intranet and even
externally via Internet.
Access Control includes a powerful module for user and access control. Users and groups can be created
by simple Copy&Paste as well as by integrated inheritance logic thus saving a great deal of time. The clear
assignment of system rights allows the specific assignment of rights for each user.
Security
1
3
2
3
4
1
Management of file and variable rights:
(1) Individual files and variables or entire folders are selectable for the rights management using a browser.
(2) These are presented in a clear tree structure.
(3) Finely grained read and write permissions can be assigned user-related directly in the list using the
Inline-Editing function.
(4) Additionally variables can be limited in the value range.
Defects and operating errors
Targeted security management only helps in the case
of undesirable and potentially destructive access.
Inadvertent changes to machine parameters, failures
of network components or misconfigurations of the
machine network are far more frequent, particularly
in the protected environment of production plants,
but pose the same security threats in terms of
symptoms and effects. For example, a broadcast
storm as a r­ esult of a faulty network switch,
overloads connected network clients in the same way
as a targeted denial of service attack.
Unlike other security measures, the added value
of revealing defects can only be achieved if appro­
priate protective measures directly affect the
controller. Bachmann provides its controllers
with functions for limiting the bandwidth of the
ethernet ports in order to increase the robustness
against intentional and unintentional network
disturbances. Realtime processes are not
disturbed by overloading of the network interface.
It is advisable to set up a user and access
­management system for each user via
Access Control. This limits any possibilities of
manipulation centrally according to the least
privilege principle, and independent security
logging allows changes to be allocated to
individual users. Operating errors can thus be
detected and warranty cases processed speedily.
Security
Safety and Security
Functional safety requires a high degree of security
measures to prevent operating errors. Unnoticed
changes to the safety programming as well as
dangerous interferences during safe operation
must be prevented and logged. Safety Control of
Bachmann already warns about any malicious,
manipulated code on the configuration computer
and protects against inadvertent changes by
means of functions for pinning software versions.
A separate login system on each safety controller
allows individually restrictable access. The continual
logging is tamper-proof and imple-mented
redundantly, so that even in the case of partial
destruction of the module, it will be possible to
reproduce the chain of events up to the f­ailure with
a high degree of probability.
Simply secure
Security measures are only effective if they are also
applied. Bachmann sees it as its task to promote
the total application and dissemination of security
functions even when no comprehensive security
concepts exist and the staff are still not security
experts. Simple activation and operation of the
extensive protective measures ensures that the
dangers of careless operation and simple attacks
are already minimized even at this early stage.
The central part is composed of four predefined
security levels that can be selected in the security
configurator. Behind this are templates which set
the settings within the controller so that certain
logs and functions are activated or even forbidden
depending on the level.
Basic protection is gainable in three steps:
1
Safeguarding the system and network
•setting the security level
•deactivating unnecessary services
•activating logging
2
Limiting access
•defining group rights
•creating users
•setting file rights
3
Securing user programs
•Implementing applications while
taking general security aspects into
account
Recommended procedure for safeguarding
the control
Security
1
2
3
4
The online security monitor gives comfortable overview:
(1) Details according to logged in users and the token status
(2) Security log entries show details to connections and communication status, e.g. login/logout (3) or
assignment of new values to variables (4)
Security
Security
Ethernet
Load limitation
Separately adjustable limitation of the read and write workload for each
Ethernet interface;
Protect the machine application against DDoS attacks (Distributed Denial of
Service), Broadcast Storms and defects in the network infrastructure.
Firewall *)
Configurable and during runtime programmable IP- and MAC-filtering
prevents against DoS attacks and allows dynamic blocking of potential
harmful services or network devices.
Network services and logs
SSL/TLS based network
­communication
Security standard for the establishment of a secured communication
­channel at IP-level.
Support (selection):
Bachmann products: Configuration and programming tool SolutionCenter,
WebMI Pro, M1COM, MJCOM
Manufacturer neutral: OPC UA, webserver, file transfer
Server and client
­authentication
The M1 controller can be an SSL server as well as a client.
The client authentication is also supported in server mode. This is used for
certificate-based authentication of computers, services and users on the M1.
Secured and deactivatable
­services (webserver, OPCserver, FTP, NTP, SMTP …)
Unnecessary protocols can be deactivated by configuration. This ensures
that only used ports are accessible thus reducing the area for attack.
Access Control
User Administration
Password protected restrictions are configured on a group and user basis for
system access and application rights. Time-restricted access is provided.
Token-based write access
protection
The special mechanism guarantees that the token owner is granted
­exclusive write permission. Additionally, prioritization can be assigned based
on the user role. Various degrees of priority can be assigned at user and
group level.
File access
File access, i.e. authorization for the read or write operation as well as the
visibility for browse requests can be set at group level. The configuration
allows individual assignment of rights at directory and file level and
facilitates this by means of the available inheritance logic.
Variable protection
The visibility, read and write access of online available process variables
can be allocated to access rights of the individual user. Mechanism and
configuration as with file permissions.
User specific extensions
provided
User and access management system as well as the token mechanism
can be replaced by user-specific applications. Thus, special policies and
­functions can be implemented and the controls can be integrated smoothly
into existing systems.
*) from M-Base / M-Sys / MxCCore ≥ V3.95
Security
Security
System
Enable/disable application
development
Protection against installation of unauthorized programs.
Memory protection
Application programs are protected at memory level against
write access from other applications.
Protection against malware that want to eavesdrop and manipulate data at
operating system level. Protection against buffer overflows.
Null pointer protection
Special protection to prevent manipulations via null pointer exception
­handling.
Security log with archiving
function
Login and logout of users as well as each write access are logged at variable
level, security-relevant modifications are noted. Timestamp, user, group,
old and new value as well as further details are stored in continuously
generated file archives.
Access is offline, e.g. via a central archiving system, but online is also
­possible via application programs or SCADA systems.
Predefined security levels
Four templates for simplifying and shortening the security configuration.
Partition encryption *)
Transparent encryption (AES128/192/256) via SolutionCenter. Defense
against unauthorized data access and manipulation in case of data media
theft (CF-/CFast).
User Application
Access Control
The information for logged in users, their session status and security
protocols can be accessed from user programs.
Security Library
Symmetric, asymmetric encryption procedures, signature and authentication
procedures, block and stream ciphers, SSL/TLS are available to the
application programs by means of openSSL library.
These functions can be used in PLC in the form of library functions.
Examples of important
­cryptographic procedures
and secure methods for
network communication
Symmetric encryption:
Asymmetric encryption:
hash functions:
MAC functions:
Signature algorithms:
Key transfer process:
Certificate variants, data encoding:
AES, 3DES
RSA
SHA, RIPEMD, MD5
CBC-MAC, HMAC
RSA-PSS, ECDSA
SSL/TLS (TLS 1.2, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.0,
SSL 3.0)
PKS7, PKS12, x509
Standards, regulations and recommendations
Security in Control Systems
The security measures were implemented while taking the following
standards, regulations and recommendations into account:
IEC 62351, IEC 62443, ISA 99, VDI/VDE 2182, FIPS 140, NIST 800 series
Publisher
BSI, BDEW, NERC
System prerequisites
Automation equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better
Engineering PC
For system prerequisites see SolutionCenter
Runtime software
M-Sys / MxCCore ≥ V3.80
Engineering software
M-Base ≥ 3.80
Installation medium
Included in M-Base (runtime and engineering components)
*) from M-Base / M-Sys / MxCCore ≥ V3.95
Integrated. Intuitive. Safe.
Safety – Integrated Safety Technology
Safety ‒ for man as well as machine ‒ plays a role that is becoming ever
more important: Machines and plants are becoming increasingly complex and
the requirements imposed on functional safety are continuously increasing.
Bachmann electronic offers a safety package that is consistently integrated
in the M1 automation system that is designed for the most rigorous safety
requirements. It consists of the safety processor module SLC284, the digital
I/O modules, and the Safety Developer, and it can be extended to meet
individual requirements and in accordance with the latest safety standards
(PL e, SIL3, Cat 4). And best of all: In addition to safety, efficiency is also
increased; the intelligent safety technology helps to significantly lower
engineering costs. Through specific diagnostic possibilities and the fastest
possible intervention, availability of the machine/system is increased and
downtimes are reduced. With the edition of the safety module as ColdClimate
version, Bachmann sets new standards in terms of robustness and functional
safety.
285
Safety Modules & Safety Developer
Integrated safety
With the safety modules for realization
of functional safety, Bachmann electronic
is setting a clear signal for a holistic
and integrated automation solution. The
systems presented here not only offer the
best-possible safety, they also guarantee
continuity and investment protection.
The new programmable safety processor
module, SLC284, and the safety digital
I/O modules, SDI208 or SDO204, and the
safety counter module, SCT202, make
it possible to set up a solution that is
integrated in the M1 Automation System.
This solution can be adapted to the
individual requirements and satisfies
the latest safety standards.
For the subsequent safety-relevant safety
engineering steps the SolutionCenter
contains the Safety Developer, which
includes all the required tools for safetyoriented programming in accordance with
FBD acc. to IEC 61131-3 and PLCopen, and
has been developed and certified in close
cooperation with TÜV.
Safety Processor Module SLC284
Features
16 digital inputs / 8 digital outputs – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Programmable in function block language
in accordance with IEC 61131-3
Programming, configuration, monitoring
and debugging per SolutionCenter
Manipulation protection thanks to configurable user
schemes with access and function restrictions
1x RS232 for on-site maintenance access without
developer tools
Safety Digital Input Module SDI208
Features
Digital input module with two galvanically
separated input groups
16 digital input channels – can be used redundantly
in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Each channel can be optionally tested
per test clocking
Cross-circuit detection
Autonomously safe – robust against network
breakdowns
286
Safety Modules & Safety Developer
Safety Digital Output Module
SDO204
Features
Digital output module with two galvanically
separated output groups
8 digital output channels – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Autonomously safe – robust against network
breakdowns
Output voltage range +18 to 34 V DC
2 A per channel
Safety Counter Module SCT202
Features
Safety module for measuring safety-related rotations
(PL d / SIL2 )
2 safety inputs as an incremental encoder
2 safety inputs – as a counter input (connection of
initiators) or latch or referencing inputs
2 safety digital inputs can also be used as latch or
referencing inputs
2 safety digital outputs as safety short response
shutdown contacts which are ideal for overspeed
­detection
Frequency measuring directly in the module
Safety Developer
Engineering Tool
Features
Integrated in the SolutionCenter all-in-one
engineering tool
Full-graphic function plan editor
with autorouting
Certified safety modules
in accordance with PLCopen Safety
Standard modules for logical links, timers and
arithmetic operations in accordancen with
EN 61131-3
Integrated debugger and monitor - online monitoring
in safe operation
287
Safety Modules
Safety Processor Module SLC284
The SCL284 module – ideally integrated in the M1
controller – is presented as an independent, safe,
and modern safety controller. The safety processor
module SLC284 is approved in accordance with the
latest safety norm, IEC 61508.
No additional cabling is needed for communication
between the SLC284 and the safety I/O modules
SDI208 and SDO204. The modules can be separated
by several hundred meters and operated in a
distributed manner via the bus expansion or a
FASTBUS.
•16 digital inputs / 8 digital outputs – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
•Each output with emergency delay is configurable in
the event of communication lost
•Safety Controller with two independent 32-bit
microcontrollers
•Fastest program cycle 5 ms
•Decentralized I/O via FASTBUS or bus expansion
with SDI208 or SDO204
•All safety I/O states can be used by the M1
controller
•Safety programming via SolutionCenter
•Galvanic isolation between the groups
•Galvanic isolation from the system bus
•Operating mode selector switch
•Operating status display »SAFE«, »PROG«, »TEST«,
»ERROR«
•Status display for each channel via LED
•Programming via independent serial interface or via
controller
Item SLC284
SLC284 CC
288
Item no.
00014273-00
00017465-00
Safety Modules
SLC284
Processor
CPU
2x LPC2468, 72 MHz, 32 bit
Controller
Programming
Via controller (I/O bus) or serial interface (COM)
Number of independent safety
programs per SLC
1
Program cycle
Minimal 5 ms
I/O expansion
Via SDI208, SDO204 or SCT202 modules
Digital inputs
Quantity
16 digital inputs – can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Input voltage range (H)
15 to 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L)
-34 to +5 V DC
Input delay (normally) HW
300 µs
Input delay (normally) SW
1 ms with deactivated test clocking
Input type according to IEC61131-2
input current at least
Type 1
3.5 mA at 24 V DC
Status display (LED)
Green
Error monitoring
Internal function monitoring
External test clocking optional
Digital outputs
Quantity
8 digital outputs – can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Output voltage range
18 to 34 V DC
Output current per channel
0.5 A nominal
Total current per group (max.)
2A
Delay 0 to 1
Max. 35 µs at full load
Delay 1 to 0
Max. 155 µs at full load
Output groups
2, electronic fuse
Status display (LED)
Green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
500 Hz
Error monitoring
Short circuit, overload, inadequate or excess voltage
of the power supply
Time-delayed emergency
­shut-off
Each output individual from 0 to 1800 s configurable
(resolution 100 ms);
Emergency shut-off is activated in the event of communication lost
e.g. Cable break or failure in the supply voltage
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the system
500 V
Galvanic isolation between groups
500 V
Internal power supply
Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal
5 V / 550 mA via backplane
289
Safety Modules
SLC284
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 to 34 V)
Current consumption
Normally 95 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption of the
encoders and sensors
Connection technology
I/O connection
Connector RM3.5 with flange
Power supply connection
Connector RM5.08 with flange
Connection technology
Screw or spring terminal
Writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety
IEC 61508:2010: Functional safety – Design of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for
ISO 13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC 62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC 61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
Product standard
IEC 61131-2
UL 508
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Operating mode adjustable via hex switch
Ambient conditions
ColdClimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C fanless
-30 to +60 °C fanless
Relative humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
-40 to +85 °C
Relative humidity storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Maximum altitude*
5 to 95 % with condensation
4,500 m above sea level
Pollution degree
2
Protection class
3
Order codes
SLC284
00014273-00
Safety processor module; integrated digital input/output; SIL3/PLe:
8x DI 24V; 4x DO 24V / 0.5A; (SIL2/PLd: 16x DI, 8x DO); 6ms cycle
time; RS232; operating standalone or with CPU modul
SLC284 CC
00017465-00
Like SLC284; ColdClimate ( )
*
For operation at an altitude of 2,000 m above sea level, a derating of -0.5 Kelvin per 100 m to a
maximum altitude of 4,500 m above sea level must be taken into account.
Accessories SLC284
Item
Item no.
KZ-SLC284 B+C 00014771-50
290
Description
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/05; 6x KZ 35/08) with
labeling strip and coding elements
Safety Modules
Safety Digital Input Module
SDI208
The SDI208 module adds an additional 8 input
channels to the SLC284 safety processor module.
A homogeneous total system is created through
independent and safe integration in the M1 controller.
Through the free choice of the slot – either directly
beside the safety controller, through bus expansion,
or several hundred meters away through the
FASTBUS – the safety system can be optimally
adapted to the distributed requirements and existing
infrastructure of the system.
The SDI208 safety digital input module is approved
under the latest safety standard IEC 61508. The
SDI208 can be easily integrated in the safety
application, comparable with a standard I/O module
– as the proven »SolutionCenter« development
platform offers the easiest configuration, most flexible
type of programming, and a safe simulation via easily
combinable
PLC-Open function modules. All variables, and
states of the SDI208 safety digital input module are
accessible in all other machine program languages
(PLC, C/C++); visualization is also available and
makes cumbersome parallel wiring unnecessary.
•16 digital inputs – can be used redundantly
in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
•Safe monitoring of the inputs with redundant 32-bit
microcontrollers
•Several SDI208 modules per controller possible
•All safety I/O states can be used by M1 controller
•Safety programming via SolutionCenter
•Galvanic isolation between the groups
•Galvanic isolation from the system
•Operating state display »SAFE«
•Status display for each channel via LED
Item SDI208
SDI208 CC
Item no.
00014544-00
00017459-00
291
Safety Modules
SDI208
Digital inputs
Quantity
Input voltage range (H)
16 digital inputs – can be used redundantly in pairs
(PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
15 to 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L)
-34 to +5 V DC
Input delay (normally) HW
300 µs
Input delay (normally) SW
1 ms with deactivated test clocking
Input type according
to IEC61131-2
Input current at least
Type 1
Status display (LED)
Green
Error monitoring
Internal function monitoring
External test clocking optional
3.5 mA at 24 V DC
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the system
500 V
Galvanic isolation between groups
500 V
Internal power supply
Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal
5 V / 500 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 to 34 V)
Current consumption
Normally 65 mA at 24 VDC + Σ current consumption
of the encoders and sensors
Connection technology
I/O connection
Connector RM3.5 with flange
Power supply connection
Connector RM5.08 with flange
Connection technology
Screw or spring terminal
Writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety
Approved for
Product standard
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
292
IEC 61508:2010: Functional safety – Design of complex E/E/PE
safety components
ISO 13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC 62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC 61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
IEC 61131-2
UL 508
Safety Modules
SDI208
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Relative humidity operation
Storage temperature
Relative humidity storage
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C fanless
-30 to +60 °C fanless
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Maximum altitude*
4,500 m above sea level
Pollution degree
2
Protection class
3
Order codes
SDI208
00014544-00
Safety digital input module; SIL3/PLe: 8x DI 24V; (SIL2/PLd: 16x DI)
SDI208 CC
00017459-00
Like SDI208; ColdClimate ( )
*
For operation at an altitude of 2,000 m above sea level, a derating of -0.5 Kelvin per 100 m to a
maximum altitude of 4,500 m above sea level must be taken into account.
Accessories SDI208
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-SDI208 B+C
00014774-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/05; 2x KZ 35/12) with
labeling strip and coding elements
293
Safety Modules
Safety Digital Output Module
SDO204
The SDO204 module adds an additional 4 output
channels to the SLC284 safety processor module
and a homogeneous overall system is created
through the independent and safe inclusion in the M1
controller. Through the free choice of the slot – either
directly beside the safety controller, through bus
expansion, or several hundred meters away through
the FASTBUS – the safety system can be optimally
adapted to the distributed requirements and existing
infrastructure of the system.
The SDO204 safety digital output module is approved
under the latest safety standard IEC61508. The
SDO204 can be easily integrated in the overall safety
application, comparable with a standard I/O module
– as the proven »SolutionCenter« development
platform offers the easiest configuration, most flexible
type of programming, and a safe simulation via easily
combinable PLC-Open function modules. All variables
and states of the SDO204 safety digital output
module are accessible in other machine program
languages (PLC, C/C++), however the visualization is
also available and makes bothersome parallel wiring
unnecessary.
•8 digital outputs – can be used redundantly in pairs
(PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
•Each output with emergency delay is configurable in
the event of communication lost
•Safe monitoring of the inputs with redundant 32-bit
microcontrollers
•Several SDO208 units per controller possible
•All safety I/O states can be used
by M1 controller
•Safety programming via SolutionCenter
•Galvanic isolation between the groups
•Galvanic isolation from the system
•Operating state display »SAFE«
•Status display for each channel via LED
Item SDO204
SDO204 CC
294
Item no.
00014545-00
00017462-00
Safety Modules
SDO204
Digital outputs
Quantity
8 digital outputs – can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Output voltage range
18 to 34 V DC
Output current per channel
2 A nominal
Total current per group (max.)
8 A*
Delay 0 to 1
Max. 35 µs at full load
Delay 1 to 0
Max. 155 µs at full load
Output groups
2, electronic fuse
Status display (LED)
Green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
500 Hz
Error monitoring
Short circuit, overload, inadequate or excess voltage of the power supply
Time-delayed emergency shutoff
Each output individual from 0 to 1800 s configurable
(resolution 100 ms);
Emergency shut-off is activated in the event of communication lost e.g.
Cable break or failure in the supply voltage
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from
the system
500 V
Galvanic isolation
between groups
500 V
Internal power supply
Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal
5 V / 250 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 to 34 V)
Voltage range
18 to 34 V DC
Current consumption
Normally 70 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption of the encoders
Connection technology
I/O connection
Connector RM3.5 with flange
Power supply connection
Connector RM5.08 with flange
Connection technology
Screw or spring terminal
Writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety
IEC 61508:2010: Functional safety – Design of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for
ISO 13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC 62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC 61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
Product standard
IEC 61131-2
UL 508
* Derating from 40 °C ambient temperature
295
Safety Modules
SDO204
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Ambient conditions
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60 °C fanless
-30 to +60 °C fanless
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85 °C
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Operating temperature
Relative humidity operation
Storage temperature
Relative humidity storage
Maximum altitude*
4,500 m above sea level
Pollution degree
2
Protection class
3
Order codes
SDO204
00014545-00
Safety digital output module; SIL3/PLe: 4x DO 24V / 2A; (SIL2/PLd:
8x DO)
SDO204 CC
00017462-00
Like SDO204; ColdClimate ( )
*
For operation at an altitude of 2,000 m above sea level, a derating of -0.5 Kelvin per 100 m to a
maximum altitude of 4,500 m above sea level must be taken into account.
Accessories SDO204
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-SDO204 B+C
00014772-50
Phoenix 笼式弹簧接线端子 (1x KZ 51/05; 2x KZ 35/08),带标签条 + 编码元件
I [A]
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
296
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
T [°C]
Safety Modules
SCT202 Safety Counter Module
with Integrated Frequency Measuring
The SCT202 is a safety module for measuring safetyrelated rotations. For this it provides inputs and
outputs which enable the i­mplementation of safety
applications up to SIL2 and PLd.
The module offers the following I/Os:
•Two safety input blocks that can be used as an
incremental interface (each connectable with
symmetrical A/B/N tracks). The measuring result is
available to the user both as a frequency as well as
in the form of a counter status.
•Two safety input blocks that can either be used as
a counter input (connection of i­nitiators) or latch or
referencing inputs.
•Two safety digital inputs that can also be used as
latch or referencing inputs.
•Two safety digital outputs as safety short r­ esponse
shutdown contacts which are ideal for overspeed
­detection (reaction time: ≤ 1 ms).
Other special features:
•Frequency measuring directly in the module
•Qualified for use as non-safety c
­ ounter / speed
measuring module
•Integrated referencing function (initiator, zero pulse
and combination, as well as via software)
•High speed shutdown on overfrequency
•Zero speed monitoring
•Available as ColdClimate module
Item
SCT202
SCT202 CC
Item no.
00022320-00
00024877-00
297
Safety Modules
SCT202
Incremental encoder inputs (INC)
Number
2 single-channel; Inputs supply counter status and frequency
Counter resolution
32 Bit
Count direction
A/B sequence
Input signals
A-, A+, B-, B+, N-, N+
Signal evaluation
1 / 2 / 4-edge evaluation
Max. input frequency
≤ 300 kHz
Digital input filter
Adjustable via software
Signal level
HTL (24 V) and TTL / RS422 on DSUB socket
Counter inputs (CNT)
Number
2 channels exclusively as counter inputs (HTL only)
Inputs supply counter status and frequency
Counter resolution
32 Bit
Count direction
Switchable via digital input or software (Pulse direction function)
Signal evaluation
1/2-fold edge evaluation optional rising or falling edge
Max. input frequency
5 kHz (CNT inputs)
Sensor support
PNP
Digital input filter
Programmable
Signal level
HTL (24 V) – for the two counter channels (CNT)
Digital Safety inputs
Number
2 single-channel, can be used up to SIL CL 2; PL d
Trigger function
Edge adjustable (transfer of value)
Input filter
1 ms
Signal level for 0 status
(inactive)
0 to +5 V
Signal level for 1 status
(active)
+15 to 34 V
Encoder power supply
+5 V
+24 V
Voltage
+5 V
Uext* -1 V
Tolerance
±5 %
As Uext
Max. current / encoder
200 mA
300 mA
Ripple
< 150 mVss
As Uext
Short circuit proof
Yes, permanent
Yes, permanent
* External power supply
298
Safety Modules
SCT202
Safety functions of incremental encoder and counter inputs
Overspeed function
Upper limit frequency exceeded (configurable and programmable)
Zero speed monitor function
Lower limit frequency configurable
Referencing function
Via
- Switch (digital signal)
- Zero track
- Switch & zero track
- Software (safety application)
Position function
In combination with the latch function or also referencing function
Error detection
Wire break, plausibility, undervoltage and overvoltage of the encoder supply
Cycle time
6 to 50 ms
Reaction time
SCT202 direct shutdown:
1 ms
in association with safety application: ≤ 12 to 100 ms
Digital Safety outputs
Number
2 digital outputs,
usable as single-channel up to SIL CL 2; PL d
Configurable shutdown delay
Output voltage range
18 to 34 V DC
Output current per channel
0.5 A
0 to 1 delay
Max. 35 μs at full load
1 to 0 delay
Max. 155 μs at full load
Fault monitoring
Short circuit, overload, undervoltage, overvoltage of the power supply
Status indication
Status LED
Green LED (SAFE), compliant with other safety modules
Channel indication
Digital inputs and outputs
One green LED per channel
M1 module status
Orange LED (RDY)
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the
system
500 V
Internal power supply
BS2xx bus rails
Internal current consumption
5 V / < 150 mA via bus rail
299
Safety Modules
SCT202
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Input voltage
24 VDC (18 to 34 VDC)
Current consumption
Typ. 70 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption of actuators and
sensors
Connection technology
HTL incremental and counter
inputs
D-SUB male socket 9-pin
I/O connection
RM 3.5 connector with flange
Power supply connection
RM 5.08 connector with flange
Connection technology
Screw or spring terminal, writable and codable plug
Standards and approvals
Machine safety
IEC 61508:2010: Functional safety of E/E/PE safety-related systems
Approved for
ISO 13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC 62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC 61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
Product standard
IEC 61131-2
GL
IEC 61400-1
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60°C fan-free
-30 to +60°C fan-free
5 to 95 % no condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
-40 to +85°C
-40 to +85°C
5 to 95 % no condensation
5 to 95 % with condensation
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Relative air humidity, operation
Storage temperature
Relative air humidity, storage
Maximum altitude*
4,500 m above sea level
Pollution degree
2
Protection class
3
Order codes
SCT202
00022320-00
Safety counter module; SIL2/PLd: 2x DO 24V / 1 A: 2x DI 24V; 2x
INC HTL/TTL 300kHz + 2x counter HTL 5kHz; HTL=24V; 32bit; INC
A,A/B/N; position; frequency; trigger; isolated
SCT202 CC
00024877-00
Like SCT202; ColdClimate ( )
*
For operation at an altitude of 2,000 m above sea level, a derating of -0.5 Kelvin per 100 m to a
maximum altitude of 4,500 m above sea level must be taken into account.
Accessories SCT202
300
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-SCT 202 B+C
00027026-00
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/03; 2x KZ 35/07) with
labeling strips and coding elements
Safety Modules
301
Safety Developer
Safety Developer
Engineering Tool
For the more safety-relevant, engineering steps the
SolutionCenter contains the Safety Developer that
includes all tools required for safety-conformant
programming in accordance with EN61508 andb
PLCopen. Safety Developer has been developed and
certified in close collaboration with TÜV. All methods
required for logging and the verification obligation of
the machine manufacturer are integral components:
password management, fail-safe program
transmission, tamper-proof logging on the target
device, documentation of the safety program, and all
software components used, unique identification of
the safety modules, and the programming itself.
•Integrated in the SolutionCenter all-in-one
engineering tool
•Full-graphic function plan editor with autorouting
•Certified safety modules in accordance with
PLCopen Safety
•Standard modules for logical links, timers and
arithmetic operations in accordancen with
EN61131-3
•Color coding of secure and unsecure signal flow
•Grouping of circuitry parts for repeat use
(compound)
•Adjustable test depth for the project translation
•Variable monitoring, value simulation and break
points
•Open programming interfaces (PLC, C, C++) for
e.g. online monitoring
302
•Bidirectional exchange of values
between secure and non-secure controller
•Unique identification of the safe hardware
•Configuration of the clocked self-monitoring of
inputs/outputs
•Communication to safe hardware via Ethernet
(M1) or serial
•Certified redundant program download
•Logging of the acceptance state in PDF format
•Direct connection to version management
•Online monitorning of all I/Os also in safe
operating mode
Safety Developer
Programming in accordance
with PLCopen Safety
The safety application is programmed in a freegraphic function plan editor (Safety Editor) in
accordance with EN61131-3. The module set
includes a library of safety modules that have
been strictly implemented, tested, and certified in
accordance with the PLCopen safety standard.
For the logic, additionally required standard
modules, such as timers, arithmetic, and logical
operations are available. The application can
be organized in multiple separated functional
units and sub programs in order to structure the
program. Unsafe input and output signals from
the control system can be added to the safety
project via a browser. The execution sequence of
the modules is presented graphically and can be
corrected by the user. Redundant hardware inputs
are summarized via equivalence or antivalence
blocks and subsequently presented as a safe
signal in the program. The data types, bool,
integer, and time, are supported.
303
Safety Developer
Visibility in the standard program
The transparent exchange of signals functions
in both directions. In the Safety Developer you
configure which values – irrespective of the
states of the safe I/Os – should also be visible
in the unsafe world. Thus intermediate results
in networks and the status of modules can be
presented in a visualization, recorded with the
Scope, or evaluated in a PLC program. Thus there
are extensive diagnostic possibilities and a high
level of operating convenience.
Safe and unsafe paths
Signals from the standard sequential program and
from the I/O modules of the control system can
be used in the safety program as unsafe input and
output signals. The classification of a signal as
safe or unsafe is presented with color coding.
304
User-specific templates
A logical circuit that is structured from a group of
basic modules can be put together and given an
interface in the project for a function group. Thus
separate user-specific function blocks (templates) can
be created and used in the project multiple times.
These groups or even complete networks can also by
transferrred from one project into the next project.
Safety Developer
Tracking changes
In the Safety Developer version management is an
integral component – regardless of the logging and
verification obligation. The version management
database is operated directly from the project
navigator. A local history is always kept automatically,
which enables reversal of changes even without a
genuine version management system. Naturally
Undo/Redo functions are also available.
Program verification
The program for execution on the target system is not
compiled, but rather is translated into a script that is
checked and executed redundantly by the firmware of
the target system. Nevertheless the Safety Developer
can detect and display possible error sources in the
code when the script is generated.
Logging
The verification obligation is supported in different
ways. For logging of acceptance, a project
report can be generated that also presents the
entire program code graphically. The tamperproof log book of the safety controller logs each
safety-relevant change in the system, such as
the download of a changed program. Thus any
manipulation can be traced with user name, date,
and time.
Optionally the safety program can be stored on
the safety controller and can be opened and
further processed from the controller. Additional
user-specific information, such as author, version
history, and additional comments can be stored
for each network.
Hardware configuration
Modularity
The Safety Developer takes the flexible requirements
in today's industry into account through its modular
project management. FBD networks, and also
additional safe I/O modules of the project, can
be activated depending on the expansion stage,
signals can be connected to different sources and
potentially susceptible equipment, thus a project for
maximum machine expansion can be created and
tested. Adaptation to the real degree of expansion is
achieved through the bringing together of the desired
parts. Commissioning of individual machine parts is
also possible in this manner.
In addition to the tools for variable selection,
programming, and logging, the safe hardware
can also be directly configured in the Safety
Developer. This includes not only assignment
of unique channel names, but particularly also
allocation of the controller to the project, the
adding of additional safe I/O modules, and
specification of test intervals for clocked lines,
which then are tested automatically by the
hardware for short circuit, cross-connection, and
interference voltage.
Safety-relevant, required unique module
identification that excludes the possibility of
swapping modules after a service deployment is
also executed directly in the Safety Developer.
Communication between Safety Developer and the
control system for program download, diagnosis
and configuration is executed conveniently and
in broadband via the Ethernet Interface of the
M1 control system. Alternatively, communication
can also be executed directly with the Safety
Controller via a serial RS232 interface, which also
enables use of the Safety Controller as a standalone solution without a surrounding control
system.
305
306
Failure-free. Flexible. Economical.
Redundancy – Maximum Availability
Ensures Productivity
Automation devices from plant, transport and mechanical engineering are
no longer unthinkable. They control and regulate mission critical systems often entirely stand-alone or with requirements that manual operation can
no longer perform. Maximum reliability and ranges of solutions for highavailability applications call for increasingly higher demands on productivity
right up to 27/7 availability.
Proven ruggedness and exceptional service life data are are often insufficient
here. Effective measures against network, sensor and wiring outages, as well
as statistically rare component part failure, are required.
Bachmann electronic with its scalable redundancy products for the
proven M1 automation system always provides the right solution. The
redundancy product series upgrades the significant ruggedness and
availability of the hardware modules universal fault tolerance. The softwareonly implementation based on redundant Ethernet real-time networking
guarantees compatibility without special and expensive redundancy hardware
and makes upgrading of existing applications possible.
307
Redundancy
The right solution for each application
Hot-standby redundancy
Maximum reliability thanks to fully
automatic variable exchange and bumpless
application switchover. Ideal where outages
are economically unacceptable and for
technical challenges like in rapid control
applications.
Network redundancy
Using the basic redundancy version, critical
transmission links are protected against
interruptions due to mechanical damage
and network equipment outages.
Warm-standby redundancy
Values interchange is supported by
network redundancy. Adjusts to redundant
data recording and for simple and less
critical redundancy applications.
Common features
Redundancy cycles up to 1 ms possible*
Automatic switchover between variables and process
value sources within one PLC cycle
Support of fully autonomous, dual communication
guarantees maximum reliability with freely selectable
transmission medium (copper/optical fiber)
Integration of configuration, monitoring and
programming in the engineering tool SolutionCenter
Redundancy networking on Ethernet basis, full
support of TCP/IP-based parallel communication
Networking topology freely selectable: star, bus,
ring and combinations  easily adaptable to existing
network
Master CPUs: all processor modules from the MPC,
MC, MH series
Retrofitable and upgradable without CPU exchange,
application of standard components
Support of standard applications in addition to
redundancy applications, even with diverse cycle
times
Standard operating range of -30 to +60 °C, with
short-term Temperature peaks of -40 to +70 °C
with condensation present when using cold climate
modules
* tested with CPUs of the MPC series; limit value
subject to CPU type, memory available, application
size, number of exchangeable variables, network
bandwidth available, network and CPU load via nonredundant applications
308
Redundancy
Hot-Standby Redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Features
Two master CPUs
Automatic matching of the master CPUs
Bumpless switchover
Chronological synchronization of all stations
Configuration and monitoring in the SolutionCenter
Expanded diagnostic and programming interfaces for
monitoring and analysis of redundancy status
Network redundancy included
Freely adjustable switchover time, automatic
switchover in case of error
Warm-Standby Redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Features
Two master CPUs
Diagnostic interface for monitoring and analyzing the
redundancy status
Slaves decide from which CPU the data packet is
applied (voter)
Switching time configurable
Matching of the master CPUs not integrated
Operator
Terminal
Network Redundancy
Master
CPU
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Features
One master CPU
Redundant communication (cyclic and non-cyclic
communication)
Easy configuration in development environment,
integrated diagnostics (status, quality)
Programming interface, libraries and system
variables for easy creation of applications
Slaves work as smart substations
Network switchover in the same PLC cycle
309
Redundancy
Hot-Standby Redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Mission-critical systems, applications in harsh
environments and facilities where even short outages,
e.g. owing to cost restraints, are not tolerated are
hot-standby redundancy's main fields of activity. In
addition, control engineering applications with their
requirement of smooth switchover, i.e. no deviation
between values when switching the master CPU, are
executable in this redundancy version too.
With redundancy on all system levels (i.e. hardware,
system software, application programming and
maintenance, monitoring interfaces) hot-standby
redundancy provides maximum reliability with
outstanding convenience at the same time.
The full integration of configuration, programming and
monitoring in Bachmann tools shortens application
creation and minimizes deviations with respect to
everyday standard operating sequences. At the same
time, risks in the course of maintenance operations,
error corrections and application updates decrease
during the process in operation.
Hot-standby redundancy combines the highest
redundancy technology and the best performance
possible with the customary ruggedness of every
Bachmann module.
Hot-standby redundancy enhances network
redundancy by the following attributes, among
others:
•Fully automatic matching of process variables
•Automatic failover upon detecting internal errors
•Integrated self-tests for checking system status
•Automatic system matching (system software,
configuration, applications)
•Automatic application synchronization (variance
< 200 µs)
•Millisecond-precise synchronization of all stations
Item
Item no.
Description
M-HS-REDU RT
00019829-63
License to operate a hot-standby redundancy on two
controller CPUs as redundant main controllers (includes
2 licenses). Allows any number of IO stations (slaves) to
connect redundantly to both main controllers (includes
network redundancy).
Redundancy
•Network switching time freely configurable (0 to
10 PLC cycles)
•Blumpless switchover
•Redundancy programming support in M-PLC
(IEC 61131-3)
•Debugging and forcing of variables in redundant
applications (M-PLC)
•Resistant to single-fault events, additionally
many multi-fault scenarios are overridden on a
continuous basis
Integration in the SolutionCenter
•Applying, monitoring and deleting redundancy
devices
•Extra support in Solution Navigator and Device
Manager for configuring, monitoring and logging
redundant applications
•Textual and graphical redundancy status displays
•Virtual redundancy devices with the option
of applying and manipulating redundancy
configurations and applications
•Redundancy master status information
•Device designation
•Current redundancy status of the entire system
•CPU information
•System software information
•Network information
•Redundancy application status information
•Current redundancy status (REDUNDANT/SINGLE/
ERROR)
•Runtime state (RUN/STOP/ERROR)
•Error status codes
•Synchronization status
•Cycle time
•Maintenance interface for redundancy systems
integrated (execution of commands on both
master CPUs at the same time)
•All commands and monitoring mechanisms are
available to the operator as open user interfaces
and/or as system variables.
Redundancy
Hot-standby redundancy
Rationale/Characteristic
High availability system type
Hot-standby redundancy with local I/O stations (1oo2 voting
integrated)
CPU redundancy
Yes (synchronization and self-monitoring automatic)
Network redundancy
Included
I/O redundancy
Possible
Sensor redundancy
Possible
Switchover
Bumpless
Continuous dual-channel ability
Yes
Communication redundancy
Yes
Processing units (recommendation)
Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral
Via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware
No (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis
Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol
bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy
Yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches
Industrial standard managed switch (or unmanaged switch with
­appropriate configuration)
Topologies
Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy
Possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension
In compliance with IEEE 802.3 - ≥ 2000 m per network section with
fiber optic connection
CPUs spatially separable
Yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization
Integrated in network protocol
Number of I/O stations
More than 100
Smart substations
Yes, for example, I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation, load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic
Yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS)
Interfaces
I/O peripheral
M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network
bluecom network variables
Field buses
Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols
See M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP etc. and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
Yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Redundancy
Hot-standby redundancy
Configuration/Programming
Editor
CoDeSys
Redundancy download
Automatic
Redundancy debugging
Yes
Redundancy synchronization
Automatic (process variables, system software)
Manual switchover
Yes
Switchover: triggering by user
Failover: automatic via software
Multitasking
Yes (one redundant task permissible per PLC application, total up to
three independent redundancy tasks)
Mixed operation
Yes (non-redundant, non-synchronized applications can run parallel
to redundancy applications)
Diagnostics/Monitoring
I/O live display
SolutionCenter
Redundancy status
Yes
Error status
Yes
Diagnostic user interface (API)
Yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API)
Yes, integrated
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
Yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Distributed logging
Yes (synchronized, granularity 1 ms)
Performance data
Master cycle time
1 to 1000 ms*
I/O cycle time
Minimum 200 µs for non-redundant applications
1 ms to 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works
More than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 to 600
channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Synchronization volume
Max. 120*1400 byte
Switching time
Adjustable from 0 to 10 cycles
Time precision
< 1 ms *
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
Possible via software / new CF card required
License protection
Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Controller equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 family or better (minimum 2 Ethernet
interfaces onboard)
Network
2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s, managed switch
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
* Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction.
Redundancy
Warm-Standby Redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
For applications where reliable recording of critical
data has priority, warm-standby redundancy is the
preferred solution. Good support when configuring
and monitoring the actual CPU redundancies helps
during the rapid development of applications for
which bumpless switchover is not required.
Continuous operation during maintenance, system
updating and application changes is also possible in
this version.
If a master CPU for maintenance work is disconnected
from the network, real-time processing is only
affected to a minimum. The data transmission
continues seamlessly and from the perspective of the
receiving stations no packets are lost.
The matching of process variables in the master
CPU has to be resolved on the application level,
which means extra effort and expense and increased
complexity vis-à-vis hot-standby redundancy (see
Fig. 1).
Warm-standby redundancy provides the qualities of
network redundancy and the following advantages as
well:
•CPU redundancy
•Switching time freely configurable (0 to 10 PLC
cycles)
•Selection of the data master integrated in end
points (voter), the fastest switching times possible
as a result
•Diagnostic interface for monitoring and analyzing
the redundancy status in the SolutionCenter
•Automatic matching of the master CPUs not
integrated  switchover not bumpless
Item
Item no.
Description
M-NW-REDU RT
00019828-63
License to operate a network redundancy communication
master on one controller CPU. Allows any number of IO
stations (slaves) to connect redundantly over the network.
Two network redundancy licenses are necessary for warmstandby operation (for each master-cpu one license).
Redundancy
Master CPU A
Master CPU B
Network 1
A
B
A
B
Network 2
A
B
A
B
B
A
B
A
A
B
A
Slave Station 1
B
Master CPU A
Master CPU B
Network 1
B
B
B
Network 2
B
B
B
B
A
Slave Station 2
B
B
B
Slave Station 1
B
Slave Station 2
Fig. 1 Switchover of the active CPU within a PLC cycle, e.g. cycle time 1 ms – switchover ≤ 1 ms
Warm-standby redundancy
Rationale/Characteristic
High availability system type
Warm-standby redundancy with decentral I/O (1oo2 voting
integrated)
CPU redundancy
Yes (no automatic synchronization and self-monitoring)
Network redundancy
Included
I/O redundancy
Possible
Sensor redundancy
Possible
Switchover
Not bumpless
Continuous dual-channel ability
Yes
Communication redundancy
Yes
Processing units (recommendation)
Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral
Via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware
No (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis
Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol
bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy
Yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches
Industrial standard managed switch (or unmanaged switch with
­appropriate configuration)
Topologies
Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy
Possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension
In compliance with IEEE 802.3 - ≥ 2000 m per network section with
fiber optic connection
CPUs spatially separable
Yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization
Integrated in network protocol
Number of I/O stations
More than 100
Smart substations
Yes, for example I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation or load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic
Yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS)
Redundancy
Warm-standby redundancy
Interfaces
I/O peripheral
M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network
bluecom network variables
Field buses
Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols
See M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP etc. and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
Yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Editor
CoDeSys
Redundancy download
Automatic
Redundancy debugging
Yes
Redundancy synchronization
Manual
Manual switchover
To integrate by user
Multitasking
To integrate by user
Mixed operation
Yes (non-redundant, non-synchronized applications can run parallel
to redundancy applications)
Diagnostics/Monitoring
I/O live display
SolutionCenter
Redundancy status
Yes (restricted to network redundancy)
Error status
Yes
Diagnostic user interface (API)
Yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API)
Yes, integrated
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
Yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Performance data
Master cycle time
1 to 1000 ms*
I/O cycle time
Minimum 200 µs for non-redundant applications
1 to 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works
More than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 to 600
channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Switching time
Adjustable from 0 to 10 cycles
* Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction.
Redundancy
Warm-standby redundancy
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
Possible via software / new CF card required
License protection
Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Controller equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better (min. 2 Ethernet interfaces
onboard)
Network
2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s, managed switch
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
Redundancy
Network Redundancy
Master
CPU
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Cable break and outage or misconfiguration of
network equipment are frequent causes of failure in
the daily automation routine. Searching for errors in
the process often proves to be expensive and difficult.
In doing so, however, little carelessnesses hide the
risk of longer production stoppages and economically
relevant outages.
The introduction of redundant real-time networking
makes separate cable routes possible. In conjunction
with the simultaneous transmission of all data
packets on both network lines, single failures on
the transmission line no longer have the effect of
disrupting communication and therefore automation.
The product „network redundancy“ fulfills these
qualities precisely by means of a combination of
media and communication redundancies.
Even in the case of an error, no data packets to the
receiving stations (master or slave) are lost in the
process (see Fig. 1). Integrated self-monitoring and
diagnostic interfaces draw attention to transmission
errors and make finding their location easier.
The network redundancy is optimized for realtime capabilities, compatibility, ruggedness and
performance. Conformity with Ethernet standard IEEE
802.3 guarantees the cost-effective networking of
more than one hundred redundancy stations*.
•Switch-over time ≤ 1 PLC cycle
•Real-time network fully Ethernet compatible
(IEEE 802.3q)
•Monitoring and diagnostics of errors via
SolutionCenter
•Programming interfaces, libraries and system
variables for data transmission and communication
monitoring in IEC 61131-3
Item
Item no.
Description
M-NW-REDU RT
00019828-63
License to operate a network redundancy communication
master on one controller CPU. Allows any number of IO
stations (slaves) to connect redundantly over the network.
Redundancy
Master CPU A
•Prioritized redundancy data transmission makes
parallel communication via IP-based protocols
possible
Network 1
•Bandwidth limit integrated
•Connection of terminals via TCP/IP
Network 2
Slave Station
Fig. 1 In case of an error, no data packets to the receiving
stations are lost.
Network redundancy
Rationale/Characteristics
High availability system type
Communication and media redundancy (1oo2 voting integrated)
CPU redundancy
No
Network redundancy
Yes
Switchover
0 ms
Continuous dual-channel ability
Yes
Communication redundancy
Yes
Processing units (recommendation)
Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral
Via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware
No (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis
Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol
bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy
Yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches
Industrial standard managed switch (or unmanaged switch with
­appropriate configuration)
Topologies
Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy
Possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension
In compliance with IEEE 802.3 - ≥ 2000 m per network section with
fiber optic connection
CPUs spatially separable
Yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization
Integrated in network protocol
Number of I/O stations
More than 100
Smart substations
Yes, I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation, load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic
Yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS)
Redundancy
Network redundancy
Interfaces
I/O peripheral
M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network
bluecom network variables
Field buses
Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols
See M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
Yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Editor
CoDeSys
Diagnostics/Monitoring
Redundancy status
Yes
Error status
Yes
Diagnostic user interface (API)
Yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API)
Yes, integrated
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
Yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Performance data
Master cycle time
1 to 1000 ms*
I/O cycle time
Minimum 200 µs for non-redundant applications
1 to 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works
More than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 to 600
channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
Possible via software / new CF card required
License protection
Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Automation equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 family or better (minimum 2 Ethernet
interfaces onboard)
Network
2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s, managed switch
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
* Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable variables,
network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant applications
** No program-technical restriction
Redundancy
Individual. Attractive. Ergonomic.
HMI – Operating and Monitoring Devices
Brilliant, fast, trouble-free, robust, efficient ‒ the HMI systems of the next
generation satisfy all requirements imposed on the operating and monitoring
of complex plants. The combination of powerful processors and state-of-theart touch screens guarantees flawless visualization of graphically complex
user interfaces. The result: Visualization devices for every application.
Bachmann electronic offers a comprehensive portfolio for a wide variety of
implementation areas and performance classes. In this regard extensive
configuration possibilities are just as self-evident as customer-specific
solutions, for example, the front panel in corporate design or custom
software solutions.
Bachmann products and technologies stand for robustness, long service life,
and quality. The reliability is ensured through 48-hour run-in tests in the
climate chamber, to which every visualization device must be subjected.
As a system provider, Bachmann can offer a density of component integration
that is unique for the market. Controller, visualization software, and HMI
hardware are perfectly matched, so that the systems are economical over
the long term, and trouble-free in use.
323
Operator Terminals
The optimal operator terminal for every application
The OT100, OT200, OT1200 and OT1300
series of operator terminals from
Bachmann electronic provide operating
devices in a wide range of performance
classes.
Intermediate class OT200 series provide
the user with a »self-contained«, fullfledged 5.7” terminal based on PC
technology, with embedded Linux as the
operating system.
The devices of the Essential class OT100
series are designed primarily for simple
text-based display in conjunction with
a powerful M1-CPU. The devices of the
The web terminals of the OT1200 product
line are certified for marine applications
and are particularly suitable for web
visualizations, such as M1 webMI pro.
Operator Terminal
OT100 Series
Features
Display: 4.2" STN Bluemode
Processor: 72 MHz 32 bit
RAM: 64 kB internal
Interfaces: RS232/422
Project planning: Vis Designer, PLC blocks
Operator Terminal
OT200 Series
Features
Display: 5.7" QVGA, 5.7" VGA, color TFT,
opt. touch screen
Processor: AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM: 512 MB
Compact Flash: ≥ UDMA 2 GB
Operating system: embedded Linux
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, RS232
Project planning: Vis Designer
324
The Advanced class OT1300 series, with
the latest Intel processors and integrated
solid state disk (SSD) or alternatively with
AMD G-T40E dual-core processor, is ideal
for applications requiring high performance
together with a shallow mounting depth
and a range of different screen diagonals.
implemented quickly and simply for
all device series. The consistent use of
industry standard components guarantees
long-term availability and thus investment
security in all projects.
In conjunction with the M1 webMI pro
engineering tool, visualizations can be
Operator Terminal
OT1300 Series
Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA / 19"
color TFT
Processor: AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz)
Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz)
Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz)
Ultrafast CFast mass memory
Interfaces: 1x GBit Ethernet, 4x USB 2.0, 1x RS232
Operating system: Linux embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7
Project management: M1 webMI pro, custom
Web Terminal
OT1200 Series
Features
Display: 7" / 10.1" / 15.6", Full-HD resolution
Analog-resistive touch or projectivecapacitive multi-touch
Processor: Freescale ARM® Cortex®-A9 i.MX6Dual
(2x 1.2 GHz)
RAM: 1 or 2 GB
Mass memory: 4 GB eMMC onboard,
optional CFast-Card
Interfaces: 1x bzw. 2x RJ45 ­(separate)
Ethernet 10/100 MBit, 2x USB 2.0
Operating system: Linux Embedded
Project management: M1 webMI pro, custom
325
Operator Terminals
Operator Terminal OT100 Series
The devices are equipped with a full graphic 4.2"
STN display. With use of UTF-8 character coding
many lines of Asiatic and Cryillic characters can be
displayed. The brightness of the LED backlighting can
be controlled with the PLC program or via the input
elements.
With the ability to operate at temperatures from
-30 to +60 °C, these terminals are predestined for
use under extreme conditions where dependability is
a must.
Communication with the M1 controller occurs through
an integrated interface that can be programmed to
either the RS232 or RS422 standard.
The arrangement and design of the control elements,
including an alphanumeric multi-click keyboard
are oriented to the familiar operating philosophy
of mobile phones. For better tactile feel the keys
are embossed and have integrated snap disks.
The aluminum front panel with inlayed front foil
underlines the sophisticated and robust character of
the terminal.
•Full-graphic 4.2" STN Bluemode display with
240 x 64 pixels
•Model-dependent operating/display elements:
5x softkeys, alphanumeric multi-click keyboard,
1x Exit key, 1x Shift key, 1x keyboard entry lock/
unlock key, 1x Backspace key, cursor directional pad
with Enter key and 3 LEDs
•Convenient project planning via Vis Designer
•Character coding with UTF-8
•Operating temperature range from -30 to +60 °C
Item OT115/R/BE1
OT115/R/BE2
OT115/R/BE2/CC
CC ... ColdClimate ( ) variant
326
Item no.
00014569-00
00014570-00
00017593-00
Operator Terminals
OT100 series
OT115/R/BE1
OT115/R/BE2
OT115/R/BE2/CC
Display
Diagonal/resolution
4.2” STN Bluemode (240 x 64 pixels)
Display brightness
450 cd/m2
Backlight
LED: dimmable via keyboard / PLC program
Processor/RAM
Processor
72 MHz 32 bit
RAM
64 kB internal
Control/display elements
Front keyboard
Softkeys
5x
5x
Enter
1x
1x
Cursor keys
4x
4x
Multi-click keyboard
-
Alphanumeric
Exit
-
1x
Shift
-
1x
Keyboard entry
-
1x lock/unlock
Backspace
Display elements
-
1x
-
1x red LED
2x yellow LEDs
RS232 / 422 (switchable)
1x
Power supply*
24 V DC (18 V to 36 V), 10 ms buffering
Certifications
CE, UL, GL; pending: ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Ambient conditions
Standard
ColdClimate ( )
-20 to +60 °C fanless
-30 to +60 °C fanless
-30 to +80 °C
-40 to +85 °C
5 to 95 %
without condensation
5 to 95 %
with condensation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage /
operation
Certifications
CE, UL, GL; pending: ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Degree of protection
Front / Rear
IP65 / IP20
Software
Visualization
Project planning: Vis Designer / programming: C, PLC environment
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
170 x 128 x 50 mm
170 x 160 x 50 mm
170 x 160 x 50 mm
Approx. 1 kg
Approx. 1 kg
Approx. 1 kg
Variants
OT115/R/BE1
4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with cross
elements, operating temp. -20°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -30 °C ..
+80 °C, rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT115/R/BE2
4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with
AlphaNum key, operating temp. -20°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -30 °C
.. +80 °C, rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT115/R/BE2/CC
4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with
AlphaNum key, operating temp. -30°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -40 °C
.. +85 °C, rel. humidity operation5 .. 95 % with condensation
* In the case of OTs for marine applications the supply voltage is galvanically isolated.
Interface
327
Operator Terminals
Operator Terminal OT200 Series
The OT200 operator terminal series offers an
inexpensive entry into the world of visualization
devices. Smaller visualization applications in the
renewable energies, industry, and marine areas
are the ideal implementation area of the operator
terminals. The system is connected to the automation
via Ethernet, in addition the device has two USB2.0
interfaces. The system is ideally designed for Java
visualizations.
The operator terminal comes with a color TFT display
and dimmable LED backlight in various screen
resolutions. The operator terminal is operated via a
touch screen and / or a keyboard integrated in the
front panel. In the marine version, OT205V/M, the
device has an internal signal encoder, as well as a
floating relay output.
•Extremely compact and powerful
•Fanless operation up to +60 °C
•Visualization with Bachmann Vis Designer
•5.7" color TFT monitor with QVGA or VGA resolution
•Optionally with keyboard integrated in the front
panel
•Marine approval and marine-typical special functions
Item OT205/BE1
OT205/V/BE1
OT205/V/BE2
OT205/M/BE1
OT205/V/BE1/CC
V ... VGA resolution
M ... maritime variant
CC ... ColdClimate ( ) variant
328
Item no.
00018216-00
00018218-00
00018221-00
00018217-00
00018219-00
Operator Terminals
OT200 series
OT205/V/
BE1
OT205/BE1
OT205/M/
BE1
OT205/V/
BE2
OT205/V/
BE1/CC
Display
Diagonal/resolution
5.7" QVGA
(320 x 240)
5.7” VGA
(640 x 480)
Display type
Color TFT
Display brightness
700 cd / m²
Half-brightness
Min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM
512 MB
Mass storage
CF card
≥ UDMA 2 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Analog resistive
Front keyboard
Softkeys
-
11x
-
Enter
-
1x
-
Cursor keys
-
4x
-
Multi-click keyboard
-
Alphanumeric
-
Exit
-
1x
-
-
1x
-
optional 5x
2
-
Shift
System LED
Status LED
Run, Init, Error
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100
1x
USB 2.0
2x
RS232
1x
Buzzer
-
1x
Floating relay output
-
1x
Power supply*
24 V DC (18 V to 36 V)
Certifications
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage /
­operation
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC, GL, ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Standard
Marine
0 to +60°C fanless**
-15 to +50°C
Standard
0 to +60°C
fanless**
ColdClimate ( )
-30 to +60°C
-20 to +85°C
-40 to +85°C
5 to 95 % without condensation
5 to 95 % with
condensation
329
Operator Terminals
OT200 series
OT205/BE1
OT205/V/
BE1
OT205/M/
BE1
OT205/V/
BE2
OT205/V/
BE1/CC
Software
Operating system
Visualization
Linux embedded
Vis Designer / Java
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
212 x 156 x 49 mm
Approx. 2 kg
Variants
OT205/BE1
Display: 5,7"; QVGA (320x240); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. 0°C.. +60 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85°C, rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
OT205/V/BE1
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:512MBDDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232; operating temp.
0°C.. +60 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85°C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/V/BE2
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); AlphaNumKB;
CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM: 512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit;
2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232; operating temp. 0°C.. +60°C;
storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/M/BE1
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM: 512MBDDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1x Buzzer;
1x potential free relay output; 1xRS232; operating temp -15°C.. +50 °C;
storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/V/BE1/CC
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM: 512MBDDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232; operating temp.
-30°C.. +60°C; rel. humitdity operation 5 .. 95 % with condensation; storage
temp. -40°C..+85°C, 5 .. 95 % short-term
condensation (≤60 min)
* In the case of OTs for marine applications the supply voltage is galvanically isolated.
** For details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
330
Operator Terminals
Operator Terminal OT1300 Series
With different screen diagonals, capacity options, and
the choice of Windows or Linux as operating systems,
the right solution is provided for every visualization.
On the software side, the OT1300 is optimally prepared
for use with M1 webMI pro, or as client or server on
atvise SCADA. We would be pleased to also deliver the
desired software configuration ex-factory.
The latest devices of the OT1300 product family with
projective-capacitive multi-touch are impressive in
the new design with brilliant full HD displays in the
widescreen diagonals 15.6“ and 21.5“.
Consistent use of industrial grade components
guarantees long-term availability, a long service life,
and thus investment security. The fanless design
without moving parts satisfies the most rigorous
requirements imposed on shock and vibration.
•Processor/RAM:
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz) / 2 GB DDR3 RAM
Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz) / 2 GB DDR3 RAM
Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz) / 4 GB DDR3 RAM
•Ultrafast CFast mass memory
•SATA HDD or SSD options for large volume storage
•Interfaces (standard device): 1x or 2x GBit Ethernet,
4x USB2.0, 1x RS232
•Standard operating temperature: 0 to +60 °C, fanless
•Operating systems: Linux Embedded,
Windows Embedded Standard 7
•Enhanced temperature range on request
Item OT1310/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
Item no.
00022647-00
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022646-00
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022645-00
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022644-00
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00023273-10
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00022882-10
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00023275-10
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00023276-10
OT1312/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P
00023501-00
OT1315/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P
00023502-00
OT1319/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P
00024295-00
OT1312/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P
00024293-00
OT1315/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P
00024294-00
OT1319/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P
00023870-00
OT1315WM/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P On request
OT1321WM/BE1/CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P On request
OT1315WM/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P On request
OT1321WM/BE1/CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P On request
331
Operator Terminals
OT1300 series
OT1310/BE1/
GT1G0
OT1312/BE1/
GT1G0
OT1315/BE1/
GT1G0
OT1319/BE1/
GT1G0
10.4“ VGA
(640x480)
12.1“ SVGA
(800x600)
15“ XGA
(1024x768)
19“ SXGA
(1280x1024)
Display
Diagonal
Display type
Display brightness
Color TFT
450 cd /m²
450 cd/m²
Half-brightness
400 cd/m²
350 cd/m²
Min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz)
RAM
2 GB
Mass storage
SSD
-
CFast card
4 GB (Linux) or 8 GB (Windows)
Control/display elements
Touch screen type*
Analog resistive, membrane front
System LEDs
Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 MBit
1x
USB 2.0
4x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 to 36 V), galvanically isolated
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems**
Linux Embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7
Visualization***
atvise® scada / M1 webMI pro
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature
-20 to +80 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
310 x 234 x 68
mm
341 x 253 x 68
mm
406 x 308 x 75
mm
471 x 375 x 76
mm
Weight
Approx. 2.5 kg
Approx. 3.0 kg
Approx. 4.5 kg
Approx. 6.0 kg
* Customer-specific front panel on request
** Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
*** not included
332
Operator Terminals
OT1300 series
OT1312/BE1/
CE1G1
CO1G7
OT1315/BE1/
CE1G1
CO1G7
OT1319/BE1/
CE1G1
CO1G7
12.1“ SVGA (800x600)
15“ XGA (1024x768)
19“ SXGA (1280x1024)
Display
Diagonal
Display type
Display brightness
Farb-TFT
450 cd/m²
400 cd/m²
Half-brightness
350 cd/m²
Min. 50.000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz) or Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz)
RAM
2 GB
4 GB
Mass storage
SSD
60/64 GB
CFast card
8 GB (optional)
Control/display elements
Touch screen type*
Analog resistiv, Folienfront
System LEDs
Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 MBit
2x
USB 2.0
4x
RS232
1x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 to 36 V), galvanically isolated
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems**
Windows Embedded Standard 7
Visualization***
atvise® scada / M1 webMI pro
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature
-20 to +70 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
341 x 253 x 74 mm
406 x 308 x 81 mm
471 x 375 x 82 mm
Approx. 3.5 kg
Approx. 5.0 kg
Approx. 6.5 kg
* Customer-specific front panel on request
** Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
*** not included
333
Operator Terminals
OT1300 series
multi touch
OT1315WM/BE1/
CE1G1
CO1G7
OT1321WM/BE1/
CE1G1
CO1G7
Display
Diagonal
Resolution
Display brightness
Contrast
Viewing angle (L, R, U, D)
Life expectancy
(half brightness)
15.6’’
21.5’’
1920x1080 (FHD)
1920x1080 (FHD)
400 cd/m²
300 cd/m²
800:1
3.000:1
80/80/65/80 °
89/89/89/89 °
50.000 h
50.000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
Celeron 847E (CE1G1, 2x 1.1 GHz)
or Intel Core i7 (CO1G7, 2x 1.7 GHz)
RAM
2 GB DDR3 RAM (CE1G1)
or 4 GB DDR3 RAM (CO1G7)
Mass storage
SSD
60/64 GB
CFast-Card Slot
16 GB (optional)
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Projective capacitive multi touch
Design
Custom marking on request
LEDs and control keys
Custom design on request
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 MBit
2x
USB 2.0
4x
RS232
1x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 to 36 V), galvanically isolated
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems**
Windows Embedded Standard 7
atvise® scada / M1 webMI pro
Visualization***
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 to +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature
0 to +55 °C fanless
(0 to 60 °C fanless on request)
-20 to +70 °C
Rel. humidity
operation / storage
5 to 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
428 x 288 x 78.5 mm
564 x 366 x 78.5 mm
Approx. 3.75 kg
Approx. 5.95 kg
** Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
*** not included
334
Operator Terminals
OT1300 series
Item
Item no.
Description
OT1310/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022647-00
Operator Terminal: 10,4“; VGA (640x480); Resistive
Touch; AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 4 GB; OS: Linux
Standard; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1312/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022646-00
Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive
Touch; AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 4 GB; OS: Linux
Standard; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1315/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022645-00
Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive
Touch; AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 4 GB; OS: Linux
Standard; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1319/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/4G0/LX
00022644-00
Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive
Touch; AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
1x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 4 GB; OS: Linux
Standard; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1310/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00023273-10
Operator Terminal: 10,4“; VGA (640x480); Resistive Touch;
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000;
4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 8 GB; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 E; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1312/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00022882-10
Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive Touch;
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000;
4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 8 GB; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 E; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1315/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00023275-10
Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive Touch;
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000;
4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 8 GB; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 E; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1319/BE1/
GT1G0/2G/8G0/WES7E
00023276-10
Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive Touch;
AMD G-T40E (2x 1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM; 1x Eth10/100/1000;
4x USB2.0; CFast-Card 8 GB; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 E; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1312/BE1/CE1G1/2G/
SSD64/WES7P
00023501-00
Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive
Touch; Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1315/BE1/CE1G1/2G/
SSD64/WES7P
00023502-00
Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive
Touch; Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1319/BE1/CE1G1/2G/
SSD64/WES7P
00024295-00
Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive
Touch; Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
335
Operator Terminals
OT1300 series
336
Item
Item no.
Description
OT1312/BE1/CO1G7/4G/
SSD64/WES7P
00024293-00
Operator Terminal: 12,1“; SVGA (800x600); Resistive
Touch; Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz); 4 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1315/BE1/CO1G7/4G/
SSD64/WES7P
00024294-00
Operator Terminal: 15“; XGA (1024x768); Resistive
Touch; Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1319/BE1/CO1G7/4G/
SSD64/WES7P
00023870-00
Operator Terminal: 19“; SXGA (1280x1024); Resistive
Touch; Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz); 2 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1315WM/BE1/
On request
CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P
Operator Terminal: 15.6‘‘ (1920x1080); Projected-Capacitive
Multi-Touch; Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3
RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1321WM/BE1/
On request
CE1G1/2G/SSD64/WES7P
Operator Terminal: 21.5‘‘ (1920x1080); Projected-Capacitive
Multi-Touch; Intel Celeron 847E (2x 1,1 GHz); 2 GB DDR3
RAM; 2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +55 °C
OT1315WM/BE1/
On request
CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P
Operator Terminal: 15.6‘‘ (1920x1080); Projected-Capacitive
Multi-Touch; Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz); 4 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +60 °C
OT1321WM/BE1/
On request
CO1G7/4G/SSD64/WES7P
Operator Terminal: 21.5‘‘ (1920x1080); Projected-Capacitive
Multi-Touch; Intel Core i7 (2x 1,7 GHz); 4 GB DDR3 RAM;
2x Eth10/100/1000; 4x USB2.0; 1x RS232; SSD 60/64
GB 2,5‘‘ SATA; CFast-Card-Slot; OS: Windows Embedded
Standard 7 P; operating temp. 0 to +55 °C
Operator Terminals
Web terminal OT1200 Series
The specifications and interfaces of the OT1200
web terminal make it the ideal choice for web
visualizations, such as M1 webMI pro.
Brilliant displays with high brightness, strong colors,
very good viewing angles and a long service life
make a lasting impression. The modern widescreen
diagonals right through to 15.6” with Full-HD
resolution are available in the same design either with
cost-efficient analog-resistive touch or high quality
projective-capacitive multi-touch technology.
7"
10.1"
15.6"
As expected, the exclusive use of industrial
components means that a long service lifespan and
availability are guaranteed. Permanently soldered
RAM and eMMC memories, as well as the absence
of any moving parts, moreover ensure maximum
resistance to shock and vibration.
The software is already prepared for everything, from
the browser right through to the simple configuration
of web-based visualizations. The open Linux-based
system can be extended as required. We shall be
glad to also supply you with your required software
configuration from the factory: unpack, connect, done.
Item OT1207W/BE1/MX6/1G/EMC04/LX
OT1207W/BE1/MX6/2G/EMC04/LX
OT1207WM/BE1/MX6/2G/EMC04/LX
OT1210W/BE1/MX6/2G/EMC04/LX
OT1210WM/BE1/MX6/2G/EMC04/LX
OT1215W/BE1/MX6/2G/EMC04/LX
OT1215WM/BE1/MX6/2G/EMC04/LX
Item no.
00025995-00
00025996-00
On Request
On Request
00026488-00
On Request
00026491-00
W … Widescreen analog resistive touch
WM … Widescreen projective capacitive multi touch
337
Operator Terminals
OT1200 series
OT1207
OT1210
OT1215
7‘‘
10.1‘‘
15.6‘‘
Display
Diagonals
Resolution
800x480
1280x800
1920x1080
Brightness
450 cd/m²
400 cd/m²
400 cd/m²
Contrast
Viewing angle (L, R, U, D)
Life expectancy
(half brightness)
800:1
800:1
800:1
89/89/89/89 °
80/80/80/80 °
80/80/65/80 °
30,000 h
50,000 h
50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
RAM
Freescale ARM® Cortex®-A9 i.MX6Dual 2x 1.2 GHz
1 or 2 GB DDR3 RAM
2 GB DDR RAM
Mass storage
eMMC onboard
4 GB
CFast-Card Slot
Optional (min. 4 GB)
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Analog resistive touch or projective capacitive multi touch
Design
Custom marking on request
LEDs and control keys
Custom design on request
Interfaces
Ethernet 10/100 MBit
USB
1x or 2x RJ45
­(separate)
2x RJ45 ­(separate)
2x USB 2.0
Software
Operating system
Visualization software*
Other software
Linux Embedded
M1 webMI pro
Bachmann Terminal setup software for configuration
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity
operation / storage
* Not included
338
0 to +60 °C fanless
-20 to +70 °C
5 to 95 % without condensation
Operator terminals
Operator Terminal System Software
All operator terminals use system software comprising
the operating system (Linux or Windows Embedded)
and additional Bachmann software components.
The Bachmann software components simplify
configuration, commissioning and diagnostics locally
on the device and remotely via a web browser or the
SolutionCenter. Furthermore, the system software
provides the option of importing updates and
accessing the device interfaces from a visualization.
Additional useful services and software packages
are preinstalled on the operating system in order to
reduce the development time for common application
scenarios. Thus, web-based visualization solutions
such as M1 webMI pro and atvise SCADA are very
easy to set up. The integrated browser is tailored
to industrial applications and offers, among other
things, an on-screen keyboard (comparable with a
smartphone) for user inputs.
The system software can be extended and adapted to
suit your needs if required and is supplied from the
factory customized with the terminals.
339
Operator terminals
Operator Terminal System Software
Software
Basic system
Debian GNU/Linux or Windows Embedded (7, 8)
Software packages
The following software packages are available preinstalled:
• Industrial browser
• Configuration interface (web-based)
• REST API for device interfaces
• DHCP server
• FTP server
• NTP client
• Java runtime
• SSH client
• SSH server
• VPN server
• VNC server
Additional software packages can be installed later, under Linux e. g.
conveniently via the Debian Package Manager (aptitude).
Installation
The current version comes preinstalled on all devices from the factory. A
customized and preconfigured image can also be supplied from the factory on
request. Furthermore, a prepared image can also be installed automatically
later.
Updates (only Linux)
The system software is updated regularly in order to provide new functionality
and security updates. The separation of the system partition and user partition
ensures that the user data remains unaffected by the system update.
Safety relevant updates and bug fixes are provided in the form of partial
updates.
Configuration and diagnostics
Remote maintenance
Remote maintenance is possible via the SolutionCenter, configuration interface
TSSW (web-based), VNC and SSH.
Terminal Setup Software
(TSSW)
Terminal Setup Software (TSSW) is a web-based, password protected
configuration tool for changing configurations easily and for performing remote
diagnostics or system updates.
TSSW is available locally via an onscreen keyboard and remotely via a standard
web browser.
The following settings, among other things, can be made using the Terminal
Setup Software (TSSW):
• Network configuration
• Web browser
• Java webstart
• DHCP server
• VNC server
• NTP client
• Firewall
• Screen saver
More configurations can be found in the user manual. Since the basic system is
a widespread Linux derivative, it can also be extended and configured with the
appropriate knowledge.
340
Operator terminals
Operator Terminal System Software
Configuration and diagnostics
Diagnostics
The web-based configuration user interface also offers the option of receiving
information about the device locally or remotely:
• Device type
• Serial number
• Hardware revision
• Software version
• Used/free memory space
• S.M.A.R.T state for flash storage media
• Display of log files
Boot animation
The boot animation displayed when the system is started can be customized.
Visualization
Web browser
The preinstalled "industrial web browser" offers a number of advantages over a
standard browser
• Easy configuration via TSSW
• No automatic updates that were not tested beforehand
• Integrated onscreen keyboard comparable with smartphones
•R
emote debugging (allows debugging from web applications with
standard tools from a developer PC)
• Compatibility with atvise® products tested by Bachmann
• Low use of resources
Java visualization
Supported with preinstalled Java runtime
Other visualizations
If further software is required for the visualization in addition to the preinstalled
software packages, the system software can be customized accordingly.
Additional possible applications
Firewall
The web terminal system software with a preconfigured iptables configuration
can be used as a firewall as well in order to save additional hardware.
VPN server
Access to the control network from outside can be regulated via the system
software using a secured VPN connection.
Hardware
Supported products
OT1300 series
OT1200 series
OT200 series
Device interfaces
Besides the support of all standard interfaces, such as Ethernet and USB, the
system software provides an API for accessing the following device interfaces
conveniently from a visualization:
• Multi-touch events
• LED control
• Inputs via function keys
• Backlight dimming until 0%
• Call up of touch calibration (only necessary with resistive touchscreens)
341
Industrial PCs
High-performance IPCs with optionally distributed displays
The industrial Box PCs are available in
several performance options and offer an
abundance of interfaces that can be further
extended tailored to your application.
Since they are fanless, the Box PCs are
maintenance-free and can thus be safely
housed together with their data in the
control cabinet.
Together with a distributed display, an
industrial PC becomes a fully-fledged
visualization solution. The display can be
installed up to a distance of 100 m and is
connected by a single cable. In the case
of larger systems, several of the slimly,
designed displays can also be integrated
simultaneously.
Industrial PC
BPC1500 Series
Features
Processor: Intel Celeron 1020E (2x 2.2 GHz)
Intel Core i7 (4x 2.3 GHz)
RAM: 4 GB DDR3
Mass storage: SSD or CFast
Interfaces: 2x GBit/s Ethernet, VGA, DVI-I
4x USB 3.0, 2x USB 2.0, Audio
Operating system: Windows Embedded Standard 7
Display (optional): 21.5’’ Widescreen Multi-Touch
342
Industrial PCs
Industrial PC BPC1500 Series
The versatile Box PCs of the BPC1500 series are
characterized by their high performance data, the
multitude of interfaces and their robust appearance –
both internally and externally.
The industrial PC can be operated as a server, e.g.
as a data collector or for server tasks, or together
with the corresponding distributed display for a
fully-fledged visualization solution. The multitouch display can be connected up to a distance
of 100 m by a single cable. To display and operate
the same visualization on large systems at various
locations, several displays can also be connected
simultaneously.
The Box PC together with its data can be installed
in the control cabinet while the displays are used at
exposed locations, and in the event of damage, can
simply be removed and replaced without having to
perform a time-consuming data backup.
Whether as an extended visualization device, a data
collector or in server operation – the BPC1500 series
flexibly adapts to your solution.
Item
Item no.
BPC1530/4G/SSD64/WS7P00026171-00
BPC1560/4G/SSD64/WS7P00026170-00
343
Industrial PCs
BPC1500 series
BPC1530
BPC1560
Intel Celeron 1020E
2x 2.2 GHz
Intel Core i7-3610QE
4x 2.3 GHz (up to 3.3 GHz)
Processor/RAM
Processor
RAM
4 GB DDR3
Mass storage
SSD
CFast-Card Slot
64 GB SSD
Optional CFast card
Interfaces
Network
USB
2x 10/100/1000 Mbit (RJ45)
4x USB 3.0, 2x USB 2.0
Serial
4x RS232 (2x RS422/485 optional)
VGA
VGA integrated into DVI-I interface
DVI-I
1920x1200 @ 60Hz
HDMI
Support HDMI 1.4, 1920x1200 @ 60Hz
Display Port
Audio
2560x1600 @ 60 Hz
High Definition Audio (HD), Line out, Mic-in
Expansion modules
HDD
2x 2.5’’ HDD slide-in rack (SATA)
Slots
1x PCIe x1, 1x PCIe x4
Power supply
Power supply
24 V DC (18 to 34 V)
RTC
Lithium 3 V/210 mAH
Software
Operating system
Visualization
Windows Embedded Standard 7
M1 webMI pro, atvise scada
Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
-10 to 60 °C
-40 to 85 °C
5 to 95 % no condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
290 x 110 x 232mm
Approx. 5 kg
Certifications
General
344
CE, UL, CCC
Industrial PCs
345
Intuitive. Intelligent. Platform-independent.
Engineering Software – SolutionCenter
Software development has become an essential component in the
automation of plants and machines. As an innovative provider Bachmann
electronic also establishes the state of the technology in this area as well
and enables groundbreaking future solutions, such as the Bachmann
SolutionCenter. With a number of state-of-the-art software engineering and
diagnostic tools we support rapid and convenient realization of programs
for machine sequence, process control, visualization, and not least,
communication with the outside world. »Time-to-market« is no longer just a
buzz word, rather it is a principle that is lived.
With engineering software from Bachmann electronic you rely on complete
solutions that have been thought-through in the details; solutions that
increase the productivity and sovereignty of your applications, that free-up
resources for your core business, and that can also be used reliably in the
distant future.
347
Project engineering made easy: SolutionCenter
A milestone in the reduction of engineering costs
Prog
ram
m
i
ls
/
ns
d-O
Ad
Con
t
reg rolli
n
u
l
a
ti g
348
To
o
& ng
Visualization
diagnosti
cs
est &
T
g
rin
u
fig
n
o
Matched in the best manner possible to the
devices and systems of the manufacturer,
it provides time savings, brings synergies,
and increases usability. Users benefit from
the cohesive operating concept and avoid
redundant entry or unnecessary manual
entry. A close linking to the automation
systems of Bachmann electronic enables
simplifications in virtually all processes.
ng
C
As part of a unique, complete software
solution, the Bachmann SolutionCenter
covers all aspects of the engineering
process – configuration, programming,
controlling/regulation, communication,
Motion, visualization, as well as test and
commissioning. Thanks to the highly
modular Eclipse plug-in concept, the tool
can be easily expanded, even for integrated
user-specific requirements.
Configuring
•Controller design offline
•Configuration of the hardware modules
•Management and use of predefined hardware
and software modules
•Assignment of signal designations
•Archiving, export and import of subsystems or
complete controller systems
•Configuration of the fieldbuses, telecontrol:
•CANopen, DeviceNet
•PROFIBUS DP
•PROFINET IO RT/IRT
•EtherCAT, SERCOS
•Modbus TCP, UDP, RTU
•IEC61850/IEC61400-25 (MMS)
•IEC60870-5-101, -103, -104
•OPC UA/DA
Programming
•IEC61131-3 (CoDeSys, PLCopen Safety)
•C/C++
•MATLAB® / Simulink®
•Extensive libraries
•Repository with SVN
Visualizing
•Configurations for M1 webMI pro web
­visualizations
•VisDesigner project designs
•Communication libraries for developing userdefined visualizations (Java, C, .NET)
•OPC server
Controlling & regulation
•Motion Control:
• Softmotion (M-SMC)
• Shaft (M-SHAFT)
• Three-dimensional motion (M-CNC)
•Temperature controller (M-TEMP)
•M-Target for Simulink®
•Libraries for IEC61131-3 and C
Testing and diagnostics
•Software oscilloscope
•Variable browser / Watch view
•Logbooks
•Task lists with runtime measurement
•Error lists in the Error Handler
•Printout of PLC report
•Direct access to I/O signals
•Remote monitoring
•Internet-enabled communication
Tools/Add-Ons
•Access control
•Time synchronization (SNTP, IEEE1588)
•SVN repository (source code & configuration
management)
•Configuration history/ comparison
•Eclipse plugins
349
Engineering Software
M-Base
The complete product range of the engineering
software from Bachmann electronic is delivered
in a software package. For different applications,
derivatives are made available which are tailored to
the needs of individual users.
•Device configuration & system settings
•Fieldbus configuration
•Right of accesses
•Programming in C/C++, IEC61131
•Safe programming
•Visualization project
•Comprehensive system diagnostics
•Many monitoring functions
•Project and diagnostic reports
Items
M-Base SL
M-Base SL AMT
M-Base-SU UL
M-Base-SU UL AMT
M-Base-Redist RT
M-Base DVD
M-Base SC light DVD
M-Base SC Demo DVD
M-Base Device Viewer DVD
M-Base PLC DVD
M-Base COM DVD
350
Item Nr.
00015629-60
00015629-70
00015629-62
00015629-72
00015629-63
00015629-xx
00018888-xx
00018889-xx
00015845-xx
00018915-xx
00015778-xx
Engineering Software
M-Base
Delivery variants
M-Base SL
00015629-60
License to install the M1 automation system‘s engineering
software on Windows PCs. Controller and field bus configuration,
programming according to IEC61131-3 as well as c/c++, safetyrelated programming according to IEC61131-3 FBD, basic
diagnostics and monitoring, system update, basic communication
with the controller (M1 OPC standard server, communication
libraries), user documentation. No redistribution.
One Year of product support and updates delivery are included in
the license (Annual Maintenance).
M-Base SL AMT
00015629-70
One year extension of product support and updates delivery for
the M-Base Site License.
M-Base-SU UL
00015629-62
License to install the M1 automation system‘s engineering
software on one Windows PC (single-user). Controller and field
bus configuration, programming according to IEC61131-3 as well
as c/c++, safety-related programming according to IEC611313 FBD, basic diagnostics and monitoring, system update, basic
communication with the controller (M1 OPC standard server,
communication libraries), user documentation. No redistribution.
One Year of product support and updates delivery are included in
the license.
M-Base-SU UL
AMT
00015629-72
One year extension of product support and updates delivery for
the M-Base Single User License.
M-Base-Redist RT
00015629-63
License to install the M1 automation system‘s engineering
software on Windows PCs. Controller and field bus configuration,
programming according to IEC61131-3 as well as c/c++, safetyrelated programming according to IEC61131-3 FBD, basic
diagnostics and monitoring, system update, basic communication
with the controller (M1 OPC standard server, communication
libraries), user documentation. Runtime license only for
redistribution with a total solution or machine. (Requires an
M-Base Site License with a valid Annual Maintenance).
M-Base DVD
00015629-xx
M-Base Software Package installer (DVD).
M-Base SC light
DVD
00018888-xx
M-Base SC light Software Package installer (DVD).
M-Base SC Demo
DVD
00018889-xx
M-Base SC Demo Software Package installer (DVD).
M-Base Device
Viewer DVD
00015845-xx
M-Base Device Viewer Software Package installer (DVD).
M-Base PLC DVD
00018915-xx
M-Base PLC Software Package installer (DVD).
M-Base COM DVD
00015778-xx
M-Base COM Software Package installer (DVD).
351
Configuration
Merging hardware, fieldbuses, and software into a unit
The expenses for design, wiring, and
commissioning of a machine represent
a considerable share of the engineering
costs. Bachmann electronic supports the
user on all levels with convenient and
innovative tools. From the planning of
the control topology and the configur­
ation of fieldbuses to the wiring test
and to installation of software modules,
one tool can be used that permits flexible
adaptation to a wide variety of tasks
with its consistent operating concept.
The Device Manager as part of the
SolutionCenter is the central point for all
configuration and diagnostics tasks.
Device Manager
The Device Manager is the integrated tool for
configuration and commissioning of all automation
devices from Bachmann electronic. The entire
M1 controller family, the panel PLCs from the CT
series, the terminals of the WT series, but also
standard-conformant fieldbus nodes from thirdparty suppliers are supported by this tool. Through
the capability for complete offline engineering
work can start before the hardware is available.
The flowing alternation between offline and online
configuration in both directions is not only possible
for the complete controller, it is also possible for the
exchange and archiving of individual hardware and
software modules, as well as for complex fieldbus
configurations.
The work area is consistently organized for all
topics in a configurator window and a monitor
window. The Configurator shows the saved target
status that will be valid after the next system startup,
the monitor shows the actual status and allows
manual change of values and settings.
The hardware structure is presented in the real
topology. The type of networking via proprietary and
standardized bus systems is presented through the
organization of a tree structure; the I / O modules can
be uniquely detected and directly operated through
the graphic presentation. Thus the wiring test can be
executed immediately after switching on the system.
The software for the controller is also managed in
the Device Manager. The system packages from
Bachmann electronic are summarized in a catalog. All
the software is updated conveniently via a wizard that
guides the user through the procedure. In addition
352
Configuration
to the provided system packages, the user can
also put together and manage his own, machinespecific packages and transfer them to other PCs.
Thus unique software states can be assured on all
systems and on all service PCs.
The variable set of all participating controllers is
presented in a structured manner in a separate
view. Searching for values is facilitated through an
automatic full-text search; a selection of relevant
values can be summarized, saved, and reloaded in
an additional window. Through a trend display the
temporal progression of values can be graphically
presented.
•One interface for all Bachmann devices
•Managing devices
•Backup of existing devices
•Offline configuration of entire control systems or
individual HW / SW modules
•Offline and online configuration of fieldbuses
(CAN, PROFINET RT and IRT, PROFIBUS DP,
EtherCAT)
•The same mode of operation for online and
offline devices
•Consistent concept: Monitor (actual status) and
configurator (target status)
•Graphic presentation of the I / O modules
•Configuration and diagnostics in one tool
•Software is managed in catalogs, user-specific
catalogs
•Flexible compilation of functional window areas
(perspectives)
353
Testing and diagnostics
Monitoring and debugging for every field of application
Bachmann M1 automation systems are
designed for a broad user spectrum.
More extensive than is the case with
the conventional solutions for industrial
automation, the support for experts
was considered right from the start.
Monitoring and debugging tools for every
354
field of application, from the signal test
of the control cabinet builder to section
identification of the control system
engineer, shorten commissioning times and
increase the transparency of the overall
system.
Testing and diagnostics
Scope 3 – Overview in real-time
Signal analytics and diagnostics directly with the
­controller
In the initial project design and also for
commissioning or troubleshooting, transparent
information concerning states and sequences of an
automatic system is essential for success. For many
dynamic processes seeing a physical variable as
only a numeric value is insufficient. The software
oscilloscope »Scope 3« makes the temporal
progression of processes visible and places this
progression in relation to other process variables.
»Scope 3« is an indispensable tool for optimization
of a controller setting, for troubleshooting in a
sequential program, or for ongoing verification of the
manufacturing process on the machine. It permits
specific and stand-alone recording, archiving of
the relevant data in a database and subsequent
measurement or evaluation of a great number of
values in parallel. Different trigger conditions as well
as pre-trigger and post-trigger functionalities enable
acquisition of all relevant data, such as in the case of
sporadically occurring errors.
Calculation of additional curves from the recording
values facilitates retrospective analysis. A special
exchange format enables saving and sending of the
recording configuration and entered values in one and
the same file. Thus, for example, Scope recordings
can be forwarded by email and further processed by
the recipient to their full extent (zoom, measurement
with cursors, calculated curves, etc.).
Item Item no.
M-SCOPE3-Pro RT
00024212-63
M-SCOPE3-Pro DVD
00024212-xx
M-SCOPE3-Pro-USB00026255-00
355
Testing and diagnostics
»Scope 3« is also the right tool for the long-term
archiving of measured values directly on the controller. The maximum storage space available is
configured and the recording started by means of
archiving limits.
Thus, millions of data points can also be archived
directly on the controller. Backup and export functions then allow further processing of the collected
data.
•Recording of analog and digital values
•Real-time acquisition directly on the controller
•Long-term recordings per database
•Large number of signals (multiple acquisition tasks
possible)
•High resolution / variable sampling priority
•Versatile trigger possibilities / pre-triggers and
post-triggers
•Graphic evaluation / curve display on the PC
•Measurement of curves
•Scaling / shifting of curves and calculated curves
•Overlay of reference curves
•Archiving / export on the PC
356
Testing and diagnostics
Engineering PC
Scope 3 tool
Configuration
Presentation
• Transforming
• Measuring
• Analysing
CSV
Data base
Data exports
TCP/UDP/QSOAP/SSL
M1 controller
Scope 3 Software module
Data base
Data
recorder
Management
APP modules
APP1
APP2
CSV
Data exports
HW modules
Digital I/O
Analog I/O
Technology
modules
The central aspect of Scope 3 is the portable database on the Engineering PC and M1
controller. This enables very simple data exchange and collaboration – also using copies of
a single file, if necessary.
357
Testing and diagnostics
Scope 3
General
Recording module
Stand-alone real-time recorder on the controller
Configuration
Graphic configuration interface in the SolutionCenter or standalone-tool
Presentation interface
Diagram display with dynamic legend in the SolutionCenter
or standalone tool
Recording module
Recordable data sources
Channel values direct (MIO), SVI variables
Data Types
All analog and digital formats up to 64-bit
Recordable tasks
SVI variables of any number of software modules simultaneously
Sampling modes
• Continuous
• Triggered once
• Triggered cyclically
Sampling rate
• Cyclical, min. 100 microseconds, max. 60 minutes
• Coupled with hardware interrupts
Time base
•
•
•
•
System-tick
Hardware-sync-signal
Auxiliary clock
Real-time clock
Trigger
•
•
•
•
Any combination of start- and stop-triggers
Recording conditions as additional limitation of the recorded data
Edge, level and distance triggering
Pre-trigger and post-trigger of any length (max. length of recording)
Data quantities
No technical limitation, dependent on the free resources on the M1 controller
Interface
C-library for using the data recorder in an application:
• Executing commands (Start, Stop, etc.)
• Changing the recording configuration
Scaling
Several recordings executable in parallel with different sampling rates and
different priorities
Auto-run
Yes, automatic start after reboot possible
Write protection
Yes, definable warning text on changes
Data buffer
Configurable ring buffer for loss-free transfer of data
from the controller to the PC
Data archiving on controller*
System
Embedded database, optionally activatable, database file can be copied freely
to different controllers or PCs and used
Archiving interval
Freely configurable in seconds, fast recorded data is buffered and stored in the
database in the archiving interval
Configurable limits
• Length in seconds
• Number of recorded points
• Number of recordings
Caching of the data-base
Cache size in the working memory freely configurable
Interface
C-library for using the database in an application:
• Addition of reference channels or entire recordings
• Export of data or hot backup
* Functions are only available in the Professional Version
358
Testing and diagnostics
Scope 3
Management / Configuration
Project Management
Configurations can be created flexibly in workspace and managed there in
projects
Management of
recordings
Recordings installed on the M1 can be managed directly via their own view
Configuration of
recordings
All configuration methods can be selected via masks. Errors in the configuration are validated immediately.
Delivery of configuration
A recording configuration can be delivered to a controller via a single action.
Backup of data
Data on an M1 can be saved on the PC by drag and drop.
Presentation/analysis system
Presentation forms
Value-over-time [x(t)], value-over-value [x(y)]
Time formats
Milliseconds [ms] or date/time formats (freely configurable)
Number of value axes
User-defined
Number of curves
User-defined, selective showing/hiding for maintaining clarity
Axis reference
Each curve can be allocated to any axis
Auto-scaling
Yes, linear or logarithmic scaling possible
Fixed scaling
Yes, adjustable
Scale arrangement
Yes, adjustable
Measurement cursors
2 (can be offset separately and together)
Measurement cursor
­functions
Value display in legend, time display, differential display
Stacked Plot
Yes, a separate diagram per signal, selective full-screen mode per curve
Array of curves
Up to 10 older recordings can additionally be displayed faded into the background for comparison
Grid
Yes, configurable
Presentation options
Curve, axis, grid colors, all line thicknesses, orientation, axis label, axis
­arrangement (left/right), flooded curves on reference value or other curves
Raw value transformation
Factor and offset per signal
Reference curves
Yes, can be imported from CSV or integrated via application
Highlighting ranges
Curves can be flooded against a configurable reference value or against
­another curve, configurable via color and transparency value
Curve calculation
• Measured curve values or calculated curve values are the basis
• The calculation methods are addition, subtraction, multiplication, division,
integration, differentiation, Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT)
• Users can add their own calculation methods
Possibilities for making
comparisons
Yes, comparison of recordings from different time ranges as well as different
recordings
Interfaces
Extendible with regard to specific calculation operations for curves and e
­ xport
functions for individual formats
359
Testing and diagnostics
Scope 3
Data retention
Recording configuration
Can be exported/imported as a file
Value storage
On the controller or PC
Exchange formats
A database for configuration and data can be exported/imported
Excel interface
CSV export
System requirements
PC software (minimum)
Processor 2 GHz, working memory 1024 MB RAM, hard disk drive with 250 MB
of free storage space, screen resolution 1024x768 pixels, Microsoft Windows XP
or higher
M1 software module
M1 controller system (except for ME2xx) with M-Base 3.75 or higher, portable
license on USB storage device with M-Base 3.95 or higher
Design variants
360
Item
Item no.
Description
M-SCOPE3-Pro RT
00024212-63
Software package to install on Windows PCs and M1
controllers for the diagnosis of waveforms (IO – and process
variables). Stand-alone task for recording and archiving of
records on the controller, trigger and pretrigger, multiple
recordings. Comprehensive graphical representation
(chart) and evaluation functions, data export on the PC,
SolutionCenter integration. License bound to target device.
M-SCOPE3-Pro DVD
00024212-xx
Installation medium for Scope 3 (DVD). Software module for
the M1 controller and Scope 3 tool for displaying recordings
and data analysis. A Scope software module without a valid
runtime license can be used for up to two hours for recordings.
After that, the recording is stopped, but it is possible to restart
after a period of 10 minutes. Without a runtime license,
archiving functions on the M1 controller are disabled.
M-SCOPE3-Pro-USB
00026255-00
Software package to install on Windows PCs and M1
controllers for the diagnosis of waveforms (IO – and process
variables). Stand-alone task for recording and archiving of
records on the controller, trigger and pretrigger, multiple
recordings. Comprehensive graphical representation
(chart) and evaluation functions, data export on the PC,
SolutionCenter integration. Portable License on USB storage
device (delivery includes a USB-stick).
Testing and diagnostics
361
Programming
Maximum performance for maximum stability
Any automation platform is only as good
as the software that is available for it.
The stability, real-time capability and
performance of the runtime system have
the highest priorities.
The M1 automation system can be
programmed in the respective familiar
environment of the automation engineer:
All five languages of IEC 61131-3 are
supported, as are C or C++.
Also the model-based development via UML-Design / coding or integration in
the function block editors of MATLAB® /
Simulink® are unique in the industrial
environment. Comprehensive, complete
provided libraries simplify the use even of
complex units from automation, motion
control, and information technology / web.
M-PLC Programming Interface
Features
Easy entry into IEC 61131-3
IT, ST, LD, FDB, CFC, QFB
Convenient debugging on the target system
with single-step, breakpoints, etc.
Provided libraries with pre-finished and tested
functions
C / C++ Developer
Features
Languages: ANSI C and C++
Gnu compiler gcc
Automatic adaptation and management
of the computer environment
Editor and debugger based on Eclipse CDT
Intellisense: Automatic supplementation
of structure elements
Syntax highlighting
Folding code ranges, e.g. for complete while loops
362
Programming
M-PLC
Programming Interface
PLC programming interface according to
IEC 61131-3
M-PLC is a complete development environment for
programming the M1 controller in accordance with
IEC 61131-3. The M-PLC puts a simple approach to
the powerful IEC language at the disposal of the PLC
programmer. Use of the edit and debugging functions
is based on the proven development program
environments of advanced programming languages.
•Easy entry into IEC 61131-3
•All languages defined in IEC standard 61131-3
are supported (instruction list, structured text,
ladder diagram, function block diagram, continuous
function chart, sequential function chart).
•Editor and debugging functions
•Provided libraries with pre-finished and tested
functions
VxWorks
SMI
IEC61131
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Tasks
IEC61131
Controller
Tasks
Controller
VxWorks
Programming
•Editors for programming in all IEC 61131-3
languages
IL
Instruction List
ST
Structured Text
LD
Ladder Diagram
FBD
Function Block Diagram
SFC
Sequential Function Chart
CFC
Continuous Function Chart
•Syntax highlighting for key words defined in
IEC 61131-3
•Graphic project navigation bar (based on Windows
Explorer)
•Support of all elementary IEC 61131-3 data types
to 64 bit
•Support of fields, structures and pointers
•Graphic controller and task configuration
•CAN objects from *.dcf files in M-PLC can be applied
as symbols
•PB objects from *.2bf files in M-PLC can be applied
as symbols
•Library management for creation and management
of libraries
•Watch manager and recipe manager (freely
definable variable monitoring)
•M-PLC can be started several times (multiple
projects open and online in parallel)
•Automatic project backup and creation of backup
•Project archiving on the controller
•Password protection for projects
•Offline simulation
•Online help
•Data exchange system-wide via SVI/SMI interface
programming
363
Programming
Runtime system
•Any number of running M-PLC projects on one
processor
•Every PLC project supports up to 16 separate
tasks
•Each task can be configured independently of
the others in terms of (priority, task call-up
mode [event, timetrigger, free running, sync],
watchdog)
•Actual multitasking via operating system tasks
(VxWorks)
•Communication between software modules (precompiled units)
SW module 1
SW module 2
•Between different tasks of an IEC61131 module:
global variables or SMI/SVI
•Between IEC61131 modules: GD flag range or
SMI/SVI
•Between IEC61131 modules and other modules
(C/C++, Simulink): SMI/SVI
•Between any modules on different controllers:
SMI
•Interface to visualization/SCADA/BDE
•Standard protocols: OPC DA, IEC 61850
IEC61400, Modbus etc.
•Libraries for integration into separate software
(for C/C++, C#.NET, Java)
•Support of battery-buffered data (RETAIN flag)
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Global variables
Tasks
Global variables
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
IEC61131
Tasks
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
SMI/SVI
IEC61131
VxWorks
364
SW module 3
GD data
C/C++
Simulink
Tasks
Online functions
•Online change (exchange of blocks in running
operation) also for multitasking projects
•Monitoring of all project variables
•Writing and forcing of variables
•Single cycle, single step and break points
•Sequence control (program lines that have
been run through will be displayed)
•Recording and graphic presentation of
project variables – trace
Programming
Manufacturer libraries
STANDARD
IEC 61131-3 Standard functions
PLC
7 standard PID controllers
MIO_PLC
Functions for direct access
to hardware I/Os
SMI_PLC
Functions for fast communication between modules
and controllers (SMI/SVI)
EHD_PLC
Functions for inputting and managing errors in the EHD
UTIL_PLC
Functions for access to RTC, runtime system info, special conversions
FILE_PLC
Functions for access to files,
directories and serial interfaces
CIA405Functions for access to CAN
DN_PLC
Functions for access to device net
PB_PLCFunctions for access to Profibus
USS_PLC
Functions for communication with "Micromaster" frequency
converters
Extensions relative to CoDeSys
•Grouping possibility for I/O modules in the process image (controller configuration) runtimeoptimized process image (only channels being
used are processed)
•CAN objects with symbolic names in the process
image
•Addressing for inputs/outputs: undelayedaccess
that bypasses the process image
•Adjustment of the interval time and watchdog time in the controller configuration
•Multiple, concurrently running PLC projects
on one CPU with different priorities / interval times
•Actual operating system tasks within the PLC
projects
•GD flag range for shared data from multiple
projects on one CPU
•RD flag range for remnant (battery-buffered) data
•Optionally, the normal flag range (MX .. MR) can
also be placed in the battery-buffered memory
area.
•Interface in the runtime system for libraries
•Initialization (C), deinitialization, version
check, memory management, management of
background tasks, provision for online change
•Support for exception handling in the runtime
system
•Display of the status "in error handling" (ERROR)
in the interface
•Implementation of the I/O modules of the process
image in the runtime system
•Optimized for performance, flexibility and
combinability, shared use of an I/O module by
multiple projects/SW modules possible
•Saving/loading of the entire project including
sources to/from the controller
•Transparency of the global variables (flags,
symbolic variables, structures) controller- and
visualization-wide
Integration in the SolutionCenter
(projects are SW modules)
Generation of an executable *.m file with
configuration information
•Task interval time measurement, can be queried in
the project itself and in Device Manager
•Watchdog integration
•Execution possible in an application layer (memory
protection)
•Install, start, stop, reset and delete of PLC
projects in Device Manager
•The state machine of a PLC project in the runtime
system always corresponds to the model defined
for SW modules.
•Integration via M1 system debug mode and M1
system logbook
•Start of a project when booting through entry in
MConfig.ini
365
Programming
C / C++ Developer
Current automations solve complex problems that
go well beyond merely controlling the system.
High-level language programming in C/C++ is quite
suitable for these complex tasks. These languages
offer the option of efficient procedural and objectoriented programing. With the ­C /C++ Developer,
a tool is provided that comprehensively supports the
system programmer in all phases of the software
development.
In the context of automation, software projects are
created in connection with a m
­ achine. The Solution­
Center is the central tool for solving a
­ utomation
tasks. The C/C++ Developer (based on the ­EclipseCDT) is a central component of this engineering-tool.
All options of the S
­ olutionCenter such as linking
of projects, version management and the EclipseMarketplace can thus be used. The M1-control family
provides a multi-tasking-environment based on the
operating system VxWorks®. Each software module
can be broken down into any number of tasks and
use all the options of the operating system.
366
Programming
So-called project templates, allow standardized
software modules to be created. Projects are used
as the basis for templates. These templates can
then be adapted with a language optimized for
this task. This language allows replacements to be
made, files to be tied in or menus to be created
to adapt the template in the selection to a specific
task. The templates can either be tied in as a file
or made available via the Eclipse Marktplace.
Editor
•Structuring of projects through sub-directories
•Intellisense: automatic supplementing of
structure elements
•Syntax highlighting
•Folding code-ranges, e. g. for complete while
loops
•Jump to the declaration of variables and
functions from the code
The actual programing is facilitated by a modern
Editor. This Editor supports Intellisense (automatic
supplementing of structure elements, further
information on the Code-Fragment etc.), SyntaxHighlighting, folding code-ranges etc.
Build/Make
•Pre- and post-build steps
•Automatic/Manual Make-Run
Compiling and linking can be automatically
controlled by the tool or manually in a targeted
way (Automatic/Manual Build, Post/Pre-Build). The
result is a finished, executable program file for the
M1 controller family.
Many problems are largely independent of
the platform used e. g. Digital Filters. The C/
C++ Developer provides the option even for
alternative target systems (e. g. MinGW, Windows
etc.) of creating executable software programs
(alternative launch configurations). This allows
efficient testing of the programs even without
target hardware.
For trouble-shooting, the Debugger is operated via
the graphic interface. The debugger used (GDB)
allows all areas of the program to be examined in
step operation. The step operation is available in
both the C/C++ area and in the Assembler area.
Views of all areas of the program (Memory,
Register, Variables, Retain etc.) support the
trouble-shooting. The Debugger is rounded off
through the option of debugging and controlling
several software modules at the same time.
For the automation range, the
C/C++ Developer is a comprehensive solution for
programing and debugging in C/C++.
Compile
•gcc 2.95.2
•gcc 4.01.2
Debug
•Stepping (Step-Into, Step-Over, Step-Return)
•Views (Expressions, Memory, Disassembly,
nvRAM)
•Assembler-stepping
•Debugging several software modules at the
same time
•Call-Tree
General
•Connection to the market place
•Based on the current CDT version
•Toolchain also controls mingw, cygwin and
Windows etc (creating/testing of programs
without target­hardware)
•Managing various configurations
•Installation and start of the software modules
created from the development environment
•Coupling of the debugger to running software
modules
Features
•Creation of external libraries for M-PLC
•SVN-connection to the SolutionCenter
•Linking of projects
•3rd party plug-ins or external plug-ins
•Templates:
•simplified creation of templates
•Menu-driven
•Adapting the template to your own needs
through an optimized template language
367
Model-based design/Simulation
Proven security for the future
M-Target for Simulink® enables rapid
implementation of algorithms developed
in MATLAB®/Simulink® on the M1
automation system. Processes are
presented in the simulation environment
of MATLAB® and suitable control and
regulation strategies are developed for
this. The overall system can be varied
as often as desired in the computer
368
simulation, before trials are executed on
real prototypes of machines and plants.
Automatic code generation enables
transfer of the developed algorithms to the
controller and automatically establishes the
connection to the input/output modules
used.
Model-based design/Simulation
®
M-Target for Simulink
Fast development of controllers and
sequence controllers
The MATLAB® program package and the associated
toolbox, Simulink® from Mathworks Inc. are
considered to be the worldwide standard in the area
of modeling dynamic systems in technologically
demanding processes.
With the complete integration of the M1 controller
as target system, a convenient and efficient
implementation of the MATLAB® functions is enabled
on an M1 control system. The user can concentrate
exclusively on working in the familiar, graphic
Simulink® programming environment, where he
can model the system in its entirety and simulate
the effect of changes even before transfer to an M1
control system. The code for the M1 target system
is generated automatically in the background
and requires no knowledge of a programming
language. This complete integration enables efficient
programming and commissioning of the M1 control
system.
•Faster implementation of controllers through shorter
controller design phases
•Shorter commissioning processes through reliable
automatic code generation
•Higher level of agreement between machine model
and controller model
Existing MATLAB® / Simulink® subsystems can be
reused in new simulations of the controller programs.
The integration of Bachmann »ready-to-use«
software modules facilitates development of complex,
customer-specific software. The unique and direct
interplay between process model, controller model
and support a more stable modeling of the overall
process. Transfer to the M1 controller is executed
automatically from the MATLAB® / Simulink®
environment, parameter variations in the model are
implemented online in the M1 target system (target).
Sequential programs can be implemented through the
optional Stateflow and Coder toolboxes.
Item
M-Target for Simulink
One-time License
M-Target for Simulink
Annual Maintenance
Item no.
00015577-60
00015577-70
369
Model-based design/Simulation
Process
370
Input
Monitoring
5. Operation
Output
Input
Output
4. Test and
optimization
Input
3. Generation and
download
Commands
Parameters
2. Simulation
Download
1. Modeling
2. Simulation
The resulting complete model is now simulated
offline on the computer. Comprehensive test
series of all possible operating conditions or
error situations are played through. Iterative
model adjustments and new simulations follow
seamlessly. The high-quality process/solver for
numeric calculation of differential equations also
prove themselves outside of simple analytical
systems. Outstanding graphic depiction
possibilities, such as curves and surface plots and
even animated 3D-CAD models, optimize the work
sequence.
Output
Development Process
1. Modeling
Both plant (physical system) and control systems
are modeled in Simulink®. Using application
specific tools reduces the time spent developing
the system. This is achieved by enabling the
developer to use modeling languages native to
the domain of interest. Domain-specific products
for physical modeling, such as SimElectronics,
SimHydraulics, SimMechanics, make it easier
to create intuitive, reusable models of the
multidomain physical system. For mathematical
modeling, MATLAB® and Simulink® also offer
a range of capabilities. Established service
companies offer additional expertise in all
domains.
Model-based design/Simulation
3. Generation and download
In this step, the process model is first separated
from the actual control or regulation part. Then
a mouse click triggers automatic code generation
and preparation of the application for the realtime system. This can be loaded directly from the
Simulink® interface into the controller. Optionally,
libraries can be generated for IEC 61131-3
programs or for C/C++, which are used in the
respective development environments in order to
create applications.
4. Test and optimization
The generated real-time program now runs in
the controller. But it can exchange data directly
with the Simulink® interface on the PC through
Using the real process environment, the
discovered solution can be verified and further
optimized. If necessary, users can switch to
a prior process step and make changes there
(iterative improvement).
5. Operation
As soon as a satisfactory result is achieved,
the project management PC can be separated
from the controller – which continues to run
autonomously in real time. All interfaces to
parallel-running applications on the same (or
other) controllers remain in place. The published
process variables can be depicted through the
general engineering tool SolutionCenter or in
visualizations.
the communication interfaces integrated during
code generation. Then, in the so-called “external
mode”, the actual process values (variables,
channel values) are available directly online in
Simulink®. At the same time, variable values
or internal parameters of the Simulink® blocks
can also be changed from there in the real-time
program. In this mode, the Simulink® model
created by the developer is only the graphic
front end for visualization of process values and
stipulation of parameters.
External Mode
Display and change online data directly from realtime systems in Simulink® .
371
Model-based design/Simulation
M-Target for Simulink®
Areas of application
Model-based development
Yes, with Simulink® / automatic code generation
Offline simulation
Yes
Hardware in the loop
Yes
Real-time programming
Yes
Control technology
Yes (PID, Observer, Fuzzy, MIMO etc.)
Signal processing
Yes, synchronous or blockwise processing
(frame-based processing)
Process and status machines
Yes, with Stateflow®
Signal interfaces1)
Digital signals
24 V uniform signal input (meter-capable, interrupt-capable)
24 V uniform signal output (PWM-capable)
5V TTL input / output
Analog signals
±1 V, ±10 V uniform signal input / output
0(4) to 20 mA uniform signal input / output
Temperature sensor
PT100
PT1000
Thermoelements type J, K, N etc.
Position, angle, location
Incremental encoder, SSI
Force/expansion measurement
Expansion measurement bridges
Vibrations, accelerations
ICP acceleration sensors (up to 50 kS/sec)
Special signals
Step motor triggering, PWM (DC motors)
Software interfaces
Process communication
SVI (standard variables interface),
SMI (standard module interface) of signals and parameters
Software interface M-Target
C/C++ (M-Target models can be supplemented with
legacy code) in the form of software modules or libraries for
IEC 61131-3 and C/C++
File system
Yes, on flash interchangeable media, fixed media, RAM,
remanent RAM
Monitoring
»External mode« by Simulink®
for using of scopes, displays, workspace blocks in Simulink®,
online monitoring of all SVI variables with the engineeringtool
SolutionCenter Scope
1) Over Bachmann M1 I/O modules
372
Model-based design/Simulation
M-Target for Simulink®
Real-time systems
Real-time operating system
VxWorks
Multitasking
Yes, preemptive
Several M-Target models
Yes, simultaneously / different priorities possible
Priority levels
255
Task models
Single-rate/single-task, multi-rate/single-task, multi-rate/
multi-task
Cycle times
Freely selectable from 200 µs (application-dependent)
Synchronization
Hardware interrupts (signal interfaces),
hardware cycle (sync), CPU
Mix mode
Yes, software modules (processes) in IEC 61131-3 (ST, FBD, IL,
LD, SFC), C, C++ can run parallel to Simulink® models
Libraries
Bachmann I/O and function modules
Yes, contained in M-Target for Simulink® with integrated
simulation modes, can be imported from the control system
Function enhancements2)
Respective toolboxes from MathWorks
Domain modeling2)
Respective toolboxes from MathWorks
System requirements
Real-time systems
Bachmann M1 CPUs of the series ME, MX, MC und MH
Engineering computer
IBM compatible PC under Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10
4 GB RAM, processor Intel Core Duo 2 GHz
or better, screen resolution ≥1280 x 1024 TrueColor,
>1 GB free HDD, Ethernet interface
Engineering software
MATLAB® with Simulink®, MATLAB Coder™ and Simulink Coder™
(supported versions as per datasheet), toolboxes from MathWorks
according to application, M-BASE Version 3.70 or higher.
Order codes
M-Target for Simulink
One-time License
00015577-60
Development tools for simulation and creation of control
programs, closed-loop control programs and sequence programs
with ­MATLAB® / ­Simulink®; automatic code generation for the M1
controller family based on MATLAB Coder™ and Simulink Coder™.
Product support and the delivery of updates within one year are
included in the license.
M-Target for Simulink
Annual Maintenance
00015577-70
One-year renewal of product support and of the delivery of
updates for M-Target for Simulink®.
2) Requirement is suitability for MATLAB Coder™ und Simulink Coder™
373
Programming
Component Manager
With the Component Manager machines and systems
can be structured modularly, so that customer-specific
differences (other software module combinations,
additional modules, etc.) can be created without
modification and thus without test of the existing
software. The component orientation thus enables
creation of the overall function of the automation
system at the time of instantiation by interconnecting
autonomous software modules.
Real machines or systems consist of a variety of
subsystems that can be structured according to
different criteria (e. g. affiliation with a trade,
function). Through the structuring in subsystems it
is possible to disregard the complexity of the overall
system and only deal with the (reduced) complexity of
the subsystem and its interface.
The M1 controller makes the concept of software
modules available for software-side organization of
these subsystems. Software modules communicate
via a uniform interface and can be created in every
programming language available on the M1 controller.
PLC
Subsystem B
PLC
Subsystem C
MD
C/C++
Subsystem C
Subsystem A
PLC
Subsystem B
Library
Subsystem A
A component abstracts its internal structure or its
implementation details and describes itself completely
through the defined interfaces and properties.
Components are individually compiled, versioned,
tested, and if necessary documented. They can be
interconnected with each other and with the I/O
system to create the overall function of an automation
PLC
Compiling
Application
374
Application
Programming
system. Implementation of the functionality
and the application of the functionality are
decoupled.
Breaking down the application
into components
(sub-functions)
This procedure enables a multi-level work
process:
•Describe a target programming language
(interface description) independently of
components
•Program components on the basis of the
interface description
•Develop applications by interconnecting
components (and I/O system if necessary)
Selection of existing
components from a library
Versionierung
Features:
•The technical process is in the foreground
•Complete abstraction of the internal structure
of the components
•Separation of definition and implementation
•Convenient description language for the
interface
•Code generation for low-level areas
•Graphic application development
•Clear and understandable application
presentation in the SolutionCenter
•Support of functionality on the application
level
Komponente vorhanden
Component Manager makes the appropriate
tools available for all phases.
CMP
PLC
MD
C/C++
TST
APP
TST
Description of the
interface
Creation of the
component in
the technology
that is optimal
for the task
Testing the
created
components
Putting an application
together from the
components
Testing the developed
­application
Component Manager modules
APP
CMP
Graphic application development
Interconnect graphically
Component Designer
Technology-independent description
of the component interface
TST
PLC
MD
C/C++
Component test
Developer for C/C++, PLC,
MATLAB® / Simulink®
375
Programming
PLC Developer
Current automations solve complex problems that
go well beyond merely controlling the system.
Programming in the IEC 61131-3 programming
language, Structured Text (ST), is well suited for
these complex tasks. This language offers the
possibility of efficient procedural programing. With
PLC Developer a tool is provided that comprehensively
supports the system programmer in all phases of
software development. In the context of automation,
software projects are created in conjunction with a
machine.
The SolutionCenter is the central tool for solving
automation tasks. PLC Developer is a central
component of this engineering-tool. Thus all options
of the SolutionCenter, such as linking of projects,
version management and the Eclipse Marketplace can
be used. The M1 controller provides a multi-taskingenvironment based on the VxWorks® operating
system. Each software module that is created with
the PLC Developer can be broken down into as
many as 16 tasks. The created tasks can be started
cyclically or event-driven, and in this process use the
possibilities of the operating system.
Writing code is a central task of the PLC programmer.
PLC Developer's project view offers an optimal
overview. This is where all files that belong to a
project (POUs, libraries, etc.) are presented in a flat
or structured view.
376
Programming
The PLC Developer's editor supports the orientation
in the code through syntax highlighting or folding
code ranges. When entering the source code,
the programmer is supported through automatic
source code completion, syntax check, code
snipples or through dynamic display of the
information concerning the code (e. g. source code
documentation). All variables for the currently
selected POU are presented in an outline v
­ iew. The
functionality of the editor can be extended through
numerous Eclipse plug-ins.
Compiling and linking are controlled automatically by
the tool. The result is a finished, executable program
file for the M1 controller. For troubleshooting, the
debugger is operated via the graphic interface.
The debugger that is used allows all areas of the
program to be examined in step operation. Via Online
Change it is possible to replace the program code
in running operation. Breakpoints enable optimal
troubleshooting. Variable values are continuously
displayed and can be manipulated (forced) in running
operation.
Various lists are available for organizing variables at
time of debug (watch lists, force lists). The controller
configured in the SolutionCenter can be imported into
the PLC Developer. Moreover, it is possible to import
existing M-PC projects and libraries.
General
•Complete integration in the SolutionCenter
•Version management within the SolutionCenter
•Linking of projects
•Connection to the Eclipse Marketplace
•3rd party plug-ins or external plug-ins
•Import/export of M-PLC projects
•16 task (Cyclic (Time/Sync), Event,
­Freerunning)
Editor
•Structuring of projects through sub­directories
•Intellisense: Automatic supplementation of
structure elements
•Syntax highlighting
•Folding code-ranges, e. g. for complete while
loops
•Jump to the declaration of variables and
functions from the code
•Code snipples (can be modified and extended
by the user)
Debug
•Stepping (Step-Into, Step-Over, Step-Return)
•Views (Expressions, Memory, Disassembly,
nvRAM)
•Concurrent debugging of multiple tasks
Library
•Creating custome libaries in IEC 61131-3/ST
•Import of libraries from M-PLC /
CoDeSys 2.x
377
Visualizing. Web-compliant. Versatile.
SCADA and webMI – A step ahead
with web technology
Increasing complexity and the constantly escalating level of automation in
a wide variety of systems demand future-oriented technologies to monitor
and control processes effectively. HMI and SCADA systems contribute significantly in this regard and guarantee maximum security. Moreover, future
applications must be able to demonstrate a high degree of flexibility; even
connecting to fixed operator control stations in the age of mobile terminals is
a thing of the past.
Due to its generic structure, the specially designed HMI and SCADA solutions
from Bachmann electronic for professional automation and control center
technology can be used in all application areas and industries such as energy,
plant construction and mechanical engineering, maritime applications or
logistics. The modern and efficient structure enables scaling from extremely
small applications with scarcely a dozen information points up to industrialscale systems with several hundred thousand process values. Top-quality
user interfaces are produced by using pure web technologies; the fact that
installation on the HMI devices is dispensed with is an additional benefit.
Visualization is available on all equipment with a standard browser and is not
constrained by screen sizes and resolutions.
379
atvise® scada
The new "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition" solution puts the Internet in the
service of the automation world thanks to pure Web technology. With the continuous use of
industrial and communication standards (e.g. OPC UA), the engineering effort is reduced to
a minimum.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Latest-generation SCADA/HMI system
Client-server architecture (multi-client)
History database
User administration & access security
Java Script server- and client side, open for customer-specific adaptation of the Java Script
OPC UA Data Access and Alarms & Conditions interface to superior systems
Client
Client
Client
Client
Ethernet/Internet
atvise® scada
Server
Engineering Tool
Ethernet/Internet
PLC
380
PLC
PLC
PLC
atvise® scada
atvise® scada
Pure web Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition Solution
The provision of information independent of location
and daytime has become the paradigm of all areas of
our life in our Internet age. This requirement expands
within the industrial automation in terms of role- and
person-selective operation and process manipulation.
Conventional control and operating systems emerged
along with other requirements and were based on
older, restrictive technologies, making their suitability
clearly limited for today’s challenges.
State-of-the-Art Technology
By using the latest technologies for the development
atvise® scada, classical limitations have been
overcome: the Internet now serves the automation
world - the visualization is based on pure web
technology. The implementation of valid industrial and
communication standards (e.g. OPC UA) allows for
example customers to reduce the efforts in project
and maintenance to a minimum.
Open Standards
By focusing on international standards (such
as HTML5, SVG - vector graphics, TCP / IP) the
generated user interface is displayed and executed on
all popular Web browsers without special additives,
such as individual plug-ins, ActiveX, Java or
Silverlight. This means added value in various ways:
Web browsers are everywhere device independently
available - whether on the particular facility level
or in the case of remote services. Eliminating
cumbersome client installations and updates means
less effort for operation and maintenance. Maximum
possibilities in graphic design along with maximum
access security are the values of benefit that the
latest stage of expansion of the Internet (web
2.0) and the smartphone era offer. atvise scada is
Item
atvise
atvise
atvise
atvise
atvise
atvise
atvise
atvise
scada 50 CCD* - micro
scada 150 CCD*
- small scada 1500 CCD*
- standard scada 10000 CCD* - large
scada Unlimited CCD* - xxl
Item No.
00021504-00
00021504-10
00021504-20**
00021504-30**
00021504-40
Server-sided Scripting Option
Fixed Client Option
Elements Option
00021679-00
00021680-00
00021681-00
* CCD = Concurrent Connected Data points (via http). e.g.: 50CCD = an opened
Web browser displays 50 data points or two opened Web browsers display 25 data points apiece, etc.
** Starting with the standard, a fixed workstation is included
381
atvise® scada
completely based on standards rather than
the makeshift „to connect to the outside,“
therefor securing highest performance,
scalability and simplicity.
Powerful Engineering Tool
The project and configuration is done with
the engineering tool atvise builder from any
PC. Via LAN or Internet the tool accesses
the server and allows online, during ongoing
operation of the plant, e.g. the creation of
data objects, the configuration of alarms or
the drawing of process images.
A variety of preconfigured standard
objects and panel layouts are available.
Their graphics have been created with the
onboard-tools of the atvise builders editor
and therefore are completely customizable
by the user. The user can also create
own objects and apply the pre-configured
dynamizations to these elements. The
designed user interfaces are immediately
and without any modification applicable on
all target systems - regardless of screen
resolution, operating system or Web
browser. Refresh rates and response surpass
all previous experience with Web applications
and even conventional supervisory control
systems.
For specific requirements an additional high
performance client-and server-side Java Script option
is available within a built-in script editor.
This system has been specifically designed for
professional automation and control systems and due
to its generic structure can be utilized in all fields and
industries. The modern and efficient design allows
scaling from small applications with only a few dozens
data-points to world-scale plants with more than
100,000 process variables
•Latest generation SCADA / HMI system
•Client-Server architecture (Multi-client)
•User interfaces in pure web technology
•Device and operating system independent (HTML5,
SVG) PC / Mac / Unix, Tablet, Smartphone, iPad ...*
•Process connection OPC UA
•Online Engineering / multi-user
•Built-in alarm system
•History database
•Online-/offline trending
•Online language/font switching
•User management and access security
•Java script, server- and client-sided
•OPC UA Data Access and Alarm Conditions interface
to superior level systems
SCADA Functions
atvise scada in general supports all typical
SCADA functionalities in regards to alarming,
historisation, trending, user management
and multi-language.
382
* Current browser compatibility list can be called up at www.atvise.com.
atvise® scada
Client
Client
Client
Client
Ethernet/Internet
atvise® scada
Server
Engineering Tool
Ethernet/Internet
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
383
atvise® scada
atvise®
Process interface
Protocols
OPC Unified Architecture (UA) Data Access
OPC Data Access V2.05, V3.0
webMI Data Interface
Physical interface
Ethernet (physical type dependent on target system)
Parallel operation
Yes (multiple protocols, multiple data sources)
Data types
All OPC UA compliant elementary types, arrays and structures
Data mapping
Integrated (to digital, analog and string as elements of arbitrary
structures)
Data model mapping
Yes (automatically)
Data naming
Arbitrary names (use source name possible)
Source time stamping
Yes (from PLC/controller, OPC compliant)
Quality tagging
Yes (from PLC/controller, OPC compliant)
Transmission mode
Event-driven, cyclically (configurable)
Update rate
Dependent on project and configuration (starting from 100 ms)*
sampling and publish intervals configurable
Update inhibition
Time / threshold dependent
Connection monitoring
Yes
Access control / security
Yes (OPC UA compliant, including SSL encryption)
Namespace browsing
Yes (hierarchical browsing interface at design and runtime)
Simulation mode
Yes
Logging
Yes (diagnostics user interface per item element)
Server
Core technology
C++ platform independent
Process data model
Fully structured, object oriented (hierarchy, derived types)
Engineering model
Type (class) / instantiated objects, inherited properties
Data volume
Scalable and dependent on hardware platform
(with Windows 7 32-Bit up to approx. 700 000 process items)*
Multi processing
Multithreaded computation / benefits from multi-core / multi-CPU
systems
Server time stamping
Yes (additionally to source time stamp)
Database
Embedded, powerfail-safe
Configuration storage
Engineering database
Alarm system
OPC UA Alarms & Conditions compliant (arbitrary alarm categories)
Historian
Process value database with incremental archiving
Archive groups with configurable sampling interval and offset
Alarm database (alarm history)
Longtime archiving
Yes (data aggregation, derived long term archives)
Trending
Online trending (without archiving)
Historical trending (offline)
Combined online/offline trending
* Performance data depends on data volume, computation power, (available) controller performance /
device and network topology/-load. Performance depends generally on application.
384
atvise® scada
atvise®
Server
Trend configuration
Fixed configuration at design time
User configurable tend displays at runtime (persistable)
User administration
Yes (privileges/rights, groups, users)
Functional Extensions
Java Script (server sided)
Full access to all item releated functions and external databases (via
ODBC)
Specific extensions via DLL
Module interface
C++ API
Virtualization
Possible
Client Interface
HTTP / HTTPS (integrated webserver)
Supervisory Interface
(supervisory systems)
OPC UA Data Access (also atvise® <-> atvise® connectivity)
OPC UA Alarms & Conditions
Client
Technology client
Up to date, standard-compliant web browser*
Technology process images
HTML, SVG, Java Script
Number of clients
Technically almost any number of clients (>>20)
dependent on license, see also Installation/CCDs
Zooming
Yes, continously
Deluttering
Yes (zoom level dependent visibility/content)
Scaling
Yes (automatic resize/adaption to client device)
Vector graphics
Yes (lossless scaling/zooming)
Base objects
See »Configuration/Engineering«
Process objects
See »Configuration/Engineering«
Alarm screen
Yes
Trend / multitrend
Yes
Operator input protocol
Yes
Operation
Mouse or other pointer devices
Keyboard (hotkeys configurable)
Touchscreen, multitouch**
Multi language
Yes (online language change)
Font type switching
Yes (online)
Character sets
Any (inclusive asian sign languages, cyrillic etc.)
Maps / GIS
Yes
Parallel content
Yes (anything running in a web browser: HTML, Video, Audio,
VRML/3D, Chat etc.)
Functional extensions
Java Script (client sided)
* Latest browser compatibility list can be accessed at www.atvise.com
** Multitouch support depends on specific device functionality, operating system and web browser
385
atvise® scada
atvise®
Configuration/engineering
Data model editor
Yes (integrated in atvise® builder)
Prozess image editor (fully
graphical)
Yes (integrated in atvise® builder)
Programming editor
Yes (integrated Java Script Editor in atvise® builder)
Page editor
Yes (integrated HTML Source Editor in atvise® builder, not required
for engineering)
Engineering model
Type (Class) / instantiated objects, inheritance of properties,
graphical objects (face plates) may be a property of a data object
Graphical objects
Primitives: line, polygon, shape (any), rectangle, ellipse, etc.
Widgets: label, text field, table, trend etc.
Object library
Yes , comprehensive catalogue of predefined standard objects in pure
vector graphics (adjustable, extensible), contains beyond others bar
graphs, gauges, tanks, engines, etc.
Picture library
Yes (optional)
Graphic format support
SVG (and others compliant to W3C)
Animations
Text, value, boundary color, background color, text color, visibility,
operability, size x/y, position x/y, rotation, flashing etc.
Advanced graphics
Arbitrary shapes and clippings, bevel, simple and complex gradient
shading, transparency, semi transparency (alpha blending), rotation,
shading, transformation/adaption of existing SVG graphics
Server interface
OPC UA (Ethernet/Internet)
Online engineering
Yes (project changes during runtime/operation)
Remote engineering
Yes (remote access possible)
Multi engineering
Yes (several engineering users work on one project)
Variations
Engineering system atvice builder can offer a configured feature set
to users (different groups / qualification levels in engineering)
Import/export
XML and CSV
Installation
386
Clients
No installation required (pure web technology)
Server
Installation by Internet/network (or CD-ROM)
Configured installation
Yes (project specific adjustments via XML)
Licensing
CCD (Concurrent Data Points) - simultanously displayed data items on
all connected clients
License protection
Hardware dependent software key (server sided)
atvise® scada
atvise®
Diagnosis
Process data monitor
Yes
Process data statistics
Yes
Systemlog
Yes
Online help system
Yes
System requirements server
Device
Minimum: PC or server with at least 500 MHz Intel
Pentium oder equivalent, 512 MB RAM (project dependent), network
(LAN), input devices, 128 MB available disk space.
Recommended: PC or server with 1.6 GHz Intel Pentium or
equivalent, 2 GB RAM (project dependent), network (LAN), input
device, display 1280x1024, 512 MB available disk space**
Operating system
Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 (32), Windows 7 (64)***,
Windows Server 2008
Operating elements
Not required (headless server operation with remote administration
possible)
System requirements engineering
Device
PC with 1,6 GHz Intel Pentium equivalent or better, 2G B RAM (project
dependent), network (LAN), display 1280x1024, 512 MB available
disk space
Operating system
Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 (32), Windows 7 (64)***,
Windows Server 2008
Operating elements
Keyboard, 2-button mouse
System requirements client
Device
PC, notebook, tablet, smartphone, iPad or similar.
Required CPU-performance und memory depends on device type/
technology and project size / parameters
Operating system
Any (Web browser is relevant)
Web browser*
Any up-to-date Web Browser (Java Script, HTML 5, SVG)
e. g. recent versions of Internet Explorer, Firefox, Chrome, Safari or
similar
Operating elements
Dependent from device technolgy and operating system
*
Latest browser compatibility list can be accessed at www.atvise.com
** For large scale configurations state-of-the-art server hardware with up to date performance
*** Windows 7 64-Bit currently in 32-Bit compatibility mode, full 64-Bit support in preparation
387
atvise® scada
atvise®
Variants
atvise scada 50 CCD* - micro
atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 50 concurrent visualised
datapoints
atvise scada 150 CCD* - small
atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 150 concurrent visualised
datapoints
atvise scada 1500 CCD* - standard
atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 1500 concurrent visualised
datapoints **
atvise scada 10000 CCD* - large
atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), limited to a maximum of 10000 concurrent visualised
datapoints **
atvise scada unlimited CCD* - xxl
atvise scada software package for one SCADA Server for Windows
(web licening), more then 10000 concurrent visualised datapoints
atvise serversided scripting option
offers serversided scripting in JavaScript on the atvise scada server
(requires atvise scada)
atvise fixed client option
grants access for an additional operating station, independent of the
actual status of the CCD count (requires atvise scada "standard" or
higher)
atvise elements option
advanced symbol and objects library with more than 4,000 high
quality vector graphic elements (per engineering workstation)
*
CCD = Concurrent Connected Datapoints (over http). E.g.: 50 CCD = one opened webbrowser
displaying 50 datapoints or two opened webbrowser displaying 25 datapoints each, etc.
** Licenses "standard" and higher include 1 fixed client
388
atvise® scada
389
M1 webMI pro
The M1 webMI pro server for Web visualization runs directly on the controller, slim and
high-performing software that makes any device with a browser into a user interface for a
machine anywhere at any time.
•Directly integrated into the M1 controller system
• No dedicated HMI devices necessary
•Free scalability thanks to vector graphics (SVG)
•Device and operating system-independent for, e. g. operator terminals, iPad
•Operate and monitor with standard browser
•Alarming and journaling of variables
Client
Client
Client
Ethernet/Internet
PLC
M1 webMI pro
390
Client
M1 webMI pro
M1 webMI pro
Web visualization directly on the controller
For the operation and monitoring of machines and
systems, usually dedicated MMI devices are required
and the software for this purpose must be installed
and allocated. Thanks to the M1 webMI pro, this is no
longer necessary; here, the visualization is integrated
directly on the controller. As a result, each authorized
device using a current browser becomes the HMI always and everywhere.
Pure Web standards
With the M1 webMI pro it is possible to exploit the
advantages of the Web technologies entirely without
limiting add-ons such as browser plug-ins and
ActiveX. Any visualization devices from smartphones
to a high-performance control panel can be connected
directly to the M1 controller via a secure web server
- operating and monitoring when- and wherever the
process calls for it.
High-quality user interface
The integration into the powerful M1 controller
system is evidence of the kind of performance that
state-of-the art web technologies provide: A flickerfree display is produced even at data update rates of
well under 100 ms and with hundreds of animated
graphic elements. The additional resources that are
required here are minimal.
Item
Item no.
Description
M1 webMI pro RT
00022839-63
Licenses to operate the M1 webMI Pro on one controller CPU.
Deployment of dynamized web pages (HTML, SVG) via the
integrated web server to display on modern browser-enabled
devices. Data coupling to SVI and IO channels locally, simple
alarm handling and archiving value directly to the controller
system. Engineering with ativse Builder and SolutionCenter.
M1 webMI pro AMT
00022839-70
One year of product support per company location and
registered support user.
M1 webMI pro Starter
00022846-00
Combination package of 10 Runtime Licenses M1 webMI Pro,
basic training M1 webMI Pro for up to 8 people, advanced
training M1 webMI pro for up to 4 people. One Year of product
support and updates delivery are included in this package
(Annual Maintenance).
(Can only be ordered once per company, only one date per
training, prices for training location Feldkirch/A or Bochum/D
otherwise extra travel expenses are added).
391
M1 webMI pro
When viewing an M1 webMI pro visualization
page, the singular advantages of HTML5 and SVG
(Scalable Vector Graphics), the basis of all graphic
objects, become immediately apparent. Perfect
graphic results are achieved with zero loss of
quality when scaling and zooming.
Unique chart functions
The integration of the Scope 3 software oscilloscope
makes some unique functions available for this area.
Firstly, data can be recorded on the controller in real
time (up to 100 microsecond sampling rate) and
displayed directly in a graph in the visualization.
Secondly, it is also possible to load large data
archives with a time scan and navigate in these
recordings. In mixed operation it is possible to
display both the archive data and the live data.
Ready-to-use components in the visualization
simplify the use of these functions and adapt them
to the requirements at hand. The controller is
provided with a programming library for the general
use of this data, thus enabling any user to create
their own user interface components for visualizing
the data.
392
All major HMI functions on board
Thanks to fully-graphic planning incl.
dynamization of the objects depicted, the creation
of visualizations is easy and possible without
programming knowledge. Here all functions of a
modern HMI solution such as alarming, journaling,
trending, user administration, and multilinguality
are supported. Special requirements of the HMI
can be implemented via client-slide Java scripts,
there are practically no limits to the possibilities.
•Directly integrated in the controller
•Client-server architecture (multi-client)
•User interface in pure Web technology
•Device and operating system-independent
(HTML5, SVG) PC/Mac/Unix, tablet, smartphone,
iPad etc.*
•Alarming and journaling of variables
•Graphic trend display
•Online language/font switchover
•User administration & access security
•Client-side Java Script
* Current browser compatibility list can be called
up at www.atvise.com
M1 webMI pro
Client
Client
Client
Client
Ethernet/Internet
PLC
M1 webMI pro
M1 webMI pro
Server
Installation
Web server as a software module directly on the M1 controller via
SolutionCenter
Parallel Operation
Yes, multiple visualizations can be run on several TCP interfaces
Sampling interval
Server monitors the process variables in a cycle of 50 to 5000 ms
Access security/Security
Yes (AccessControl of the M1, HTTPS with SSL encryption)
Server time stamp
Yes
Alarm system
Alarms on variables incl. persistence of the alarm status
Archiving
Archiving of the process values on the controller, configuration of the
sample intervals via archive groups, up to 100.000 data points can be
stored in the database
User Administration
Yes (rights, groups, users)
Functional expansions
Yes, M1 applications can provide data for processing in the HMI
393
M1 webMI pro
M1 webMI pro
Client
Installation
No installation necessary
Technology process images
HTML, SVG, Java Script
Number of clients
Up to 16 clients at the same time
Zooming
Yes, continuously without quality loss
Scaling
Yes (automatic adaptation of the resolution on the target device)
without additional engineering effort
Vector graphics
Yes (all components of the HMI are SVGs)
Trend
Yes (live trending and historical data views are possible)
Operation
Mouse or other pointing device
Keyboard (hotkeys can be configured)
Touchscreen, Multitouch**
Multilingual
Yes (online)
Font switching
Yes (online)
Fonts
Any (including Asian-language characters, Cyrillic etc.)
Embedding of external contents
Yes (everything that runs in the Web browser: HTML, video, audio,
VRML/3D chat etc.)*
Functional expansions
Total flexibility through Java Script (client-side)
Application interface (controller side)
Configuration/Engineering
Variable integration
Variables can be read in directly from the M1 controller
Fully-graphic process image editor
Yes (integrated into atvise builder)
Program editor
Yes (integrated Java Script editor in atvise builder)
Page editor
Yes (integrated HTML source editor in atvise builder)
Graphic objects
Primitive: line, polygon, shape (any), rectangle, ellipse, bezier curve etc.
Widgets: label, text field, table, trend etc.
Object library
Yes, extensive catalog of pre-configured standard objects in pure
­vector graphic (adaptable, expandable) contains among other things
bar graphs, tacho/gauges, tanks, engines and much more
Graphic incorporation
SVG (and all other according to W3C) as well as pixel graphics (PNG,
JPG etc.)
Animation types
Text, value, frame color, background color, text color, visibility,
­operability, size x/y, position x/y, rotation, blinking, distortion etc.
Graphic options
Any shapes & sectors, roundings, simple and complex color
­processes, transparency, semi-transparency (alpha blending),
­rotation, shading, transformation/change of existing SVG graphics
Interface to the server
HTTP(S), FTP(S)
Import/Export
XML (customer-specific expansions feasible)
* Current browser compatibility list can be called up at www.atvise.com.
** Multi-touch dependent on device functionality, operating system and browser version
394
M1 webMI pro
M1 webMI pro
Scope 3 Integration***
Installation
Scope V3.02 or higher on the M1
Ready-to-use displays
Yes
Graph component, online configurator of the display, various
interaction elements available
Data volume / limits
Unlimited, depending on hardware used (M1 and HMI device)
Display types
Live, Mixed and Archive mode as well as scans across several data
recorders possible
Controller data recorder
Yes, commands can be sent to the data recorder via Javascript library
Proprietary UI components
The data from Scope 3 can be used in UI components (e. g. tables,
other chart types, data processing).
System prerequisites
Clients
Commercially available browser only*
Server
All M1 CPUs except ME203 (MH2xx, MC2xx, MPC2xx, MX2xx)
with at least M-Base 3.85
Variants
M1 webMI pro RT
Licenses to operate the M1 webMI Pro on one controller CPU.
Deployment of dynamized web pages (HTML, SVG) via the integrated
web server to display on modern browser-enabled devices. Data
coupling to SVI and IO channels locally, simple alarm handling and
archiving value directly to the controller system. Engineering with
ativse Builder and SolutionCenter.
M1 webMI pro AMT
One year of product support per company location and registered
support user.
M1 webMI pro Starter
Combination package of 10 Runtime Licenses M1 webMI Pro, basic
training M1 webMI Pro for up to 8 people, advanced training M1
webMI pro for up to 4 people. One Year of product support and
updates delivery are included in this package (Annual Maintenance).
(Can only be ordered once per company, only one date per training,
prices for training location Feldkirch/A or Bochum/D otherwise extra
travel expenses are added).
* Current browser compatibility list can be called up at www.atvise.com.
** Multi-touch dependent on device functionality, operating system and browser version
*** See Scope 3 product sheet for detailed information on the functions
395
Visualization
Greater transparency and flexibility in process visualization
The clear and understandable presentation
of process and machine information, as
well fully intuitive interaction are the
center of the visualization software from
Bachmann electronic.
In order to provide these characteristics,
not only locally on the machine, but
also in a distributed manner on the
intranet / Internet, the latest generation
of the Bachmann software is based on Java
and web technologies.
This offers independence from devices
and operating systems and saves time, as
well as maintenance costs. The provided
»ready-to-use« functions,
the available libraries and components, and
the extraordinary suitability
of Java for visualization tasks reduce
engineering effort of the applications.
M-JVIS, M-JSYS Tool Library
Features
Tool library for Java visualizations
Management of process variables and their values
Language management / switchover
Alarm handling
Quality table
Communication to the controller (RPC, FTP, Vis)
Basis of M1 software modules
Monitoring the communication
396
Visualization
M-JVIS, M-JSYS
Tool Library
M-JVIS and M-JSYS are libraries for creation of
visualizations under Java that can be used platformindependently on Java-capable devices. The
components are based on Java version 1.1.8. This
version is supported by the VM (virtual machine) from
Bachmann electronic.
M-JVIS consists of the following packages:
•M-JVIS / DACC
•M-JVIS / UTIL
•M-JVIS / GUI
The packages are divided into two types
of classes:
•Configuration classes that are implemented
in the form of beans
•Runtime classes that allow a dynamic
configuration and during runtime handle
the management or presentation of the data
The configurations of all objects are
stored in XML files.
397
Visualization
M-JVIS / DACC
The M-JVIS / DACC package manages
process variables and their values
(DACC = Data Access).
M-JVIS / GUI
The M-JVIS / GUI contains the graphic components
The graphic components are based on AWT.
M-JVIS / DACC consists of the following
components:
•Process variable management
•Recipe management
•Unit switchover
•Communication interface
M-JVIS / GUI consists of the following components:
•XY diagram
•Table
•Tree view
•Screen keyboard
•Input fields
•Button
M-JVIS / UTIL
The M-JVIS / UTIL package consists of the
following components:
•Language management / language switchover
•Protocols
•Alarm handling
•Quality table / statistical process control
M-JSYS
The M-JSYS package allows general access to the
control system.
•Read-out and change of the controller
configuration
•RPCs for control
•Access to system software modules
Web-Start / browser
M-JVIS / GUI
XY-diagram
Buttons
Table
Input error
Tree-view
Screen
keyboard
Visualization
M-JVIS / DACC
M-JVIS / UTIL
Process
variable
management
Units
conversion
M1-proxy
Communic­
ation
interface
Recipe
management
Alarm
handling
Quality stab. /
stat. process
control
Logging
Language
switchover
Visualization device
M1 controller
M-SYS
398
Visualization
399
400
Standardized. Special. Overlapping.
Motion Control –
standardized drive control
The requirements imposed on modern drive technology are becoming ever
more specialized, and not rarely are mechanical engineers confronted with
special requests or special regulations from the customer side. Even with
the most modern machines, with the most innovative drives, special drive
solutions are still requested. No problem for Bachmann electronic: With
the M1 automation system, drive controllers can be selected with complete
independence from the drive type.
Building on the IEC 61800-7 standard, an open and universal interface to
the drive technology is implemented in the M1 automation system, with the
name »Drive Middleware«. Drive Middleware takes over the translation from
the logical drive with a manufacturer-independent, standardized drive profile
on the respective physical drive.
The Drive Middleware interface permits selection of a drive that is perfectly
matched to the respective requirements. In this regard the fieldbus
technology (CANopen, EtherCAT, SERCOS, PROFINET etc.) or the product line
of the drive manufacturer are irrelevant. Thanks to fieldbus-independence
with concurrent standardization of the fieldbus profiles, the finished Motion
Control applications can be implemented in the shortest time possible and
the training/maintenance costs of the various drive worlds are significantly
reduced. At Bachmann electronic, perfect solutions for every request are just
part of the standard.
401
Control
Professional motion guidance for individual requirements.
With expert know-how gained through
years of experience in the area of control
and system technology, Bachmann
electronic is indisputably one of the
leading providers of special solutions
in the industry. This knowledge and
the associated technology does not
necessarily have to be worked out by each
company itself. Customers and partners of
Bachmann electronic can rely on proven
and highly-optimized software controllers
for a wide variety of applications. Thus
years of development work can be
embedded as a finished, configurable
module in your own application.
Extensive libraries for C or
M-SMC
Software Motion
Control
Features
Software module for regulating
the speed and / or position
of motion axes
Combined actuator / controller
operation
Master / slave operation
for parallel guided motions
Convenient commissioning
via monitor
Library for IEC 61131-3
PLC programs
402
IEC61131-3 encapsulate the functionality
and guarantee standardized access
from the application program. Naturally
all controller modules from Bachmann
electronic support SVI communication
(Standard Variable Interface), as well as
the synchronizing function »Sync« of the
M1 system family. Commissioning and
diagnostic tools with graphic interface
designed by experienced users additionally
facilitate use. The palette of freely usable
components extends from simple motion
control of multiple axes, to CNC and
shaft controllers, to special modules for
demanding temperature applications.
M-CNC
Three-dimensional
motions
Features
Path motion for Cartesian
3-axis system
Profile specification in accordance
with DIN 66025 (program structure
of numerically-controlled axes)
Interfaces (analog, incremental,
fieldbus, etc.)
Configuration and diagnostics
via Device Manager
Commissioning interface
(CNC monitor)
Library for IEC 61131-3 PLC
programs
Control
M-SHAFT
Shaft controller
Features
Software module that simulates
a virtual shaft from 0° to 360°
Cyclic and synchronous regulation
of 32-axes
Speed of the shaft can be changed
in running operation
Independent master operation or
can be synchronized as slave
Convenient axis commissioning
via monitor
Drive Middleware
Features
Uniform, fieldbus-independent
programming of motion
applications in accordance
with IEC 61800-7
Full integration in the Bachmann
SolutionCenter
Easy addition of new,
supplemental drives
Position control, speed control,
and torque control are integrated
Easy management of the drive
parameters
M-TEMP
Temperature controller
Features
Temperature control software
for universal implementation
Modes: Actuator or controller
(2-3 point)
Automatic parameter assignment
(learn function)
Heating power monitoring
Sensor failure detection
For heating sections, cooling
sections, and combined sections
403
Control
M-SMC
Software Motion Control
Software module for regulating the speed and / or position of motion axes Based on a simple
configuration a wide variety of options or modes of
regulation can be selected.
•Configuration as speed controller, position controller,
or underlying speed controller (cascade control)
•Combined actuator / controller operation
•Master / slave operation for parallel guided motions
•Specification of speed, accelerations, delays and the
target position to be approached
•Specification of position tolerance window and
tolerance monitoring time (settling time)
•Sampling times: min. 200 µs, in 100 µs increments
•Easy application through FUB interface for PLC
programs
•Commissioning interface
404
Control
Features
•Up to 16 freely configurable axes
per SMC module can be defined
•Software module can be loaded multiple times
•Free configuration of the hardware input and
output signals via Device Manager
•»Controller enable« signal (output),
»controller ready« signal (input)
•Master slave relationship between axes
•Flying saw
•Online switchover from speed
to position specification
•Online change of the controller parameters
•Change of target position or speed during travel
•Selection of different pre-defined referencing
methods is possible
•Reversing operation with teach function for
controller adjustment
•Integrated drag error monitor with various
response methods and status output
•Monitoring of software limit switches
•Monitoring of hardware limit switches
Visualization
•PLC function library
•Software module available for all M1 processor
modules
•Easy integration of visualization systems through
disclosure of the parameter interfaces and
addressing via symbolic variables
•Different methods of interpolation for position,
speed and acceleration
•Configurable PID controller structure with
FeedForward
•Different methods for implementing master/
slave applications
•Support of fieldbus systems (CAN, SERCOS,
EtherCAT)
•Easy commissioning through the Windows
interface SMC monitor
•Test function for determination of the section
parameters
SMC monitor
M1 controller
Speed
Application
(PLC / C)
Manipulated variable
Position
M-SMC
Motion unit
ENC
M
T
405
Control
M-SHAFT
Shaft controller
M-SHAFT is a software module that simulates
a virtual shaft that turns from 0° to 360°. Different
axis types can be synchronized on this shaft.
M-SHAFT is ideally suited for machines with a
cyclically recurring sequence, such as packaging
machines, processing machines, etc.
•Speed (rpm) of the shaft can be changed in running
operation
•Independent master operation or can be
synchronized as slave
•Up to 32 axes per software module can be
synchronized to the shaft
•Step up / step down ratio for each axis can be freely
selected
•Axes can be switched on and off in running
operation
•End position monitor and dead time compensation
for digital axes
•Offline collision monitoring of the axes
•Convenient commissioning tool M-SHAFT monitor
406
Control
Profile specification
•Offline or online profile specification for each
axis is possible
•Profile specification via an external file is
possible (up to 360 interpolation points)
•Profile calculation online in the production cycle
without stop (online interpolation)
•Free selection of the type of interpolation
between the interpolation points
•Interpolation types: Linear, sinoid, sinus2,
modified sinus, spline, trapeze, Bestehorn,
polygon 6th degree, temporal, ext. signal
Table interpreter
•Profile calculation for minimal cycle times via
table interpreter
•Record by record position-oriented consideration
of profiles (similar to CNC)
•CNC commands (F, W, X, E, T)
•Loop command for automatic repetitions of
specific table columns
•Input of tables via M-SHAFT monitor
Axis types
•Regulated, absolute
(absolute coordinates, e. g. lift cylinder)
•Regulated, relative
(relative coordinates, e. g. feed)
•Analog
(analog manipulated variable, e. g. -10 to +10 V)
•Digital (e. g. pneumatic ejector, press)
•Multi-cam (16 digital cams per axis)
Summary – features
•Configurable and parameter-assignable software
module
•All options can be configured via software
(number of axes, axis type, I / Os etc.)
•Fast commissioning via graphic presentation of
all datasets
•High product quality through high repeatability
•Short set-up times through omission of
mechanical switch cams
•Simplified mechanics through independent drives
•Software module can be instanced
407
Control
M-CNC
Three-dimensional motions
M-CNC is a software module for path control of threedimensional motions with three axes in Cartesian
arrangement. Motions are specified in accordance
with DIN 66025.
•Path motion for Cartesian 3-axis system
•Profile specification in accordance with DIN 66025
(program structure of numerically-controlled axes)
•Configuration and diagnostics via Device Manager
•Commissioning interface (CNC monitor)
•Library for IEC 61131-3 PLC programs
408
Control
Functions
•Genuine 3-axis CNC controller
•Circle segments and straight lines user-defined
in space
•Point control behavior (PTP travel)
•Straight line interpolation (path)
•Circle interpolation (clockwise / counterclockwise)
•Predefined dwell time
•Tool path corrections:
•Tool corrections:
•Reference point travel
•Referencing (various methods)
•Multiple instances of the module are possible
•Different methods for area monitoring at
calculation and execution
•Several methods of interpolation for position,
speed, acceleration of single axis
Visualization
Special functions
•Fast and direct setting of outputs from M-CNC
•Single-axle travel
•Teaching of axes / positions
•Cascading with speed controller (M-SMC)
•ActiveX element for Visual Basic, Visual C and
Delphi
•Commissioning monitor for efficient graphic user
guidance
CNC monitor
M1 controller
Speed
Application
(PLC / C)
Actuating variable
Position
M-CNC
Motion unit
409
Control
Drive Middleware
Investment security
The investment in a motion application is not lost if
there is a change in the drive supplier.
Learning effort is reduced
The different drive profiles, such as SERCOS,
ProfiDRIVE, and DS402 have their own state
machines, error routines, and parameter
designations. Through standardization in accordance,
the training effort and the complexity of drive
solutions is reduced.
Drive-independence for coordinated axis
motions
Multi-axis applications, as they are realized
with M-SMC, M-SHAFT, etc. can be implemented
independently of the fieldbus profiles of the individual
drives.
Features
•Uniform, fieldbus-independent programming of
motion applications in accordance
•Full integration in the Bachmann SolutionCenter
•Connection to motion applications for multi-axis
applications is already integrated
•Easy addition of new, supplemental drives
•Cyclical and non-cyclical communication is possible
•Referencing methods in accordance with DS402 are
integrated
410
Control
User applications (PLC, C/C+)
Motion Control
M-SMC
Positioning/
Gantry
M-SHAFT
Camming
Gearing
M-CNC
DIN66025
Motion
IEC 61800-7
<xml
Drive dependent
Drive
Descriptions
Drive Middleware
...
*
* on request
Drives
411
Control
M-TEMP
Temperature controller
M-TEMP is a software module of the M1 controller for
monitoring and regulating temperature-dependent
processes. To achieve an optimal adaptation to the
controlled system, all control parameters can also be
changed during operation.
•Temperature control software for universal
implementation
•Modes: Actuator or controller
•Automatic parameter assignment (learn function)
•Integrated adaptive setpoint filtering
•Temperature range -200 to +1400 °C
Visualization
M1 controller
M-TEMP
412
Application
(PLC / C / …)
Control
Features
•Fast commissioning via graphic user interface
•User-defined changing between actuator and
controller operation
•Heating and cooling path control with one
controller is possible
•Setpoint change during operation is possible
(setpoint function)
•Suppression of vibrations in the event of major
setpoint changes, through adaptive setpoint
filtering
•Change of all control parameters is possible
during operation
•Possibility of autonomous determination of the
control parameters
•Precise determination of the target temperature
and process monitoring functions
•Versatile possibilities for data input and output
•Automatic generation of a cleaning pulse for
analog cooling controllers
•Conventional and user-defined temperature units
are possible
•Detection of sensor break
•Detection of defective power switches
•Current measurement function
•PLC function library
•Maximum of 9 controller systems, each with up
to 127 controllers
•Controller sample time 20 ms to 30 min
•Pulse width modulation periods from 20 ms to
30 min
•Temperature resolution 1 / 100 °C
Possible functions
•Heating controller
•Cooling controller
•Three-state controllers (combined heating
and cooling section)
Process monitoring functions
•Tolerance band monitoring
•Increase monitoring
•Heating power monitoring
•Heating current monitoring
Actual value acquisition via
•AIO288 (Pt100 sensor)
•TCO2xx-C (thermal element)
•DA3284-C (Pt100, Pt1000)
•PTAI216 (Pt100 sensor)
•SVI interface (external)
Manipulated variable to
•AIO288, AO204 (analog value 0 to 10 V)
•TCO2xx-C, DO2xx, DIO2xx, DIO2xx-C,
DA3284-C (digital output with pulse width
modulation)
SVI interface
• External, e. g. for a different task
413
Planning. Detecting. Preventing.
CMS – Condition Monitoring System
The annual revenue of a production plant is significantly determined by its
reliability. Particularly for difficult to reach plants and plants that can only be
reached under specific conditions, such as offshore wind turbines, focused
planning of maintenance is necessary. A Condition Monitoring System (CMS)
integrated in the automation system can provide all information, in order
to detect failure hazards early on and plan maintenance tasks in good time.
Thus the costs for spare parts and maintenance can be minimized and
downtimes can be significantly reduced.
The Condition Monitoring System from Bachmann electronic is the first
integrated controller-integrated solution worldwide to be certified by
Germanischer Lloyd. For the first time, complete recording, analysis and
evaluation can be executed parallel to the controller program.
The model of the AIC212 CMS module of the M1 automation system from
Bachmann offers high-resolution vibration measuring inputs for signalcorrelated capture of a wide variety of measuring points.
Condition monitoring is based on the continuous or regular acquisition of the
machine condition by measuring and analyzing meaningful physical variables
(e.g. vibration, temperature, condition of lubricant).
A CMS that is built with the Bachmann M1 system benefits from its versatile
communication and service interfaces and also reduces the training period
of the operating and maintenance personnel. Secure web technologies
also enable defined access to the full system or to individual parts of the
plant from the outside. Thus data is accessible at all times for operators
and maintenance personnel, so that optimal process control and power
generation are ensured.
CERTIFICATE NO. TC-GL-002A-2014, Rev.1
415
Condition Monitoring
More control, fewer outages
The operational availability of modern
machines and plants requires a
comprehensive maintenance and
service concept as well as a consistent
design. Due to the high costs of failure,
heavy mechanical elements for power
transmission (power trains, gears, prime
movers) and bearings in particular place
considerable pressures on manufacturers
and operators. A continuous and if possible
automatic monitoring of the mechanical
systems is the ideal solution. The condition
of the equipment (wear and damage)
can be monitored and maintenance
and service can be timely scheduled
to ensure maximum operability. Within
the framework of Condition Monitoring,
in addition to numerous well-known
indicators, such as temperature, current
consumption or load selective operating
hour acquisition, vibration analyses in the
frequency range, in particular, has proven
to be an effective output variable.
Vibration Sensor
Input Module AIC212
Features
Number of inputs: 12 analog inputs
(9 inputs with IEPE interface for Piezo vibration
sensors and 3 inputs with ±10 V)
Resolution: >17 bit
Dynamics: >95 dB
Sampling rate up to 50 kHz, adjustable
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ω-Guard®
Stand-alone Solution
Features
12 analog inputs
PLC-independent CMS
Fixing with mounting feet,
direct mounting or magnets
416
Remote Service via
WebLog Expert
Features
Client-based »WebLog ­Expert«
software for
remote diagnostics
Condition Monitoring
Ω-Guard®
TopBox-integrated Solution
Features
12 analog inputs
PLC-independent CMS
Installation in existing control ­cabinet
Ω-Guard®
Fully Integrated Solution
Features
12 analog inputs
PLC-independent CMS
Installation in existing control ­cabinet
Acceleration Sensors
BAM100 / BAM500
Features
Robust design
Connection via ICP inputs
of the AIC212
Hermetically sealed
Corrosion resistant
Insulated housing
µ-bridge
Sensor
Features
IEPE standard
Operating current: 4 to 10 mA
Surge protection: Imax = 16 mA
Output voltage (offset)
11 ± 0.5 V
Max. saturation degree 8V
417
Condition Monitoring
Vibration Sensor
Input Module AIC212
The M1 automation system's AIC212 module offers up
to nine vibration measuring inputs for high resolution,
signal correlated monitoring of different measuring
points. Three signal inputs with a standard signal
level of ±10 V and a position transducer input provide
consistent acquisition of other relevant variables
and the angle or position relation of the mechanics.
Thanks to the embedding in the M1 system analyses
can also directly consider any other signals or
variables of the entire controller composite (e. g.
current performance, operating condition), doubling
the sensor system.
The AIC212 module has its own integrated working
memory to record time series of signal profiles for up
to 50 kilo samples / second – which is far below the
controller cycle time. The evaluation is carried out
in the well established M1 CPU modules in the form
of CMS application programs that can operate as
required with static processes, frequency or location
analyses. The measuring data is also provided as
channel values in the cycle of controller programs as
directly recorded online variables.
Item AIC212
AIC212/R
418
Item no.
00014151-00
00022811-00
Condition Monitoring
Alarm, service information
or external analysis
M1-CPU
AIC212
AIC212
Results
Analysis
History &
reference
Buffer
memory
Recording
...
...
Sensor signals
As an M1 standard module, the AIC212 allows
implementation of »stand-alone« condition monitoring
as well as use in the various remote or distributed
configurations of the Bachmann automation system.
The use of M1 CPUs for evaluation, logging and
alarming allows such a CMS to benefit from the wide
range of communication and service interfaces and
also reduces the training requirements for start-up
and maintenance personnel.
Instead restricting evaluations through a strictly
prescribed frame, the AIC212 system concept allows
a free design of the Condition Monitoring software
for the particular requirements of the respective
application. Regardless of the implementation
(C/C++, IEC  61131 or MATLAB® / Simulink®) the
recording time sequences of the CPU are available
in memory and enable consistent access via the
location and time specific software. (change to ...
consistent location-specific and time-specific access
through the software. Existing evaluation packages
can be ported to the M1 CPU system (VxWorks® / Intel
x86 compatible processor) since no special solutions
(DSPs, special operating systems) are required.
•12 analog inputs (9 inputs with ICP® interface
for Piezo vibration sensors and 3 inputs with ±10 V)
•Position detection (incremental encoder input
•24 V and A / B / N track or 2 counter inputs
with 24 V for initiators) as 24 V inputs, optional as
RS422/5 V signal inputs (AIC212/R)
•All channels, including position measurement
•(Rotary encoder signal) sampled synchronously
•Analog filter and digital filtering with adjustable
cut-off frequency
•Resolution > 17 bits
•Dynamics > 95 dB
•Sampling rate 50 kHz, adjustable
•Different trigger modes for the recording start
(position / location, IO bus sync etc.)
•High-speed buffer memory directly on the
module
•Access to channel values also synchronous
with application (direct access and process
image for PLC programs)
•Embedding in M1 plant management system
or as autonmous CMS
•Use of any signals of other modules or calculated
variables for evaluation
•Signal base suitable for frequency analysis with /
without location reference
•Several AIC212 modules in one system
simultaneously
•Evaluations can be designed to individual
requirements
•Broad spectrum of usable implementation
technologies (C, C++, MATLAB®/Simulink®)
on the real-time operating system VxWorks®
•Synergy by using fieldbus and service
communication
•Local memory in evaluation CPU: CF card, PC
card
419
Condition Monitoring
AIC212
Analog inputs
Quantity
9
3
AC-coupled ±6 V, ICP interface
Measuring range
±10 V
®
Resolution
> 17 bits
Dynamic
> 95 dB
Scan rate*
Up to 50 kHz per channel adjustable
Frequency range general
0.1 Hz to 20 kHz
Error (full scale) at +25 °C
±0.1 %
Digital filter
Adjustable depending on sampling frequency
Distortion attenuation / distortion factor
THD+N (fSIN_In=1kHz, fSample=50kHz)
LevelIN_from_FullScale= 0 dB
LevelIN_from_FullScale= -20 dB
LevelIN_from_FullScale= -40 dB
< -78 dB
< -68 dB
< -48 dB
Input impedance
200 kOhm
Current source for ICP interface
Cross-talk control range
> 1 MOhm
5 mA / channel
–
+8 to +12 V
±2 V
Error detection
Wire break
Interference voltage strength
-15 to +36 V
Incremental and counter inputs
Interface
AIC212
24 V
initiators / proximity
switch
with 10mA sink
AIC212/R
Incremental 24 V
Incremental RS422
Either one incremental interface or two counter inputs
can be used for proximity switches
Number of channels
2
1
Yes, via green LED
No
Counter frequency
5 kHz
36 kHz
Measured value / resolution
32 Bit
32 Bit
A
A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Display
Input signals
Filter frequency
Programmable
–
Error detection
Error pulse
Phase error
Evaluation
–
1, 2, 4 edge signals & pulse direction mode
Supply
For external sensors: 24 V / 5 V short circuit proof
Galvanic isolation from system
Input impedance, static
3.6 kOhm
≥ 5 kOhm
–
121 Ohm in series
with 1 nF
Low
-34 V < Ue < + 3 V
High
+15 V < Ue < +34 V
According to RS422
standard
AC termination
Input level
500 V
* Frequency bands/fsample:20 kHz / 48 kHz;10 kHz / 24 kHz; 5 kHz / 12 kHz; 2.5 kHz / 6 kHz
420
Condition Monitoring
AIC212
Operating conditions
Power supply
24 V (18 V to 34 V) with reverse polarity protection
Power consumption module
Approx. 9.5 W without encoder supply
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 to 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 to 95 % with condensation
Model variants
AIC212
Analog measuring module for Condition Monitoring; 9x Input ICP; 3x
Input ±10V; 18bit; 0.1%; >95dB dynamic range; 20µs sample time;
1x INC HTL; 36kHz; A,A/B/N; 128MB measured data storage
AIC212/R
Analog measuring module for Condition Monitoring; 9x Input ICP; 3x
Input ±10V; 18bit; 0.1%; >95dB dynamic range; 20μs sample time;
1x INC RS422; 36kHz; A,A/B/N; 128MB measured data storage
Accessories AIC212
Item
Item no.
Description
KZ-AIC212 B+C
00014396-50
Terminal set Phoenix cage clamp (1x KZ 51/02; 4x KZ 35/12) with
labeling strips and coding elements
421
Condition Monitoring
Ω-Guard®
System Variants
With the GL-tested and certified machine diagnostic
system (Condition Monitoring System: CMS)
Ω-Guard® an intelligent monitoring solution without
mechanical moving components (hard disks, fans) is
available for use under harsh ambient conditions.
Stand-alone solution
The hardware and software architecture has been
based on a modular concept. Thus analog and
digital inputs and outputs can be flexibly configured.
Ω-Guard® in particular has extensive self-test
possibilities that enable a detailed function check
of the CMS. Script-oriented software enables easy
adaptation to different monitoring tasks with due
consideration of the special requirements imposed on
technical plant management.
The following characteristics of this CMS
must be particularly highlighted:
•Modularity
•Future compatibility (inclusion many additional
measured values is possible)
•Extensive temperature range
•Robust relative to environmental influences
•Watchdog monitoring
•Client-based »WebLog E
­ xpert« software for remote
diagnostics
TopBox-integrated solution
Item Ω-Guard®
Stand-alone solution
Ω-Guard®
TopBox-integrated solution
Ω-Guard®
Fully integrated solution
Fully integrated solution
422
Item no.
00022367-00
00022370-00
00022373-10
Condition Monitoring
Ω-Guard®
Analog measurement channels
Number of channels
12 analog inputs (9 inputs with IEPE interface
for piezo vibration sensors and 3x ±10 V inputs)
Sampling rate
Up to 50 kHz, all channels including position detection
(encoder signal) scanned synchronously
Measuring range
IEPE standard, current (4 to 20 mA), voltage (±10 V)
Error detection
Cable break, interference pulse, phase error
CPU unit
Interfaces
Ethernet, FASTBUS
Communication
LAN, GRPS, Modem
Housing / power supply
Type
Wall mounting, fixing feet mounting, mounting with magnets
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions
380 mm x 380 mm x 210 mm (Stand-alone solution)
Sensor supply
IEPE
4 mA
External operating voltage
For external sensors: 24 V / 5 V short-circuit-proof
Power supply
Multi-voltage power supply
100 to 240 V / 50 to 60 Hz / 50 W
Mechanical environmental conditions
Mechanical class 3M4
EN 60721-3-3
Vibration sinusoidal
EN 60068-2-6 Test level 2 to 9 Hz ±3.5 mm, 9 to 500 Hz 10 m/s
Shock and Continuous shock
EN 60068-2-27 Test level 15 g over 11 ms, all axes
Air pressure environmental conditions
Air pressure
EN 60068-2-13 Test level 106-58 kPa (0 to 4500 m)
Temperature derating
2000 to 4500 m over NN: 0.5 Kelvin (K) pro 100 m height
Galvanic Isolation
AC voltage
EN 60255-5 Test level 500 Veff, 50 Hz, 1 min
Insulation resistance
EN 61557-2
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2
ESD
EN 61000-4-2 Test level 4 kV Contact, 8 kV Air discharge
Electromagnetic field
EN 61000-4-3 Test level 80 MHz to 3 GHz, 10 V/m, 80 %AM
Burst
EN 61000-4-4 Test level 2 kV supplies, 1 kV interfaces > 3 m
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Test level 500 V supplies, 1 kV interfaces > 30 m
Conducted HF
EN 61000-4-6 Test level 150 kHz to 80 MHz, 10 V, 80 %AM
Magnetic field
EN 61000-4-8 Test level 100 A/m, 50/60 Hz
Pulsed magnetic field
EN 61000-4-9 Test level 1000 A/m, 50/60 Hz
Voltage dips, short interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Test level 100 % 20 ms, 60 % 200 ms, 30 % 0,5 s
423
Condition Monitoring
Ω-Guard®
EMC Emission EN 61000-6-4
Radiated emission
CISPR 16-2-3
Conducted emission
CISPR 16-1-1/2
Current emission
CISPR 22
Harmonic current emissions
EN 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flicker
EN 61000-3-3
Temperature parameters
Cold test
EN 60068-2-1 Test level -25 °C @16 h
Dry heat test
EN 60068-2-2 Test level +60 °C @16 h
Change of temperature
EN 60068-2-14 Test level 3 K/min
Operating temperature
-25 to +55 °C
Storage temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Humidity parameters
Damp heat, steady state
Damp heat, cyclic*
EN 60068-2-30 Test level 25, 55 °C/95 %RTH @48 h
Damp heat, cyclic*
EN 60068-2-38 Test level -25, 55 °C/95 %RTH @48 h
* Only possible with ColdClimate ( ) units.
424
EN 60068-2-78 Test level 40 °C/95 %RTH @16 h
Condition Monitoring
Remote Service
via WebLog Expert
Client-based »WebLog ­Expert« software for
remote diagnostics
The success of a condition monitoring system
is closely linked to correct installation,
parameterization and commissioning, as well as
rapid and correct reaction to reported changes
of status. Our experts accordingly handle all
concerns on-site, even training and orientation of
customer personnel. Our modern teleservice for
distributed applications includes online monitoring
over a secure Internet connection and thus is
available worldwide. Currently we monitor far
more than 2.000 Condition Monitoring systems
via Internet. In this regard the power range of
the systems extends from 250 kW to 5 MW. We
developed the »WebLog Expert« portal new for
this. It serves as an interface to the diagnostic
system and enables worldwide access to the
status data of the monitored plants. Alarm
messages are signaled to the users via a status
window.
Simultaneously a trend analysis of the state of
the machine can be executed via the integrated
database. The »WebLog Expert« software solution
that can be implemented universally is the
foundation for the worldwide telediagnostics and
early error detection for distributed machines and
plants.
Communication and analyses are based on
progressive web-based and database-based
technologies. Through its scalability and
modularity »WebLog Expert« permits secure
adaptation and fast configuration for solving
all tasks, extending to demanding tasks in the
condition monitoring area in various industries
(particularly wind energy, biogas, shipping
industry, etc.) Thus »WebLog Expert« is the basis
for use of many Condition Monitoring systems
that can be installed immediately in the original
equipment with the »M1« controller by the OEM
on the same bus system, or that are available for
retrofitting of machines and plants.
•Password protected access
•On the start page all current error messages are
displayed
•Visualization of the detailed diagnostic results
for each measurement point
•Expert tools for fault diagnosis
425
Condition Monitoring
Acceleration Sensors
BAM100 / BAM500
The tried and tested acceleration sensors are provided
with an extremely robust housing, a hermetic sealing
and an insulated housing and are thus proven even
for demanding ambient conditions. Their minimally
invasive mounting on the object as well compact
dimensions make them suitable for difficult to access
measuring points.
The piezo vibration sensors offer a sensitive response
to the smallest accelerations and are connected via
the IPC inputs of the AIC212. The BAM100 sensor is
suitable for fast rotating m
­ achine areas. The more
sensitive BAM500 sensor is used for slow rotating
areas.
Item
BAM100
BAM500
Acceleration sensor
Item no.
00020455-00
00020456-00
BAM100
BAM500
Technical data
Sensitivity
100 mV/g
500 mV/g
Output
ICP®-compatible
Sensor connection
Measuring range
Acceleration range
M12
0.5/0.2 Hz to 14 kHz
VDC >25 V
80 g maximum
Amplitude nonlinearity
Frequency response
Resonance frequency
426
VDC >22 V
10 g maximum
1%
± 3 dB
0.5 Hz to 14 kHz
± 3 dB
0.2 Hz to 14 kHz
30 kHz
Operating voltage
18 to 30 VDC
Operating current
2 to 10 mA
Condition Monitoring
µ-bridge Sensor
We developed the »μ-bridge« sensor to capture
sound waves and flexural vibrations in machines and
plants (e.g. on components, solid bodies, etc.). The
structure-borne sound waves emitted by machine
parts are characteristic for the wear status of a part.
For the µ-bridge sensor the force of the sound wave
is converted to a measurement voltage without a
detour through a spring mass damper system. This
even makes it possible to detect structure-borne
sound waves and flexural vibrations at frequencies
from 10 kHz to under 1 Hz with high resolution and
bandwidth; this means that the sensor is particularly
well suited for measurements on slowly rotating or
vibrating parts.
Item µ-bridge
Item no.
00019918-00
µ-bridge
Technical data
Operating mode
IEPE standard
Operating current
4 to 10 mA
Output voltage (offset)
11 ±0.5 V
Max. saturation degree
8V
Sensitivity
0.7 V/N
Signal-to-noise ratio
-83 dB
Carrier-to-interference ratio
-79 dB
Low limit frequency
High pass 1st order, ƒg = 1.6 Hz
High limit frequency
ƒg > 10 kHz
427
Fast. Flexible. Future-proved.
Branch-specific solutions
Bachmann offers sophisticated automation solutions to its customers
worldwide in a wide range of application areas. Setting new standards,
thinking ahead, as well as responding quickly and flexibly to new challenges
– these are the tasks to which we are committed in securing the critical
competitive edge for our customers. All our activities are focused on the
benefit to the customer: We deliver tailored solutions and set ourselves
the highest standards. The independence we have in development and
production enables us to tackle specific market and customer requirements
with passion and commitment every day.
Our broad and modular product range meets really every customer
requirement. We provide you with a homogeneous and holistic system
solution that also ensures a high level of availability and is future proof. We
offer you everything from a single source and at the highest quality. Our
automation systems stand out on account of their extraordinary robustness,
high performance and open interfaces. The latest and most innovative
platform for your branch specific requirements.
429
Branch-specific solutions
Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
The WTE software package is tailored to the
requirements of manufacturers and control
system developers of wind turbines, and helps to
considerably reduce the time required for developing
and commissioning the controller software and the
visualization. Bachmann’s Wind Turbine Essentials
cover many standard tasks required for the
automation of wind turbines.
The configurator of the WTE toolset is integrated into
the Engineering Suite SolutionCenter and enables the
structured configuration of the event system, user
roles and access rights, data sampling with long-term
recording and statistical processing. A visualization
for developers and customers is created in parallel
with the data configuration.
The runtime components execute the event system,
sample data values, send alarm messages and
check passwords of users. The complete logging of
all events and user operations is secured by the M1
system features.
A visualization is offered both for a PC with mouse
operation and for a panel with touch screen (OT) in
optimal resolution. The visualization offers access
to process data which can be arranged in arbitrary
groups with freely selectable physical units and
description texts in any language or character
set. The PC visu contains additionally graphical
components for snapshots and long-term trends as
well as power curve and wind rose diagrams.
The software developer can additionally use the WTE
features in his own code because most features are
also delivered in program libraries for IEC61131-3
(M-PLC) und C/C++.
For user management and access control, WTE
contains also a dedicated login-checker and a tool to
generate passwords.
Item
WTE SDK (DVD for installation)
WTE Admin Tool
(DVD for installation)
WTE Company Licence WTE Runtime Licence
430
Item no.
00022097-00
00022098-00
00022097-60
00022097-63
Branch-specific solutions
•Configuring instead of programming
•Readable, comparable, extensible project format
•High performance in execution of vast event
configurations
•Setting and resetting events automatically from
variable value or from user program
•Individual configurable time delay for setting and
resetting events and for power-up
•Freely configurable reactions to events
•Complete logging with high-resolution time stamps
•Standardized power curve created with a few mouse
clicks
Configure
WTE
Deploy
Execute
WTE.m
M1
settings
Configurator
Plug-in for SC
•Numerous statistical functions with automatic
data sampling and graphical display in
visualization
•Flexible assignment of user access rights
depending on login name and password
•Ready-to-use visualization is created by
configuration
•Arbitrary grouping of monitor- and parameter
values
•Arbitrary language and character sets for
description texts
•Extensive program libraries for customer specific
extensions
Project.zip
Visu
settings
Monitor
Implement
Libs for PLC and C
WTE.Visu
Standalone
Software package overview: Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
431
Branch-specific solutions
Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
Configurator
Environment
The configurator is installed as extension to the Bachmann SolutionCenter.
Project handling
Turbine projects are stored without any external dependencies and thus can
be transferred easily from one PC to another.
Workflow
For all parts of the configuration, comfortable table editors with input
assistants are available.
Validation
Immediate check for plausible and complete configuration parameters
User management
Configuration of user roles, assignment of required role to each value.
Required role for reading and writing can differ
Storage format
Project files in readable format enable comparison between versions and
parallel work of different team members
Version control
Tools for version control (SVN, CVS, etc.) can be operated directly from the
project navigator. This assures that always complete projects are stored on
the server.
Import of external models
Project contents like event configuration can also be imported from different
sources as CSV format. Projects of the predecessor product M-WAB can be
imported directly into the WTE configurator
Software modules for the controller
WTE software module
Executable program for the controller, behavior is defined by configuration
project. Executes event system, logging, sampling of production data,
statistical processing, trend- and snapshot-recordings. Supports fail-safe
software update.
WTE alarm handler
Executable program for the controller. Is called in case of an error by the WTE
module for automatic dispatch of E-mail and/or SMS messages. Triggering is
also possible by other application programs. WTE event logs are included as
attachment.
WTE login checker
Executable program for the controller. See User management and access
rights for details
Visualization
432
WTE Visualization
ready-to-use visualization for a Desktop PC with mouse operation, graphical
display of trends, power curve, wind rose. Buttons for turbine commands,
arbitrary grouping of values in tables for numerical display of monitor values,
parameters, event logs and access logs.
Displayed values
Variable values are selected and grouped, then descriptive texts, formats and
physical units are assigned. The visualization displays the values according to
the selected language and the access right of the current user. Both values
of the WTE software module and values of any other process variable on the
controller can be selected.
WTE eVis
visualization optimized for HMI panels with touch screen under Windows or
Linux
Internationalization
Definition of descriptive texts for events, parameters and monitor values
directly in the WTE configurator. Export and import of languages to CSV
format for external translation. Filter for missing translations is available.
Branch-specific solutions
Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
Visualization
Character set
all international character sets are supported, e. g. for Asian, Cyrillic or
Arabic languages
Text representation of
numerical values
status information is commonly stored as numerical values. For these
values it is possible to configure descriptive texts for different languages.
Brand labeling
icons and images can be replaced by manufacturer-specific images
Event system
Event parameters
Events are operational states which are derived from sensor data, from
programmed reactions and from operator input. The complete list of all
events that might occur is the central part of the turbine control program.
Necessary reactions to events, like stopping the turbine, yawing operations
etc. are assigned to events. For each event, a set of the following additional
parameters can be configured:
arbitrary number and type of user-defined event reactions.
Typical are brake, yaw and alarm level.
Creation of follow-up-events on repeated occurrence of another event
within a defined period, e. g. frequent exceeding of a temperature limit
Descriptive name of event in different languages for display in the
visualization
classification in Info, Warning, Error
Possibility to deactivate an event, e. g. during service procedures. Required
user access right for deactivating.
time delay after power up, e. g. to wait for the completion of an average
calculation.
time delay between setting an event and calling the reaction
required user right for resetting events (error acknowledgement)
Setting and resetting events
automatically by variable value
automatically via handler block with hysteresis
via set- and reset-functions of WTE libraries
via reset command of the visu (depends on access right)
Max. number of events
only limited by memory and CPU load
Trends and snapshots
Trends
continuous long-term recording of values for archiving reasons, e. g. for
recording of the turbine’s production data
Snapshots
continuous short-term recording of some selected variable values until a
trigger condition occurs. Then the last few minutes are stored, otherwise
the values are discarded. Typically used for error-analysis with a pre-trigger
condition.
433
Branch-specific solutions
Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
Trends und Snapshots
Storage
File based on the storage media of the controller. Each recording is stored in
one file, the filename contains time and date of the recording. File format is
documented and thus can be parsed also by customer specific tools.
Storage
Selection of available recordings by type and by date and time. The trend
display offers several Y-axes, show/hide curves and measurement cursors
with numerical value display. Trend values can also be shown as table.
Statistical functions
Average calculation
Average calculation of linear and polar values, selectable sample time and
averaging time, with or without calculation of minimum/maximum values and
standard deviation.
State counter
Counts rising edges and duration of on-state, separated output as
day-, year- and total count/duration. Values are shown as variables and are
stored automatically in files. Maximum values for edge count and duration
can be configured, then exceeding the limit can raise a maintenance warning.
Typically used for counting operating hours of aggregates.
Energy counter
Adds up the current power to energy and keeps produced and consumed
energy separated, both are displayed as day-, year- and total values. Results
are displayed in variables and are automatically logged to files.
Power curve
Creates a power curve according to IEC61400-12, selectable with or without
internal average calculation. One type can directly process raw data, the
other expects input data which are already averaged. The WTE Visualization
displays the power curve together with an optional reference curve. It is
possible to keep several power curves on the controller, e. g. to verify the
result of parameter changes
Wind rose
Shows the distribution of wind speed depending on the wind direction. The
WTE visualization has a graphical display of the wind rose.
User management and access rights
Definition of user rights
Creation of a list of user roles in the configurator, then assignment of required
role to a variable.
Required role can be different for Read- and write-access. E. g. reading
of operating hours is possible for everybody, resetting the counter is only
allowed for certain users.
434
Password generator
Separated stand-alone tool to create passwords which are valid for a limited
period between one day and one year.
Login Checker
Executable program for the controller. Derives user rights from login name,
password and date and can limit the access of the user
Access log
Complete logging of all logins and write operations to the controller. Log is
stored on the controller
Branch-specific solutions
Wind Turbine Essentials (WTE)
Programming libraries
Supported languages
The libraries are available with an identical feature set for IEC61131-3
(M-PLC) as *.lib and for C/C++ as *.a
WTE Interface Library
Comfortable interface for communication between user program and WTE
software module, especially for setting/resetting events, retrieving current
state of events, resetting counters, triggering snapshots and start/stop
wind rose and power curve recordings.
WTE Library
Functions and function blocks for statistical data processing, energy- and
state-counters, creation and administration of specific log files
File functions
General features
Fast and resource-saving access to storage media
Automatic creation of a series of files with a configurable maximum size for
each file
Filename contains date and time of last entry which makes sorting in
chronological order easy
Each file contains an optional header with selectable information, e. g.
turbine name, software version etc.
The oldest file can optionally be deleted automatically
Files can optionally be zipped automatically on closing
Supported file formats
CSV with header information and column captions
Binary with header information
Ring file for temporary storage of values
System requirements
Engineering PC
Bachmann SolutionCenter needs to be installed, required version
M-Base 3.80 or better
Controller software
M-Base 3.80 or better
Controller hardware
controller CPU of series MX200, MPC200, MC200 and MH200
Delivery variants
WTE SDK
DVD for installation
Software development Kit contains configurator, runtime components,
libraries and visualization
WTE Admin Tool
DVD for installation
Tool to create manufacturer specific passwords with limited validity period.
Matches the login checker included in WTE
WTE Company Licence
License to use the WTE development tools in the whole company
WTE Runtime Licence
License to use the WTE software module on controller
435
Branch-specific solutions
Wind Power SCADA (WPS)
Based on atvise® scada, with "Wind Power SCADA"
(WPS) Bachmann makes a SCADA system available
for the wind power industry. WPS enables a
comprehensive, and at the same time, detailed view
of the entire wind farm and of an individual wind
turbine.
State-of-the-art technologies
As is the case with atvise® scada, pure web
technology that offers absolute consistency on all
levels for the user, is implemented for WPS. Thanks to
this technology visualization can be operated on any
PC, tablet, or smart phone. Through use of scalable
vector graphics (SVG) an ergonomically favorable
solution is provided for each device level (control
center/park/individual wind turbine).
Item
WPS SDK License
Item no.
00027931-00
Wind Power SCADA (WPS)
Process integration / communication
Protocols
OPC Unified Architecture (UA) data access
IEC 61400-25
Physical connection
Ethernet
Parallel operation
Yes, multiple clients in different technology (PC, tablet, mobile phone)
Project planning
Development environment
atvise® builder
Functionalities
Language switchover
Yes
Data historization
Yes, recorded on M1 controller and SCADA server
Alarm/event log
Yes, recorded on M1 controller and SCADA server
Trending (event-trigger)
Yes, recorded on M1 controller and SCADA server
Wind rose
Yes
User administration
Yes, consistent synchronized administration on SCADA and M1 controller
Access security
User-specific access monitoring and logging/archiving of the accesses
Export function
Yes, Excel, CSV, PDF, and clipboard
Online live trend
Yes
Reporting
Yes
Visualization
Browser
436
HTML5 visualization (Chrome/Firefox/IE/Safari) with SVG graphics
(Scalable Vector Graphics)
Branch-specific solutions
Communication standards
WPS implements communication standards,
such as OPC UA (Unified Architecture) and
IEC 61400‑25. The OPC UA interface integrates
convenient live process data and alarms and it can
be used for historization. Use of data structures in
accordance with IEC 61400-25 standardizes the
process values.
Scalability
WPS maps all relevant plant levels: From the
global view of the region, to the wind farm,
and the individual turbine. Specific information
is displayed for each level, which provides the
user with an overview at any time. If detailed
information is required, the user can quickly and
easily go to the respective level.
The number of levels can be freely configured,
so that smaller units, as well as large wind
farms, can be created in a manner that is clearly
organized and easy to understand. An overview
table provides a fast survey of the entire number
of turbines, the queued alarms, the produced
power, and total energy generated.
WPS – global view
WPS – wind farm view "graphic"
The visualization has a "split screen" mode that
makes it possible to see up to four different views
of different levels at one time. The settings for
the logged in user are stored and are available
automatically at next log-in.
WPS has a presentation mode. Presentation mode
automatically changes screens of the WPS that
can freely configured at a specific time interval.
SCADA functions
WPS makes functionalities available that are
already familiar from atvise® scada, such as
alarm handling, data historization, trending, user
administration, and support of multiple languages.
User administration is transparent and easy to
operate for the user. One login procedure on the
WPS suffices to access an individual turbine.
For this the familiar security standards of the
M1 controller, for which Bachmann is wellknown, are used in the transmission (SSL) and
user administration (groups/level) to prevent
unauthorized access.
WPS – wind farm view "GeoMap"
WPS – turbine detail
437
Branch-specific solutions
An additional active state function ensures that
multiple users do not have concurrent write access
to the system. Active state can be requested via
WPS and the actual access status is presented in a
clear and understandable manner.
Data history, alarms/events and trending are
recorded by the M1 controller and consistently
relayed to WPS so that a comprehensive analysis
(power curve/wind rose/filters) is ensured there. If
the connection to the SCADA server is interrupted,
no data is lost, because it is first stored on the
M1 controller. For the further connection the
data is synchronized with the SCADA server and
historized on the turbine with the time stamp of its
occurrence.
On the data level, the WPS system is subject to the
Bachmann Product „Wind Turbine Template“ (WTT),
which provides the functions cited above.
WPS offers extensive possibilities for analysis of
the recorded data (sorting/filter functions), among
other things, via elements such as power curve,
wind rose or event-triggered snapshots. An online
trend component enables read-out and comparison
of live process data as a trend diagram or table.
The values can be presented in a manner that
extends beyond the wind turbine or the wind farm;
the values can also be historized. The configuration
can be executed online in WPS at any time. As a
start aid, the most prevalent process values of a
wind turbine are pre-configured and can be reached
via a selection box.
WPS – report view
438
In addition, WPS offers a service logbook where
freely entered text can be stored. It is also possible
to store these texts directly when acknowledging
an alarm that has occurred. All entries can also
be edited retroactively and likewise they can be
historized.
Integrated reporting
WPS offers the possibility of creating reports. These
can be created manually for a selected period of
time in WPS, as well as generated automatically
with a prescribed time interval. The reports are
stored on the server as PDF files and they can be
displayed, fully integrated, via the WPS interface.
The report content includes the power curve, wind
distribution, and wind data, as well as availability
and produced energy. An alarm table with all
errors that occurred in the time frame, as well as
an analysis of alarms relative to frequency and
duration of the single alarms, is also included.
The service logbook is also a component of the
report. The report templates can be individually
adapted via a selection of components.
Condition monitoring in accordance with
ISO VDI 3834
The integration of Bachmann CMS is implemented
in WPS in accordance with ISO VDI 3834. An
overview page alerts the user when a lasting
exceeding of the characteristic ISO values has
occurred. In addition, with one click a trend
can be opened that displays the last measured
values recorded. In addition to the experienced
CMS Remote Service, this component is a helpful
indication for the user.
WPS – CMS in accordance with ISO VDI 3834
Branch-specific solutions
Project planning
WPS project planning is done via the tool atvise®
builder. The object structure, created in accordance
with IEC 61400-25, offers the user the simple
possibility of configuring the necessary elements.
As is the case for atvise® scada, the data points
are pulled up for linking by browsing an OPC UA
data source in the atvise® builder. The scripting
functionality, as well as other advantages of the
atvise® builder can likewise be used for WPS
project planning. In this regard, an extensive
library provides a wide variety of pre-fabricated,
wind-specific components.
„Responsive web design“ ensures that the WPS
project must only be created once. Adaptation to
the resolution on the tablet or smart phone occurs
automatically.
Connection to external systems
Via the standardized OPC UA interface it is possible
to integrate external controller systems that are
based on the IEC 61400-25 data model, directly
into the WPS.
External systems that does not support the
standards cited above can be integrated via a
gateway (Bachmann controller) that contains the
basis for the WPS functions.
This is where the standardized fieldbus protocols of
the M1 controller (PROFINET/PROFIBUS/CANBus/
DNP3 etc.), as well as energy protocols
(IEC 60870-103/-104/IEC 61850 in each case as
client and server) are available; on the basis of
these protocols the process data of the wind power
plant can then be decoupled. Customer-specific,
proprietary solutions can also be implemented on
the gateway in order to use WPS in full scope.
Features
•Branch-specific SCADA system
•Use of standard communication protocols OPC UA
and IEC 61400-25
•High scalability, open system
•Live process data on all visualization levels
•Automatic adaptation of the graphic resolution for
PC, tablet, or smart phone
•Easy visualization on all mobile operating devices
•Uniform user administration for SCADA and
turbine
WPS – split screen "4x"
WPS – tablet view/smart phone view, wind farm
•Active state / access control
•Split screen mode
•Online/offline trending
•Online language switchover
•Alarm and data historization
•Availability calculation in accordance with
IEC 61400-26-1/-3
•Service logbook
•CMS ISO VDI 3834 integration
•Reporting
439
Safe. Qualified. Certified.
Directives and certificates –
for worldwide implementation
Product certifications and approvals are essential prerequisites for global
acceptance of industrial products.
Whether national standards, climatic conditions, degrees of protection,
set-up, installation, operation or maintenance possibilities – in international
implementation the course must be set in the project coordination phase.
And it is precisely at this point that our strengths are brought to bear.
Approvals
GL
Germanischer Lloyd
CE
Declaration of Conformity
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
HALT
Highly Accelerated Life Test
ISO9001 / 2000Quality management
CCC
China Compulsory Certification
DNV
DetNorske Veritas
LR
Lloyds Register
BV
Bureau Veritas
ABS
American Bureau of Shipping
441
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
442
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00009928-10
ACR222/2
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00012245-10
AI202/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010693-20
AI204/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010693-10
AI204/2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010693-00
AI204/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017447-00
AI204/4 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012245-00
AI204/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017772-00
AI208/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018843-00
AI208/SI CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014151-00
AIC212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017444-00
AIC212 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020627-00
AIO208
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020628-00
AIO208 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020631-00
AIO216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020632-00
AIO216 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00023016-00
AIO202/SI
**
**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
00023017-00
AIO204/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00023018-00
AIO208/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014470-00
AIO288
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016157-00
AIO288 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014470-10
AIO288/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010692-00
AO202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012246-10
AO202/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012246-00
AO204/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011244-00
AO208/I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017441-00
AO208/I CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009540-00
A-PCC200
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
•
00009754-00
BEM201
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00012846-00
BEM211
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00012847-00
BES212
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00012848-00
BES212/N
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00010507-00
BS201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009802-00
BS202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009313-00
BS203
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015947-00
BS203 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016785-00
BS203/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009752-00
BS204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015948-00
BS204 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016786-00
BS204/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009206-00
BS205
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
00015949-00
BS205 CC
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016787-00
BS205/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009792-00
BS206
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015950-00
BS206 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016788-00
BS206/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009207-00
BS207
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015951-00
BS207 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016789-00
BS207/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009793-00
BS208
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015952-00
BS208 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016790-00
BS208/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009634-00
BS209
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015953-00
BS209 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016791-00
BS209/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009794-00
BS210
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015954-00
BS210 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016792-00
BS210/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009795-00
BS211
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015955-00
BS211 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016793-00
BS211/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009796-00
BS212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015956-00
BS212 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016794-00
BS212/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009797-00
BS213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015957-00
BS213 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016795-00
BS213/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009798-00
BS214
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015958-00
BS214 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016796-00
BS214/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009799-00
BS215
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018623-00
BS215 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016797-00
BS215/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009800-00
BS216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018624-00
BS216 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016798-00
BS216/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009698-00
CM202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016404-00
CM202 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010709-10
CNT204/H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016407-10
CNT204/H CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010709-20
CNT204/R
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
443
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
444
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00013178-00
CS200
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013179-00
CS200/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013597-00
DA3284-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017450-00
DA3284-C CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009002-00
DI216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00008997-00
DI232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016411-00
DI232 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012162-00
DI232/48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011516-00
DI232/np1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010285-00
DIO16-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017453-00
DIO16-C CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010615-00
DIO216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010892-00
DIO216/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016141-00
DIO216/4 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013034-00
DIO232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019116-00
DIO248
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019115-00
DIO264
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009205-00
DIO264-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019114-00
DIO280
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019119-00
DIO280 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010129-00
DIO32-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010526-00
DIO48-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009884-00
DMS202
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00012696-00
DNM201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009004-00
DO216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009003-00
DO232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016414-00
DO232 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012176-00
DO232/48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014497-10
DOR206/230
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010555-00
DPM200
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018032-00
DPM200 CC
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00012671-00
EM203
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017321-00
EM213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017470-00
EM213 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017821-00
FM211
**
**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
00017822-00
FM212
**
**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
00016747-10
FM221
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018091-10
FM221 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016747-00
FM222
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018091-00
FM222 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
00010497-00
FS211
00017823-00
FS211/N
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
**
**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
•
00010499-00
FS212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017824-00
FS212/N
**
**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
00016749-10
FS221/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018092-10
FS221/N CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016749-00
FS222/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018092-00
FS222/N CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020620-00
GIO212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020623-00
GIO212 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00022162-00
GM260
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017829-00
GMP232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019063-00
GMP232 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025962-00
GMP232/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025966-00
GMP232/1 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025961-00
GMP232/2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025965-00
GMP232/2 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025964-00
GMP232/3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025968-00
GMP232/3 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025963-00
GMP232/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025967-00
GMP232/4 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019756-00
GSP274
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00021759-00
GSP274 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013737-00
ISI222
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016421-00
ISI222 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014127-00
ISI222/8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014477-00
LM20
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009494-00
LM201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018805-10
MC205
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018805-12
MC205-CFA4GB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020513-1x
MC205 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018806-1x
MC210
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020514-1x
MC210 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013176-00
ME203/CN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016336-00
ME203/CN CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013191-00
ME203/CNW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013177-00
ME203/EN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015985-00
ME203/EN CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016370-0x
MH212/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018652-0x
MH212/S CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
445
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
446
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00012711-40
MPC240
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018591-x0
MPC240
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016338-40
MPC240 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020547-x0
MPC240 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013127-40
MPC240/W
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00021018-00
MPC240/W-CF512MB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018372-00
MPC240/W-CF4GB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012708-40
MPC265
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018587-x0
MPC265
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012710-40
MPC270
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018589-x0
MPC270
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016180-40
MPC270 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020413-x0
MPC270 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013129-40
MPC270/W
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00023264-00
MPC270/WCF512MB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014274-40
MPC293
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017629-00
MPC293CF512MB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017332-40
MPC293/W
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00020575-00
MPC293/WCF512MB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014445-00
MX207
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018594-x0
MX213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018597-x0
MX213 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018593-x0
MX220
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019210-00
MX220 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017689-x0
MX220 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012754-00
NT250/48
•
•
00013251-00
NT255
•
•
00016158-00
NT255 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-10
PCC201/ 8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-20
PCC201/16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-30
PCC201/32
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-40
PCC201/64
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010708-00
PTAI216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017456-00
PTAI216 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011056-00
PWM202
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00021235-00
RS204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00021674-00
RS204 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009542-00
S201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00022320-00
SCT202
•
•
**
**
-
-
-
-
-
•
00024877-00
SCT202 CC
•
•
**
**
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014544-00
SDI208
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00017459-00
SDI208 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014545-00
SDO204
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00017462-00
SDO204 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011756-00
SEM201
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00014273-00
SLC284
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00017465-00
SLC284 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010851-00
TCO204-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010850-00
TCO208-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00008673-00
TCO216-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014008-00
TI214
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014008-20
TI214/2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009496-00
VP200
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00009498-00
VP200/S
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
BDEW
VDE4105
TR3
TR8
IEEE37.90
G59.3
00017829-00
GMP232
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025962-00
GMP232/1
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025966-00
GMP232/1 CC
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025961-00
GMP232/2
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025965-00
GMP232/2 CC
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025964-00
GMP232/3
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025968-00
GMP232/3 CC
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025963-00
GMP232/4
•
-
•
•
•
•
00025967-00
GMP232/4 CC
•
-
•
•
•
•
00019063-00
GMP232 CC
•
-
•
•
•
•
00019756-00
GSP274
•
•
•
•
•
•
00021759-00
GSP274 CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
447
Standards and approvals
HMI devices
448
Item no.
Module
00026171-00
BPC1530
00026170-00
BPC1560
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00014569-00
OT115/R/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014570-00
OT115/R/BE2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017593-00
OT115/R/BE2/CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018216-00
OT205/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018217-00
OT205/M/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018218-00
OT205/V/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018219-00
OT205/V/BE1/CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018221-00
OT205/V/BE2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00025680-00
OT1207W/BE1/
MX6/1G
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
•
00025680-10
OT1207W/BE1/
MX6/2G
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
•
00026300-00
OT1210WM/BE1/
MX6/2G
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
•
00026301-00
OT1215WM/BE1/
MX6/2G
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
•
00022298-00
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00021833-00
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00022299-00
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00021831-00
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00022799-00
OT1312/BE1/CE1G1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00022984-00
OT1315/BE1/CE1G1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00024222-00
OT1319/BE1/CE1G1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00026303-00
OT1315WM/BE1/
CE1G1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00026304-00
OT1321WM/BE1/
CE1G1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00024223-00
OT1312/BE1/CO1G7
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00024224-00
OT1315/BE1/CO1G7
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00023738-00
OT1319/BE1/CO1G7
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00026305-00
OT1315WM/BE1/
CO1G7
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00026306-00
OT1321WM/BE1/
CO1G7
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
* RoHS China and RoHS Europe
** Certification in process
*** On request
Extreme. Reliable. Ultimate.
ColdClimate:
Nothing shocks it
Those who work under extreme climatic conditions appreciate reliable
partners. Bachmann electronic is known worldwide for its quality promise –
to only deliver products with the highest possible reliability.
It‘s a good thing that our customers are so demanding. They are looking
for unique solutions for demanding environments. Whether condensation
or operating temperatures from -30 to +60 °C, (temperature peaks from
-40 to +70 °C), Bachmann solutions withstand everything. The ColdClimate
modules are the ultimate response to extreme climatic conditions.
Our Quality promise is also based on a number of extensive test
procedures that extend far beyond the legally prescribed minimum scope –
starting with the 100% test for all modules in an active RUN-IN, to extreme
temperature change phases in climate chambers, to standard-conformant
measurements in the company‘s own 3-meter EMC absorber chamber.
Bachmann products are also ideally equipped for other difficult
environmental conditions: For example implementation at high elevations
with low air pressure and reduced thermal capacity. And not least: The
incredible mechanical stress due to shock and vibration that has no effect
on Bachmann controllers.
What for others are feared extreme conditions, are daily challenges for us
that we happily and easily master.
449
ColdClimate
ColdCimate modules
Processor modules
Item designation
Item number
Processor module
ME203/EN CC
00015985-00
Processor module
ME203/CN CC
00016336-00
Processor module
MX213 CC-CF512MB
00018597-00
Processor module
MX213 CC-CF4GB
00018597-10
Processor module
MX220 CC
00019210-00
Processor module
MX220 CC-CF512MB
00017689-00
Processor module
MX220 CC-CF4GB
00017689-10
Processor module
MC205 CC
00020513-10
Processor module
MC205 CC-CFA4GB
00020513-12
Processor module
MC210 CC
00020514-10
Processor module
MC210 CC-CFA4GB
00020514-12
Processor module
MH212/S CC
00018652-00
Processor module
MH212/S CC-CFA4GB
00018652-02
Digital input/output modules
Item designation
Item number
Digital input module
DI232 CC
00016411-00
Digital output module
DO232 CC
00016414-00
Digital input/output module
DIO216/4 CC
00016141-00
Digital input/output module
DIO232 CC
00019502-00
Digital input/output module
DIO280 CC
00019119-00
Safety modules
Item designation
Item number
Safety Logic Controller
SLC284 CC
00017465-00
Safety digital input module
SDI208 CC
00017459-00
Safety digital output module
SDO204 CC
00017462-00
Analog input/output module
Item designation
Item number
Universal input/output module
GIO212 CC
00020623-00
Universal input/output module
AIO208 CC
On request
Universal input/output module
AIO216 CC
00020632-00
Analog input module
AI208/SI CC
00018843-00
Analog input/output module
AIO288 CC
00016157-00
Temperature recordung module
PTAI216 CC
00017456-00
Measurement module for CMS
AIC212 CC
00017444-00
Functional module
Item designation
Item number
Counter modulel
CNT204/H CC
00016407-10
Positioning module
ISI222 CC
00016421-00
Proportional Valve Amplifiers
PVA208 CC
On request
Grid measurement module
Item designation
Item number
Grid measurement module
GMP232 CC
00019063-00
Interface module
Item designation
Item number
Industrie-Ethernet-Master
EM213 CC
00017470-00
Interface module
RS204 CC
00021674-00
CC ... ColdClimate ( )-model
450
ColdClimate
ColdCimate modules
System networking
Item designation
Item number
Ethernet Remote Station
ERS202 CC
00021244-00
FASTBUS module
FM221 CC
00018091-10
FASTBUS module
FM222 CC
00018091-00
FASTBUS module
FM221/N CC
00018092-10
FASTBUS module
FM222/N CC
00018092-00
CANopen Master module
CM202 CC
00016404-00
PROFIBUS DP-Master module
DPM200 CC
00018302-00
Decentralized CAN modules
Item designation
Item number
Digital input/output module
DIO16-C CC
00017453-00
Analog and digital in/output
module
DA3284-C CC
00017450-00
Fieldbusses
Item designation
Item number
EtherCAT slave module
ECS200 CC
00019206-00
PROFIBUS-DP-Master module
DPM200 CC
00018032-00
ColdClimate modules
System modules
Item designation
Item number
Power supply
NT255 CC
00016158-00
Backplane
BS203 CC
00015947-00
Backplane
BS204 CC
00015948-00
Backplane
BS205 CC
00015949-00
Backplane
BS206 CC
00015950-00
Backplane
BS207 CC
00015951-00
Backplane
BS208 CC
00015952-00
Backplane
BS209 CC
00015953-00
Backplane
BS210 CC
00015954-00
Backplane
BS211 CC
00015955-00
Backplane
BS212 CC
00015956-00
Backplane
BS213 CC
00015957-00
Backplane
BS214 CC
00015958-00
Backplane
BS215 CC
00018623-00
Backplane
BS216 CC
00018624-00
ColdClimate Terminals
OT100 series
Item designation
Item number
Operator Terminal
OT115/R/BE2/CC
00017593-00
OT200 series
Item designation
Item number
Operator Terminal
OT205/V/BE1/CC
00018219-00
More varianes on request
CC ... ColdClimate ( )-model
451
CAE/CAD data
CAE/CAD data –
the convenient solution
High-quality automation components are good and important, however they no longer
suffice for successful machine building and process plant engineering projects. Development
and project planning also play a crucial role for automation. Consequently the electrical and
mechanical design of control cabinets is increasingly executed with 3D-supported programs
that can ensure optimal placement of components and cable routing.
The same applies at Bachmann electronic: With eCAD import functionality in the
SolutionCenter the turnaround time of automation projects can be significantly reduced. We
satisfy the new market requirements and support our customers with additional components
in the integrated engineering process.
452
CAE/CAD data
ePLAN library for control cabinet
construction
Good automation components no longer suffice for
successful machine building and plant engineering
projects. Efficient development and project planning
is becoming ever more important.
Bachmann electronic meets the requirements
and supports its customers with two additional
components in the integrated engineering process.
The device data necessary for electrical design of
the Bachmann automation components is provided
as a library in the ePLAN data portal. Macros for
circuit diagram and control cabinet layout, function
templates for intelligent configuration of controllers,
item data for the spare parts catalog;
The data that is created and certified with ePLAN
can be loaded directly into the ECAD project and
immediately used for the design – a significant
contribution in time savings, as well as for uniform
structuring of the project.
With the new eCAD import functionality in the
SolutionCenter the time of automation projects can
be significantly reduced. While one team plans parts
lists, circuit diagrams and control cabinet layouts,
another team can create the required software in
parallel. Through the use of symbolic variables in the
software, to this point in the project knowledge of
the structure of the hardware is not required. Only
through automatic import of the ECAD data into the
SolutionCenter will a link be established between
symbolic variables and the hardware used, and an
operable software module be generated.
Variants, extensions or corrections in ECAD project
planning are no problem – the software module will
simply be re-generated with the changed and newlyimported ECAD data.
453
CAE/CAD data
ePLAN library
The ePLAN library contains device data, macros
and technical documentation of all automation
components: M1 hardware, visualization hardware
and S1 servo system.
•Direct transfer from the portal into the
electrical project planning
•Tested and assured quality through Certification
•Ongoing update and extension
•Support for the entire electrical project planning
– circuit diagrams, control cabinet layouts,
Overview drawings, PLC configurations and
spare part documentation
•Support for implementation of the library
•Use of design software ePLAN P8 and higher
454
ECAD import in the SolutionCenter
•Software is created with symbolic variables
•Linking of the symbolic variables with the
hardware used through import of the ECAD data
into the SolutionCenter
•An operable software module is generated
•Variants, extensions, or corrections in the ECAD
project planning can be easily integrated at any
time through subsequent import
CAE/CAD data
3D-CAD model library for control
cabinet design
Control cabinets are increasingly being designed
with 3D-assisted programs in order to guarantee an
optimal placement of the components and the wiring.
Bachmann electronic supports its customers in this
engineering process and makes a library available for
this purpose.
The 3D-CAD model library contains the versioned
3D models of the controller and terminal products.
The 3D models are created on a 1:1 scale. The STEP
format was chosen so that it can be further processed
by all major 3D drawing programs. The models show
the external details of the products at full resolution
so that a realistic appearance for the 3D design is
facilitated. Internal details are largely masked out,
which achieves a considerable reduction of the data
size.
Bachmann electronic provides this library without
charge to its customers for standard products.
Libraries can be created for customer-specific
products if needed.
3D-CAD model library
•Detailed display of the products in the STEP 3D
exchange format
•Data reduced to the required Data volume
•Labeling of the 3D models with the product version
number
455
Installation in the control cabinet / housing
M1 controller hardware
UL / CSA regulations and those of the EU Directive 73 / 23 EC (Low-voltage Directive) specify that controllers
be mounted in a cabinet, an enclosure or a closed operating area in order to meet the requirements for
electrical safety. When determining the spatial requirements of an M1 controller, certain minimum distances
between the mounting rack and the adjacent fixtures must be considered
40 mm
RDY
62 mm
10 mm
10 mm
199 mm
56 mm
1
64 mm*
2
3
n
40 mm
n x 55 mm + 20 mm
*for cables an additional movement space of at least 30 mm must be provided. When using high covers for
the D-SUB connectors more space can also be required.
HMI systems
In order to protect against the potential danger of overheating, the visualization equipment should be
mounted in a cabinet or housing, with the minimum distances specified below.
50 mm
50 mm
50 mm
10 mm
50 mm
456
Note: Every device series can have lower minimum distances upon request, depending on the specific
conditions.
CAE/CAD data
Installation in the control cabinet*
Vertical
Interfaces
Bottom/top
45° angle
Horizontal
CT200 series
50 °C
50 °C
50 °C
45 °C
OT100 series
60 °C
60 °C
60 °C
55 °C
OT200 series**
50 °C
50 °C
50 °C
45 °C
OT1200 series**
60 °C
60 °C
60 °C
55 °C
OT1300 series***
60 °C
60 °C
60 °C
55 °C
Installation in the control housing
Vertical
Horizontal
CT200 series
45 °C
40 °C
OT100 series
55 °C
50 °C
OT200 series**
45 °C
40 °C
OT1200 series
50 °C
45 °C
OT1300 series***
50 °C
45 °C
* Subject to observation of the defined minimum clearances and surrounding volume in the control cabinet.
** Maximum ambient temperature, individual device variants may vary (see user manual for detailed
information).
*** Except OT1321 (Derating -5 °C)
457
Dimensions – HMI Devices
Outside
Control cabinet
A (Width) B (Height) C (Width) D (Height)
F (O/U)
Depth
Weight
OT series
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
kg
OT1207W
212
156
197
141
7.5
7.5
45
0.85
OT1210WM
298
225
283
210
7.5
7.5
53.1
1.85
OT1215WM
428
288
413
273
7.5
7.5
53.1
2.95
OT1310
310
234
290
214
10
10
OT1312
341
253
321
233
10
13.5
OT1315
406
308
387
289
9.5
9.5
611)/822)
4.3
OT1315WM
428
288
413
273
7.5
7.5
78.5
3.75
OT1319
471
375
452
356
9.5
9.5
621)/822)
6
OT1321WM
564
366
550
352
7
7
78.5
5.95
1)
2)
458
Frame
E (L/R)
Refers to products with AMD T40E CPU
Refers to products with Intel Celeron 747E and Intel Core i7 CPU
54
54 /74
1)
2.25
2)
3.75
Dimensions – Controller System
Dimensions
Module
Processor modules
ME203 / x
ME203 / xN
MX213
MC200
MH212/x
Safety modules
SLC284
SDI208
SDO204
Digital input/output module
DI2xx/xx
DO2xx/xx
DOR206/xx
DIO216 / xx
DIO232
DIO248
DIO264
DIO280/x
Analog input/output module
GIO212
AIO208
AIO216
AI204/x
AI20x/SI
AO202
AO202/SI
AO204/SI
AIO288/x
PTAI216x
TI214/x
DMS202
AIC212x
Technology module
CNT204/Hx
CNT204/R
ISI222/x
ACR222/2
PWM202
Interface module
RS204
EM213x
Bus module
BEM211
BES212
BES212/N
Grid measurement module
GSP274
GMP232
GM260
W x H x D (mm)
Weight (g)
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
220 x 119 x 96
230
310
670
670
1870
110 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
360
210
230
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
200
240
220
210
210
370
390
385
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
200
200
200
210
210
200
200
210
240
220
210
235
360
55
55
55
55
55
61
61
61
61
61
200
225
235
265
220
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
200
340
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
195
205
290
165 x 119 x 75
110 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
640
600
190
x
x
x
x
x
119
119
119
119
119
x
x
x
x
x
459
Dimensions – Controller System
Dimensions
Module
W x H x D (mm)
Weight (g)
FM211
55 x 119 x 70
320
FM222
55 x 119 x 70
400
FS221/N
55 x 119 x 70
350
FS222/N
55 x 119 x 70
425
CM202x
55 x 119 x 61
200
CS200/x
55 x 119 x 61
300
DPM200
55 x 119 x 61
200
DNM201
55 x 119 x 61
205
SEM201
55 x 119 x 72
200
DIO16-C
110 x 119 x 61
485
DIO32-C
164 x 119 x 61
695
DIO48-C
228 x 119 x 61
750
DIO264-C
137 x 119 x 61
250
DA3284-C
228 x 119 x 61
850
TCO2xx-C
137 x 119 x 61
250
Bus modules
Dezentralized CAN modules
Power supply modules / bus rails / accessories
460
NT250/48
55 x 119 x 61
300
NT255x
55 x 119 x 61
300
VP200/x
55 x 119 x 61
260
LM201
55 x 119 x 61
115
BS201
55 x 119 x 14
260
BS202
110 x 119 x 22
150
BS203x
165 x 119 x 22
260
BS204x
220 x 119 x 22
365
BS205x
275 x 119 x 22
440
BS206x
330 x 119 x 22
515
BS207x
385 x 119 x 22
620
BS208x
440 x 119 x 22
690
BS209x
495 x 119 x 22
740
BS210x
550 x 119 x 22
880
BS211x
605 x 119 x 22
960
BS212x
660 x 119 x 22
1000
BS213x
715 x 119 x 22
1100
BS214x
770 x 119 x 14
1200
BS215x
825 x 119 x 22
1310
BS216x
880 x 119 x 22
1420
BS203/S
165 x 137 x 22
280
BS204/S
220 x 137 x 22
385
BS205/S
275 x 137 x 22
460
BS206/S
330 x 137 x 22
535
BS207/S
385 x 137 x 22
640
BS208/S
440 x 137 x 22
710
BS209/S
495 x 119 x 22
760
BS210/S
550 x 137 x 22
900
BS211/S
605 x 137 x 22
980
BS212/S
660 x 137 x 22
1020
BS213/S
715 x 137 x 22
1120
BS214/S
770 x 137 x 14
1220
BS215/S
825 x 137 x 22
1330
BS216/S
880 x 137 x 22
1440
Module Power Consumption
Power consumption of the individual modules via the backplane
+5 V [mA]
+15 V [mA]
-15 V [mA]
ACR2xx/x
Module
350
–
–
AI204/1
220
–
–
AI204/2
340
–
–
AI204/4
580
–
–
AI202/SI
190
–
–
AI204/SI
300
–
–
AI208/SI
330
–
–
AIC212
480
–
–
AIO202/SI
90
–
–
AIO204/SI
100
–
–
AIO208
80
–
–
AIO216
80
–
–
AIO208/SI
110
–
–
AIO288
230
–
–
AIO288/1
180
100 without potentiometer supplier
130 with potentiometer
supply2)
75 without potentiometer supplier
105 with potentiometer
supply2)
AO202
470
–
–
AO202/SI
275
–
–
AO204/SI
520
–
–
BEM211
270
–
–
BES212
400
–
–
- / 4001)
–
–
CM202
320
–
–
CNT204/x
120
–
–
2000
250
200
BES212/N
CPC210
CS200
700
15
40
- / 7001)
- / 151)
- / 401)
DI216
70
–
–
DI232/x
80
–
–
DI232/48
80
–
–
DO216
130
–
–
DO232
170
–
–
DO232/48
250
–
–
DOR206/230
100
63
59
DIO216
190
–
–
DIO216/4
235
–
–
DIO232
170
–
–
DIO248
255
–
–
DIO264
255
–
–
DIO280
255
–
–
DMS202
200
–
–
DNM201
250
–
–
DPM200
400
–
–
ECS200
270
–
–
EM213
380
–
–
CS200/N
1) Current consumption from the IO backplane for operation without station power supply / station power
supply (for operation with station power supply the integrated power supply is switched off)
2) The potentiometer supply is not considered during current check.
3) From function code 140.xxx
461
Module Power Consumption
Power consumption of the individual modules via the backplane
Module
FM211
+5 V [mA]
600
+15 V [mA]
–
-15 V [mA]
–
FM212
700
–
–
FM221
280
–
–
FM222
500
–
–
FS211
600
–
–
- / 6001)
–
–
FS211/N
FS212
700
–
–
- / 7001)
–
–
GM260
≤ 130
≤ 45
≤0
GMP23x
260
20
16
GIO212
80
–
–
GSP274
≤ 316
≤ 21
≤ 23
FS212/N
HUB204/x
–
–
–
ISI222
180
–
–
ISI222/8
140
–
–
2.100
–
–
- / 1.4001)
- / 301)
- / 101)
- / 303)
MX213/x
- / 1.7001)
- / 1.6503)
- / 301)
- / 101)
- / 301) 3)
MX220/x
- / 1.7001)
- / 301)
- / 301)
MC205
MC210
MX207/x
ME203/x
800
15
40
- / 8001)
- / 151)
- / 401)
PTAI216
95
–
–
PWM202
500
–
–
RS204
120
–
–
SLC284
600
–
–
SDI208
600
–
–
SDO204
250
–
–
SEM201
450
–
–
110
–
–
ME203/xN
TI214
TI214/2
1) Current consumption from the IO backplane for operation without station power supply / station power
supply (for operation with station power supply the integrated power supply is switched off)
2) The potentiometer supply is not considered during current check.
3) From function code 140.xxx
462
Together. Competent. Efficient.
Training
Bachmann training:
profit from our knowledge
Availability of qualified personnel is a crucial factor for assurance of product
quality. Consequently employees at all levels of an enterprise must be
offered advanced training on a regular basis. We are pleased to support you
in this regard: with our extensive Bachmann training offering.
Our offering
Our training offering extends from proven standard training courses to
training courses that are individually tailored to your requirements.
Our procedure
Our modularly structured training concept makes it possible to put
together a training program that meets the needs of your company.
Your result
Qualified employees and documentation that meets the requirements
of your training program.
We would be pleased to create a training program for your company!
Contact us: [email protected]
[i]
Note: Additional information on this topic
is provided in our training catalog
»bachmann.training«.
463
Imprint
Copyright © 2016
by Bachmann electronic GmbH
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Kreuzäckerweg 33
6800 Feldkirch, Austria
P +43 (0) 55 22 / 34 97-0
[email protected]
www.bachmann.info
Publisher:
Bachmann electronic GmbH, Feldkirch
Product overviews, operating manuals, manuals,
and software are protected by copyright.
Copying, duplication, translation or conversion
to any electronic medium or machine readable
form in whole or in part is prohibited. All other
rights to the software are specified in the license
provisions. Citation of products that do not
come from Bachmann electronic GmbH, is for
information purposes only and does not constitute
misuse of trademarks. Bachmann electronic GmbH
assumes no guarantee relative to the selection,
performance or usability of these products. All
rights reserved.
[i]
Specification subject to change – the product’s
characteristics are exclusively governed by the
data of the respective user manual.
Limitation of liability:
We have checked the content of the
document for agreement with the described
hardware / software. Nevertheless the possibility
of deviations cannot be excluded; we cannot
assume any liability for complete agreement.
The information in this document is checked on
a regular basis and necessary corrections will be
included in subsequent editions.
KA-SYSTEM / EN, 09/2016
www.bachmann.info
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement